Salesforce Winter22 Release Notes

Salesforce Release Notes
Maximize your Salesforce ROI with the latest features,

Salesforce, Winter ’22
most of which come standard
PREVIEW
Note: This release is in preview. Features described in this document don’t become generally available
until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and @salesforcedocs
where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can’t guarantee general availability Last updated: September 1, 2021
within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally
available products and features.
© Copyright 2000–2021 salesforce.com, inc. All rights reserved. Salesforce is a registered trademark of salesforce.com, inc.,
as are other names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS
SALESFORCE WINTER ’22 RELEASE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

How to Use the Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Get Ready for the Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How and When Do Features Become Available? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Salesforce Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Commerce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Einstein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Einstein Automate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Experience Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Industries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Marketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
myTrailhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Pardot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Salesforce Anywhere (Quip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Salesforce CDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Salesforce CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Security, Identity, and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Sustainability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Work.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Other Salesforce Products and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Release Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Legal Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
SALESFORCE WINTER ’22 RELEASE NOTES
Did you know most new features are included with your initial purchase? Explore the latest innovations in the release to maximize your
ROI from Salesforce.
IN THIS SECTION:
How to Use the Release Notes
Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features. We include setup information, tips to help
you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success.
Get Ready for the Release
Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you, your org, and your users
ready for what’s coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often.
How and When Do Features Become Available?
Some features in Winter ’22 affect all users immediately after the release goes live. Consider communicating these changes to your
users beforehand so that they’re prepared. Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit from
the new functionality.
Supported Browsers
We’ve made some changes to our supported browsers documentation, making it easier to find what you need. Supported browsers
for Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
Salesforce Overall
Winter ’22 brings a flurry of new features and improvements. Enjoy smarter searching with Einstein Search, available by default and
at no extra charge. View and manage permission set licenses more efficiently. Use the Your Account app to view, pay, and download
invoices for your Salesforce subscriptions. Check out the many exciting improvements to User Engagement, Salesforce Surveys, and
Salesforce Scheduler. And remember, on February 1, 2022, all your internal users who log in to Salesforce through the user interface
must use Multi-Factor Authentication.
Analytics
Get unified sales and service data with a new Customer Insights app, make your modeling more accurate with improved validations,
and find insights faster with a redesigned search experience.
Commerce
Commerce Cloud enhancements include new and updated features for B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience, B2B2C Commerce,
and Salesforce Order Management.
Customization
Create more dynamic and performant Lightning pages with Dynamic Interactions and improvements to Performance Analysis for
App Builder. Choose from a larger selection of publicly available APIs thanks to added support for larger spec sizes and expanded
limits for operations, actions, and objects. Support your users wherever they work with new time zones, languages, and locales.
Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or our APIs with your favorite programming language, these
enhancements help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.
1
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes
Einstein
Einstein Search is turned on by default in Lightning Experience, so everyone can benefit from AI-powered search at no extra cost.
Use your own external models in Einstein Discovery for even better predictions. Einstein Key Accounts Identification ranks your best
accounts to help you optimize your account-based marketing efforts. Launch one Einstein Bot in many languages, helping to reduce
administrative workload and providing more choices for interaction. Read up on these features and more, and get ready to work
smarter with all that Einstein has to offer.
Einstein Automate
Compose intelligent workflows with Salesforce Flow, Einstein Bots, OmniStudio, and Flow Orchestrator (beta). Integrate across any
system with Mulesoft Composer for Salesforce. Build and deliver personalized recommendations with Einstein Recommendation
Builder and Einstein Next Best Action.
Experience Cloud
Use our new Microsite template, which is based on the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR), to capture user data and create leads without
the overhead of developing a complete website. Archive sites that outlived their usefulness and free up space to create the sites
you need. Optimize your site performance with several content delivery network (CDN) enhancements. And build LWR sites more
quickly with several new drag-and-drop components.
Field Service
Let customers efficiently set and manage their appointments without calls with Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment Assistant.
Save time and money by giving your customers technical support without going on-site with Visual Remote Assistant. Prevent costly
maintenance missteps by creating criteria-based asset maintenance plans. Enhanced features in shift patterns and templates help
you streamline resource planning and scheduling. And with custom actions, make Work Plans work better for your business.
Industries
Industries solutions for business verticals keep getting smarter and easier to use. Consumer Goods Cloud helps manage store visits
and monitor stock better. Financial Services Cloud adds deal management and branch management. Health Cloud introduces
automated benefit verification and self-service appointments. Manufacturing Cloud brings enhanced forecasting and SKU management.
Public Sector Cloud makes licensing and permitting simpler and faster. Industries products that you can use in more than one
Industries cloud, such as the data processing engine and decision tables, get significant enhancements.
Marketing
Marketing Cloud is the premier platform for delighting customers with 1:1 customer journeys. It enables you to build a single view
of your customer, leveraging data from any source. Plan and optimize unique customer journeys based on your business objectives.
Deliver personalized content across every channel and device at precisely the right time. Measure the impact of each interaction on
your business so that you can optimize your approach in real time and deliver better results.
Mobile
Get more done in the Salesforce mobile app with new features like the new full-width tablet app experience on iPad and Android
tablets. Briefcase Builder helps make offline record data available to your users. Mobile Publisher offers users new distribution methods
to best fit your org’s needs.
myTrailhead
Enhance your myTrailhead learning experience with new options for fulfilling your company’s unique training and enablement
requirements.
Pardot
Getting started with Pardot is easier than ever with the new setup assistant in Marketing Setup. You also get automation extensibility
and landing page builder enhancements, Engagement Studio support for drag-and-drop builder emails, and Einstein Key Accounts
Identification on list views. The key accounts feature and mailability changes are generally available.
2
Revenue
In Salesforce CPQ, a release update adds permissions to standard permission sets and updates Access permission sets. Salesforce
Billing prevents duplicate payments by locking invoices until confirming a valid response from the payment gateway. Credit note
lines now inherit the Tax Percentage field, revenue finance books support more finance periods, and a Customer Asset Lifecycle
Management field was relabeled.
Sales
Pipeline Inspection lets you create custom filters, watch important opportunities, and see which deals are less likely to close in the
current month. Show a Most Likely forecast category on the forecasts page. Assign territories quicker and put assignment rules on
pause. Add Inbox users to any Einstein Activity Capture configuration. Salesforce Maps helps you automate assignments for large
territories. Territory Planning gives you flexibility to design territories for in-person and virtual customer visits. High Velocity Sales
lets you update active sales cadences and test different versions of email templates and call scripts on the same outreach step.
Salesforce Anywhere (Quip)
Get the most out of your Salesforce data with Quip. Let your users choose where they work, stay in Quip with documents that autofill
with Salesforce data and records created from Salesforce live apps, or work in Salesforce with the Template Library in Lightning
Experience. Speed up your Quip setup with the New Document global quick action automatically added to all your global publisher
layouts. Learn about the latest updates to Salesforce Anywhere Beta features.
Salesforce CDP
The latest round of Salesforce CDP updates directly addresses customer feedback and unlocks access to new data sources, such as
Commerce Cloud. Look out for a more accessible experience for mapping data and major improvements in Identity Resolution.
There’s also a new Salesforce Web SDK to unify website instrumentation across Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio.
Salesforce CMS
Preview your content before you publish to make sure things are just right.
Security, Identity, and Privacy
To comply with browser requirements, you must have a My Domain, or we deploy one for you. Verify your identity with biometric
built-in authenticators. To help you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement, use the MFA Rollout Pack. Enjoy
a more intuitive consent data model and Portability Policy dashboards. Event Monitoring includes four new event log file types and
more detailed Transaction Security policy notification emails. Encrypt more Financial Services Cloud data at rest. And Threat Detection
integration with Security Center is now generally available, along with customizable alerts for monitoring security configuration
changes.
Service
Take advantage of a wide range of new, intuitive Service Cloud features that help you and your team deliver efficient, flexible service.
Try out Incident Management, which allows your team to diagnose root causes and resolve major incidents faster while creating a
better customer experience. Use it to empower your service teams to quickly classify and prioritize work, assign the right experts,
and streamline communication with customers. Workforce Engagement offers a queue-based workflow for planning and staffing
tools so you can access the business analytics that you need faster. And set up Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony more
easily with the new prescriptive setup experience, which includes templates and menus to help you create your contact center and
sync it with your telephony provider.
Sustainability
Resolve issues with your carbon footprint record data with Data Gap Filling. Individually lock or unlock energy use records with
Individual Locking Control.
Work.com
Prepare your business, employees, and facilities. Respond to major events, such as the current COVID-19 crisis, with the apps and
services in Work.com.
Other Salesforce Products and Services
Get the latest information on features from Customer Success Group, Heroku, IdeaExchange,, and Trailhead GO.
3
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes How to Use the Release Notes
Release Updates
Salesforce periodically provides release updates that improve the performance, logic, security, and usability of our products. The
Release Updates page provides a list of updates that can be necessary for your organization to enable. Some release updates affect
existing customizations.
Legal Documentation
We made seasonal updates to Salesforce Legal Documents.
How to Use the Release Notes

Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features. We include setup information, tips to help you
get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success.
• We offer PDF and HTML versions.
• For the HTML version, your browser’s settings determine the language that you see. To change the language, scroll to the bottom,
click Change Language, and select a language.
• The release notes include details about new and modified features. For information on known issues, visit Salesforce Known Issues.
Note: Until the new release is available to you, links from release notes to Salesforce Help, implementation guides, developer
guides, and other documentation don’t work. And sometimes the links point to material from the previous release.
Some of our documentation has preview versions available several weeks before the release. To access a preview version on
Salesforce Developers, select Preview from the Documentation Version dropdown list.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Filters to Zero In on the News That Matters Most
The filters narrow down the list of release notes on the right side of your screen, not the content on the left.
Know What’s in Salesforce Lightning Experience and What’s in Salesforce Classic
Everybody’s excited about Lightning Experience and everything it offers. But we also understand that lots of orgs continue to use
Salesforce Classic—either exclusively or in tandem with Lightning Experience as it evolves.
Release Note Changes
Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.
Your Feedback Matters
We know how important our documentation is to your company’s success. We want to know what works for you and what doesn’t.
Use Filters to Zero In on the News That Matters Most

The filters narrow down the list of release notes on the right side of your screen, not the content on the left.
Experience
See which features are available in Lightning Experience, the Salesforce mobile app, and Salesforce Classic.
Edition
The feature enhancements available to you depend on your edition. Filter the release notes to show only the enhancements that
are available in your edition.
Feature Impact
Some features require you to enable or configure them before users can get the benefits. As an admin, filter the release notes to
focus on or hide just those features. Or maybe you want to see only the features that are automatically enabled for your users.
4
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Know What’s in Salesforce Lightning Experience and What’s
in Salesforce Classic
Product Area
See only the products that your org uses. If your org does sales but not support, set up your release notes so that only the sales-related
news appears.
To narrow down the list of release notes, click Show Filters on the right side.
You can share your filtered list of release notes with anyone. Select filters, copy the URL, and then distribute that URL however you want.
Know What’s in Salesforce Lightning Experience and What’s in Salesforce

Classic
Everybody’s excited about Lightning Experience and everything it offers. But we also understand that lots of orgs continue to use
Salesforce Classic—either exclusively or in tandem with Lightning Experience as it evolves.
One key to success during this time of transition is understanding what’s available in one, both, or all the Salesforce experiences. To
guide you, we added experience information to the applicable release notes at the highest level: for entire clouds or for individual features
within clouds. Let’s look at a couple of examples.
• A new Service Cloud feature is available in both desktop experiences, so the Where section of the release note says, “This change
applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic.”
• A new Sales Cloud feature is available in Lightning Experience only, so the Where section of the release note says, “This change
applies to Lightning Experience.”
If a key feature is also available in the Salesforce mobile app, we mention that in the Where section of the release note. But you can also
check the Mobile section for a complete list of what’s new.
Release Note Changes

Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.
5
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Release Note Changes
August 30, 2021

Solve Cross-Cloud Use Cases with Salesforce Solution Kits
Added a release note about 4 new Solution Kits.
Customer 360 Guide for Consumer Goods
Added release notes about the Customer 360 Guide for Consumer Goods.
Metadata API
Added information about the tm2BypassRealignAccInsert field on the Territory2Settings metadata type.
New and Changed Connect REST API Resources and New and Changed Connect in Apex Classes
Removed information about CMS Managed Content resources and classes that aren’t supported.
Flow and Process Run-Time Improvements in API Version 53.0
Added a release note on specifying the default workflow user to run schedule-triggered flows.
Added a release note on correctly evaluating the true and false global constants in conditions in some elements.
New and Changed Objects
Added a release note about the addition of the Scorecard, ScorecardMetric, and ScorecardAssociation objects.
Associate Errors with the Right Lightning Components for Screen Readers
Corrected the Where section.
Make Custom Screen Components React to Other Components on the Same Flow Screen (Pilot)
Corrected the Where section. In How and When Do Features Become Available?, moved the release note’s checkbox to Contact
Salesforce to enable.
ConnectApi (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and Enums on page 219
Added information about new class that supports Flow Orchestrator (Beta): ConnectApi.Orchestration.
New and Changed Connect REST API Resources on page 233
Added information about new resource that supports Flow Orchestrator (Beta): /connect/interaction/orchestration/instances.
Metadata API
Added information about the enablePreventBadgeGuestAccess field on the CommunitiesSettings metadata type.
August 23, 2021

Update Tasks and Events Reports for More Accurate Data
Added more information about creating a report with the CompletedDateTime field.
Get Email Alerts About Voice Issues (Pilot)
Added a release note about the Service Cloud Voice Customer Alerts pilot.
Enforce OAuth Scope for Lightning Apps (Release Update)
Clarified that the scope of an OAuth token isn’t currently enforced for Lightning apps. Also, added more details to the description
of a Lightning app.
Connect to More Elements Across the Auto-Layout Canvas (Beta)
Added information about the Connect to element option replacing the Merge with another path option.
Use the Organization-Wide Defaults Sharing Setting to Control Access to Products
Changed B2B Commerce API information to specify that access to products is based on entitlements. Added the sharing setting
name (Default External Access) to clarify recommended settings.
View Flow Error Details More Quickly in Flow Builder
Added a release note about a behavior change to flow error details in Flow Builder.
6
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Your Feedback Matters
Field Values for Interview Status Are Paused for Paused Flow Interviews
Added a release note about a behavior change to the Interview Status field on paused flow interviews.
Error Details for Referenced Flows and Pause Elements from Managed Packages Are Hidden
Added a release note about a behavior change to flow error details for flows from managed packages.
August 16, 2021

Published preview release notes.
Your Feedback Matters

We know how important our documentation is to your company’s success. We want to know what works for you and what doesn’t.
• Trailblazer Community—Post your feedback to the Release Readiness Trailblazers group. To help us track and respond to your
feedback, use a hashtag that indicates the release, such as #Winter22Feedback.
• Feedback forms—As you’re working with our documentation in Salesforce Help, release notes, or developer guides, look for the
feedback buttons and vote up or down. Add comments if you have them.
• Twitter—When you follow @salesforcedocs on Twitter, you receive notices whenever we publish new documentation or make
significant updates to existing documentation. Tweet us at @salesforcedocs.
Get Ready for the Release

Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you, your org, and your users ready
for what’s coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often.
Release Readiness Essentials

• Release Readiness Trailblazers. Access resources and experts for all things release readiness.
• Trust Status Maintenances. See sandbox and other release dates and times. Click Instances and your instance to see your maintenance
dates.
• Sandbox Refresh Calculator. Plan if and when you need to refresh your existing sandbox orgs.
• Sandbox Preview Video. Learn how to navigate the sandbox preview process.
• Sandbox Preview Instructions. Get early access to new features in your sandbox.
• Certification Release Maintenance Schedule. Keep your certification updated in Trailhead.
• Prepare for Salesforce Releases. Use Trailhead to create your release strategy.
• Releases Email Journey. Prepare for releases by subscribing to emails.
How and When Do Features Become Available?

Some features in Winter ’22 affect all users immediately after the release goes live. Consider communicating these changes to your users
beforehand so that they’re prepared. Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit from the new
functionality.
7
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes How and When Do Features Become Available?
Supported Browsers
We’ve made some changes to our supported browsers documentation, making it easier to find what you need. Supported browsers for
Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
Enabled for Requires Contact

administrators/ administrator Salesforce to
Feature Enabled for users developers setup enable
Supported Browsers and Devices for
Lightning Experience
Supported Browsers and Devices for

Salesforce Classic
Supported Browsers for Tableau CRM
Salesforce Overall
Winter ’22 brings a flurry of new features and improvements. Enjoy smarter searching with Einstein Search, available by default and at
no extra charge. View and manage permission set licenses more efficiently. Use the Your Account app to view, pay, and download

General Enhancements
Get Ready for the Future Requirement

to Enable Multi-Factor Authentication
(MFA)
Keep Working with Tab-Focused Dialogs

(Release Update)
See More Information About Permission

Set Licenses
Add and Remove Permission Set License

Assignments Faster
Solve Cross-Cloud Use Cases with

Salesforce Solution Kits
User Engagement
Point to Specific Elements on a Page

with Targeted Prompts (Generally
Available)
8

Show In-App Guidance for Specific
Record Types
Create and View In-App Guidance in

Setup
Learn About Salesforce In-App Content
Explore More Resources in the Guidance

Center
Keep Track of Resources Inside the

Guidance Center
Your Account App
View Invoices with the Your Account

App
Checkout Is Now Named Manage

Subscription
Salesforce Surveys
Engage More Customers Using Digital

Engagement Channels
Personalize Post Feedback Followup

Actions
Share Surveys with Team Members
Salesforce Scheduler
Appointment Distribution
New Apex Methods
Other Improvements
Make the Most of the Improved

Salesforce Scheduler Documentation
Search
Einstein Search
Welcome to Einstein Search: Now On by

Default
Take Control of Which Objects Users See in

Search (Beta)
9

Assist Your Agents and Customers to Find
Knowledge Articles (Pilot)
Get Search Results for More Objects
Analytics

Reports and Dashboards
Automatically Tune Your Dashboards

to Your Business Goals with Dynamic
Gauge Charts (Beta)
Update More Fields from the Report Run

Page with Expanded Inline Editing
(Beta)
Tableau CRM
Setup and Data Integration
Audit Usage Statistics for Auto-Installed

Apps
Be a Connector Trailblazer with New and

Improved Connector Versions
Output Your Tableau CRM Data to Amazon

S3 (Generally Available)
Access Salesforce Data Without Data Sync

Using Direct Data for Recipes (Generally
Available)
Supersize Recipe Creation
Navigate Data Prep with Accessible

Keyboard Shortcuts
Filter Smarter with Custom Filter Logic
Bucket Smarter with Fuzzy Match for Data

Prep Bucketing
10

Guide the Optimal Number of Clusters
Get Unselected Values Included in Pivot

Output
Roll Up Hierarchical Data
Output Fully Qualified Names in .csv

Headers
Prebuilt Templates and Apps
Unify Sales and Service Analytics in the

Customer Insights App
Visualize Your Pipeline Progression in the

Revenue Operations App
Bring the Power of Analytics to Your

Corporate and Investment Banking Deals
Kick-Start Your Customer Insights App

Installations
Use Improved Keyboard Navigation for the

Prebuilt Apps Wizard and Template Gallery
App Building
Manage Dashboard Layouts with Ease
Design Richer Tooltips for Chart Widgets
Import Snowflake Data to Apps Using Live

Datasets in Templates
Jump-Start Templated App Development

with Dashboard Components
Control Where Null Values Appear in Charts

and Tables
Give Your Users Custom Functionality in

Tableau CRM Dashboards with Lightning
Web Components (Beta)
Draw Insights on Salesforce CDP Data (Beta)
What’s New in SAQL and SQL
Einstein Discovery
Operationalize Externally Built Models in

Salesforce (Generally Available)
11

Translate Unstructured Data into Valuable
Insights with Sentiment Analysis (Generally
Available)
Add Einstein Discovery Insights to Your

Flows
Gather Insights Directly from Your Snowflake

Schema (Pilot)
Deploy Better Models with Enhanced Model

Quality Alerts
Predict Outcomes for Multiple Categories

with Multiclass Models (Pilot)
Evaluate Model Performance with Validation

Sets
Speed Up Story Creation with Smart

Sampling (Pilot)
Get Reliable Insights from Unbalanced Data
Get Diagnostic Insights with the Insights API
Salesforce Data Pipelines
Create External Data Connections Faster

(Beta)
Tableau CRM for Everyone
Choose Your Search Experience (Beta)
Popularize Data-Driven Decision-Making

with Ask Data for Salesforce (Beta)
Control Who Sees What in an App with

Asset Visibility (Generally Available)
Find All Your Learning Resources on the

Help Clearinghouse Page
Analytics on Mobile
Get the Latest Version of Tableau CRM for

iOS and Android
12
Commerce

B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience
Use Promotions to Drive B2B Commerce

on Lightning Experience
Customize Your B2B Store’s Checkout

Experience with an Enhanced Checkout
Flow
Add Fractional Product Quantities
Define and Select Product Quantities

with the Quantity Selector
Import Products at the Global Level
Edit and View Workspaces More

Efficiently
Create a B2B Store on an Existing

Experience Cloud Site
Use Modular Components on the

Product Detail Page
Automatically Display the Most Relevant

Facets for B2B Commerce Search
Set Up Your Org for Commerce More

Easily
Modernize the B2B Commerce Order

Experience with Salesforce Order
Management
Resume Shopping Without Canceling

Checkout
Add a Buyer Group Related List to Your

Account Record Pages
Use Buyer Group User Permissions to

Share Access to Buyer Group Members
Create Secondary Carts Using the

Connect API
13

See Only Categories with Entitled
Products When Browsing Categories
Use the Organization-Wide Defaults

Sharing Setting to Control Access to
Products
Display All Category Navigation Menu

Items
B2B2C Commerce
Do More with B2C Data Import
Edit and View Workspaces More

Efficiently
Increase Shopper Conversion with

Customers Also Bought Einstein
Recommendations
Automatically Display the Most Relevant

Facets for B2B2C Commerce Search
Set Up Your Org for Commerce More

Easily
Free Up Storage With Weekly Job that

Deletes Expired B2B2C Commerce Guest
Carts
Salesforce Order Management
Modernize the B2B Commerce Order

Experience with Salesforce Order
Management
Reship Lost or Missing Order Items
Handle Orders with Multiple Payments

More Robustly
Associate Return Shipments with Return

Orders
Apply Salesforce Duplicate

Management to Shopper Records from
B2C Commerce
Include Custom Email Data in B2C

Commerce Orders
14

Categorize Sales Channels by Business
Type
Categorize Order Summaries as B2C or

B2B
Edit Order Delivery Information
Customization
Create more dynamic and performant Lightning pages with Dynamic Interactions and improvements to Performance Analysis for App
Builder. Choose from a larger selection of publicly available APIs thanks to added support for larger spec sizes and expanded limits for
operations, actions, and objects. Support your users wherever they work with new time zones, languages, and locales.

Lightning App Builder
Build More Interactive Lightning Pages

with Dynamic Interactions
Bring Dynamic Interactions to Your

Dynamic Actions Bar (Pilot)
Let Org-Specific Metrics Guide Your

Lightning Page Performance
Improvements
Get Performance Analysis for App

Builder Recommendations
Automatically
Improve Page Performance with More

Custom Lightning Component Analysis
Use Flow Orchestrator Work Guide to

Connect Users with Tasks (Beta)
External Services
Use External Services for MuleSoft to

Generate Actions (Generally Available)
Register More API Specs with Revised

and Expanded Operation, Action, and
Object Limits
15

Map Non-Standard Media Types in Your
Registration
Unlock the Power of External Services

in Einstein Bot Builder
Major Enhancements to the Trailhead

Experience
External Services UI Is Now Fully

Compliant with Salesforce Accessibility
Standards
Globalization
Select New Time Zones
Connect with More Customers with New

Languages and Locales
Prepare for Updated Locale Formats
Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release

Update)
Sharing
Hide More Personal Information Fields

from External Users
Control Access to Sensitive Data with

Restriction Rules (Generally Available)
Control the Default Records Your Users

See with Scoping Rules (Beta)
Profiles and Permissions
Grant Access Based on Activated User

Sessions for Permission Set Groups
Create Custom Profiles from Scratch via

the SOAP API
Manage Assignment Expiration in

Permission Sets and Permission Set
Groups (Beta)
Grant Access to the DeveloperName

Field to Users Who Require It
Einstein Recommendation Builder
16

Use a Managed Package to Deploy
Custom Recommendations
Try Einstein and Build

Recommendations Your Way
General Setup
Get Enhanced Functionality for Syncing

an External Data Source
Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or our APIs with your favorite programming language, these enhancements
help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.

Lightning Components
Secure Your Components Better,

Stronger, Faster with Lightning Web
Security (Beta)
Expose Events in the Lightning App

Builder
View Dependencies for Lightning Web

Components
Limit for Number of Actions in a Boxcar

Request Was Added
Add User-Authorized Cookie Consent

to Your Lightning Web Components
DOM API Changes May Require UI Test

Updates
Lightning Components Release Updates
Securely Access Aura Components (Release

Update)
Enforce OAuth Scope for Lightning Apps

(Release Update)
Enforce CORS Allowlist for Lightning Apps

(Release Update)
17

Prevent Consecutive API Navigation Calls
(Release Update)
Enable Secure Static Resources for Lightning

Components (Release Update)
Einstein Vision and Language
Einstein Vision
Use Images with Multiple Tables on a Page
Detect Text in PDFs with Einstein OCR

(Generally Available)
Train and Retrain a Dataset with Less Data
Einstein Language
Match Credit Card and US Social Security

Numbers (Beta)
Create an Einstein Intent Model with Less

Data
Visualforce
Securely Call the Visualforce Remoting

API (Release Update)
Prevent Consecutive API Navigation

Calls in Visualforce Pages (Release
Update)
Visualforce Expression Language Apex

Method Access Modifier Enforcement
(Release Update)
Apex
Use the valueOf() Enum Method to

Convert a Specified String to an Enum
Constant Value
Use Mock Responses to Test Salesforce

Functions
Call Invocable Actions from Apex

(Developer Preview)
API
Legacy API Versions 7.0 Through 20.0

Have Been Retired
18

Legacy API Versions 21.0 Through 30.0
Are Being Retired
Updated Tooling API describeSObjects()

referenceTo values
Packaging
Remove Metadata Components from

Second-Generation Managed Packages
(Beta)
Get an Early Look at Converting

First-Generation Managed Packages
(Developer Preview)
Simplify Package Development by

Creating and Specifying an Org Shape
Manage First-Generation Managed

Packages More Easily
View Your Progress During Package

Uninstalls
Remove Invalid Characters from

Managed Package Translations
Platform Development Tools
Develop Platform Apps with Ease
Lightning Design System
Accessibility Updates for Selection List

Components
Lightning Design System Component

Blueprint Updates
Salesforce Functions
Unleash the Power of Elastic Compute

with Salesforce Functions (Generally
Available)
AppExchange Partners
Analyze Tableau CRM Lens and

Dashboard Usage with AppExchange
App Analytics
19

Learn More About Subscriber Orgs with
New AppExchange App Analytics
Package Summary Fields
Usage Metrics Has Been Retired
Deepen Your Analysis with the

AppExchange App Analytics Developer
Cookbook
Change Data Capture
Change Data Capture Entity Selections

from AppExchange Packages No Longer
Count Against Your Allocation
Platform Events
Filter Your Stream of Platform Events

with Channels (Pilot)
Einstein Automate
system with Mulesoft Composer for Salesforce. Build and deliver personalized recommendations with Einstein Recommendation Builder
and Einstein Next Best Action.

MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce
OmniStudio
Einstein Bots
Teach Your Bot to Speak Multiple

Languages (Beta)
Get More from Your Knowledge Base

with Article Answers Improvements
(Beta)
Generate Utterances in More Languages

with Input Recommender (Beta)
Solve Bot Problems Fast with Improved

Bot Analytics
20

Unlock the Power of External Services
in Bot Builder
Build Bots Faster from a Template

Reuse Your Einstein.ai Intent Models

Across Other External Orgs (Beta)
Collect and Manage Customer

Information with New System Entities
Access Bots Faster Using the Improved

Setup Home Page
Channels Are Now Connections
Flow Orchestrator (Beta)
Orchestrate Multi-User Processes with

Increase Productivity with Flow

Orchestrator Work Guide (Beta)
Identify Bottlenecks and Opportunities

with Flow Orchestrator (Beta)
Salesforce Flow
Flow Builder
Connect a Record-Triggered Flow to an

External System Using an Asynchronous
Path
Call Another Flow from a Record-Triggered

Flow Using a Subflow Element
Roll Back Pending Record Changes When a

Flow Element Fails at Run Time
Supercharge Scheduled Paths with

Enhancements for Minutes, Batching, and
Limits
Send an Outbound Message from Your

Record-Triggered Flow
Enjoy a Streamlined Trigger Setup

Experience in Flow Builder
21

Translate Labels for More Flow Screen
Components with Translation Workbench
Get Rich Text Email Line Breaks from Long

Text Area Fields
Customize Button Labels in the Flow Screen

Footer (Beta)
Connect to More Elements Across the

Auto-Layout Canvas (Beta)
Read Loops More Easily in Auto-Layout

(Beta)
Set Up Flow Screen Choice Options with

Fewer Clicks
Edit Choice Resources Directly from Flow

Screen Editor
Avoid Creating Incompatible Resources from

Choice Components
Navigate Flow Builder More Easily with

Improved Keyboard Shortcuts (Beta)
Create a Managed-Installed Flow That

Admins Can Override and Customize
Other Changes to Salesforce-Provided Flow

Screen Components
Flow Debugging
Change Record Field Values Temporarily

While Debugging Record-Triggered Flows
Debug Scheduled Paths in Record-Triggered

Flows
View the Flow Interview GUID in a Flow Error

Email
Choose More Options When You Debug a

Flow
View Flow Error Details More Quickly in Flow

Builder
Error Details for Referenced Flows and Pause

Elements from Managed Packages Are
Hidden
22

Flow Management
View All Triggering Objects and Platform

Events for Triggered Flows
Analyze Flow Execution Events in Event

Monitoring
Send Email Notifications for Every

Automated Field Update
Run Optimizer to Get Recommendations for

Migrating Your Workflow Rules to Flows
Run Flows Permission is Being Removed
Field Values for Interview Status Are Paused

for Paused Flow Interviews
Flow Extensions
Generate Actions for Flow Builder from

External Services for MuleSoft (Generally
Available)
Associate Errors with the Right Lightning

Components for Screen Readers
Make Custom Screen Components React to

Other Components on the Same Flow
Screen (Pilot)
Get Insights and Intelligence in Your Flows
Flow and Process Release Updates
Accurately Measure the CPU Time

Consumption of Flows and Processes
(Release Update)
Analyze Screen Flow Usage (Release

Update)
Check for Null Record Variables or Null

Values of Lookup Relationship Fields in
Process and Flow Formulas (Release Update)
Disable Rules for Enforcing Explicit Access

to Apex Classes (Release Update)
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record

Values in Process Builder (Release Update)
23

Make Paused Flow Interviews Resume in the
Same Context with the Same User Access
(Release Update)
Flow and Process Run-Time

Improvements in API Version 53.0
Einstein Next Best Action
Build Einstein Next Best Action

Strategies in Flow Builder (Pilot)
Show Flow-Driven Recommendations

on Lightning App Pages (Pilot)
Experience Cloud
the overhead of developing a complete website. Archive sites that outlived their usefulness and free up space to create the sites you
need. Optimize your site performance with several content delivery network (CDN) enhancements. And build LWR sites more quickly
with several new drag-and-drop components.

Capture Leads and Deliver Fresh
Content with the Microsite Template
Archive Experience Cloud Sites (Closed

Beta)
Experience Builder Sites
Redirect Users Within an Experience

Cloud Site
Fine-Tune Your LWR Sites with New

Branding Properties
Set the Default Language in LWR Sites
Use Lightning Message Service in Aura

and LWR Site Pages (Generally
Available)
Automatically Complete Addresses in

Aura Sites
24

Differentiate Between the Build Your
Own Templates for Aura and LWR Sites
Use Audiences as Criteria for Other

Audiences
Paste Images in Chatter Posts and

Comments
Display Both the Hamburger Menu and

the Back Button in the iOS Mobile
Publisher App
Lightning Components in Experience Builder
Add Content to LWR Sites with New

Components
Dynamically Add Content to Your LWR

Sites with Data Binding in LWC
Components
Make Cross-Cloud Connections with the

Marketing Cloud Form Component
(Pilot)
Developer Productivity
Use Expression Language with Data

Binding in LWR Sites
Page References Now Support External

Record Routes
Set Up Tab Bar Navigation for Mobile

Publisher Apps in ExperienceBundle
Get Information About the Current Site

in Lightning Web Components
Incorporate User-Authorized Cookie

Consent into Your Sites
Use the @salesforce/apexContinuation

Scoped Module in LWR Sites
Performance
Automatically Get CDN for Digital

Experiences
Use Single Certificates with the CDN for

Digital Experiences
25

Improve Self-Registration Performance
for High-Scale Sites (Pilot)
Get Improved Self-Registration

Performance with Account Role
Optimization
Use the Customizable Service Not

Available Page for LWR and Aura Sites
Load Pages Faster with HTML Document

Caching in LWR Sites
Get Ready for Salesforce Edge Network

for Custom Domains
Security and Sharing
Create Sharing Rules to Retain and

Control Guest Users’ Product Access
(Release Update)
Bid Farewell to Run Flows for Guest

Users
Default Guest User Access to

Recognition Badges Disabled (Release
Update)
Other Changes
Get More Contact Information on Portal

Users
Customize Your Experience Cloud Site’s

Device Activation Emails
Specify a Language for Email and SMS

Messages When Using
initSelfRegistration
Files Connect for SharePoint

On-Premises is Being Retired
Field Service
Let customers efficiently set and manage their appointments without calls with Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment Assistant. Save
time and money by giving your customers technical support without going on-site with Visual Remote Assistant. Prevent costly
26
maintenance missteps by creating criteria-based asset maintenance plans. Enhanced features in shift patterns and templates help you
streamline resource planning and scheduling. And with custom actions, make Work Plans work better for your business.

Resource Management
Make Resource Planning Easier with

Enhanced Shift Patterns and Templates
Take the Guesswork Out of Scheduling

Shifts in Different Time Zones
Ease Shift Planning with Calendar and

Shift Schedule Enhancements
Share Records with Manual Sharing for

Field Service
Asset Management
Prevent Unscheduled Downtime and

Increase Asset Reliability with Filter
Criteria (Beta)
Schedule Recurring Work Rules Without

Guesswork
Administration and Processes
Enhance the Usability of the Work Plans

Lightning Web Component with Custom
Actions
Give Users Access to Work Plans on Their

Experience Builder Site
Customer Engagement
Give Your Customers Control Over Their

Appointments
Let Back-Office Workers See What

Customers See
Personalize the Real-Time Location Map

with Custom Icons
Expand Remote Video Capabilities for

Mobile Workers with the Visual Remote
Assistant Mobile App
Facilitate Virtual Appointments Using

Visual Remote Assistant
27

Improve Collaboration by Sharing
Images during a Remote Visual Session
Deliver Service Anytime, Anywhere with

Visual Remote Assistance for Sales and
Experience Clouds
Boost Customer Support by Connecting

Customers to the Mobile App from Their
Regional App Store
Enhance Your Visual Experience by

Customizing Augmented Reality Magic
Markers
Mobile
Enhance Work Plans Usability with

Custom Actions
Easily Transfer Products Between

Locations
Stop Deep Link Security Dialogs from

Interrupting Your Work (Beta)
Industries
Industries solutions for business verticals keep getting smarter and easier to use. Consumer Goods Cloud helps manage store visits and
monitor stock better. Financial Services Cloud adds deal management and branch management. Health Cloud introduces automated
benefit verification and self-service appointments. Manufacturing Cloud brings enhanced forecasting and SKU management. Public
Sector Cloud makes licensing and permitting simpler and faster. Industries products that you can use in more than one Industries cloud,
such as the data processing engine and decision tables, get significant enhancements.

Consumer Goods Cloud
Boost Field Reps’ Productivity with

Product Sequencing
Manage Product Availability with

Account Hierarchy for Products
Maximize Store Sales by Using

Predictions
28

Changed Objects in Consumer Goods
Cloud
Explore Consumer Goods Business Scenarios
Financial Services Cloud
Financial Deal Management
Relate Multiple Financial Deals to

Interactions and Interaction Summaries
Ensure Consistency and Compliance in

Financial Deal Engagements with Action
Plans
Guide Deal Teams Toward Success with Path
Interaction Summaries
Get Details for an Interaction Summary

Faster
Sort Interaction Summaries
Find Interaction Summaries Faster
More Flexible Performance Tracking with Record Association Builder
Record Association Builder Supports More

Financial Services Cloud Objects
Build Associations with Custom Objects
Enhance Branch Performance Tracking with

Record Association Builder
Add Association Criteria to Reports
Intelligent Document Automation
Handle Multiparty Consent Authorization

Requests
Insurance for Financial Services Cloud
Manage Claims and Policies Effectively with

Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics
Other Financial Services Cloud Changes
29

Increase Security for Interaction Summaries
and Financial Deals with Shield Platform
Encryption
Make It Easier to Share Records
Remove Participants Selected for Sharing

Records with a Single Click
New and Changed Financial Services

Cloud Object Fields
Health Cloud
Intelligent Appointment Management
Self-Schedule Appointments from

Anywhere
Set Up Intelligent Appointment

Management Faster
Give Users Appointment Scheduling Access

Quicker
Medication Management
Plan Medications Better with the Patient

Medication Manager Lightning Component
Add Medications Seamlessly Using the

Built-In Add Medication Flow
Provider Network Management
Manage Network Participations
Set Up Provider Search Faster
Ease Your Transition to Person Accounts
Verify Patient Benefits
Improve Data Extraction Efficiency by

Using Confidence-Level Scores
Candidate Patient Object Is No More
Health Cloud Has New and Changed

Objects
Connect REST API
Manufacturing Cloud
30

Generate Holistic and Accurate Account
Forecasts
Leverage Data Processing Engine

Definitions for Forecast Calculations
Define Sales Agreements Flexibly with

Agreements for Product Categories
New and Changed Objects for

Manufacturing Cloud
New and Changed Invocable Actions in

Manufacturing Cloud
New Action Type Value in

Manufacturing Cloud
Public Sector Solutions
Complete Inspections Virtually with the

Inspection Management Desktop App
Empower Your Employees with the

Employee Experience for Public Sector
Permission Set
Rebate Management
Define Product-Based Eligibility Easily

and Quickly with Product Filter Type on
Program Rebate Type
Do More with the New and Enhanced

Template Data Processing Engine
Definitions
Rebate Analytics
Get Business Insights to Drive Partner Sales
Track Your Accruals
New and Changed Objects for Rebate

Management

Rebate Management
New Action Type Value in Rebate

Management
Loyalty Management
31

Member Groups
Grow Your Loyalty Program with Group

Memberships
Set Up a One-Time Process to Transfer

Points
Get a Snapshot of the Points Transferred by

a Member
Keep Your Group Balances Up to Date
View Points Transferred to a Group
Keep Members Plugged Into Their Groups
Escrow Points
Keep Member Points in Escrow Until a

Transaction Is Completed
Release a Member's Points from Escrow

Automatically
Easily Track a Member's Escrow Points
Override the Escrow Period for Transactions
Use Updated Flow Actions to Easily Process

Escrow Points
Reward Members at the Time of Activity
Promotion Management
Determine Applicable Promotions for a

Transaction
Get Promotions That Fit a Member Best
Update Member Progress Towards

Unlocking a Promotion
Update a Member’s Progress Easily
Voucher Management
Give Members Flexibility to Use a Voucher

Across Multiple Activities
Personalize the Value of Vouchers
Recall Vouchers for Reversed Transactions
32

Marketing Cloud Integration
Keep Members Informed About Points

Earned or Spent
Get an Early Start on Your Tier Upgrade

Emails
Trigger Automated Process Using

Transaction Journals
Simplify the Tier Model Setup
Start Your Journey with the Loyalty

Management Learning Map
Analytics for Loyalty
Increase Promotion Revenue with Einstein

Discovery Predictions (Beta)
Anticipate Liabilities with Time Series

Forecasting
Other Improvements to Analytics for Loyalty
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty

Management

Loyalty Management
New Action Type Value in Loyalty

Management
Connect REST API
Apex: New Items in Loyalty

Management
Industries Common Components
Data Processing Engine
Filter Records Based on a Set of Values
Find the Length of a Word or Number
Increase Your Data Processing Engine Limits
Get More Out of Your Definitions with

Increased Limits
Get Your Definitions Up and Running Faster
33

Run Definitions with Different Input Variable
Values Simultaneously
Create Definitions with Manufacturing Cloud
Changed Objects in Data Processing Engine
Data Processing Engine Has a Changed

Metadata Type
Batch Management
Create Batch Management Jobs with

Manufacturing Cloud
Use Metadata API instead of Objects to

Create Batch Management Jobs
Changed Objects in Batch Management
Einstein Relationship Insights
Explore More Object Relationships with

Additional Person and Company Record
Objects
Store Object Configurations in a Dedicated

Database
Get Relationship Recommendations from

Multiple Sources
Find Items in Smart Tag View Easily by

Searching with Keywords
Smarttagscanvasapp Is Renamed Einstein

Relationship Insights Canvas App
Experience Improved Usability with Updated

Labels
Omnistudio
Connect REST API
Action Plans
Collaborate Better on Action Plans Even

Offline
Provide Better Insights Into Action Plan

Items
Improve Timely Task Completion
34

Clean Up the Action Plan Template List
Monitor Documents as They're

Transformed
Mobile
Get more done in the Salesforce mobile app with new features like the new full-width tablet app experience on iPad and Android tablets.
Briefcase Builder helps make offline record data available to your users. Mobile Publisher offers users new distribution methods to best
fit your org’s needs.

Salesforce Mobile App
Everything That’s New in the Salesforce Mobile App
Salesforce Mobile App Requirements Have

Changed
Help Your Users Personalize Their Content

With Mobile Home (Generally Available)
Protect Your Data with Enhanced Mobile

Security Updates
Limited Access for New Users with

Community Licenses
Run Your Business on Tablets (Beta)
Take Advantage of the Salesforce Mobile

App Defaulting to Lightning Apps
Briefcase Builder
Mobile Publisher
Mobile Publisher Requirements
New Distribution Methods for Your

Branded Apps
Manage How URLs Open in the

Experience Cloud App (Generally
Available)
35

Improved Sandbox Switching for the
Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud
App (iOS)
myTrailhead
requirements.

Deliver Learning Content for Specific
Audiences
Pardot

Marketer Experience
Send Slack Notifications to Pardot Users

with Completion Actions (Beta)
Build Landing Pages Faster with

Drag-And-Drop Editor
Take Your Automations Further with

Pardot Extensibility Enhancements
Push Emails from Lightning Experience

into Engagement Programs
Create Custom Components for the

Email Content Builder
Enjoy Improved Prospect Mailability

Insights (Generally Available)
Reset Bounce Counts on Prospect

Records
36

Customize Prospect Unsubscribe and
Resubscribe Page Content
See When and How Segmentation

Prospect Lists Were Updated
Unarchived Dynamic Lists Retain

Prospects
View IP Address for Prospect Activities

in Pardot
New and Updated Pardot User

Permissions
Plan for Pardot Drip Program

Retirement
Data and Content
Explore Einstein Key Accounts on List

Views (Generally Available)
Prepare Einstein Discovery in Fewer

Clicks
Some B2B Marketing Analytics Datasets

Were Fixed
CSS Class Name Was Changed
Manage and Extend Pardot
Pardot API: New and Changed Items
Bring Your Own Encryption Keys to

Pardot
Changes to Paused Connector Sync

Behavior
Pardot Classic App Is Being Retired
Revenue
In Salesforce CPQ, a release update adds permissions to standard permission sets and updates Access permission sets. Salesforce Billing
prevents duplicate payments by locking invoices until confirming a valid response from the payment gateway. Credit note lines now
inherit the Tax Percentage field, revenue finance books support more finance periods, and a Customer Asset Lifecycle Management field
was relabeled.
37

Salesforce CPQ
Assign New Access Permission Sets and

Review New Permissions (Release
Update)
Salesforce Billing
Prevent Duplicate Payments
Use More Finance Periods in Your

Revenue Finance Books
On Credit Note Lines, See the Tax

Percentage After You Cancel and Rebill
A Lifecycle Management Field on Orders

Was Relabeled
Sales
Pipeline Inspection lets you create custom filters, watch important opportunities, and see which deals are less likely to close in the current
month. Show a Most Likely forecast category on the forecasts page. Assign territories quicker and put assignment rules on pause. Add
Inbox users to any Einstein Activity Capture configuration. Salesforce Maps helps you automate assignments for large territories. Territory
Planning gives you flexibility to design territories for in-person and virtual customer visits. High Velocity Sales lets you update active sales
cadences and test different versions of email templates and call scripts on the same outreach step.

Pipeline Inspection
Save Time by Creating Custom Pipeline

Views and Filters
Flag Important Deals to Track Progress

Closely
See Which Deals Are Unlikely to Close

This Month with Einstein Deal Insights
Prioritize Deals More Effectively with

Tiered Einstein Opportunity Scores
Hold Sales Reps Accountable for

Updating Opportunity Next Steps
See How Many Times Close Dates Are

Pushed Out
38

Core Sales Features
Collaborative Forecasts
Track Forecast Categories Your Way
Bookmark Your Forecasts
Enterprise Territory Management
Speed Up Account-Territory Assignment
Put Assignment Rules on Pause
Products
Set Organization-Wide Sharing for Products

(Release Update)
Create Sharing Rules to Retain and Control

Guest Users’ Access to Products (Release
Update)
Other Changes in Core Sales Features
Delete Your Original Territory Management

Sharing Records (Release Update)
ForecastingSettings Was Restructured
Productivity Features
Einstein Activity Capture
Include Salesforce Inbox Users in Any

Einstein Activity Capture Configuration
See Consistent Event Data on the Activity

Timeline and in Standard Reports
Add the Recommended Connections

Component to Standard Layouts with Fewer
Clicks
Prevent Sensitive Information from

Appearing on the Activity Timeline
See When a Commitment Is Made to a

Customer or Prospect
Ensure that User Data Doesn’t Move Until

Setup Is Complete
39

Choose Whether the Activities Dashboard
Is Available
Email Experience
Send List Email Your Way (Pilot)
Use List Emails for Sales Cadence Automated

Emails Automatically
Email Templates
Add Rows and Columns to Your Email

Templates
Get Some Breathing Room with Column

Padding
Add Variety with Indentations in Rich Text

Components in Email Template Builder
Navigate More Easily with Breadcrumbs
Include Salesforce Inline Image References

in Email Template Builder Packages and
Change Sets
Say More in a Lightning Email Template’s

Subject
Activities
Sort Upcoming & Overdue Activities

Intuitively
Filter and Sort the Activity Timeline with a

New Icon
Update Tasks and Events Reports for More

Accurate Data
Split Bulk Queries on the TaskRelation Table

with PK Chunking
Salesforce Inbox
Saleforce Inbox Mobile
Einstein Conversation Insights
Match Opportunities to Voice and Video

Calls Automatically
40

Filter by Opportunity Stage,
Opportunity Amount, and Lead Status
Video Calls Display Title and

Opportunity Contact Role
Analyze Service Calls in a Dedicated

Conversation Insights Dashboard
Use Service Cloud Voice with Partner

Telephony (Pilot)
Salesforce Maps
Salesforce Maps
Automate Assignments for More Territories
Plot Any Salesforce Data on the Map
Identify Potential Customers Within Specific

Markets
Fill Gaps in Today’s Schedule from a Desktop
Salesforce Maps Territory Planning
Optimize Areas for In-Person and Remote

Business
Plan and Visualize Territories Using a Heat

Map
Publish Territory Data for Other Systems
Create Territory Models from Salesforce or

External Data Sources
Fine-Tune Account Assignments in

Salesforce Territory Models
Salesforce Maps Live Tracking
Automate Driver Location and Metrics

Reporting
Track Work-Related Miles Using Mobile

Devices
High Velocity Sales
Sales Cadences
Edit Active Sales Cadences
41

Find Out Which Email Templates and Call
Scripts Perform Best with Variant Testing
See Sales Cadence and Sales Rep

Performance at a Glance
Organize Sales Cadence Email

Templates
Add and Remove Sales Cadence Targets

from Reports
Send Sales Cadence Automated Emails

as List Emails to Save Data
Integration with Google
Gmail Integration
Get Improved Event Logging in the Gmail

Integration
Log Emails Manually from the Gmail

Integration with Inbox When Einstein
Activity Capture Is On
Simplified Multi-Factor Authentication in

the Gmail Integration
Support for the Gmail Integration in Older

Versions of Google Chrome Is Ending
Lightning Sync for Google
Check Out Einstein Activity Capture

Improvements for Google Customers
Integration with Microsoft
Outlook Integration
Get Improved Event Logging in the Outlook

Integration
Log Emails Manually from the Outlook

Integration with Inbox When Einstein
Activity Capture Is On
Simplified Multi-Factor Authentication in

the Outlook Integration
Support for the Outlook Integration in Older

Versions of Outlook and Windows Is Ending
42

Lightning Sync for Microsoft® Exchange®
Move to Einstein Activity Capture Easily
Check Out Einstein Activity Capture

Improvements for Microsoft Exchange
Customers
Salesforce for Outlook
Salesforce for Outlook Is Being Retired in

June 2023
Find Version-Specific Salesforce for Outlook

Release Notes
Other Changes in the Sales Cloud
Feedback Option for Einstein Email

Insights Was Removed

with Salesforce data and records created from Salesforce live apps, or work in Salesforce with the Template Library in Lightning Experience.
Speed up your Quip setup with the New Document global quick action automatically added to all your global publisher layouts. Learn
about the latest updates to Salesforce Anywhere Beta features.

When to Expect Salesforce Anywhere
Features
Create Documents from Templates from

Anywhere
Populate Salesforce Data Automatically

in a Document Created from a Template
in Quip
Streamline Template Creation with New

Settings
Simplify Document Creation in

Lightning Experience with New
Document Global Action Improvements
43

Understand Who Can Access a
Document with Synced Sharing
Enhancements
Salesforce Anywhere Beta Is Being

Retired
The Collaboration User Engagement

Records Table Is Being Retired
Share Your Live Apps with Selected Quip

Sites
Simplify Quip User Account

Management with the New Bulk SCIM
API Method
Simplify Bulk Document Archiving with

New Quip Admin API Methods
Automate Information Sharing and

Document Editing in Quip
Get Better Performance with the Quip

Automation API
Get the Enhanced Salesforce Anywhere

Experience
Salesforce CDP
Commerce Cloud. Look out for a more accessible experience for mapping data and major improvements in Identity Resolution. There’s
also a new Salesforce Web SDK to unify website instrumentation across Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio.

Create CRM Bundles with Data Kits from
Your Salesforce CDP Data
Capture Event Updates on Calculated

Insights, Identity Resolution, and
Schema Changes
Enjoy an Improved Identity Resolution

Experience
44

Take Control of Unified Profiles with
Match Rules
Create Better Unified Individuals with

Multiple Individual Rulesets
Drive Actions from Salesforce CDP with

Data Actions
Download Datasets into Salesforce CDP

to Use in Tableau Desktop
Stream Data from Your Own External

Sources using Ingestion API
Connect to Mulesoft for a User-Friendly

API Experience
Map Your Data in Table View
Draw Insights on Salesforce CDP Data

Using Tableau CRM (Beta)
Connect Your B2C Commerce Data to

Salesforce CDP
Salesforce Interactions Web SDK for

Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio
Get a Complete View of a Salesforce CDP

Unified Individual with Profile Explorer
Create Streaming Insights in Real-Time
Create Calculated Insights with Insight

Builder
Simplify Calculated Insights Building

with Metrics on Metrics
Create Smarter Segments with the

Power of Einstein Engagement Scores
Build Segments Based on Many-1-Many

Relationships
Find Customers to Engage with Again
Complex Calculated Insights Functions

Now Supported in Segmentation
Find Activations Easily in Marketing

Cloud Shared Data Extensions
45

Activate to Commerce Cloud to
Personalize Commerce Experiences
Non-Aggregatable Measures Now

Supported in Activation
New Calculated Insights Data Types

Now Supported in Activation
Use the Privacy Data Model to Honor

Customer Consent Preferences
Salesforce CDP API: New and Changed

Items
Download Release Notes PDF for

Salesforce CDP Releases Before Winter
’22
Salesforce CMS

Preview Salesforce CMS Content on Your
Site

To comply with browser requirements, you must have a My Domain, or we deploy one for you. Verify your identity with biometric built-in
authenticators. To help you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement, use the MFA Rollout Pack. Enjoy a more
intuitive consent data model and Portability Policy dashboards. Event Monitoring includes four new event log file types and more detailed
Transaction Security policy notification emails. Encrypt more Financial Services Cloud data at rest. And Threat Detection integration with
Security Center is now generally available, along with customizable alerts for monitoring security configuration changes.

Domains
Deploy a My Domain (Release Update)
Enable User Email Domain Restrictions
46

Require SOAP API Calls to Log In with
My Domain
Prepare for Your Custom Domain to Use

Salesforce Edge Network
Enable Enhanced Domains (Release

Update)
Domain HTTPS Option Was Renamed
Identity and Access Management
Salesforce Identity for Your Employees
Streamline Identity Verification with Built-In

Authenticators (Beta)
Get Users Ready for Multi-Factor

Authentication with Change Management
Resources
MFA Challenges for Authentication Provider

Single Sign-On Logins Are No Longer
Enforced
Verify Logins in Users Reports
Require Users to Reauthenticate When

Accessing Service Providers with Single
Sign-On
Login Credentials in GET Query Strings Are

Disabled
Customize How Just-in-Time Provisioning

Handlers Process Attributes in SAML
Assertions
Identity Connect 7.1
Give Authorized Access to Salesforce CDP

Data
OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow Supports

mobileauth.salesforce.com/analytics
Redirect URL for Refresh Tokens
Salesforce Identity for Your Customers
Tailor Device Activation Emails for

Experience Cloud Sites
47

Control the Language Used for Experience
Cloud Self-Registration Verification
Messages
Identity Cookies Have Shorter Durations
Email and SMS One-Time Password Codes

Are Longer
Get Information About Named Credentials

in the EventLogFile
Privacy Center
Consent Data Model Branding
Portability Policy Changes
Salesforce Shield
Event Monitoring
Append New Data to Event Monitoring

Analytics App Datasets (Beta)
Get More Informative Transaction Security

Policy Notifications
Analyze Your Flows in the Flow Execution

Event Type
Get Information About CORS Violation

Records in the EventLogFile
Get the Names of Installed Managed

Packages That Access Named Credentials
Review Bulk API 2.0 Workload Information
Review Threat Detection Data in Security

Center (Generally Available)
Field Audit Trail
Retention Policy Now Associated with Only

One Custom Object
Shield Platform Encryption
Encrypt More Financial Services Cloud Data
Security Center
48

Threat Detection Compatibility
Create Alerts
Detail View Filters
Other Changes
Share Resources with Browser

Extensions
Service
Try out Incident Management, which allows your team to diagnose root causes and resolve major incidents faster while creating a better
customer experience. Use it to empower your service teams to quickly classify and prioritize work, assign the right experts, and streamline
communication with customers. Workforce Engagement offers a queue-based workflow for planning and staffing tools so you can
access the business analytics that you need faster. And set up Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony more easily with the new
prescriptive setup experience, which includes templates and menus to help you create your contact center and sync it with your telephony
provider.

Incident Management
Diagnose, Track, and Prevent Service

Interruptions with Incident
Management
Service Setup
Get Sample Surveys from the Service

Setup Assistant
Channels
Voice
Streamline Your Partner Telephony Contact

Center Setup (Prescriptive Setup)
Simplify Your Amazon Partner Telephony

Setup
Route Calls with Omni-Channel Flows (Beta)
Analyze Service Calls in the Einstein

Conversation Insights Dashboard
49

Get Actionable Call Insights with Einstein
Conversation Insights for Partner Telephony
(Pilot)
Improve Reporting with Consistent Call

Statuses
Define Omni-Channel Statuses for Missed

and Declined Calls
Keep Your Lambda Functions Warm and

Other Enhancements
Find Voice Calls Quickly with Global Search
Speed Up Agent Troubleshooting with

Downloadable Call Logs
Transfer Callers to Available Agents with

Search
Match Callers to End User Records with

Phone Channels (Beta)
Improve the Supervisor Reporting

Experience with Recognizable Usernames
Monitor Call Quality with Mean Opinion

Scores
Voice Users Must Agree to Being Recorded
Improve Caller Experiences with Enhanced

Contact Flows
Messaging
Route Messaging Sessions with

Omni-Channel Flows (Beta)
Save Time with the End Session Mass Action
Chat
Improve Your Control Over Objects Available

Using findOrCreate API
Avoid Multiple Greetings in a Session
Workforce Engagement
50

Create a Workload History, Intelligent
Forecast, and Omni-Channel Plan in a
Queue-Based Workflow
View the Omni-Channel Plan by Shifts,

Not Time Intervals
Map Job Profiles to Queues with the

Workforce Engagement Configuration
App
Create Shifts in Bulk from Your

Omni-Channel Plan
Set a Match Queues Scheduling Rule
Create Shifts from a Template
Filter a Workload History Based on

Picklist or Text Fields
Set Objectives for Streamlined

Scheduling
Ease the Pain with Non-Standard Shifts
Routing
Connect Your Customers to the Correct

Service Agents Using Omni-Channel
Flow (Generally Available)
Get a Head Start on Building

Omni-Channel Flows with Templates
Give Agents More Context with a

Customized Screen Pop
Einstein for Service
Einstein Classification
Upgrade Your Customer Service

Materials with Smarter Reply Templates
Knowledge
Review Knowledge Article Versions with

Improved Accessibility Measures
Cases
51
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Supported Browsers

Disable Ref ID and Transition to New
Email Threading Behavior (Release
Update)
Use a Default No-Reply Address as

System Address for Case Email
Notifications (Release Update)
Supported Browsers
We’ve made some changes to our supported browsers documentation, making it easier to find what you need. Supported browsers for
Salesforce vary depending on whether you use Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience
See the supported browsers and devices for Lightning Experience.
Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic
See the supported browsers and devices for Salesforce Classic.
Supported browsers for Tableau CRM include those supported for Lightning Experience with the following differences: Tableau CRM
isn’t supported on Apple® Safari®.
Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience

See the supported browsers and devices for Lightning Experience.
Where: Lightning Experience is available in the Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
Note:
• Salesforce doesn’t support nonbrowser applications that embed WebView or similar controls to render content for Salesforce
Classic or Lightning Experience. Examples of approaches that embed this type of control include Salesforce Mobile SDK,
Microsoft’s WebBrowser Control, Electron’s embedded Chromium browser, iOS’s UIWebView and WKWebView, and Android’s
WebView.
• You can’t access Lightning Experience in a mobile browser. Instead, we recommend that you use the Salesforce mobile app
when you work on a mobile device.
• You can access Lightning Experience on iPad Safari. For more information, see Lightning Experience on iPad Safari Considerations.
• Lightning Experience doesn’t support incognito or other private browsing modes.
52
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Supported Browsers and Devices for Lightning Experience
Desktops and Laptops

Salesforce supports these following browsers. Make sure that your browsers are up to date. Other browsers or older versions of supported
browsers aren’t guaranteed to support all features.
Important: Support for Internet Explorer 11 to access Lightning Experience ended on December 31, 2020.
• When using IE11, a permanent banner displays in your Salesforce org indicating that you're on an unsupported browser.
• IE11 has significant performance issues in Lightning Experience.
• This change doesn’t impact Salesforce Classic.
Important: Support for the non-Chromium version of Microsoft Edge in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic ended on
December 31, 2020.
Microsoft® Microsoft® Microsoft® Google Mozilla® Apple®

Internet Edge Edge Chrome™ Firefox® Safari®
Explorer® (non-Chromium) Chromium
Lightning Not supported Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest
Experience stable browser stable browser stable browser stable browser
version version version version
Experience Not supported Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest
Builder sites stable browser stable browser stable browser stable browser
Special setup Not supported Not supported No No No No

considerations?
Limitations? Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Note: The browser vendor defines “latest” for their own browser. Check with your browser vendor to determine the latest version
available.
Tablets
Use Apple Safari on iPadOS (iOS 13.x) or later. Portrait orientation and orientation switching aren’t supported on Lightning Experience
on iPad Safari. Use landscape orientation and maximize your Safari browser to full width. To avoid orientation switching, turn on the
iPad rotation lock.
We support only the Salesforce mobile app for Android-based tablets.
Apple® Safari® Google Chrome™ Other Browsers Salesforce Mobile

App
iPadOS Supported Not supported Not supported Supported
Android N/A Not supported Not supported Supported
Note: Salesforce treats touch-enabled laptops, including Microsoft Surface and Surface Pro devices, as laptops instead of tablets.
It’s not possible to access the Salesforce mobile app on these devices. Users are always redirected to the full site experience that’s
53
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic
enabled for them—Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. Only standard keyboard and mouse inputs are supported on these
types of devices.
Phones
For the best experience, use the Salesforce mobile app.
Supported Browsers and Devices for Salesforce Classic

See the supported browsers and devices for Salesforce Classic.
Where: Salesforce Classic is available in all editions.
Note: Using Salesforce Classic in a mobile browser isn’t supported. Instead, we recommend using the Salesforce mobile app
when you’re working on a mobile device.
Important: Support for the non-Chromium version of Microsoft Edge in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic ended on
December 31, 2020.
Microsoft® Microsoft® Microsoft® Google Mozilla® Apple®

Internet Edge Edge Chrome™ Firefox® Safari®
Explorer® (non-Chromium) Chromium
Salesforce Classic IE 11 only Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest
stable browser stable browser stable browser stable browser
Salesforce Classic IE 11 only Not supported Supports latest Supports latest Supports latest Not supported
Console stable browser stable browser stable browser
version version version
Special setup Yes Not supported No No Yes No

considerations?
Limitations? Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
Note: The browser vendor defines “latest” for their own browser. Check with your browser vendor to determine the latest version
available.

Supported browsers for Tableau CRM include those supported for Lightning Experience with the following differences: Tableau CRM
isn’t supported on Apple® Safari®.
54
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Overall
Salesforce Overall
Winter ’22 brings a flurry of new features and improvements. Enjoy smarter searching with Einstein Search, available by default and at
no extra charge. View and manage permission set licenses more efficiently. Use the Your Account app to view, pay, and download
IN THIS SECTION:
Enable Multi-Factor Authentication at no extra cost. See more information about permission set licenses and add and remove them
more quickly.
User Engagement
Targeted prompts are generally available, and in-app guidance is available on supported Setup pages. Additional options give you
more control for when to show in-app guidance for record types. In the Guidance Center, explore more resource sets with new ways
to manage what you see.
Your Account App
View and download invoices. In Salesforce Classic, the Checkout node was renamed.
Salesforce Surveys
Invite more participants and generate responses by sending survey invitations from Digital Engagement channels, such as WhatsApp
and Facebook, or share the URL in an SMS. Make better decisions on what actions to take by adding more context in your data maps.
Create meaningful actions in your map using merge fields. Share surveys and survey invitations from the Salesforce Lightning UI to
collect feedback about survey design or collaborate better on the survey results and analytics.
Allocate appointments evenly among service resources with resource-utilization-based appointment distribution. Use Apex methods
to quickly create and update service appointments. Make more API calls with the increased per user, per hour Connect API request
limit. And check out the new Salesforce Scheduler Developer Guide and the improved, standalone Salesforce Scheduler Help
supplemented with flow variable documentation.
Search
Search brings intelligence and efficiency to users who are looking for relevant information in their Salesforce org. Users in Lightning
Experience get the added benefits of AI-powered Einstein Search. The more users engage with Einstein Search, the more likely
Einstein returns the most useful search results.
Enable Multi-Factor Authentication at no extra cost. See more information about permission set licenses and add and remove them
more quickly.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Ready for the Future Requirement to Enable Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA)
On February 2, 2021, we announced a future requirement for all customers to enable multi-factor authentication (MFA) for their
Salesforce products. To satisfy the MFA requirement, all your internal users who log in to Salesforce through the user interface must
use MFA. You can turn on MFA directly in Salesforce or use your single sign-on (SSO) provider’s MFA service. Salesforce MFA is
available at no extra cost.
55
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes General Enhancements
Keep Working with Tab-Focused Dialogs (Release Update)

In Lightning console apps, dialogs no longer stop you from interacting with the rest of the UI. This release update limits the focus
of dialogs triggered by a workspace tab or subtab to only the tab that triggered it. This update was first made available in Winter
’20.
See More Information About Permission Set Licenses
See key details about your permission set licenses on the Company Information Setup page. In the permission set licenses related
list, you get a snapshot of your licenses, their expiration dates, and the number of remaining seats. On each license’s detail page,
you now see which user, object, and custom permissions are available for the license. From this detail page, you can also view and
manage user assignments.
Add and Remove Permission Set License Assignments Faster
Save time by assigning multiple users to a permission set license together or by removing multiple users all at once. On each
permission set license detail page, you can select multiple users to complete bulk assignment operations. Previously, you added or
removed users individually from each user’s detail page.
Salesforce solution kits help you implement solutions to complex, cross-cloud use cases. Each solution kit includes recommendations
for specific products, configurations, and best practices.
On February 2, 2021, we announced a future requirement for all customers to enable multi-factor authentication (MFA) for their Salesforce
products. To satisfy the MFA requirement, all your internal users who log in to Salesforce through the user interface must use MFA. You
can turn on MFA directly in Salesforce or use your single sign-on (SSO) provider’s MFA service. Salesforce MFA is available at no extra
cost.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all Salesforce mobile apps in all editions.
When: Beginning February 1, 2022, per the Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation, all Salesforce customers are contractually
required to use MFA for direct and SSO logins to Salesforce products. We encourage you to begin planning now and implement MFA
as soon as possible.
Why: The global threat landscape is constantly evolving, and the types of attacks that can cripple a business and exploit consumers are
on the rise. A key part of your security strategy is safeguarding access to your Salesforce user accounts. But on their own, user credentials
don’t provide sufficient protection against threats like phishing attacks, man-in-the-middle attacks, and credential stuffing. That’s where
MFA comes in. It’s one of the easiest, most effective ways to prevent unauthorized account access and safeguard your business and your
customers’ data.
How: MFA requires users to prove they’re who they say they are by providing two or more pieces of evidence—or factors—when they
log in. One factor is something the user knows, such as their username and password combination. Other factors are verification methods
that the user has in their possession, such as the Salesforce Authenticator app or a physical security key. By tying logins to multiple,
different types of factors, it’s much harder for a bad actor to access your Salesforce environment. To learn more about MFA, watch the
How MFA Works to Protect Account Access video.
56
We’re here to help you get ready for the MFA requirement. To get started, check out the Multi-Factor Authentication Assistant. In Lightning
Experience, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter MFA, and then select Multi-Factor Authentication Assistant. And to get
customizable templates for rollout planning and change management, download the MFA Rollout Pack.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Salesforce Multi-Factor Authentication FAQ
Knowledge Article: Announcement of the Future Requirement to Enable Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA)
Salesforce Help: Meet the Multi-Factor Authentication Assistant (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Users Ready for Multi-Factor Authentication with Change Management Resources

In Lightning console apps, dialogs no longer stop you from interacting with the rest of the UI. This release update limits the focus of
dialogs triggered by a workspace tab or subtab to only the tab that triggered it. This update was first made available in Winter ’20.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions. Lightning console apps are available for an extra cost to users with Salesforce Platform user licenses for certain products. Some
restrictions apply. For pricing details, contact your Salesforce account executive.
When: This update was first available in Winter ’20 and is enforced in Spring ’22. This update was originally scheduled to be enforced
in Winter ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance
tab.
Why: Before the Winter ’20 release, all dialogs triggered by a workspace tab or subtab in a Lightning console app took the focus of the
entire app. This update makes a dialog require the focus of only the tab that triggered it, allowing users to interact with the rest of the
app.
How: To review this release update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, then select Release Updates.
For Keep Working with Tab-Focused Dialogs, follow the testing and activation steps.
After the update, when you trigger a dialog, it’s limited to the tab that created it.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
57

See key details about your permission set licenses on the Company Information Setup page. In the permission set licenses related list,
you get a snapshot of your licenses, their expiration dates, and the number of remaining seats. On each license’s detail page, you now
see which user, object, and custom permissions are available for the license. From this detail page, you can also view and manage user
assignments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Company Information, and then select Company Information. Scroll down to
the Permission Set Licenses related list for a quick glance at your licenses. For more details about a specific permission set license and
to manage assignments, click the license name.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View and Manage Your Permission Set Licenses (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Save time by assigning multiple users to a permission set license together or by removing multiple users all at once. On each permission
set license detail page, you can select multiple users to complete bulk assignment operations. Previously, you added or removed users
individually from each user’s detail page.
Developer editions.
How: Before you remove the permission set license, you must remove the related assigned permissions from the user. Then, from Setup,
in the Quick Find box, enter Company Information, and select Company Information. Scroll down to the permission set licenses
related list, and click the name of the permission set license that you want to assign users to or remove users from. To see and remove
current assignments, click View Users. To assign users, click Assign Users.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Assign a Permission Set License to a User (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Remove a Permission Set License from a User (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce solution kits help you implement solutions to complex, cross-cloud use cases. Each solution kit includes recommendations
for specific products, configurations, and best practices.
• Collect Health Verifications to Return to Work — Verify your employees' COVID-19 health status to ensure safety when returning to
the workplace.
• Integrate B2C Commerce with Single Sign-On — Reduce friction and ensure a secure connection by integrating B2C Commerce
Account Manager and other Salesforce applications with your identity provider.
• Register Customers with Passwordless Login — Reduce password-related risks, improve authentication processes, and make it easier
for your users to log in to frequently used applications with a well-implemented authentication and registration strategy. Passwordless
login can make registration and access even simpler. Capture mobile-first markets and delight new user demographics by providing
58
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes User Engagement
the ability to create an identity with your brand without forcing consumers to juggle yet another password. Customize login pages
to reflect your brand and report on login activities from Salesforce to better understand customer engagement.
• Use Interaction Studio to Personalize Experience Cloud Websites — Personalize, make recommendations, and track user behavior
in Experience Cloud using standard Interaction Studio functionality like banner recommendations and global templates.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Explore Salesforce Solution Kits
User Engagement
Targeted prompts are generally available, and in-app guidance is available on supported Setup pages. Additional options give you more
control for when to show in-app guidance for record types. In the Guidance Center, explore more resource sets with new ways to manage
what you see.
IN THIS SECTION:
Point to Specific Elements on a Page with Targeted Prompts (Generally Available)
Target a specific page element to show your users exactly what you’re referring to with the newest type of in-app guidance.
Show In-App Guidance for Specific Record Types
Now, you can choose if you want in-app guidance to appear for all or only a specific record type. And you can customize your
message so that users get detailed help for the unique layout and picklists of different record types. Previously, when you created
in-app guidance and assigned it to a record page with multiple record types, the in-app guidance appeared for all of its record types.
Create and View In-App Guidance in Setup
In-app guidance is available for supported Setup pages. View and author custom prompts and walkthroughs to enhance feature
discovery and show users how to configure apps and features.
Stay up to date on the valuable in-app prompts, welcome mats, and popovers that Salesforce shows admins and end users. Avoid
duplicating information as you create your own prompts or other in-app content.
Explore More Resources in the Guidance Center
The Guidance Center has new sets of resources for admins setting up Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA), Field Service, and Health
Cloud. Spend time learning, not searching for content, to become an expert fast. Also, customers with Premier support can see which
resources are included just for them. Look for the “Premier” tag on resources.
Keep Track of Resources Inside the Guidance Center
Managing your learning resources is easier than ever. Hide completed items, archive guidance sets, and check the box to mark a
resource as completed without opening it. Declutter your Guidance Center view to focus on the resources you need right now.
Point to Specific Elements on a Page with Targeted Prompts (Generally Available)

Target a specific page element to show your users exactly what you’re referring to with the newest type of in-app guidance.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From Setup in Lightning Experience, in the Quick Find box, enter In-App Guidance, and then select In-App Guidance.
59
As you create a prompt, click Targeted Prompt in the Prompt Type area (1). The targeted prompt points to the page element you select
(2) so that your users can benefit from more directed guidance.
Show In-App Guidance for Specific Record Types

Now, you can choose if you want in-app guidance to appear for all or only a specific record type. And you can customize your message
so that users get detailed help for the unique layout and picklists of different record types. Previously, when you created in-app guidance
and assigned it to a record page with multiple record types, the in-app guidance appeared for all of its record types.
How: From Setup in Lightning Experience, in the Quick Find box, enter In-App Guidance, and then select In-App Guidance.
When you add or edit in-app guidance that has more than one record type and you want the prompt to appear only for a specific record
type, select the checkbox in the Record Type area.
60
Create and View In-App Guidance in Setup

In-app guidance is available for supported Setup pages. View and author custom prompts and walkthroughs to enhance feature discovery
and show users how to configure apps and features.
How: Inside the builder canvas, navigate to the gear icon, and go to the page where you want to add the prompt or walkthrough, and
then click Add.
61

Stay up to date on the valuable in-app prompts, welcome mats, and popovers that Salesforce shows admins and end users. Avoid
duplicating information as you create your own prompts or other in-app content.
Where: The availability of in-app content varies by feature.
Why: Salesforce added this in-app content.
Feature Area Type Description

Essentials Walkthrough Educates users on the importance of accounts and the basics of an
account record. Shown in the Sales and Service apps.
Walkthough Educates users on the importance of tasks and activities and how to
create tasks and log a call. Shown in the Sales and Service apps.
Walkthrough Educates users on the importance of opportunities and how to move

them forward in the pipeline. Shown in the Sales and Service apps.
Marketing Docked prompt Highlights tips and best practices for managing benefits.
Docked prompt Highlights tips and best practices for managing promotions.
Docked prompt Highlights tips and best practices for managing vouchers.
Feature popover Highlights the Pardot Setup Assistant within the Marketing Setup App.
Only shown to admins.
Platform Docked prompt Notifies admins to add Mobile Home to a Lightning App or to the Mobile
Only navigation for users to access it in their menu. Only shown to
admins.
Floating prompt Highlights sandbox readiness materials. Only shown to admins.
Feature popover Encourages users to employ the global actions menu.
Feature popover Highlights the features of the Einstein Bots Builder. Only shown to
admins.
Sales Docked prompt Reminds admins to enable the Einstein Conversation Insights feature,
which is included for orgs that have both High Velocity Sales and
Lightning Dialer. Only shown to admins.
Docked prompt Explains how to use Pipeline Inspection, and highlights key features.
Floating prompt Provides tips and best practices for using Pipeline Inspection.
Welcome mat Introduces users to Pipeline Inspection.
Service Floating prompt Introduces users to the case list view created by the Service Setup
Assistant.
Walkthrough Introduces users to the case record page layout created by the Service
Setup Assistant.
Walkthrough Introduces users to the default help center created by the Service Setup
Assistant.
62
Feature Area Type Description

Walkthrough Introduces users to the Lightning email templates created by the Service
Setup Assistant.
Walkthrough Introduces users to the default surveys created by the Service Setup
Assistant.
Setup Docked prompt Reminds admins how to prepare their data before importing. Only shown
to admins.
Walkthrough Highlights In-App Guidance to admins. Only shown to admins.
How: Turn off all in-app content authored by Salesforce from the In-App Guidance Setup page. Click Settings and then deselect
Salesforce Standard In-App Guidance.
Explore More Resources in the Guidance Center

The Guidance Center has new sets of resources for admins setting up Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA), Field Service, and Health Cloud.
Spend time learning, not searching for content, to become an expert fast. Also, customers with Premier support can see which resources
are included just for them. Look for the “Premier” tag on resources.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. You
only see applicable guidance sets for the apps installed.
Why: The Guidance Center now includes these additional sets of resources:
• Get Ready for Multi-Factor Authentication—Beginning February 2022, all Salesforce users must log in using MFA. Learn how
to satisfy this requirement and add extra protection against security threats like phishing attacks.
• Get Started with Health Cloud—Explore onboarding resources to help you navigate your Health Cloud org for provider, payer,
life sciences, and medical device uses.
• Get Started with Field Service—Find expert guidance and resources to help you implement Salesforce Field Service.
We hid the Lightning Experience welcome mat for admins because the Guidance Center is now the go-to location for admin setup and
onboarding help. Admins can always access the welcome mat from the Help Menu, under Getting Started.
How: Access the Guidance Center anywhere, anytime by clicking the icon for Learning Paths in the global header. Although the learning
panel is available to all users, only admins see a link to the Guidance Center. When you first click the Guidance Center inside the panel,
you see a list of available resource sets with descriptions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get Personalized Guidance While Setting Up Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Keep Track of Resources Inside the Guidance Center

Managing your learning resources is easier than ever. Hide completed items, archive guidance sets, and check the box to mark a resource
as completed without opening it. Declutter your Guidance Center view to focus on the resources you need right now.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Why: Now, you can check the box near the title to mark the item as complete. In previous releases, only items you opened were marked
as complete. You can also uncheck a resource to remind yourself to review it again later.
63
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Your Account App
By default, we don’t hide completed items. To see only the resources that you haven't yet reviewed, toggle Hide completed items to
On.
If you’re done with a guidance set for now, you can archive it, which moves it off the Guidance Center home screen to an archive section.
Select Archive from the dropdown menu next to the set name.
You can always access the content whenever you want by clicking Archived Guidance Sets at the bottom of the panel. Use the
dropdown menu to select Restore an archived set.
How: Access the Guidance Center anywhere, anytime by clicking the icon for Learning Paths in the global header. Although the learning
panel is available to all users, only admins see a link to the Guidance Center. When you first click the Guidance Center inside the panel,
you see a list of available resource sets with descriptions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get Personalized Guidance While Setting Up Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Your Account App

View and download invoices. In Salesforce Classic, the Checkout node was renamed.
IN THIS SECTION:
View Invoices with the Your Account App
Do more in the Your Account app. View and download invoices and review your payments and credit memos. No need to head
over to Salesforce Checkout.
Checkout Is Now Named Manage Subscription
In Salesforce Classic, the Checkout node is now named Manage Subscription.
64
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Your Account App
View Invoices with the Your Account App

Do more in the Your Account app. View and download invoices and review your payments and credit memos. No need to head over to
Salesforce Checkout.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: To open the Your Account app, click Setup( ), and select Your Account.
Click View Invoices.
To view your invoices, adjust the filters. To download an invoice, click .

To view invoice details, click the invoice number.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Meet the Your Account App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Checkout Is Now Named Manage Subscription

In Salesforce Classic, the Checkout node is now named Manage Subscription.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Manage Subscription, and then select Manage Subscription.
65
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Surveys
Salesforce Surveys
Invite more participants and generate responses by sending survey invitations from Digital Engagement channels, such as WhatsApp
and Facebook, or share the URL in an SMS. Make better decisions on what actions to take by adding more context in your data maps.
Create meaningful actions in your map using merge fields. Share surveys and survey invitations from the Salesforce Lightning UI to
collect feedback about survey design or collaborate better on the survey results and analytics.
IN THIS SECTION:
Engage More Customers Using Digital Engagement Channels
Increase engagement and response rates with distribution channels that are more effective than email. Automatically send survey
invitations after a chat over social media channels, such as WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger, or through SMS.
Personalize Post Feedback Followup Actions
Make better decisions while you create or update Salesforce records based on contextual information in a data map. Add multiple
types of merge fields to your conditions or target fields, such as associated record or participant record. Use the predefined custom
or org variables in your data maps. Associate timestamps while creating or updating records.
Easily share survey drafts with your team and collect feedback about the survey design. Publish and share survey results and analytics
with other users. Assign access permission to individuals or a group while sharing the surveys. View the hierarchy of users who have
access to the survey.
Engage More Customers Using Digital Engagement Channels

Increase engagement and response rates with distribution channels that are more effective than email. Automatically send survey
invitations after a chat over social media channels, such as WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger, or through SMS.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance, Partner Developer, Enterprise, Unlimited,
and Developer editions where Salesforce Surveys is enabled.
Who: To send survey invitations, users need the Salesforce Surveys Advanced Features permission available with the Salesforce Feedback
Management Growth and Salesforce Feedback Management Starter licenses.
66
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Surveys
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Messaging Settings, and then select Messaging Settings.
Click Configure Survey (1) for a messaging channel. In the Survey Invitation Settings section (2), if needed, add a message that you
want to send with the invitation, and select a survey to send in the Survey field.
Personalize Post Feedback Followup Actions

Make better decisions while you create or update Salesforce records based on contextual information in a data map. Add multiple types
of merge fields to your conditions or target fields, such as associated record or participant record. Use the predefined custom or org
variables in your data maps. Associate timestamps while creating or updating records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance, Partner Developer, Enterprise, Unlimited,
and Developer editions where Salesforce Surveys is enabled.
Who: To use merge fields and data maps, users need the Salesforce Surveys Advanced Features permission available with the Salesforce
Feedback Management Growth and Salesforce Feedback Management Starter licenses.
Why: Derive actions using the contextual information. For example, if the response to a Net Promoter Score survey of each participant
of a high-value account is less than 5, create a case with an escalated status.
How: In Survey Builder, create or update the data map for a survey.
67
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Scheduler
• Manage conditions (1) based on the merge fields.

• Map target fields (2) to the merge fields, and then create meaningful actions based on the contextual information.
• Associate the target fields (3) with the record-creation or -updation timestamp.

Easily share survey drafts with your team and collect feedback about the survey design. Publish and share survey results and analytics
with other users. Assign access permission to individuals or a group while sharing the surveys. View the hierarchy of users who have
access to the survey.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Partner Developer, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions
where Salesforce Surveys is enabled.
How: Open a survey that you want to share in the Lightning Experience UI.
To share the survey with an individual or a group, and grant access permissions, click Sharing (1). To view the list of users who have
access to the survey and to view the user’s access levels, click Sharing Hierarchy (2).
Allocate appointments evenly among service resources with resource-utilization-based appointment distribution. Use Apex methods
to quickly create and update service appointments. Make more API calls with the increased per user, per hour Connect API request limit.
And check out the new Salesforce Scheduler Developer Guide and the improved, standalone Salesforce Scheduler Help supplemented
with flow variable documentation.
68
IN THIS SECTION:
Optimize Resource Utilization with Even Appointment Distribution
Use the new data-driven appointment distribution to quickly and evenly allocate appointments to service resources. Salesforce
Scheduler uses load-balancing logic to find and suggest the least-occupied eligible service resources for appointments. For an
anonymous appointment, the least occupied eligible resource is automatically assigned to the appointment.
Create and Update Appointments Through New Apex Methods
Salesforce Scheduler developers can now easily create and update appointments without prerequisites such as remote site settings
for using APIs. The new Apex methods use POST and PATCH requests on the Service Appointments Connect API to create and update
appointments.
Other Changes to Salesforce Scheduler
Learn about other small but important improvements to Salesforce Scheduler.
Make the Most of the Improved Salesforce Scheduler Documentation
Check out the new Salesforce Scheduler Developer Guide that brings all Salesforce Scheduler developer resources to one place. The
Build Custom Appointment Booking Experiences Using Salesforce Scheduler APIs topic shows how to the Salesforce Scheduler APIs
to build a custom scheduling app. You can use the app to schedule and modify appointments including anonymous and multi-resource
appointments. For easy access and navigation, we moved the Salesforce Scheduler help topics from the Extend Salesforce with Clicks,
Not Code guide to a standalone Salesforce Scheduler Help. And, we added useful information about flow screen component attributes
to the help.
Optimize Resource Utilization with Even Appointment Distribution

Use the new data-driven appointment distribution to quickly and evenly allocate appointments to service resources. Salesforce Scheduler
uses load-balancing logic to find and suggest the least-occupied eligible service resources for appointments. For an anonymous
appointment, the least occupied eligible resource is automatically assigned to the appointment.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Salesforce Scheduler
enabled.
Why: Appointment distribution helps you quickly find the right resources for appointments. And an equitable distribution of appointments
ensures efficient use of service resources and increased productivity. To enhance the scheduling experience for users when appointment
distribution is enabled, you can:
• Optimize the performance by defining the maximum number of eligible resources you want to show for scheduling. Scheduling is
a performance-intensive process. As the number of eligible resources increases, Salesforce scheduler takes longer to fetch the resource
list.
Use the new Number of Resources to Show (Appointment Distribution) attribute in flows. This attribute is available in the Select
Service Resource, Select Service Appointment Time, and Select Service Resource and Service Appointment Time screen components.
If you’re using APIs, use the resourceLimitApptDistribution parameter. This parameter is available in the
getAppointmentCandidates REST API and the available-territory-slots Connect API.
• List service resources based on their workload, with the least occupied resource at the top.
Set the new Show Service Resources by Availability attribute to False. This attribute is available in the Select Service Resource and
Select Service Resource and Service Appointment Time screen components. By default, it’s set to True and sorts resources by the
earliest next availability date and time.
69
How: Define an appointment assignment policy to calculate resource utilization, and then link the assignment policy to your scheduling
policy. To start resource utilization calculation, on the Salesforce Scheduler Settings page, enable Appointment Distribution, and then
Aggregate Resource Use.
Note: Resource utilization calculation is a resource-intensive and time-consuming process. A separate setting to control utilization
calculation enables you to turn it off whenever other assignment methods become available in the future.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Scheduler Help: Appointment Distribution (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create and Update Appointments Through New Apex Methods

Salesforce Scheduler developers can now easily create and update appointments without prerequisites such as remote site settings for
using APIs. The new Apex methods use POST and PATCH requests on the Service Appointments Connect API to create and update
appointments.
enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Scheduler Developer Guide: LxScheduler Namespace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
70
Other Changes to Salesforce Scheduler

Learn about other small but important improvements to Salesforce Scheduler.
Where: These changes apply to Salesforce Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Salesforce Scheduler
enabled.
Why: We added more resources for Salesforce Scheduler developers.
Track requests from external systems using correlation ID
Use the new correlationId parameter in the getAppointmentCandidates and getAppointmentSlots REST
APIs and the available-territory-slots Connect API to pass custom information to the ServiceResourceScheduleHandler
Apex interface. For example, you can use the correlation ID to identify the app, website, or external system that calls the
ServiceResourceScheduleHandler interface implementation. If you don’t pass a custom value, a random identifier is passed. The
Correlation ID attribute is also available in the Select Service Resource and Select Service Appointment Time screen components in
Salesforce Scheduler flows.
Make more API calls with the increased Connect API request limit
We increased the maximum number of per user, per hour requests to the Salesforce Scheduler Connect APIs to 10,000. With the
increased request limit, Salesforce Scheduler Connect APIs are better equipped to handle large number of requests. For example, if
you use APIs for guest user appointments, the number of incoming requests from the integration user can be large.
Make the most of the optimized Inbound New Guest Appointment flow
We optimized the Save Appointment action in the Inbound New Guest Appointment flow. The flow now works with the
ServiceResourceScheduleHandler Apex interface implementation. You can now check external calendars for availability of service
resources for guest user appointments.
Edit the Inbound New Guest Appointment flow in Flow Builder. Delete the Create Lead node, and then connect the Decision and
Assignment nodes directly to the Save Appointment action node. Passing the Lead object, instead of lead records, to the Save
Appointment action node ensures a complete rollback when something goes wrong during the guest appointment scheduling
process. Previously, the appointment record was rolled back, but the lead record that was created during the process remained in
the system, resulting in duplicate leads.
71
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Search
Enjoy granular flow security in Experience Cloud sites

In new orgs beginning in Winter ’22, you can’t grant the Run Flows permission to guest users in Experience Cloud sites. Instead, you
can grant them access to specific flows by enabling restricted access for those flows and then adding them to the guest user profile.
SEE ALSO:
Changed Connect REST API Request Bodies
Salesforce Scheduler Developer Guide: Salesforce Scheduler Business APIs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Make the Most of the Improved Salesforce Scheduler Documentation

Check out the new Salesforce Scheduler Developer Guide that brings all Salesforce Scheduler developer resources to one place. The Build
Custom Appointment Booking Experiences Using Salesforce Scheduler APIs topic shows how to the Salesforce Scheduler APIs to build
a custom scheduling app. You can use the app to schedule and modify appointments including anonymous and multi-resource
appointments. For easy access and navigation, we moved the Salesforce Scheduler help topics from the Extend Salesforce with Clicks,
Not Code guide to a standalone Salesforce Scheduler Help. And, we added useful information about flow screen component attributes to
the help.
enabled.
Search
Search brings intelligence and efficiency to users who are looking for relevant information in their Salesforce org. Users in Lightning
Experience get the added benefits of AI-powered Einstein Search. The more users engage with Einstein Search, the more likely Einstein
returns the most useful search results.
IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Search
All features of Einstein Search are now on by default at no extra cost. Users gain a smarter search without giving up search features
that they rely on. Einstein Search delivers three main features. Personalization returns relevant search results based on a user’s activity.
Natural language search lets users type common words and phrases in their queries to filter search results. And the actionable UI
lets your users accomplish tasks right from the search box, such as logging a case or creating a contact.
The following objects are now searchable.
Einstein Search
All features of Einstein Search are now on by default at no extra cost. Users gain a smarter search without giving up search features that
they rely on. Einstein Search delivers three main features. Personalization returns relevant search results based on a user’s activity. Natural
language search lets users type common words and phrases in their queries to filter search results. And the actionable UI lets your users
accomplish tasks right from the search box, such as logging a case or creating a contact.
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem. Represented exclusively by Greenlight.
72
IN THIS SECTION:
Welcome to Einstein Search: Now On by Default
Einstein Search is at your service. It’s enabled by default at no extra cost. Users can search just like they’re used to. Nothing’s going
away with Einstein Search, but search is getting smarter. Einstein Search adds personalized search results, record previews from the
search box, and natural language searches.
Take Control of Which Objects Users See in Search (Beta)
You can fine-tune the search scope so that the right objects are searched across your Salesforce org. The search scope is the set of
objects that Einstein Search looks at to deliver search results. Choose which objects Einstein Search always includes in instant and
top search results for any new or existing user profiles. The objects that you select are included with the objects that Einstein Search
determines based on the activity of each individual user. Together these objects are searched from the moment a user clicks in the
global search box.
Assist Your Agents and Customers to Find Knowledge Articles (Pilot)
Einstein Search for Knowledge is now powered by AI to get service agents and customers the most relevant knowledge articles. Try
it by signing up for the Einstein Search for Knowledge pilot.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Release Notes
Welcome to Einstein Search: Now On by Default

Einstein Search is at your service. It’s enabled by default at no extra cost. Users can search just like they’re used to. Nothing’s going away
with Einstein Search, but search is getting smarter. Einstein Search adds personalized search results, record previews from the search
box, and natural language searches.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce Mobile app in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Note: Einstein Search uses global predictive models to provide meaningful search results. For more information, review Einstein
Global Models and Data Usage.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Search: Work Faster and Smarter (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Take Control of Which Objects Users See in Search (Beta)

You can fine-tune the search scope so that the right objects are searched across your Salesforce org. The search scope is the set of objects
that Einstein Search looks at to deliver search results. Choose which objects Einstein Search always includes in instant and top search
results for any new or existing user profiles. The objects that you select are included with the objects that Einstein Search determines
based on the activity of each individual user. Together these objects are searched from the moment a user clicks in the global search
box.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce Mobile app in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Note: This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Search Results Objects, then select Search Results Objects. From this page,
assign objects to different user profiles, or use the default search profile.
73
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select Objects for Different User’s Search Results (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Einstein Search for Knowledge is now powered by AI to get service agents and customers the most relevant knowledge articles. Try it
by signing up for the Einstein Search for Knowledge pilot.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Essentials, Performance, Developer, and Unlimited editions of
Knowledge with Lightning Knowledge enabled.
Note: This feature isn’t generally available and is being piloted with certain Customers subject to additional terms and conditions.
It is not part of your purchased Services. This feature is subject to change, may be discontinued with no notice at any time in SFDC’s
sole discretion, and SFDC may never make this feature generally available. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of
generally available products and features. This feature is made available on an AS IS basis and use of this feature is at your sole risk.
Why: So what’s in the pilot? AI-driven search results that are fine-tuned to each user’s work and reflect the popularity of the articles.
74
• Search filters in the Knowledge sidebar that are easier to find, modify, and apply when viewing results. And you can reposition the
Filter button on either side of the search box (1).
• User-profile-based knowledge search results appear in a card view in the sidebar and global search box. Users see article details,
snippets, and highlighted search terms (2).
• A button to attach an article to a record with one click (3).
• Clearly labeled articles promoted by content managers. (4).

The following objects are now searchable.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce mobile app. Availability in Salesforce Classic is
noted in the table.
Object Product Area Found In

Budget Nonprofit Cloud Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions in Lightning Experience
Budget Allocation Nonprofit Cloud Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer

Business Brand Platform Services Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and

Developer editions in Lightning Experience
and Salesforce Classic
Change Request Service Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,

Professional, and Developer editions in
75

Customer Platform Services Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Financial Deal Interaction Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Fincl Deal Interaction Summary Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Gnrc Vst Key Performance Ind Consumer Goods Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Incident Service Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,

Interaction Sum Discussed Account Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Loyalty Pgm Group Mbr Rlnsp Loyalty Management Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Marketing App Extension Pardot All editions of Pardot in Lightning

Experience
Multiparty Info Auth Request Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Object State Definition Insurance for Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Object State Transition Insurance for Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Object State Value Insurance for Financial Services Cloud Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited
Omni Data Pack Vlocity Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer

Problem Service Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,

Promotion Segment Commerce Cloud (B2B Commerce) Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Provider Network Contract Health Cloud Enterprise and Unlimited editions in

Lightning Experience where Health Cloud
is enabled.
76
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Analytics

Provider Network Tier Health Cloud Enterprise and Unlimited editions in
Lightning Experience where Health Cloud
is enabled.
Seller Platform Services Cloud Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and

Voice Call Service Cloud Voice Performance, Enterprise, and Unlimited

Editions in Lightning Experience
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Searchable Fields by Object in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Searchable Fields by Object in Salesforce Classic (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Analytics
IN THIS SECTION:
Stay on top of changing business goals, data, and performance. Your dashboard’s gauge charts can now adjust dynamically as your
business evolves. With more field types for inline editing you can now update more data without leaving the report run page. You
get to focus on your current tasks while saving time and clicks.
Tableau CRM
Track your auto-installed Tableau CRM app usage on a redesigned setup page. Try the new Customer Insights app with unified sales
and service data. Manage mobile layouts more easily when you build dashboards. Evaluate how your models perform with new
validations in Einstein Discovery. Find insights in new ways with natural language search and more (Beta).

Stay on top of changing business goals, data, and performance. Your dashboard’s gauge charts can now adjust dynamically as your
business evolves. With more field types for inline editing you can now update more data without leaving the report run page. You get
to focus on your current tasks while saving time and clicks.
IN THIS SECTION:
Automatically Tune Your Dashboards to Your Business Goals with Dynamic Gauge Charts (Beta)
Dashboard gauge charts are awesome to track your performance and business goals, but your business is always changing. With
dynamic gauge charts, you’re no longer tied to static goals or performance levels. Build your gauge chart using report metrics and
field values that respond dynamically to your business. For example, a gauge chart can show how a subsidiary’s sales are doing
relative to your overall business.
77
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Reports and Dashboards
Update More Fields from the Report Run Page with Expanded Inline Editing (Beta)
Update your reports more efficiently without losing your place by clicking back and forth. Inline editing is now supported for date,
picklist, and lookup fields. When your report data gets out of date, you can edit it right on the report run page. For example, sales
reps can update opportunity statuses directly from their pipeline reports. Previously, inline editing was supported only for text and
numeric fields.
Automatically Tune Your Dashboards to Your Business Goals with Dynamic Gauge
Charts (Beta)
Dashboard gauge charts are awesome to track your performance and business goals, but your business is always changing. With dynamic
gauge charts, you’re no longer tied to static goals or performance levels. Build your gauge chart using report metrics and field values
that respond dynamically to your business. For example, a gauge chart can show how a subsidiary’s sales are doing relative to your
overall business.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Start by enabling dynamic gauge charts. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Reports and Dashboards, and then select
Reports and Dashboards Settings. Select Enable Dashboard Dynamic Gauge Charts (Lightning Experience only), and save your
changes. Next, make sure that your source report is set up for the data that you want to chart. Now, pop over to the dashboard builder
for your new or existing dashboard and add the gauge chart component .
In Standard mode, you can create a gauge chart with fixed values as you usually do. In Dynamic mode, you have dynamic control over
the chart measure, indicated by the pointer, and the chart target, or maximum value in the chart.
78
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Reports and Dashboards
For example, this chart measure is the annual contract value (ACV) for a company’s Singapore subsidiary ($150k). This value is taken from
the source Account report, which was filtered to show only the data for the Singapore subsidiary. The chart target is the ACV for the
overall business ($640k), which is taken from the ACV field on the Account record for the parent company. To be in the green (excellent)
range, the subsidiary must account for at least 50% of the company’s total ACV. The actual performance is in the red zone, so the team
in Singapore has work to do. Because the chart is dynamic, any improvements in the Singapore team’s performance are automatically
reflected in the chart.
For successful dynamic gauge charts, keep these points in mind:

• Your source reports must be set up with the groupings, metrics, and filters that you want to reflect in the gauge charts.
• The target segment values for a dynamic gauge chart are always percentages. (For standard gauge charts, the segment ranges are
fixed numeric values.)
Update More Fields from the Report Run Page with Expanded Inline Editing (Beta)
Update your reports more efficiently without losing your place by clicking back and forth. Inline editing is now supported for date, picklist,
and lookup fields. When your report data gets out of date, you can edit it right on the report run page. For example, sales reps can update
opportunity statuses directly from their pipeline reports. Previously, inline editing was supported only for text and numeric fields.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Reports and Dashboards, and then select Reports and Dashboards Settings.
Select Enable Inline Editing in Reports (Lightning Experience only), and save your changes.
Now open a report and hover over the field that you want to edit. If you see a pencil icon, click it, modify the value, and save. The field
value is updated on the report and in the source record, and the report reruns automatically.
79
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Tableau CRM
A lock icon means that the field isn’t available for inline editing.
Inline editing isn’t supported for these fields and field types.
• Task and event object fields
• Owner fields
• System fields, such as Record ID and Created Date
• Compound fields, including name and address fields
• Encrypted text fields
• Formula fields
• Standard fields of type auto number, rollup summary, record type, master-detail, long text area, rich text, and hierarchy
• Other fields where editing isn’t permitted due to restrictions in the page layout or record type
Tableau CRM
Track your auto-installed Tableau CRM app usage on a redesigned setup page. Try the new Customer Insights app with unified sales
and service data. Manage mobile layouts more easily when you build dashboards. Evaluate how your models perform with new validations
in Einstein Discovery. Find insights in new ways with natural language search and more (Beta).
IN THIS SECTION:
Analytics Data Integration
Build bigger recipes with tools for moving and viewing hundreds of nodes simultaneously. Control the data in recipes with Boolean
filter logic, and roll up your hierarchical data for analysis.
Analytics Prebuilt Templates and Apps
The new Customer Insights app brings together Sales and Service analytics and provides a new architecture that makes it a snap to
customize dashboards. Automatically install apps, starting with the Customer Insights app. Try the new Analytics for Corporate and
Investment Banking app to get insights on your commercial and investment banking deals.
Analytics App Building
Create dashboard layouts more easily for desktop and mobile users, and add custom visualizations to dashboard charts. Skip the
data prep and explore Salesforce CDP data with Tableau CRM. Bring your Snowflake data into Tableau CRM templates using live
datasets.
80
Einstein Discovery
Operationalize externally built models that you easily upload and deploy into Salesforce. Translate unstructured data into valuable
insights with sentiment analysis. Get predictive and prescriptive intelligence directly in your automated business processes.
Build connections to sync pipeline data more easily.
New search pages on Tableau CRM Home provide options for exploration to help you find insights faster. With intelligent, self-service
analytics, Ask Data for Salesforce guides you in answering your data questions.
Analytics Mobile Apps
Organize your favorite insights with Collections in both Tableau CRM for iOS and Android. Plus, work faster with one-click actions in
Tableau CRM for iOS, and see images in tables in Tableau CRM for Android.
Analytics Data Integration

Build bigger recipes with tools for moving and viewing hundreds of nodes simultaneously. Control the data in recipes with Boolean filter
logic, and roll up your hierarchical data for analysis.
IN THIS SECTION:
Audit Usage Statistics for Auto-Installed Apps
Want to see how your apps impact org limits for API calls and dataset row storage? Now you can monitor your Auto-Installed Tableau
CRM apps from the Auto-Installed Apps Setup page. Track each app’s average API calls per hour and the number of dataset rows
used per day.
Be a Connector Trailblazer with New and Improved Connector Versions
It’s time to make the switch. The remote connectors that you use to sync data to Tableau CRM have new versions. Customers new
to Tableau CRM after August 1, 2021 use only the new connector versions, while customers prior to August 1 can choose when to
upgrade. If you choose to be an early adopter, you can switch over to the new connector versions and try them out now. During
the Spring ’22 release, we plan to auto-switch customers to the new connector version when it reaches or exceeds the level of
functionality and performance of the legacy connector version. We plan to finish the auto-switching during the Summer ’22 release.
Output Your Tableau CRM Data to Amazon S3 (Generally Available)
Output connectors now let you push your data from Tableau CRM into Amazon S3 when you use Data Prep. You designed powerful
recipes that combine data from multiple sources, add formula fields, and transform data into datasets tailored to your business
needs. With output connectors and Data Prep, datasets are liberated from Tableau CRM and written as one or more .csv files for you
to improve your overall business processes with better data. For example, output processed and transformed customer service data
for individual agents to understand what they could be doing to improve customer satisfaction.
Access Salesforce Data Without Data Sync Using Direct Data for Recipes (Generally Available)
Recipes can now access data in more Salesforce objects, not just the connected objects that you sync. When using direct data for
recipes, the recipe pulls the latest data directly from the Salesforce object, bypassing the data sync step. Direct data is optimized for
occasional, small data pulls, so use it when data sync isn’t available or when the Salesforce object is used as the source for only one
recipe.
We added features to speed up data prep in large recipes. Now you can auto-hide unused columns and temporarily disable data
preview for faster page loads. You can also select multiple nodes to rearrange or delete them as a group, clearing up space for more
recipe building.
81
Navigate Data Prep with Accessible Keyboard Shortcuts

Recipe building in data prep is now accessible to more users thanks to keyboard navigation. You can navigate between nodes and
the menu, undo and redo actions, and even add input data, all through keystrokes.
Get more granular with data prep recipe filters to include only the rows you want. Define custom filter logic with parentheses and
the AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators, such as (1 AND 2) OR 3. Previously, you filtered data that met all specified conditions. For
example, now you can focus on accounts with contracts expiring this year that are currently high value, or low value but with many
employees.
Bucket Smarter with Fuzzy Match for Data Prep Bucketing
You can now use typographic fuzzy matching in your Data Prep recipe buckets to automatically handle spelling variations. Spelling
differences in dimension data can split rows into separate buckets when they really belong in the same bucket. Differences in
capitalization, pluralization, abbreviations, and regional variations such as behavior and behaviour create ambiguity about how to
group the data. If you enable fuzzy matching on a text column, Einstein ignores capitalization so that variations such as flavor, Flavor,
flavour, and flavors all can belong in the same bucket.
Identifying hidden relationships across big data using cluster analysis is easier with more options to find the optimal number of
cluster transformation groupings. You can now define the number of clusters, allow the clustering algorithm to determine the
optimal number, or guide the algorithm with a base cluster number. For example, guide the cluster transformation to use the
optimum cluster number from a base of 10. The algorithm evaluates all options 25% above and below your base, so 7–13, to find
the best data organization where data groupings are most like each other. Previously, you set the number of clusters, so you manually
ran the cluster transformation and evaluated data grouping alikeness for each cluster count from 7 to 13. You can also compare
between differently scaled data more easily by rescaling each column’s data values from 0 through 1.
Get Unselected Values Included in Pivot Output
Leave no data behind when you pivot. Your values that aren’t picked are now automatically included in a column labeled Other
when you pivot with the Data Prep aggregate node. For example, you can group columns by opportunity type, select your most
important types, and let the rest be grouped in the Other column. Previously, these rows were dropped from the output.
Data Prep recipes have leveled up to handle your multilevel data. You can now apply aggregation to your hierarchical data to sum
values at each level of the relationship, instead of calculating manually. For example, you can roll up revenues, assets, or liabilities
for companies and their subsidiaries. Or, you can roll salesperson data up the management chain to see aggregates by team, region,
area, and beyond. You can also apply percentage splits to allocate portions to different parents such as commission among members
of the sales team.
Output Fully Qualified Names in .csv Headers
Interpreting the output .csv from a Tableau CRM recipe is easier with the option to include a column’s fully qualified name in the
.csv header. The fully qualified name has more information about the source object to help you understand the data lineage, usually
in the format [ObjectName].[APIName]. For example, the .csv header uses the fully qualified name Account.BillingCity instead of the
column label BillingCity. Previously, only the column label was included in the .csv header, which made interpretation challenging
if there were duplicate or similar column labels.
Audit Usage Statistics for Auto-Installed Apps

Want to see how your apps impact org limits for API calls and dataset row storage? Now you can monitor your Auto-Installed Tableau
CRM apps from the Auto-Installed Apps Setup page. Track each app’s average API calls per hour and the number of dataset rows used
per day.
Where: This change applies to Tableau CRM in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. Tableau CRM is available in Developer Edition
and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
82
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Auto-Installed Apps, and then select Auto-Installed Apps. Usage statistics
for all embedded apps in the org are visible on the main page.
To view individual app usage statistics as charts, select an app and then click the Usage tab.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor, Update, and Delete Auto-Installed Apps (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Tableau CRM Limits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Be a Connector Trailblazer with New and Improved Connector Versions

It’s time to make the switch. The remote connectors that you use to sync data to Tableau CRM have new versions. Customers new to
Tableau CRM after August 1, 2021 use only the new connector versions, while customers prior to August 1 can choose when to upgrade.
If you choose to be an early adopter, you can switch over to the new connector versions and try them out now. During the Spring ’22
release, we plan to auto-switch customers to the new connector version when it reaches or exceeds the level of functionality and
performance of the legacy connector version. We plan to finish the auto-switching during the Summer ’22 release.
Why: We’re constantly working to improve connectors, and these new connector versions give us the framework to make changes
more easily. Many of the new connector versions are already faster or have more options.
How: Your existing connections created with one of these connectors stay on the legacy version until you upgrade using the connector’s
legacy toggle.
83
Connector Notes
Amazon Redshift Connector The new version doesn’t use Amazon S3. The Master Symmetric
Key, AWS Secret Access Key, AWS Access Key ID, and S3 Bucket
Name settings aren’t used.
Amazon S3 Connector The new version supports connecting to objects encrypted with
customer master keys stored in the AWS Key Management Service
or a customer-generated key in the 256-bit AES format.
AWS RDS Aurora MySQL Connector
AWS RDS Aurora PostgresSQL Connector
AWS RDS MariaDB Connector
AWS RDS MySQL Connector
AWS RDS PostgreSQL Connector
AWS RDS SQL Server Connector
Google BigQuery Legacy SQL Connector BigQuery Storage Read API is now supported, which can increase
throughput. Set the new version’s Use Storage API property to true
to use BigQuery Storage API. The new version doesn’t use the
staging environment.
Google BigQuery Standard SQL Connector BigQuery Storage Read API is now supported, which can increase
throughput. Set the new version’s Use Storage API property to true
to use BigQuery Storage API. The new version doesn’t use the
staging environment.
Heroku Postgres Connector
Microsoft Azure SQL Database Connector
Microsoft Synapse Analytics Connector
NetSuite Connector The new version names objects differently than the legacy version.
Update your recipes and dataflows with the new object names
after upgrading.
Salesforce External Connector
Salesforce Marketing Cloud Contacts OAuth 2.0 Connector The new version makes more Marketing Cloud data accessible
through expanded Data Extension support.
Snowflake Connector
Zendesk Connector
To upgrade, turn off legacy mode, and complete the new version configuration. In Data Manager, on the Connect tab, select Connect
to Data. Then, select the connection’s menu, and click Edit Connection.
84
Deselect Use legacy connector.
Save and validate the connector, and then test your connection. When you create a connection from this group, we recommend that
you use the new connector version to avoid another upgrade in the future. If your tests with the new version aren’t successful, reselect
Use legacy connector.
Your existing connections created with one of these connectors stay on the legacy version until you manually migrate to the new version.
Connector Notes
Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 Connector The new version supports custom objects. Using core reporting
API v4.0 provides additional Google Analytics options.
Marketo Connector There are two connector options, Marketo Connector and Marketo
Legacy Connector, that reflect the new or legacy version. These
connectors don‘t use the legacy connector toggle. The new
connector version supports filtering on select objects.
Oracle Eloqua Connector The new version currently uses different field names, includes more
objects than the legacy version and doesn’t yet support the Activity
object.
SAP HANA Connector There are two connector options, SAP HANA Cloud Connector and
SAP HANA Connector, reflecting the new or legacy version. These
connectors don’t use the legacy connector toggle. The new
connector version supports filtering, uses different connection
properties, and is JDBC-based.
85
To migrate, create a connection with the connector mirroring the settings of your legacy connection and any new required properties.
Then, update your recipes and dataflows to use the external objects from the new connection. Keep the legacy version of the connection
for troubleshooting. When you create a connection from the manually migrated group, it always uses the new version.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: New Connector Version Upgrades and Considerations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Output Your Tableau CRM Data to Amazon S3 (Generally Available)

Output connectors now let you push your data from Tableau CRM into Amazon S3 when you use Data Prep. You designed powerful
recipes that combine data from multiple sources, add formula fields, and transform data into datasets tailored to your business needs.
With output connectors and Data Prep, datasets are liberated from Tableau CRM and written as one or more .csv files for you to improve
your overall business processes with better data. For example, output processed and transformed customer service data for individual
agents to understand what they could be doing to improve customer satisfaction.
How: In Setup, under Analytics, enable the Amazon S3 output connection. Then, create the output connection to Amazon S3 from the
Connect section of the Tableau CRM Data Manager, using the Output Connections tab.
Build out your Data Prep recipe and add an Output node. Select to write to the Output connection and choose the Amazon S3 connection
name. In this example, the dataset is saved to the MonthlyServiceData Amazon S3 connection.
Save the recipe. When the recipe runs, Tableau CRM creates a folder in the directory you chose when you created the connection, with
a name based on the folder path. For example, if you chose the folder path ...support/servicedata, a new folder servicedata
is created at the path ...support/servicedata/servicedata. The new folder contains the recipe outcome file
86
servicedata_0.csv, a schema.json metadata file, and a _SUCCESS file. When you run the recipe again, the files previously generated are
deleted and the new version of the files are written.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Amazon S3 Output Connection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Access Salesforce Data Without Data Sync Using Direct Data for Recipes (Generally Available)
Recipes can now access data in more Salesforce objects, not just the connected objects that you sync. When using direct data for recipes,
the recipe pulls the latest data directly from the Salesforce object, bypassing the data sync step. Direct data is optimized for occasional,
small data pulls, so use it when data sync isn’t available or when the Salesforce object is used as the source for only one recipe.
How: When you add an input node to a recipe, you can now select direct data in addition to datasets and connected objects.
Each object on the Add Input Data page appears with an icon that denotes whether the object is a connected object ( ), dataset
( ), or direct data ( ). Salesforce objects that aren’t connected appear as direct data.
Add a direct data input node filter that limits the data pulled into the recipe.
87
If you add a filtered direct data object to data sync later, the direct data input node’s filter is converted automatically to a standalone
filter node.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pull Data Directly into Recipes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

We added features to speed up data prep in large recipes. Now you can auto-hide unused columns and temporarily disable data preview
for faster page loads. You can also select multiple nodes to rearrange or delete them as a group, clearing up space for more recipe
building.
How: To speed up data preview, start by automatically hiding all columns that aren’t used by recipe nodes. Click the auto-hide button
on any node.
If data preview is still delayed, switch off data preview. You can always turn it back on when you want to see your progress.
88
Manage multiple nodes on the data prep graph by dragging your mouse to select as many nodes as you want. Drag the group of nodes
around, or delete them all at once.
Navigate Data Prep with Accessible Keyboard Shortcuts

Recipe building in data prep is now accessible to more users thanks to keyboard navigation. You can navigate between nodes and the
menu, undo and redo actions, and even add input data, all through keystrokes.
How: To open the menu of keys and shortcuts from data prep, press Ctrl+/ (Windows) or Cmd+/ (macOS). Press Tab to start the keyboard
navigation and cycle between node fields. Move between nodes and menu options with the arrow keys, and press Enter (Windows) or
Return (macOS) to open menus and select. For example, to join the Account Transformation node to the Activity Filter node, press Tab
to select the upper-left node on the graph and then press Right Arrow three times to the Add icon.
89
Press Enter to open the menu, and Right Arrow to open the Connect menu (1). Press Down Arrow to connect to the Account Transform
node. Press Enter to confirm.
Press Down Arrow to connect with Join, and press Enter.
90
Configure the Join node, navigating with Tab and the arrow keys, and press Enter on the Apply button. With keys not clicks or code, the
Join node is added to your recipe.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Keyboard Shortcuts for Building Data Prep Recipes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get more granular with data prep recipe filters to include only the rows you want. Define custom filter logic with parentheses and the
AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators, such as (1 AND 2) OR 3. Previously, you filtered data that met all specified conditions. For example,
now you can focus on accounts with contracts expiring this year that are currently high value, or low value but with many employees.
How: After you add a filter node to your data prep recipe, create the individual components of the filter. This example adds filters for
the contract end date this year, annual revenue greater than 1 million, annual revenue less than or equal to 1 million, and employees
greater than 50,000.
91
Add the filter logic from the menu button ( ).
The default AND logic is shown, and each filter component is assigned a number. To edit the logic, click the pencil icon.
92
Build the filter logic with parentheses and the AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators. For our example, we want the contract date AND
either the revenue greater than 1 million OR less than 1 million AND employees over 50,000.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Filter Node: Filter Rows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Bucket Smarter with Fuzzy Match for Data Prep Bucketing

You can now use typographic fuzzy matching in your Data Prep recipe buckets to automatically handle spelling variations. Spelling
differences in dimension data can split rows into separate buckets when they really belong in the same bucket. Differences in capitalization,
pluralization, abbreviations, and regional variations such as behavior and behaviour create ambiguity about how to group the data. If
you enable fuzzy matching on a text column, Einstein ignores capitalization so that variations such as flavor, Flavor, flavour, and flavors
all can belong in the same bucket.
How: In a Data Prep recipe, select a dimension, add a Transform node, choose bucketing, and select Apply Smart Bucketing (1).
93
To change the edit distance, use the Distance Threshold slider (2). Einstein uses the Levenshtein algorithm for fuzzy matching. The default
edit distance is set to 1, which means that a single-character edit is allowed for text matching. In the flavors example, the variation
flavored belongs in a separate bucket because its edit distance is 2. By default, differences in uppercase and lowercase characters are
ignored.

Identifying hidden relationships across big data using cluster analysis is easier with more options to find the optimal number of cluster
transformation groupings. You can now define the number of clusters, allow the clustering algorithm to determine the optimal number,
or guide the algorithm with a base cluster number. For example, guide the cluster transformation to use the optimum cluster number
from a base of 10. The algorithm evaluates all options 25% above and below your base, so 7–13, to find the best data organization where
data groupings are most like each other. Previously, you set the number of clusters, so you manually ran the cluster transformation and
evaluated data grouping alikeness for each cluster count from 7 to 13. You can also compare between differently scaled data more easily
by rescaling each column’s data values from 0 through 1.
How: When you add a cluster transformation to a recipe, enter a number of clusters as a starting point, and then select to use the optimal
number of clusters.
94
Apply the transformation, and run the recipe. For the best data organization, the cluster transformation evaluates cluster numbers 25%
above and below your starting point. For example, if you enter 20, the transformation evaluates scenarios from 15 through 25 and shows
data for the optimum number of clusters in that range.
If you select to find the optimal number of clusters without entering a number of clusters, the transformation evaluates each clustering
scenario 2–50. This evaluation takes more time than if you enter a starting number of clusters, but it can reveal a data relationship that
you weren’t aware of.
To switch all column values to a similar scale to help comparisons, select Min-Max scaling (1) and whether to create a column for these
converted values (2). The transformation converts data in each selected cluster column to values from 0 through 1 relative to each other.
95
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Cluster Transformation: Segment Your Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Unselected Values Included in Pivot Output

Leave no data behind when you pivot. Your values that aren’t picked are now automatically included in a column labeled Other when
you pivot with the Data Prep aggregate node. For example, you can group columns by opportunity type, select your most important
types, and let the rest be grouped in the Other column. Previously, these rows were dropped from the output.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Aggregate Node: Roll Up Data to a Higher Level (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
96

Data Prep recipes have leveled up to handle your multilevel data. You can now apply aggregation to your hierarchical data to sum values
at each level of the relationship, instead of calculating manually. For example, you can roll up revenues, assets, or liabilities for companies
and their subsidiaries. Or, you can roll salesperson data up the management chain to see aggregates by team, region, area, and beyond.
You can also apply percentage splits to allocate portions to different parents such as commission among members of the sales team.
How: To aggregate across multilevel data, select Hierarchical Aggregation (1) in your Data Prep recipe aggregate node. Define your
aggregates (2), such as the sum of a measure or count of rows. Specify the record ID (3) and the parent ID (4) columns. Optionally, select
the percentage column (5) to multiply the aggregate by if you want to apply a percentage split.
97
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Aggregate Node: Hierarchical Aggregation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Output Fully Qualified Names in .csv Headers

Interpreting the output .csv from a Tableau CRM recipe is easier with the option to include a column’s fully qualified name in the .csv
header. The fully qualified name has more information about the source object to help you understand the data lineage, usually in the
format [ObjectName].[APIName]. For example, the .csv header uses the fully qualified name Account.BillingCity instead of the column
label BillingCity. Previously, only the column label was included in the .csv header, which made interpretation challenging if there were
duplicate or similar column labels.
How: When you add an output node to a recipe and choose to output to CSV, you can now select to include the fully qualified name.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Recipe Output to .csv (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Analytics Prebuilt Templates and Apps

The new Customer Insights app brings together Sales and Service analytics and provides a new architecture that makes it a snap to
customize dashboards. Automatically install apps, starting with the Customer Insights app. Try the new Analytics for Corporate and
Investment Banking app to get insights on your commercial and investment banking deals.
98
IN THIS SECTION:
Unify Sales and Service Analytics in the Customer Insights App
The new Customer Insights app brings together analysis of Sales and Service clouds in a unified, easy-to-customize app. Not only
can you access your Sales and Service data from one place, but it’s easier to understand the interactions between them. In addition,
it’s now a snap to customize the dashboard. Use the app components as building blocks to create the perfect dashboard for your
environment. You can mix out-of-the-box components with your own, or create a dashboard by copying and pasting components.
Visualize Your Pipeline Progression in the Revenue Operations App
The new Sankey diagram in the Revenue Operations Pipeline Progression dashboard is a game changer when it comes to visualizing
the state of your pipeline. The widths of the bands are linearly proportional to growth or loss, so it’s easy to see the state of your
pipeline at a glance. You can see how your opportunities have progressed or regressed between two points in time. You can also
use this diagram to understand which stage an opportunity came from and how it ended up. For example, which opportunities
resulted in closed wins during a quarter, and did the closed wins derive from negotiations or qualifications?
Bring the Power of Analytics to Your Corporate and Investment Banking Deals
The new Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app analyzes your data and leverages the security of your Financial Services
cloud. New embedded dashboards provide actionable insights about deal progressions, pipelines, and client interactions. The Home
Embedded dashboard provides pipeline metrics, account insights, interaction summaries (call reports), and revenues for a given
account. Get insights about deals in an account space, client interactions, call reports, and deal progressions in the Account Embedded
dashboard. Use the Deal Embedded dashboard to investigate deal progression in greater depth. You can answer questions such as
which interactions have moved a deal forward and which interactions have a positive impact.
Kick-Start Your Customer Insights App Installations
Starting with the Customer Insights app, Salesforce admins can automatically install prebuilt apps that are applicable to your org
when activating Tableau CRM. The auto-install option configures the correct settings for your environment, avoiding common
installation errors and making the app immediately available to users in your org. This option is enabled by default in new activations
of Tableau CRM and you can manually enable it for an existing org.
Use Improved Keyboard Navigation for the Prebuilt Apps Wizard and Template Gallery
The Prebuilt Apps Wizard and Template Gallery is now more accessible for all members of the Salesforce community. We’ve enabled
keyboard navigation, making it easier for customers to use Tableau CRM. This feature is enabled by default.
SEE ALSO:
Rebate Analytics
Unify Sales and Service Analytics in the Customer Insights App

The new Customer Insights app brings together analysis of Sales and Service clouds in a unified, easy-to-customize app. Not only can
you access your Sales and Service data from one place, but it’s easier to understand the interactions between them. In addition, it’s now
a snap to customize the dashboard. Use the app components as building blocks to create the perfect dashboard for your environment.
You can mix out-of-the-box components with your own, or create a dashboard by copying and pasting components.
Who: The template is available for Tableau CRM Growth and Tableau CRM Plus users.
How: For existing Tableau CRM activations, go to Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and select App. Find and select Customer
Insights, and then follow the instructions in the wizard to create your app.
99
For new activations of Tableau CRM, the app is auto-installed by default. Salesforce performs checks to ensure that you have the correct
objects, licenses, permissions, and environment to run the app. It installs it if all the criteria are met. You can view the status of your
auto-installed apps by going to Setup > Feature Settings > Analytics > Analytics > Auto-Installed Apps.
Visualize Your Pipeline Progression in the Revenue Operations App

The new Sankey diagram in the Revenue Operations Pipeline Progression dashboard is a game changer when it comes to visualizing
the state of your pipeline. The widths of the bands are linearly proportional to growth or loss, so it’s easy to see the state of your pipeline
at a glance. You can see how your opportunities have progressed or regressed between two points in time. You can also use this diagram
to understand which stage an opportunity came from and how it ended up. For example, which opportunities resulted in closed wins
during a quarter, and did the closed wins derive from negotiations or qualifications?
How: In Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and select App. Find and select Revenue Operations Analytics, and then follow
the instructions in the wizard to create your app.
If you have an existing Revenue Operations Analytics app, upgrade it to view the new functionality. To upgrade your app, click the New
version available link in the app’s home page, and then follow the wizard’s instructions. Upgrading an app removes any customizations.
Bring the Power of Analytics to Your Corporate and Investment Banking Deals
The new Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app analyzes your data and leverages the security of your Financial Services
cloud. New embedded dashboards provide actionable insights about deal progressions, pipelines, and client interactions. The Home
Embedded dashboard provides pipeline metrics, account insights, interaction summaries (call reports), and revenues for a given account.
Get insights about deals in an account space, client interactions, call reports, and deal progressions in the Account Embedded dashboard.
Use the Deal Embedded dashboard to investigate deal progression in greater depth. You can answer questions such as which interactions
have moved a deal forward and which interactions have a positive impact.
100
Who: The Tableau CRM for Communications app is only for Corporate and Investment Banking cloud customers.
How: In Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create and select App. Find and select Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking
and then follow the instructions in the wizard to create your app.
Kick-Start Your Customer Insights App Installations

Starting with the Customer Insights app, Salesforce admins can automatically install prebuilt apps that are applicable to your org when
activating Tableau CRM. The auto-install option configures the correct settings for your environment, avoiding common installation
errors and making the app immediately available to users in your org. This option is enabled by default in new activations of Tableau
CRM and you can manually enable it for an existing org.
How: For orgs with Tableau CRM already enabled, go to Setup > Feature Settings > Analytics > Analytics > Settings and select
Enable Auto Installation of Apps. Salesforce performs checks to ensure that you have the correct objects, licenses, permissions, and
environment to run the app. It installs it if all the criteria are met. You can view the status of your auto-installed apps by going to Setup
> Feature Settings > Analytics > Analytics > Auto-Installed Apps.
Use Improved Keyboard Navigation for the Prebuilt Apps Wizard and Template Gallery
The Prebuilt Apps Wizard and Template Gallery is now more accessible for all members of the Salesforce community. We’ve enabled
keyboard navigation, making it easier for customers to use Tableau CRM. This feature is enabled by default.
101
How: Use the tab key to move through elements on the page. You can use the Space or Enter key to select the element highlighted.
Analytics App Building

Create dashboard layouts more easily for desktop and mobile users, and add custom visualizations to dashboard charts. Skip the data
prep and explore Salesforce CDP data with Tableau CRM. Bring your Snowflake data into Tableau CRM templates using live datasets.
IN THIS SECTION:
It just got easier to give your on-the-go dashboard users the best layout for their smaller screens. Now you can create and see layouts
in more ways as you build dashboards.
Review more information when you hover over a visualization that illustrates key aspects of your business. In addition to custom
text and legend, a chart widget’s tooltip can now include a visualization. Add a chart, table, or a component that houses multiple
widgets to the tooltip so that you can see related details quickly while keeping your dashboard clutter-free.
Import Snowflake Data to Apps Using Live Datasets in Templates
The Tableau CRM template framework now supports the Snowflake Direct Connector. Templated apps with Snowflake connectors
import live data from Snowflake. These templated apps provide real-time metrics in dashboards and lenses using queries based on
the Snowflake data.
Jump-Start Templated App Development with Dashboard Components
Manage and reuse groups of widgets across multiple dashboards with dashboard components in Tableau CRM templates. With
templated apps that use dashboard components, you can reuse dashboard functionality throughout your app.
Control Where Null Values Appear in Charts and Tables
When you sort a chart or table by a field in descending order, the field’s null values appear first by default. That order isn’t always
helpful when tracking metrics. Now set whether a field’s null value records appear first or last in your charts and tables without
editing SAQL queries or creating formula columns.
Give Your Users Custom Functionality in Tableau CRM Dashboards with Lightning Web Components (Beta)
Build richer and more customized dashboards with the power of Lightning Web Components. Lightning Web Components allow
you to create customized reusable extensions for use anywhere in Lightning Experience. Create your own charts, widgets, and even
Tableau data visualizations, and bring them directly into your dashboards. Now you can build a seamless experience between your
custom extensions and your Tableau CRM data.
Want actionable metrics for your Salesforce CDP data? With Tableau CRM Direct Data for Salesforce CDP, you can run deep explorations
on your unified customer data source without loading data or preparing it in Tableau CRM first. After setting up a live connection
to Salesforce CDP, you can run queries on Salesforce CDP data associated with the connection in real time. You can also build
dashboard charts and tables based on the queries that you run on this data.
SQL goes prime time. With its Generally Available debut, we’ve added the ability to write windowing functions and subqueries, and
include boolean expressions in SELECT statements. You can now use the FETCH clause as an alternative to LIMIT.

It just got easier to give your on-the-go dashboard users the best layout for their smaller screens. Now you can create and see layouts
in more ways as you build dashboards.
102
How: Create layouts with fewer clicks right where you select and manage layouts.
Create layouts using content from your existing dashboard, or start from scratch.
See layouts when you save a dashboard (1). And you get notified when your dashboard is available on mobile but you haven’t yet created
a mobile layout (2).
103
Note: Dashboard properties are set to Available on mobile by default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Generate Unique Tableau CRM Dashboard Layouts for Different Devices (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)

Review more information when you hover over a visualization that illustrates key aspects of your business. In addition to custom text
and legend, a chart widget’s tooltip can now include a visualization. Add a chart, table, or a component that houses multiple widgets
to the tooltip so that you can see related details quickly while keeping your dashboard clutter-free.
Why: Let’s say your dashboard bar chart shows opportunities by industry. You can add a table in its tooltip that breaks down opportunities
by account type. Or you can show a donut chart in the tooltip that captures the distribution of opportunities across products. To include
these two views in the same tooltip, design a component with the chart and table, and then add it to the tooltip.
104
How: Consider this example, with the opportunities by industry chart selected in the dashboard designer.
105
Select Add visualization in the tooltip section of the widget properties panel (1). Specify the type of visualization to include in the
tooltip (2).
For a chart or table visualization, update its query to create the tooltip you want. Alternatively, to include a component visualization,
select an existing dashboard component or create one, and then select it as your tooltip visualization.
Note: By default, for chart and table tooltip visualization types, the initial selections and filters on the visualization match the ones
in the associated chart widget. And, when you hover over a chart’s grouping, that grouping is applied as a filter on the tooltip.
Verify that the tooltip appears correctly by clicking Preview, and then save your settings.
106
Import Snowflake Data to Apps Using Live Datasets in Templates

The Tableau CRM template framework now supports the Snowflake Direct Connector. Templated apps with Snowflake connectors
import live data from Snowflake. These templated apps provide real-time metrics in dashboards and lenses using queries based on the
Snowflake data.
How: Templatize a source app that uses a Snowflake Direct Connector. Templatizing creates a dataset entry in template-info.json
with a liveConnection attribute that specifies the connector name and the Snowflake source object. Before creating an app from
the template, a Snowflake Direct Connector must exist with a developer name that is an exact match of the connectionName in
the template.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Live Datasets in a Tableau CRM Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: When to Use Tableau CRM Direct Data for Snowflake (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Jump-Start Templated App Development with Dashboard Components

Manage and reuse groups of widgets across multiple dashboards with dashboard components in Tableau CRM templates. With templated
apps that use dashboard components, you can reuse dashboard functionality throughout your app.
107
How: Templatize a source app that contains your dashboard components, allowing each app created from your template to generate
unique component instances. Dashboard components are found in the components attribute of the template-info.json file.
They’re processed as other Tableau CRM assets in the template, meaning they can be conditionally created at runtime and altered with
template rules.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Edit template-info.json (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create and Manage Dashboards with Reusable Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Control Where Null Values Appear in Charts and Tables

When you sort a chart or table by a field in descending order, the field’s null values appear first by default. That order isn’t always helpful
when tracking metrics. Now set whether a field’s null value records appear first or last in your charts and tables without editing SAQL
queries or creating formula columns.
How: To order a field’s null values, go to the Data tab in explorer (1). From the field’s action menu, select Set Null Value Order (2).
Specify how you want null values to appear in the field (3). Click Set Null Value Order when done (4).
108
Give Your Users Custom Functionality in Tableau CRM Dashboards with Lightning Web Components
(Beta)
Build richer and more customized dashboards with the power of Lightning Web Components. Lightning Web Components allow you
to create customized reusable extensions for use anywhere in Lightning Experience. Create your own charts, widgets, and even Tableau
data visualizations, and bring them directly into your dashboards. Now you can build a seamless experience between your custom
extensions and your Tableau CRM data.
How: In Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, open the dashboard designer, and add a Component widget. Select the Lightning Components
tab, choose the component that you want to add to your dashboard, and then click Done.
If no custom Lightning Web Components are available, the component list is empty.
Use the widget properties to define the Component Attributes that your Lightning Web Component must have to function correctly.
Each component has different attributes that are defined by the component, like text fields, properties, Boolean options, URLs, and more.
Preview your changes, and save your dashboard.
109

Want actionable metrics for your Salesforce CDP data? With Tableau CRM Direct Data for Salesforce CDP, you can run deep explorations
on your unified customer data source without loading data or preparing it in Tableau CRM first. After setting up a live connection to
Salesforce CDP, you can run queries on Salesforce CDP data associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard
charts and tables based on the queries that you run on this data.
Who: Tableau CRM Direct Data for Salesforce CDP is available to users with a Salesforce CDP license.
Why: With Tableau CRM Direct Data for Salesforce CDP, you can analyze your customer data to identify the customers most likely to
churn. Or, create powerful visualizations that reveal purchasing patterns within various customer segments.
How: By default, Enable Analytics Direct Data for external data sources is turned on in the Analytics Settings page.
110
From the Connect tab of the Tableau CRM Data Manager, create a live connection using Salesforce CDP Direct Data Connector (Beta)
(1).
In the Data tab of the data manager, with Live Datasets selected, create a live dataset (2).
111
Select the connection and enable a Salesforce CDP source table that is available with the connection (3). Name the live dataset, and
then assign it to an Analytics app. Use the app to control which Salesforce users, roles, and groups have access to explore Salesforce
CDP data with the connection. When done, click Create Live Dataset.
To begin exploring, click the live dataset from the Datasets tab in Analytics Studio.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce CDP (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

SQL goes prime time. With its Generally Available debut, we’ve added the ability to write windowing functions and subqueries, and
include boolean expressions in SELECT statements. You can now use the FETCH clause as an alternative to LIMIT.
IN THIS SECTION:
Fast-Track Your Queries with SQL for Tableau CRM (Generally Available)
SQL for Tableau CRM is a query language that lets you execute queries against your Tableau CRM datasets. Structured Query Language
(SQL) is typically used for working with data stored in relational databases. Tableau CRM uses the ANSI SQL interface to access Tableau
CRM’s fast in-memory data store. It has native support of Salesforce features used in Tableau CRM, including sharing inheritance and
custom fiscal calendars.
Refine Aggregations with Window Functions
A window function lets you perform calculations on a selection—or "window"—of rows. You can think of them as powerful aggregate
functions. With count() and sum(), for example, your results are grouped into a single row. When you use a window function,
you can perform additional operations on row results, such as ranking and calculating totals.
112
Build Complex, Maintainable Queries with Subqueries

Sometimes, your queries have a lot to say: join these datasets, filter on a subset, then operate on a further subdivision. Streamline
your SQL queries with subqueries to isolate and nest each part of a statement. By using subqueries, your query is easier to read and
maintain in the long run.
Return True or False As Query Results with Boolean Expressions in Select Statements
Is SQL for Tableau CRM better than ever with boolean expressions in SELECT statements? True. Previously, boolean expressions
were available in WHERE statements only. When you include a boolean expression in WHERE, your query filters on a condition
that is true or false, and the query results reflect values that meet the condition. By including a boolean expression in SELECT, your
query can now return true or false as results. Boolean expressions are commonly used with count to find the number of
entities that meet specific criteria.
Return Rows the ANSI SQL Way with the Fetch Clause
We made it easier to follow the SQL standard by including the FETCH clause as an alternative to LIMIT. FETCH is functionally
similar to LIMIT: It specifies the number of rows to return from query results. You can also count rows from an offset. A typical use
case for a limit and offset is pagination. While LIMIT is popular among many databases that use SQL such as PostgreSQL and
MySQL, it isn’t part of the SQL standard.
Build Advanced Interactions with Data Serialization Functions for SQL
Love adding interactions in your dashboard builders, but more comfortable writing queries for them in Structured Query Language
(SQL)? Now you can use data serialization functions in SQL to perform dynamic filtering, grouping, and sorting on dashboard widgets
based on standard or live datasets, or Salesforce objects.
Fast-Track Your Queries with SQL for Tableau CRM (Generally Available)
SQL for Tableau CRM is a query language that lets you execute queries against your Tableau CRM datasets. Structured Query Language
(SQL) is typically used for working with data stored in relational databases. Tableau CRM uses the ANSI SQL interface to access Tableau
CRM’s fast in-memory data store. It has native support of Salesforce features used in Tableau CRM, including sharing inheritance and
custom fiscal calendars.
Note: These features don’t support the full range of cases covered by ANSI SQL. Refer to each statement in the SQL for Tableau
CRM Developer Guide for more information.
How: To create SQL queries for a dataset, in Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, open the dataset, and click Query Mode (1). Then click
Switch to SQL (2). Switching to SQL provides a warning that switching clears your current query. If you don't want to lose the SAQL
query, copy it before switching to SQL. Edit the SQL query and click Run Query to validate it (3). To add the query to a dashboard, clip
the query lens to the dashboard (4).
113
SQL for Tableau CRM supports these standard SQL features:

• SELECT
• FROM
• WHERE
• GROUP BY
• GROUPING
• ROLLUP
• HAVING
• ORDER BY
• LIMIT
• FETCH
• OFFSET
• UNION
• CASE statements
• COALESCE
• NULLIF
• Select aggregate, windowing, math, and string functions, and subqueries
SEE ALSO:
SQL for Tableau CRM Developer Guide: Introducing SQL for Tableau CRM (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Refine Aggregations with Window Functions

A window function lets you perform calculations on a selection—or "window"—of rows. You can think of them as powerful aggregate
functions. With count() and sum(), for example, your results are grouped into a single row. When you use a window function, you
can perform additional operations on row results, such as ranking and calculating totals.
114
How: This example calculates the top account owners and the percentage of each of their contributions relative to the other account
owners for each country.
SELECT Billing_Country, Account_Owner, SUM(Amount)/SUM(SUM(Amount)) OVER (PARTITION BY
Billing_Country ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING) * 100 AS
Percent_Amount_Contribution
FROM "DTC_Opportunity"
GROUP BY Billing_Country, Account_Owner
ORDER BY Billing_Country ASC, Percent_Amount_Contribution DESC
Billing Country Account Owner Percent_Amount_Contribution

Australia Dennis Howard 44.29
Bruce Kennedy 41.41
John Williams 14.3
Belgium Julie Chavez 62.91
Laura Garza 23.81
Evelyn Williams 13.27
Brazil Bruce Kennedy 100
Canada Chris Riley 47.3
Harold Campbell 21.87
Laura Palmer 16.61
Here are the first ten results. The “window” is the set of rows that have the same Billing Country as the current row.
The Percent_Amount_Contribution column is the window function's output. To find the percentage of each account owner’s
contribution relative to the other ones in their billing country, the window function partitions the results by billing country. The frame
clause ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING refers to the first row of the partition to
the last. For all of the entries in each billing country, the query divides the sum of the current account owner's contribution by the total
sum of all of the account owners' contributions. To get a percentage value, the query then multiplies by 100.
SEE ALSO:
SQL for Tableau CRM Developer Guide: Window Functions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Build Complex, Maintainable Queries with Subqueries

Sometimes, your queries have a lot to say: join these datasets, filter on a subset, then operate on a further subdivision. Streamline your
SQL queries with subqueries to isolate and nest each part of a statement. By using subqueries, your query is easier to read and maintain
in the long run.
115
How: To include a subquery in your query, after the FROM statement, add an additional SELECT statement in parentheses.
For example, this query returns the sum of all profits and the max profit value from Superstore where all profits are greater than zero.
No losses are reflected in the results.
SELECT d.sumProfit, maxProfit
FROM (
SELECT SUM(Profit) as sumProfit, MAX(Profit) as maxProfit
FROM (
SELECT Profit
FROM "Superstore"
WHERE Profit > 0
)
) as d;
Tableau CRM first runs the innermost query.

SELECT Profit "Superstore" WHERE Profit > 0
The output from this query becomes the dataset on which the outer query operates.
SELECT SUM(Profit) as sumProfit, MAX(Profit) as maxProfit
FROM (innermost query);
Optionally, you can refer to an inner query by its alias, if you choose to use one. In the outermost query, you can refer to sumProfit
as d.sumProfit, as shown in the example, or you can refer to it simply as sumProfit.
SELECT d.sumProfit, maxProfit FROM (nested subqueries) as d;
sumProfit maxProfit
442,649.60 8,399.98
SEE ALSO:
SQL for Tableau CRM Developer Guide: Subquery (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Return True or False As Query Results with Boolean Expressions in Select Statements
Is SQL for Tableau CRM better than ever with boolean expressions in SELECT statements? True. Previously, boolean expressions
were available in WHERE statements only. When you include a boolean expression in WHERE, your query filters on a condition that is
true or false, and the query results reflect values that meet the condition. By including a boolean expression in SELECT, your query
can now return true or false as results. Boolean expressions are commonly used with count to find the number of entities that
meet specific criteria.
How: To include a boolean expression in SELECT, add it directly following the SELECT clause.
This example demonstrates a query that satisfies two numerical logical conditions.
SELECT Profit > 0 and Profit < 100 as Profits FROM "Superstore" LIMIT 5;
116
Profits
true
false
true
false
true
This example demonstrates a text comparison.

SELECT Customer_Name LIKE 'A%' as "A Names" FROM "Superstore" LIMIT 5;
A Names
false
false
false
false
true
SEE ALSO:
SQL for Tableau CRM Developer Guide: Boolean Expressions in SELECT Clause (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Return Rows the ANSI SQL Way with the Fetch Clause
We made it easier to follow the SQL standard by including the FETCH clause as an alternative to LIMIT. FETCH is functionally similar
to LIMIT: It specifies the number of rows to return from query results. You can also count rows from an offset. A typical use case for a
limit and offset is pagination. While LIMIT is popular among many databases that use SQL such as PostgreSQL and MySQL, it isn’t part
of the SQL standard.
How: In this example, because there is an offset of one row, FETCH starts from the second value of the City column, ordered
ascending. The query returns the next three rows, which are the second, third, and fourth rows.
SELECT City
FROM "Superstore"
ORDER BY City
OFFSET 1
FETCH NEXT 3 ROWS ONLY;
City
Abilene
117
City
Akron
Akron
SEE ALSO:
SQL for Tableau CRM Developer Guide: Fetch Clause (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Build Advanced Interactions with Data Serialization Functions for SQL

Love adding interactions in your dashboard builders, but more comfortable writing queries for them in Structured Query Language
(SQL)? Now you can use data serialization functions in SQL to perform dynamic filtering, grouping, and sorting on dashboard widgets
based on standard or live datasets, or Salesforce objects.
Why: SQL for Tableau CRM supports these data serialization functions:
• asSQLSelect()
• asSQLOrder()
• asSQLGrouping()
• asSQLWhere()
• asSQLHaving()
Einstein Discovery
Operationalize externally built models that you easily upload and deploy into Salesforce. Translate unstructured data into valuable insights
with sentiment analysis. Get predictive and prescriptive intelligence directly in your automated business processes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Operationalize Externally Built Models in Salesforce (Generally Available)
Augment your predictive powers with externally built models that you can quickly put into production. Your data scientists can use
their favorite modeling tools to design, build, test, and tune their carefully crafted models. Then, upload and deploy them in Salesforce,
and your users can start working toward better outcomes using the model’s predictions.
Translate Unstructured Data into Valuable Insights with Sentiment Analysis (Generally Available)
Comments, survey data, or other forms of customer feedback often contain some of the richest information in your datasets. Now,
Einstein Discovery processes unstructured data during story creation and categorizes sentiment as positive, negative, or neutral. For
example, “Love the new fall colors” is positive, “The movie was OK” is neutral, and “Not a great experience” is negative. Einstein
Discovery lets you detect customer emotions and tags this information for meaningful analysis. Previously, data like this was often
regarded as unusable due to the time, budget, and expertise required for sentiment analysis.
Add Einstein Discovery Insights to Your Flows
Get predictive and prescriptive intelligence directly in your flows with Einstein Discovery powered models. Select the values to use
in your predictions, and let Einstein Discovery generate suggested improvements and predictors.
118
Gather Insights Directly from Your Snowflake Schema (Pilot)

Create stories faster with your Snowflake tables using the Tableau CRM Direct Data for Snowflake connector. The same Live Connector
that’s used for data exploration and queries now can initiate predictive and prescriptive insights and build corresponding models
without replicating a dataset.
Deploy Better Models with Enhanced Model Quality Alerts
Automatic quality alerts direct you to augment model performance before deployment so that your model provides better insights,
predictions, and improvements. Einstein Discovery alerts you to possible model quality issues by examining your training data and
model metrics. Einstein now detects imbalanced distributions, possible data leakage, and no correlation issues in your training data.
Einstein Discovery also checks certain quality metrics for your model and alerts you to any issues it detects. For linear regression
models, Einstein Discovery flags low or high R2. For logistic regression models, Einstein Discovery flags low or high AUC (Area Under
the Curve). Finally, you can now selectively choose to ignore specific alerts that you consider to not be relevant for your model.
Predict Outcomes for Multiple Categories with Multiclass Models (Pilot)
Einstein Discovery introduces multiclass models so that you can predict probable outcomes among up to 10 categories. For example,
an insurance company can predict which of nine policies an applicant is most likely to choose. Support for multiclass models adds
a third use case to the numeric and binary classification use cases that Einstein Discovery already supports.
Evaluate Model Performance with Validation Sets
Validation sets give you a new way to simulate real-world performance and compare models for accuracy. A validation set has the
same schema as the training dataset, but it contains a separate, independent collection of observations. If enabled in a story, Einstein
runs the associated model on the data in the validation set. Einstein then calculates its accuracy by comparing the model’s predicted
outcomes with the actual outcomes in the validation set. Validation sets provide another way in which to test your model’s performance
so that you can more confidently deploy it in Salesforce.
Speed Up Story Creation with Smart Sampling (Pilot)
Analyzing a sufficiently representative subset lets you create stories and story versions faster and with confidence. Train your model
with Smart Sampling for datasets of 300,000 rows or more. Select your sample data size and allow Einstein Discovery to create a
story based on a randomly selected subset of observations in your data.
Compensate for unbalanced data using the new Automatic Data Rebalancing option. It enables Einstein Discovery to view the data
for more balanced analysis, and Einstein Discovery can synthetically tune the distribution for a more balanced dataset. Einstein
Discovery can increase frequency in the minority class by upsampling the data and reduce frequency in the majority class through
downsampling. Work with the data that you have without relying on external tools for this crucial data manipulation step.
The Insights API allows you to embed diagnostic insights from your story into any website, application, or dashboard. Derived from
historical data, diagnostic insights answer, Why did it happen? Previously, the Insights API returned only descriptive insights that
answer, What happened with my data? Diagnostic insights drill deeper into correlations to help you understand which variables
had the biggest impact on the business outcome you’re analyzing. For example, Why did my sales increase during this quarter? or
Why did case time to close increase in this region?
SEE ALSO:
Operationalize Externally Built Models in Salesforce (Generally Available)

Augment your predictive powers with externally built models that you can quickly put into production. Your data scientists can use their
favorite modeling tools to design, build, test, and tune their carefully crafted models. Then, upload and deploy them in Salesforce, and
your users can start working toward better outcomes using the model’s predictions.
119
How: Bundle all files associated with your TensorFlow model in a .zip file. Be sure to include all the required components:
• Python script
• Tensorflow model object
• Small CSV file containing test data to ensure that your model works as expected
• The two folders (assets/ and variables/) that are created automatically when you save your TensorFlow model
Open Model Manager, and click Upload to launch the Upload Model wizard.
Specify details about the model, then click Next to specify all the variables in the model.
120
Select the .zip file containing the model files to upload.
Click Upload, and then click Done. You can deploy the model immediately into your Salesforce environment or add it to the Uploaded
Models tab for deployment later.
121
Note: For some functionality, feature support for imported models differs from the models that Einstein Discovery creates.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Salesforce Help: Operationalize External Machine Learning Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Translate Unstructured Data into Valuable Insights with Sentiment Analysis (Generally Available)
Comments, survey data, or other forms of customer feedback often contain some of the richest information in your datasets. Now,
Einstein Discovery processes unstructured data during story creation and categorizes sentiment as positive, negative, or neutral. For
example, “Love the new fall colors” is positive, “The movie was OK” is neutral, and “Not a great experience” is negative. Einstein Discovery
lets you detect customer emotions and tags this information for meaningful analysis. Previously, data like this was often regarded as
unusable due to the time, budget, and expertise required for sentiment analysis.
How: In story settings, select the variable that contains your unstructured data. Click the Transform dropdown menu and select
Sentiment Analysis.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery

Get predictive and prescriptive intelligence directly in your flows with Einstein Discovery powered models. Select the values to use in
your predictions, and let Einstein Discovery generate suggested improvements and predictors.
How: In Flow Builder, add an Action element to the flow, and select Einstein Discovery as the category. In the Action field, select a
deployed prediction (1).
122
Specify whether to retrieve and store predictors and improvements (2), and generate predictions based on a record or values in the
flow.(3).
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Gather Insights Directly from Your Snowflake Schema (Pilot)

Create stories faster with your Snowflake tables using the Tableau CRM Direct Data for Snowflake connector. The same Live Connector
that’s used for data exploration and queries now can initiate predictive and prescriptive insights and build corresponding models without
replicating a dataset.
Note: This feature is not generally available and is being piloted with certain Customers subject to additional terms and conditions.
You can provide feedback and suggestions for this feature in the applicable IdeaExchange group in the Trailblazer Community.
How: If you’re interested in participating in the pilot program, ask your Salesforce Account Executive.
Use your existing Tableau CRM Snowflake Direct Connector, or create a connection to the Snowflake source table. In Tableau CRM Studio,
from the Datasets tab, click the live Snowflake dataset (1), and select Create Story (2).
123
The story opens with a Live Connection notification.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Deploy Better Models with Enhanced Model Quality Alerts

Automatic quality alerts direct you to augment model performance before deployment so that your model provides better insights,
predictions, and improvements. Einstein Discovery alerts you to possible model quality issues by examining your training data and model
metrics. Einstein now detects imbalanced distributions, possible data leakage, and no correlation issues in your training data. Einstein
Discovery also checks certain quality metrics for your model and alerts you to any issues it detects. For linear regression models, Einstein
Discovery flags low or high R2. For logistic regression models, Einstein Discovery flags low or high AUC (Area Under the Curve). Finally,
you can now selectively choose to ignore specific alerts that you consider to not be relevant for your model.
How: On the Story toolbar, choose Review Alerts to see model quality alerts for this story.
124
The new Data Alerts screen replaces the Recommended Updates screen. You can selectively ignore alerts that you don’t need to fix.
Ignored alerts show up on the Resolved tab.
Similarly, in story setup, if you select a variable with an alert, you can choose to ignore the alert.
To find alerts associated with model metrics, on the Story toolbar, click Model.
125
Look for possible issues detected (1) in the Assess Deployment Readiness panel on the Model Overview page. If issues were detected,
click View All Alerts (2), and then examine the alerts related to model quality. This example alert indicates that data leakage possibly
contributes to such a high-quality score.
When you deploy a model, Einstein alerts you to unresolved quality issues.
126
Taking action on alerts requires you to create a story version.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Salesforce Help: Model Quality Alerts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Predict Outcomes for Multiple Categories with Multiclass Models (Pilot)

Einstein Discovery introduces multiclass models so that you can predict probable outcomes among up to 10 categories. For example,
an insurance company can predict which of nine policies an applicant is most likely to choose. Support for multiclass models adds a
third use case to the numeric and binary classification use cases that Einstein Discovery already supports.
How: If you’re interested in participating in the pilot program, ask your Salesforce Account Executive.
During story creation, in the Field to Analyze list, select a text column that contains 3–10 unique categories.
Note: Minimizing or maximizing an outcome pertains to numeric and binary classification use cases, but not to multiclass models.
127
When the story is created, Einstein Discovery generates the predictive model and takes you to the Predictions tab. There, you can conduct
what-if probability calculations for different classes and groups.
128
Select a group to predict (1). You see which class Einstein predicted as the most likely outcome (2) along with ranked probabilities (3),
the model accuracy for the predicted class (4), and top prediction factors (5).
Model metrics for multiclass models show evaluative statistics per class and all classes. For example, the Confusion Matrix for All Classes
shows you, at a glance, how accurately the model predicts each class.
Where the row and column for each class intersect in the table, the color of the square indicates the model’s accuracy. The legend shows
a color progression from 0 to 1, with 1 representing 100% accuracy. In this example, the darker blue diagonal indicates a high percentage
of true positives.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Evaluate Model Performance with Validation Sets

Validation sets give you a new way to simulate real-world performance and compare models for accuracy. A validation set has the same
schema as the training dataset, but it contains a separate, independent collection of observations. If enabled in a story, Einstein runs the
associated model on the data in the validation set. Einstein then calculates its accuracy by comparing the model’s predicted outcomes
with the actual outcomes in the validation set. Validation sets provide another way in which to test your model’s performance so that
you can more confidently deploy it in Salesforce.
How: In story setup, on the General Settings panel, select a validation type.
129
You can define a validation set in two ways

• Training/Validation Ratio randomly splits the observations in the Tableau CRM dataset into a training set and a validation set. The
default is 80% training and 20% validation, but you can adjust this percentage according to your needs.
• Validation Dataset specifies a separate Tableau CRM dataset that contains the validation data. You see only the datasets that match
the schema of your story’s dataset. Ideally, select a dataset that contains a diverse set of observations that reflect real-world conditions.
If you want to compare models for accuracy, selecting the same validation dataset gives you a common, unbiased baseline for
evaluation.
130
Create a story or story version. In Model Metrics, go to the Validation subtab on the Model Evaluation tab. Einstein shows statistics on
how well the model performed on the validation set that you specified.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Salesforce Help: Edit General Settings for a Story (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Speed Up Story Creation with Smart Sampling (Pilot)

Analyzing a sufficiently representative subset lets you create stories and story versions faster and with confidence. Train your model with
Smart Sampling for datasets of 300,000 rows or more. Select your sample data size and allow Einstein Discovery to create a story based
on a randomly selected subset of observations in your data.
How: If you are interested in participating in the pilot program, ask your Salesforce Account Executive.
In Story Settings from the General Setting panel, click Smart Sampling. Use the slider to define your dataset sample size.
131
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery

Compensate for unbalanced data using the new Automatic Data Rebalancing option. It enables Einstein Discovery to view the data for
more balanced analysis, and Einstein Discovery can synthetically tune the distribution for a more balanced dataset. Einstein Discovery
can increase frequency in the minority class by upsampling the data and reduce frequency in the majority class through downsampling.
Work with the data that you have without relying on external tools for this crucial data manipulation step.
Why: Let’s say you want to train your data to predict customer churn. Your data has 1,000 rows, with one customer that churned and
999 that didn’t. The imbalance in this dataset can’t generate a reliable story. Previously, data was rebalanced outside of Salesforce and
handled in a programmatic way using R or Python.
How: Open Story Settings and click the variable that‘s displaying an Imbalanced Distribution in the Alerts column.
Click Apply class weights to improve data distribution then update story.
132
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery

The Insights API allows you to embed diagnostic insights from your story into any website, application, or dashboard. Derived from
historical data, diagnostic insights answer, Why did it happen? Previously, the Insights API returned only descriptive insights that answer,
What happened with my data? Diagnostic insights drill deeper into correlations to help you understand which variables had the biggest
impact on the business outcome you’re analyzing. For example, Why did my sales increase during this quarter? or Why did case time to
close increase in this region?
Who: To access and run the API, you need the Use Einstein Discovery system permission.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Discovery
Salesforce Help: Get Descriptive and Diagnostic Insights Programmatically (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Build connections to sync pipeline data more easily.
133
IN THIS SECTION:
Create External Data Connections Faster (Beta)
All the features that let you bridge the data gap between Salesforce Data Pipeline and your remote systems have been redesigned
for an optimal connection-building experience.
Create External Data Connections Faster (Beta)

All the features that let you bridge the data gap between Salesforce Data Pipeline and your remote systems have been redesigned for
an optimal connection-building experience.
Where: Salesforce Data Pipelines is available for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Note: As a beta feature, the new Connection section of the Data Manager is a preview and isn’t part of the “Services” under your
master subscription agreement with Salesforce. Use this feature at your sole discretion, and make your purchase decisions only
on the basis of generally available products and features. Salesforce doesn’t guarantee general availability of this feature within
any particular time frame or at all, and we can discontinue it at any time. This feature is for evaluation purposes only, not for
production use. It’s offered as is and isn’t supported, and Salesforce has no liability for any harm or damage arising out of or in
connection with it. All restrictions, Salesforce reservation of rights, obligations concerning the Services, and terms for related
Non-Salesforce Applications and Content apply equally to your use of this feature. You can provide feedback and suggestions for
this feature in the Trailblazer Community.
Who: Data Pipelines isn’t available to Government Cloud customers.
Why: With the new Connections view, you can see the objects, columns, and details for each connection.
When you add a connection, the settings are reorganized with related fields, such as username and password, next to each other.
134
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Connect and Sync Your Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Modify and Enrich Salesforce Data with Recipes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

New search pages on Tableau CRM Home provide options for exploration to help you find insights faster. With intelligent, self-service
analytics, Ask Data for Salesforce guides you in answering your data questions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Search is blossoming with possibilities. New search pages in Tableau CRM give you options for exploration to help you find insights
faster. You choose the simplest path to the analytics you want, whether that’s traditional keyword search, semantic (data match)
search, or natural language querying.
Popularize Data-Driven Decision-Making with Ask Data for Salesforce (Beta)
Entice your business users to answer their own data questions without prior data knowledge or even a dashboard. Ask Data for
Salesforce brings intelligent, self-service analytics to the Tableau CRM home page. The Ask Data for Salesforce system works with
your data and users’ interactions to find the right data to answer natural language questions. The system also includes smart
recommendations and Next Best Insight suggestions. All these features work together to make it easy and fun to discover data
insights.
135
Control Who Sees What in an App with Asset Visibility (Generally Available)
App managers and editors can now hide select assets. Use Asset Visibility to manage the presence of sensitive assets, such as a
dashboard in development or a raw dataset, from other app members.
Find All Your Learning Resources on the Help Clearinghouse Page
Update your Learning Map bookmark to point to the redesigned Tableau CRM page in Help. We’re deprecating the old Learning
Map and moving its entire collection of links into Salesforce Help, which is more secure, searchable, and easily localized.

Search is blossoming with possibilities. New search pages in Tableau CRM give you options for exploration to help you find insights
faster. You choose the simplest path to the analytics you want, whether that’s traditional keyword search, semantic (data match) search,
or natural language querying.
Who: To access the search experience beta feature, users need the Use Metalytics API user permission. This permission is enabled by
default with the Tableau CRM Plus license.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then select Settings. On the Settings page, select Enable Ask Data
for Salesforce.
In the search bar on Analytics Home, enter search terms, or ask a question about your business.
136
The new Search page opens with three sections: Search Results that are keyword matches (1), the top Insight based on the data selected
to answer your question (2), and Items related to the insight (3).
To open the Search Results page, click View All (4). Access the full list of results or continue with keyword searching. Filter using the
options in the Filters panel.
137
To go back to the main Search page, click Search in the page title. On the main Search page, open the Insights page by clicking More
Insights (5).
138
In addition to the Top Insight (1), you can check out the Insights Data (2) that was selected to answer your question. The Next Best
Insights section (3) is a prediction service that suggests ideas for further exploration with additional and related groupings of the data.
To learn about the insights and how to explore them, see Popularize Data-Driven Decision-Making with Ask Data for Salesforce (Beta)
on page 140.
Take action from any insight. Click Share to post to Chatter, export to Salesforce Anywhere (Quip), or download the insight. Click
Explore to open the insight in the explorer, where you can change the visualization. If you’re in Analytics Studio, you can also save
it or clip it to a dashboard.
139
To open the Data Match page, enter semantic search terms in the search bar. Use semantic search to find dashboards and datasets based
on the data they use.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Find Tableau CRM Assets and Insights (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Find Dashboards and Datasets by Field Using Semantic Search (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Ask Data for Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Popularize Data-Driven Decision-Making with Ask Data for Salesforce (Beta)

Entice your business users to answer their own data questions without prior data knowledge or even a dashboard. Ask Data for Salesforce
brings intelligent, self-service analytics to the Tableau CRM home page. The Ask Data for Salesforce system works with your data and
users’ interactions to find the right data to answer natural language questions. The system also includes smart recommendations and
Next Best Insight suggestions. All these features work together to make it easy and fun to discover data insights.
Who: To access Ask Data for Salesforce, users need the Use Metalytics API user permission. This permission is enabled by default with
the Tableau CRM Plus license.
Why: We integrated Ask Data for Salesforce into the search experience to make self-service analytics available for all users. Users can
start with a question, not with a dashboard. They can simply suggest a grouping or filter, unlike before when knowing a dataset’s fields
was necessary. Ask Data for Salesforce surveys your org to learn data relationships and the vocabulary of your business. It also uses word
association feedback to train the natural language system so that all your users benefit. With org-specific, self-training models, virtually
no admin setup time is needed.
Note: The same data governance that you expect from Salesforce is built into Ask Data for Salesforce. Security and sharing rules
are fully respected. All models are built specifically for each Salesforce org and only that org. Your data never leaves our secure
data centers. Also, Ask Data for Salesforce services don’t affect your data or API usage limits.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then select Settings. On the Settings page, select Enable Ask Data
for Salesforce.
Enter a data question in the search bar, and the new Search page opens. For more information about search, see Choose Your Search
Experience (Beta) on page 136. To open the Insights page, click More Insights.
140
The Top Insight (1) is the Ask Data for Salesforce interpretation of your question as a data query, presented in an automatically generated
visualization. Did we understand your question? Look to the Insights Data panel (2) for information about the data selected to answer
your question. And check out the Next Best Insights (3), an analytics prediction service that suggests related questions to help you
discover the most relevant and valuable information.
141
The Insights Data panel lists the report type used to help identify the data that answers your question (1) and the datasets with the
highest confidence (2). The dataset queried is highlighted. Click the name of another dataset to use it as the basis of the query.
Automatically, the Top Insight and Next Best Insights are reconfigured to show answers using the data that you select.
142
In the Insights Data panel, you can also click the confidence level on a dataset to view more information about it. Confidence is determined
by algorithm scores for data matches, popularity measures, and natural language interpretation. The dataset details and related objects
can help you verify that we’re using the data that you expect.
Alternatively, if you know the data, you can specify it by adding dataset:[developerName] or object:[developerName]
to your question in the search bar.
Notice that some words in your question are highlighted. Highlighted words are associated with a field or value in the data that we’re
using to answer your question. If you want to change the association, click the word to open the menu.
143
In the menu, the field with a checkmark is the one used in the data query configured from your question. Each time you or anyone in
your org selects a field or value to associate with a word or phrase, Ask Data for Salesforce learns your business’s language. The numbers
next to some fields indicate how many times people in your org have associated them with the highlighted word. These numbers can
help you make the right selection.
Note: Any word in your question can be associated with a data element. You can also select more than one word to assign the
phrase to a data element.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Smart Recommendations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Find Dashboards and Datasets by Field Using Semantic Search (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Ask Your Data, View Instant Insights (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Blog: Autonomous Insights
Blog: A new search-driven analytics experience with Ask Data for Salesforce
Control Who Sees What in an App with Asset Visibility (Generally Available)
App managers and editors can now hide select assets. Use Asset Visibility to manage the presence of sensitive assets, such as a dashboard
in development or a raw dataset, from other app members.
How: App managers can toggle an asset’s status to control visibility by clicking the row-level action dropdown menu for the asset and
clicking Hide.
144
Asset changes affect app members that are assigned with Viewer sharing access. Assets remain visible to app users with Manager or
Editor sharing access regardless of the asset’s status. Users with Manager or Editor sharing access can control asset visibility.
Find All Your Learning Resources on the Help Clearinghouse Page

Update your Learning Map bookmark to point to the redesigned Tableau CRM page in Help. We’re deprecating the old Learning Map
and moving its entire collection of links into Salesforce Help, which is more secure, searchable, and easily localized.
Why: The Help page at https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=sf.bi.htm is now your one-stop clearinghouse for all Tableau CRM
onboarding resources.
145
Start at the top for a streamlined map (1) of top-level Help pages arranged by jobs to be done, plus links to Trailhead, in-app videos, and
all the training videos, webinars, and best practices blogs by Tableau CRM experts. Scroll down for learning resources that cover every
aspect of Tableau CRM (2).
146
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Commerce
Analytics Mobile Apps

Organize your favorite insights with Collections in both Tableau CRM for iOS and Android. Plus, work faster with one-click actions in
Tableau CRM for iOS, and see images in tables in Tableau CRM for Android.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get the Latest Version of Tableau CRM for iOS and Android
To benefit from the latest enhancements and bug fixes, upgrade to the latest version of Tableau CRM for iOS and Android.
Get the Latest Version of Tableau CRM for iOS and Android
To benefit from the latest enhancements and bug fixes, upgrade to the latest version of Tableau CRM for iOS and Android.
Where: These changes apply to Tableau CRM for iOS and Tableau CRM for Android. Tableau CRM is available in Developer Edition and
for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: For the latest enhancements, download Tableau CRM from the App Store or Google Play.
Check out what’s new in Tableau CRM for iOS.
• New in version 13.2.
– Organize and easily access insights even if they’re spread across multiple apps with Tableau CRM Collections.
– Get work done faster on your mobile device with one-click actions.
– Bug fixes.
Check out what’s new in Tableau CRM for Android.

• New in version 13.2.
– Get a more complete picture from your data with images in tables.
– Organize and easily access insights even if they’re spread across multiple apps with Tableau CRM Collections.
– Bug fixes.
Commerce
IN THIS SECTION:
B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience includes new promotion functionality and the ability to import products on a global level
for all stores. This release also includes an enhanced checkout flow and support for fractional product quantities.
B2B2C Commerce
Enhancements for B2B2C Commerce include the ability to import products at a global level and recommend products to shoppers
based on site-wide purchase behavior. You can also work more efficiently with workspaces and display the most relevant facets for
search.
147
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience

Modernize the Salesforce B2B Commerce order experience with Salesforce Order Management. Improve shopper satisfaction with
the new reship feature for handling lost or missing items. Apply Salesforce duplicate and matching rules to shopper records from
Salesforce B2C Commerce order data.

B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience includes new promotion functionality and the ability to import products on a global level for
all stores. This release also includes an enhanced checkout flow and support for fractional product quantities.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Promotions to Drive B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience
Increase revenue in your B2B store with promotions that encourage more orders. Offer automatic discounts for specific products,
product categories, or other attributes. Target your promotions to make sure the right buyers receive the right savings. Then, use
Experience Builder to customize how your promotions show to eligible buyers.
Customize Your B2B Store’s Checkout Experience with an Enhanced Checkout Flow
The enhanced checkout flow is designed as a single synchronous flow. It’s easier to understand and to customize, and it runs faster
than before.
Support buyers who want to order products in fractional quantities, such as 1.5 tons of cement or 1.25 kilos of apples. Use fractional
quantities with up to four decimal places to define the minimum and maximum amounts of a product that a customer can buy.
Fractional quantities are visible when a buyer searches for a product, views the product’s details, and adds the quantity to the cart.
Define and Select Product Quantities with the Quantity Selector
Buyers can now view quantity rules, select quantities, and add products directly to their carts from the pages where they find them.
Previously, buyers left the Category Detail or Search Results pages to go to the Product Details page to add items to their cart.
Use a CSV file to import products that aren’t associated with a particular B2B or B2C store. In the product import CSV file, you can
specify products and variations, categories, entitlement policies, and prices for multiple price books. After the import, you can use
the products for any store.
Edit and View Workspaces More Efficiently
Save time when configuring products, pricing, and promotions by editing fields inline directly in your workspace. You can edit
boolean, number (int, long, and double), phone, text, and url fields. You can edit multiple fields in up to 200 rows at a time. You can
also filter the list of items using up to two cross-entity filters. These enhancements apply to the product, promotion, and pricing
workspaces.
Create a B2B Store on an Existing Experience Cloud Site
You don’t have to create a store on a new site. You can reuse domain and site settings, branding, and styling to present an integrated
experience to your users. When you add a store, the existing site template, pages, components, and navigation stay the same, but
you can add commerce pages and components. You can create a store on any site that doesn’t already have a store, that’s using
the Aura framework, and that’s using either the Customer Portal template (CPT), Starter template, or B2B template.
Use Modular Components on the Product Detail Page
Customize and reduce the time to configure product options on the Product Detail page with the new Image Detail, Breadcrumbs,
Product Heading, and Purchase Options modular components. With the new modular components, use only the components that
you need rather than the out-of-the-box Product Detail Card component. Existing customers can still use the Product Detail Card
component, but any customization requires rebuilding the component.
148
Automatically Display the Most Relevant Facets for B2B Commerce Search
Automatically select, order, and display the 10 most-relevant facets, including the Category facet, based on Search results.
Set Up Your Org for Commerce More Easily
New guides in PDF format take you through preparing and setting up your org for B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience or B2B2C
Commerce. We also have a new guide that includes just the setup steps for Salesforce admins who want to add B2B2C Commerce
to B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience.
Modernize the B2B Commerce Order Experience with Salesforce Order Management
Modernize the entire B2B Commerce order lifecycle from purchase through fulfillment and order servicing by implementing Salesforce
Order Management. Manage orders from any channel, and create integrated buying experiences across channels by centralizing
order, inventory, product, and customer data. Streamline order servicing with a self-service storefront for shipment tracking, invoice
management, cancellations, and returns.
Resume Shopping Without Canceling Checkout
Now carts unlock automatically for buyers who abandon a checkout process, so they can pick up right where they left off. Previously,
to continue shopping, buyers unlocked their carts manually. With this enhancement, consider reviewing your extensions or other
customizations to make changes, if necessary.
Add a Buyer Group Related List to Your Account Record Pages
The Buyer Group related list shows the buyer groups associated with the account. You can assign or remove accounts from buyer
groups directly from the related list.
Use Buyer Group User Permissions to Share Access to Buyer Group Members
New user permissions control access to buyer group members. Access to a buyer group member is now determined by a user's
access to the member's buyer group.
Create Secondary Carts Using the Connect API
Use the Connect API to create multiple active carts for the same buyer. To use this feature, you have to build your own front end as
a custom solution.
See Only Categories with Entitled Products When Browsing Categories
When browsing product categories on the storefront, buyers and guest users only see a category’s entitled products. If a category
has no entitiled products, it also doesn’t display on the storefront.
A new Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD) setting is now available for Product records.
Display All Category Navigation Menu Items
When you use a data source to define the menu categories, there’s an additional menu item for all categories. If you manually add
a category menu item, the parent of the category menu doesn’t include a menu item for all categories.
Use Promotions to Drive B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience

Increase revenue in your B2B store with promotions that encourage more orders. Offer automatic discounts for specific products, product
categories, or other attributes. Target your promotions to make sure the right buyers receive the right savings. Then, use Experience
Builder to customize how your promotions show to eligible buyers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: This change is available for users with a B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience license.
149
How: Create and manage your promotions in the Promotion Workspace. If your organization uses a single currency only, you can try
the simplified create flow. Configure display properties on the Promotions, Cart, Cart Totals, Order Summary Products, and Order Summary
Promotions components in Experience Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Manage Promotions with the Promotion Workspace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customize Your B2B Store’s Checkout Experience with an Enhanced Checkout Flow
The enhanced checkout flow is designed as a single synchronous flow. It’s easier to understand and to customize, and it runs faster than
before.
Who: This change applies to users with a B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience license.
How: Use SFDX to install the enhanced flow and automatically set it as the default. If necessary, you can use the older asynchronous
flow, but we recommend the enhanced flow.
SEE ALSO:
SFDX

Support buyers who want to order products in fractional quantities, such as 1.5 tons of cement or 1.25 kilos of apples. Use fractional
quantities with up to four decimal places to define the minimum and maximum amounts of a product that a customer can buy. Fractional
quantities are visible when a buyer searches for a product, views the product’s details, and adds the quantity to the cart.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Order APIs support and calculate the quantities with up to four decimal positions. On the Order pages, you can only view or edit
the quantity field with up to two decimal places. Any other pages that reference these quantity fields also only reflect two decimal places.
Order Summary data model doesn’t support any decimal places.
SEE ALSO:
Create Purchase Quantity Rules (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Define and Select Product Quantities with the Quantity Selector

Buyers can now view quantity rules, select quantities, and add products directly to their carts from the pages where they find them.
Previously, buyers left the Category Detail or Search Results pages to go to the Product Details page to add items to their cart.
How: Use Experience Builder to add or modify Quantity Selector properties on these pages.
Experience Builder Page Component

Product Detail Product Detail Purchase Options or Product Detail Card
Category Detail Results Layout
Search Results Results Layout
150
Experience Builder Page Component

Cart Cart
Use the Quantity Selector properties to define minimum, maximum, and increment text, the Quantity Selector label, and whether to
show quantity rules.
SEE ALSO:
Cart (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Product Detail Card (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Results Layout (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use a CSV file to import products that aren’t associated with a particular B2B or B2C store. In the product import CSV file, you can specify
products and variations, categories, entitlement policies, and prices for multiple price books. After the import, you can use the products
for any store.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience and B2B2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: We provide templates to get you started creating the CSV file. When the file is ready, from the Product Workspace, click Import
and follow the instructions to upload the file and start the import process.
SEE ALSO:
Import Products Using a CSV File (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
151

Save time when configuring products, pricing, and promotions by editing fields inline directly in your workspace. You can edit boolean,
number (int, long, and double), phone, text, and url fields. You can edit multiple fields in up to 200 rows at a time. You can also filter the
list of items using up to two cross-entity filters. These enhancements apply to the product, promotion, and pricing workspaces.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience and B2B2C Commerce in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer editions.
How: To edit a field in a workspace, hover your cursor over the field. Click the pencil icon to open the field for editing.
To edit fields for multiple items in the workspace, select the items and then click the pencil icon in the field. Select the option to update
all selected items.
To filter items in a workspace, create the filters based on other entities. For example, filter products in the Product Workspace based on
store and category.
SEE ALSO:
Commerce Workspaces
Create a B2B Store on an Existing Experience Cloud Site

You don’t have to create a store on a new site. You can reuse domain and site settings, branding, and styling to present an integrated
experience to your users. When you add a store, the existing site template, pages, components, and navigation stay the same, but you
can add commerce pages and components. You can create a store on any site that doesn’t already have a store, that’s using the Aura
framework, and that’s using either the Customer Portal template (CPT), Starter template, or B2B template.
Where: This change applies to B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From the Stores page, click Create a Store on an Existing Site, and follow the instructions to select your site and add the B2B
store.
152
Note: If you’re using B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience and have existing Experience Cloud sites, those sites now show
commerce pages and components as available in Experience Builder. But the pages and components don’t work correctly until
you create a store for the site because the components require store context.
SEE ALSO:
Create a Store on an Existing Experience Cloud Site (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use Modular Components on the Product Detail Page

Customize and reduce the time to configure product options on the Product Detail page with the new Image Detail, Breadcrumbs,
Product Heading, and Purchase Options modular components. With the new modular components, use only the components that you
need rather than the out-of-the-box Product Detail Card component. Existing customers can still use the Product Detail Card component,
but any customization requires rebuilding the component.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Product Detail Breadcrumbs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Product Detail Headings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Product Detail Image Gallery (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Product Detail Image Purchase Options (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Automatically Display the Most Relevant Facets for B2B Commerce Search
How: In the Search tile, select the Results Filters tab, and click Manage Filters. In the Available Fields column, move up to 49 filters
to the Selected Fields column. In the Results Display Settings tab, select Autoselect the 10 most relevant facets in the Filters and
Facets section and then rebuild the index from the Search Index Summary tab.
153
SEE ALSO:
Automatically Select the Most-Relevant Facets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Commerce. We also have a new guide that includes just the setup steps for Salesforce admins who want to add B2B2C Commerce to
B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience.
editions.
How: Download the PDF guides.
• B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience Set Up Guide (can be unavailable during release preview)
• B2B2C Commerce Set Up Guide (can be unavailable during release preview)
• Add B2B2C Commerce to B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience Set Up Guide (can be unavailable during release preview)
Order Management. Manage orders from any channel, and create integrated buying experiences across channels by centralizing order,
inventory, product, and customer data. Streamline order servicing with a self-service storefront for shipment tracking, invoice management,
cancellations, and returns.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: Salesforce Order Management is available to B2B Commerce users with a Salesforce Order Management license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Order Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Resume Shopping Without Canceling Checkout

Now carts unlock automatically for buyers who abandon a checkout process, so they can pick up right where they left off. Previously, to
continue shopping, buyers unlocked their carts manually. With this enhancement, consider reviewing your extensions or other
customizations to make changes, if necessary.
Who: This change is available for users with a B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience license.
154
Add a Buyer Group Related List to Your Account Record Pages

The Buyer Group related list shows the buyer groups associated with the account. You can assign or remove accounts from buyer groups
directly from the related list.
SEE ALSO:
Add Buyer Accounts to a Buyer Group (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use Buyer Group User Permissions to Share Access to Buyer Group Members
New user permissions control access to buyer group members. Access to a buyer group member is now determined by a user's access
to the member's buyer group.
SEE ALSO:
Create a Buyer Group and Associate It with a Store (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Secondary Carts Using the Connect API

Use the Connect API to create multiple active carts for the same buyer. To use this feature, you have to build your own front end as a
custom solution.
Who: This change applies to users with a B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience license.
SEE ALSO:
Commerce Webstore Cart, Make Primary
See Only Categories with Entitled Products When Browsing Categories

When browsing product categories on the storefront, buyers and guest users only see a category’s entitled products. If a category has
no entitiled products, it also doesn’t display on the storefront.
How: To view a category or its descendent categories, it must have entitlement to at least one product within the category. Rebuild
your search index for any category changes to take effect. The Account Selector option isnt available with this feature.
SEE ALSO:
Show Only Categories with Entitled Products (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

A new Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD) setting is now available for Product records.
155
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes B2B2C Commerce
Why: B2B Commerce APIs now determine access to products based on entitlements. Salesforce recommends that you set the Default
External Access OWD sharing setting on Product records to Private for all commerce use cases. If the Default External Access OWD sharing
setting isn’t set to Private, and you have multiple stores or both stores and other Experience Cloud sites, it’s possible for authenticated
users to use a SOQL query and discover all your products regardless of any entitlements you’ve set up. However, they can’t see prices
nor purchase products. For the most secure setup for external users, don’t grant access to products and other commerce objects at the
profile level. Instead, grant access to objects through a permission set that is only assigned to buyers and buyer managers.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Display All Category Navigation Menu Items

When you use a data source to define the menu categories, there’s an additional menu item for all categories. If you manually add a
category menu item, the parent of the category menu doesn’t include a menu item for all categories.
SEE ALSO:
Multi-Level Navigation Menu
B2B2C Commerce
Enhancements for B2B2C Commerce include the ability to import products at a global level and recommend products to shoppers based
on site-wide purchase behavior. You can also work more efficiently with workspaces and display the most relevant facets for search.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use a CSV file to import products that aren’t associated with a particular B2B or B2C store. In the product import CSV file, you can
specify products and variations, categories, entitlement policies, and prices for multiple price books. After the import, you can use
the products for any store.
You can now specify multiple categories in the CSV file and import product variations. Use any of these data types for custom fields:
string, checkbox, currency, date, date/time, email, number, percent, phone, picklist, picklist (multiselect), text, text area, text area
(long), text area (rich), time, or url. You can also specify that the import use an existing catalog or entitlement policy instead of the
defaults.
Save time when configuring products, pricing, and promotions by editing fields inline directly in your workspace. You can edit
boolean, number (int, long, and double), phone, text, and url fields. You can edit multiple fields in up to 200 rows at a time. You can
also filter the list of items using up to two cross-entity filters.
Increase Shopper Conversion with Customers Also Bought Einstein Recommendations
Recommend products to shoppers based on site-wide purchase behavior to increase conversion rate and automate manual
merchandising on product pages. Commerce Einstein now gathers shopper purchases across your site. This enhancement enables
the use case for Customers Also Bought to recommend products frequently bought together by shoppers who also bought the
item being viewed.
Automatically Display the Most Relevant Facets for B2B2C Commerce Search
156

Commerce. We also have a new guide that includes just the setup steps for Salesforce admins who want to add B2B2C Commerce
to B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience.
Free Up Storage With Weekly Job that Deletes Expired B2B2C Commerce Guest Carts
Now a weekly job runs behind the scenes to delete expired guest carts from your B2B2C store. This gives you room for more data
storage in Salesforce.

Use a CSV file to import products that aren’t associated with a particular B2B or B2C store. In the product import CSV file, you can specify
products and variations, categories, entitlement policies, and prices for multiple price books. After the import, you can use the products
for any store.
editions.
How: We provide templates to get you started creating the CSV file. When the file is ready, from the Product Workspace, click Import
and follow the instructions to upload the file and start the import process.
SEE ALSO:
Import Products for All Stores Using a CSV File (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

You can now specify multiple categories in the CSV file and import product variations. Use any of these data types for custom fields:
string, checkbox, currency, date, date/time, email, number, percent, phone, picklist, picklist (multiselect), text, text area, text area (long),
text area (rich), time, or url. You can also specify that the import use an existing catalog or entitlement policy instead of the defaults.
Where: This change applies to B2B2C Commerce in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: We provide a template to get you started creating the CSV file. The first time you import data to a store, we recommend that you
let the import process use the default catalog and entitlement policy. On subsequent imports, you can override the defaults and select
another catalog or entitlement policy.
SEE ALSO:
B2C Data Import (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Save time when configuring products, pricing, and promotions by editing fields inline directly in your workspace. You can edit boolean,
number (int, long, and double), phone, text, and url fields. You can edit multiple fields in up to 200 rows at a time. You can also filter the
list of items using up to two cross-entity filters.
Where: This change applies to the Product Workspace, Promotion Workspace, and Pricing Workspace in B2B Commerce for Lightning
Experience and B2B2C Commerce in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To edit a field in a workspace, hover your cursor over the field. Click the pencil icon to open the field for editing.
157
To edit fields for multiple items in the workspace, select the items to be edited and then click the pencil icon in the field. Select the
option to update all selected items.
To filter items in a workspace, create the filters based on other entities. For example, filter products in the Product Workspace based on
store and category.
SEE ALSO:
Commerce Workspaces
Increase Shopper Conversion with Customers Also Bought Einstein Recommendations

Recommend products to shoppers based on site-wide purchase behavior to increase conversion rate and automate manual merchandising
on product pages. Commerce Einstein now gathers shopper purchases across your site. This enhancement enables the use case for
Customers Also Bought to recommend products frequently bought together by shoppers who also bought the item being viewed.
How: Deploy Commerce Einstein on your B2B2C Commerce site and enable activity tracking to capture shopper activities with the new
finishCheckout API request. Use Experience Builder to add or modify the Einstein Recommendations Component on the Product page,
and select the Customers Also Bought recommendation from the Use Case menu.
158
SEE ALSO:
Tracked Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Einstein Recommendations Component (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Automatically Display the Most Relevant Facets for B2B2C Commerce Search
How: In the Search tile, select the Results Filters tab, and click Manage Filters. In the Available Fields column, move up to 49 filters
to the Selected Fields column. In the Results Display Settings tab, select Autoselect the 10 most relevant facets in the Filters and
Facets section and then rebuild the index from the Search Index Summary tab.
159
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Order Management
SEE ALSO:
Define Search Results Display Settings

Commerce. We also have a new guide that includes just the setup steps for Salesforce admins who want to add B2B2C Commerce to
B2B Commerce for Lightning Experience.
editions.
How: Download the PDF guides.
• B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience Set Up Guide (can be unavailable during release preview)
• B2B2C Commerce Set Up Guide (can be unavailable during release preview)
• Add B2B2C Commerce to B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience Set Up Guide (can be unavailable during release preview)
Free Up Storage With Weekly Job that Deletes Expired B2B2C Commerce Guest Carts
Now a weekly job runs behind the scenes to delete expired guest carts from your B2B2C store. This gives you room for more data storage
in Salesforce.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Configure Guest Browsing for B2C Stores

Modernize the Salesforce B2B Commerce order experience with Salesforce Order Management. Improve shopper satisfaction with the
new reship feature for handling lost or missing items. Apply Salesforce duplicate and matching rules to shopper records from Salesforce
B2C Commerce order data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Order Management. Manage orders from any channel, and create integrated buying experiences across channels by centralizing
order, inventory, product, and customer data. Streamline order servicing with a self-service storefront for shipment tracking, invoice
management, cancellations, and returns.
160

Delight your shoppers even when their order goes awry by reshipping lost or missing order items. Use the Reship workflow to create
a fulfillment order and process a new shipment for a previously fulfilled item with no additional charge to the shopper.
Handle Orders with Multiple Payments More Robustly
All captured funds are now applied to an invoice before authorized funds, regardless of the amount. Previously, funds were applied
based on order payment summary amounts, regardless of whether the funds were captured or authorized. In some cases, that
behavior applied incorrect amounts. If you want to revert to the previous behavior, contact Salesforce Support.
Associate Return Shipments with Return Orders
The Shipment object has a new Return Order field, and the Shipment Item object has a new Return Order Line Item field. The Return
Order layout includes a new related list of associated shipments, and the Return Order Line Item layout includes a related list of
associated shipment items.
Apply Salesforce Duplicate Management to Shopper Records from B2C Commerce
You can configure the B2C Commerce integration to apply your org’s duplicate and matching rules when ingesting account, contact,
and person account records for shoppers.
Include Custom Email Data in B2C Commerce Orders
The Salesforce B2C Commerce integration supports the Email data type for matching custom attributes and fields.
Categorize Sales Channels by Business Type
The Sales Channel object has new Type and Type Category picklist fields. Type Category contains the fixed values B2B, B2C, and
Other, and it isn’t visible in the UI. Type contains default values matching the Type Category values, and is customizable. Each value
in the Type picklist is associated with a value from the Type Category picklist, and multiple Type values can be associated with each
Type Category value. In existing Order Management orgs, the Winter ’22 automated update process sets both fields to B2C for each
sales channel that’s associated with at least one managed order summary. If your Order Management org is integrated with B2C
Commerce, don’t delete the B2C value from the Type picklist.
Categorize Order Summaries as B2C or B2B
Use the new Order Summary object field, Business Model, to specify the type of order: B2C or B2B. When creating an order summary
via the Connect in Apex method, Connect REST API endpoint, or Flow core action, you can optionally specify this value as an input
property.
Users with the Edit Delivery Information user permission can edit most fields on order delivery group summaries. This permission is
included in the Order Management Agent and Order Management Operations Manager standard permission sets.
Order Management. Manage orders from any channel, and create integrated buying experiences across channels by centralizing order,
inventory, product, and customer data. Streamline order servicing with a self-service storefront for shipment tracking, invoice management,
cancellations, and returns.
Who: Salesforce Order Management is available to B2B Commerce users with a Salesforce Order Management license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Order Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
161

Delight your shoppers even when their order goes awry by reshipping lost or missing order items. Use the Reship workflow to create a
fulfillment order and process a new shipment for a previously fulfilled item with no additional charge to the shopper.
Who: The Reship workflow is available to users with a Salesforce Order Management Growth or Plus license.
SEE ALSO:
Reship Order Items (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Handle Orders with Multiple Payments More Robustly

All captured funds are now applied to an invoice before authorized funds, regardless of the amount. Previously, funds were applied
based on order payment summary amounts, regardless of whether the funds were captured or authorized. In some cases, that behavior
applied incorrect amounts. If you want to revert to the previous behavior, contact Salesforce Support.
Who: This change applies to orgs with a Salesforce Order Management license.
Associate Return Shipments with Return Orders

The Shipment object has a new Return Order field, and the Shipment Item object has a new Return Order Line Item field. The Return
Order layout includes a new related list of associated shipments, and the Return Order Line Item layout includes a related list of associated
shipment items.
Who: This change applies to orgs with a Salesforce Order Management Growth or Plus license and the Return Merchandise Authorization
(RMA) feature enabled.
Apply Salesforce Duplicate Management to Shopper Records from B2C Commerce

You can configure the B2C Commerce integration to apply your org’s duplicate and matching rules when ingesting account, contact,
and person account records for shoppers.
Who: This change applies to orgs with a Salesforce Order Management license and that are using the Salesforce B2C Commerce
integration.
How: In Setup, in the Order Management settings, turn on B2C Integration Data Matching Rules.
Include Custom Email Data in B2C Commerce Orders

The Salesforce B2C Commerce integration supports the Email data type for matching custom attributes and fields.
Who: This change applies to orgs with a Salesforce Order Management license and that are using the Salesforce B2C Commerce
integration.
162
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Customization
Categorize Sales Channels by Business Type

The Sales Channel object has new Type and Type Category picklist fields. Type Category contains the fixed values B2B, B2C, and Other,
and it isn’t visible in the UI. Type contains default values matching the Type Category values, and is customizable. Each value in the Type
picklist is associated with a value from the Type Category picklist, and multiple Type values can be associated with each Type Category
value. In existing Order Management orgs, the Winter ’22 automated update process sets both fields to B2C for each sales channel that’s
associated with at least one managed order summary. If your Order Management org is integrated with B2C Commerce, don’t delete
the B2C value from the Type picklist.
Categorize Order Summaries as B2C or B2B

Use the new Order Summary object field, Business Model, to specify the type of order: B2C or B2B. When creating an order summary via
the Connect in Apex method, Connect REST API endpoint, or Flow core action, you can optionally specify this value as an input property.

Users with the Edit Delivery Information user permission can edit most fields on order delivery group summaries. This permission is
included in the Order Management Agent and Order Management Operations Manager standard permission sets.
Customization
Create more dynamic and performant Lightning pages with Dynamic Interactions and improvements to Performance Analysis for App
Builder. Choose from a larger selection of publicly available APIs thanks to added support for larger spec sizes and expanded limits for
operations, actions, and objects. Support your users wherever they work with new time zones, languages, and locales.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Dynamic Interactions to create applications with components that communicate and transform based on user actions. And get
more help improving your Lightning page performance. Performance Analysis for App Builder now runs automatically and alerts
you to more custom component performance predictions. Org-specific metrics now help you decide how important taking these
performance predictions is.
External Services
Use a larger selection of publicly available APIs thanks to added support for even larger spec sizes and expanded limits for operations,
actions, and objects. Register your Mulesoft API specs with a simplified, integrated workflow. Select your registered actions directly
from Einstein Bots! And try the new Trailhead experience - Salesforce super-powers await.
Globalization
New time zones, locales, and platform-only languages are available in Salesforce. We updated existing locales to the latest formats,
and you can enable the new locale format standard via a release update.
163
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Lightning App Builder
Sharing
Find out how to hide fields containing personal information from external users with an enhanced user management setting. Manage
access to sensitive data on contracts, tasks, events, time sheets, and time sheet entries. And limit the default records that your users
see so that they only see what’s necessary.
Get the benefits of expanded profile and permission management. Use the power of permission set groups to configure session-based
access control. Create custom profiles using the API instead of cloning existing profiles.
Try Einstein and build recommendations at no additional cost. Independent service vendors (ISVs) and partners can now use managed
packages to save time and seamlessly share custom recommendations with other Salesforce orgs.
General Setup
Edit external object names while syncing, perform sync asynchronously, and create external lookup relationships for table lookup
fields.

Use Dynamic Interactions to create applications with components that communicate and transform based on user actions. And get
more help improving your Lightning page performance. Performance Analysis for App Builder now runs automatically and alerts you
to more custom component performance predictions. Org-specific metrics now help you decide how important taking these performance
predictions is.
IN THIS SECTION:
Build More Interactive Lightning Pages with Dynamic Interactions
Now you can create applications with components that communicate and transform based on user interactions, all in the Lightning
App Builder UI. With Dynamic Interactions, an event occurring in one component on a Lightning page, such as the user clicking an
item in a list view, can update other components on the page.
Bring Dynamic Interactions to Your Dynamic Actions Bar (Pilot)
Now you can update multiple components on your app page with one click of a button in your Dynamic Actions Bar. An admin can
use the Dynamic Actions Bar component to create Dynamic Interactions, which trigger other components to update and transform
based on user interactions.
Let Org-Specific Metrics Guide Your Lightning Page Performance Improvements
Various factors can affect your Lightning page’s performance at runtime. Performance Analysis for App Builder gives you
recommendations to improve your page performance. Now you can see your users’ performance metrics to help you decide which
recommendations to take or to defer. Data from the last 90 days of use is analyzed and displayed in your Org-Specific Metrics card
results. This analysis includes your users’ network latency, browser speed, and number of cores.
Get Performance Analysis for App Builder Recommendations Automatically
Performance Analysis for App Builder now automatically runs when you build a page in Lightning App Builder. If your page performance
is poor or moderate, recommendations to improve performance appear, and the warning icon appears next to the Analyze button.
Improve Page Performance with More Custom Lightning Component Analysis
Updates to Performance Analysis for App Builder give you more performance predictions for your custom Lightning components
on your Lightning page.
Use Flow Orchestrator Work Guide to Connect Users with Tasks (Beta)
The new Flow Orchestrator Work Guide (Beta) component displays actions generated by Flow Orchestrator orchestrations to assigned
users.
164

Now you can create applications with components that communicate and transform based on user interactions, all in the Lightning
App Builder UI. With Dynamic Interactions, an event occurring in one component on a Lightning page, such as the user clicking an item
in a list view, can update other components on the page.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: To get the most out of Dynamic Interactions, admins and developers work together.
Developers write custom Lightning web components that power the dynamic interactions. The developer defines the events that are
supported by a component and then exposes them in the Lightning App Builder. Then for each event, admins can create interactions
between the source and target components using a new Dynamic Interactions UI in the Lightning App Builder properties pane.
If a component has events exposed for it, its properties pane has two tabs. The Properties tab contains the component properties that
you’re familiar with. The Interactions tab is new for Dynamic Interactions. It lists all the events that the developer exposed for the selected
component and any interactions that have been configured for each event.
Example: This Account List source component has an Item Selected event available but no interactions set up for it. What happens
when a user selects an item in the list? You decide. Click Add Interaction, select a target component, and then define what
happens to that target component when the event is triggered.
The Item Selected event fires when a user clicks a list item in the Account List component. For example, you can configure an
interaction with a map component as the target. When a user clicks an account record in the list, the target component pinpoints
that account’s location on a map. Then every new click or tap on an account in the list results in an update to the target component.
SEE ALSO:
Expose Events in the Lightning App Builder
Salesforce Help: Dynamic Interactions in the Lightning App Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Interactions in the App Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Lightning Web Components Dev Guide: Configure a Component for Dynamic Interactions in the Lightning App Builder (can be outdated
or unavailable during release preview)

Now you can update multiple components on your app page with one click of a button in your Dynamic Actions Bar. An admin can use
the Dynamic Actions Bar component to create Dynamic Interactions, which trigger other components to update and transform based
on user interactions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in all editions.
165
Note: The Dynamic Actions Bar component isn’t generally available and is being piloted with certain Customers subject to
additional terms and conditions. It isn’t part of your purchased Services. This feature is subject to change, may be discontinued
with no notice at any time in SFDC’s sole discretion, and SFDC may never make this feature generally available. Make your purchase
decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. This feature is made available on an AS IS basis and use
of this feature is at your sole risk. To be nominated to participate in the Dynamic Actions Bar pilot program, contact Salesforce.
Why: Dynamic Interactions is a new feature for Lightning App Builder. You can use custom components as a source for Dynamic
Interactions too, but the Dynamic Actions Bar component is the first standard component supported as a source for your interactions.
How: Add an interaction to your Dynamic Actions Bar just like you would add an action. When you select the Dynamic Actions Bar
component on your app page, click Add Interaction in the properties pane. After you name the button, you can choose your interaction
type and configure it in the pane.
For example, say you want to configure your new button, Show Cases, to update the List View component to show cases instead of
accounts.
You want the button to update a component, so in the Interaction picker (1), under Components, select Update Properties. Then,
specify the Component this interaction updates, List View (2). Choose the Object (3) and Filter (4) for your List View as Case and All
Open Cases.
Now, when your users click Show Cases in the Dynamic Actions Bar, the List View changes to show open cases.
166
Note: Dynamic Interactions for the Dynamic App Bar component are supported only on app pages.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Dynamic Interactions in the Lightning App Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Lightning Page Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Let Org-Specific Metrics Guide Your Lightning Page Performance Improvements

Various factors can affect your Lightning page’s performance at runtime. Performance Analysis for App Builder gives you recommendations
to improve your page performance. Now you can see your users’ performance metrics to help you decide which recommendations to
take or to defer. Data from the last 90 days of use is analyzed and displayed in your Org-Specific Metrics card results. This analysis includes
your users’ network latency, browser speed, and number of cores.
editions.
How: To view org-specific metrics, click Analyze from the Lightning App Builder toolbar, if it has not run automatically.
The Org-Specific Metrics card shows data from the org that you’re in. If you’re viewing user metrics in a sandbox, the metrics are different
than when viewed in production. If the Lightning page that you’re analyzing isn’t activated, the metrics shown reflect all users in the
org. After the page is activated, the metrics are filtered to reflect only the users that the page is assigned to.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Lightning Page Performance (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Performance Analysis for App Builder Recommendations Automatically

Performance Analysis for App Builder now automatically runs when you build a page in Lightning App Builder. If your page performance
is poor or moderate, recommendations to improve performance appear, and the warning icon appears next to the Analyze button.
167
editions.
How: You can minimize the recommendations window. Performance Analysis for App Builder continues to evaluate your page as you’re
working, even while minimized. If the recommendations aren’t displayed, congratulations! Your page performance is good. If you want
to run the analysis manually, click Analyze.
SEE ALSO:
Improve Page Performance with More Custom Lightning Component Analysis

Updates to Performance Analysis for App Builder give you more performance predictions for your custom Lightning components on
your Lightning page.
editions.
Why: To help you improve page performance, Performance Analysis for App Builder alerts you if a component contains:
• External CSS
• Unminified JavaScript
• A use of lightning:recordEditForm
• A use of layoutType="FULL"
• A use of lightning:tabFocused listeners
How: To view the assessment of your record page’s performance, click Analyze from the Lightning App Builder toolbar. Custom Lightning
components on your Lightning record pages are analyzed and incorporated into the desktop performance analysis card results. This
analysis includes your page’s predicted Experienced Page Time or page load time and the component performance breakdown card.
Recommendations for optimizing custom components appear when relevant.
SEE ALSO:
168
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes External Services
Use Flow Orchestrator Work Guide to Connect Users with Tasks (Beta)
The new Flow Orchestrator Work Guide (Beta) component displays actions generated by Flow Orchestrator orchestrations to assigned
users.
editions.
SEE ALSO:
Increase Productivity with Flow Orchestrator Work Guide (Beta)
External Services
Use a larger selection of publicly available APIs thanks to added support for even larger spec sizes and expanded limits for operations,
actions, and objects. Register your Mulesoft API specs with a simplified, integrated workflow. Select your registered actions directly from
Einstein Bots! And try the new Trailhead experience - Salesforce super-powers await.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use External Services for MuleSoft to Generate Actions (Generally Available)
Import your MuleSoft Anypoint Platform APIs in a few clicks with External Services for MuleSoft. Select your MuleSoft named credentials,
and let Salesforce do the heavy lifting of importing your endpoints and converting them into actions. Salesforce automatically gets
the list of APIs available to your MuleSoft account across all your environments. Previously, you manually exported your Open API
2.0 specifications from MuleSoft and imported them into an external service. This export process can lead to validation errors when
you created the actions in Salesforce.
Register More API Specs with Revised and Expanded Operation, Action, and Object Limits
You can register even more complex, publicly available API specifications. Most registration limits have been rescoped from a per
API spec limitation to a per org limitation, and have been expanded.
Map Non-Standard Media Types in Your Registration
A Salesforce administrator, developer, or ISV can edit the compatible media type mappings in an external service registration for
OpenAPI specifications with unknown or non-standard request or response media types.
Unlock the Power of External Services in Einstein Bot Builder
Use External Services in more parts of the Salesforce Platform! Integrating your Einstein bot with an external service is now as easy
as adding an action to a Bot Builder dialog. You can add an external service’s action to your bot from the Bot Builder. Previously, you
could only add an external service’s action to your bot via a flow.
Major Enhancements to the Trailhead Experience
We've made some major enhancements to the External Services Trailhead module based on your feedback. Understand how External
Services works and exchanges data with Salesforce Flow! Oh yes... you’ll want to pick up this badge.
External Services UI Is Now Fully Compliant with Salesforce Accessibility Standards
We’ve made External Services more accessible.
169

Import your MuleSoft Anypoint Platform APIs in a few clicks with External Services for MuleSoft. Select your MuleSoft named credentials,
and let Salesforce do the heavy lifting of importing your endpoints and converting them into actions. Salesforce automatically gets the
list of APIs available to your MuleSoft account across all your environments. Previously, you manually exported your Open API 2.0
specifications from MuleSoft and imported them into an external service. This export process can lead to validation errors when you
created the actions in Salesforce.
Who: To use External Services for MuleSoft, you need a valid MuleSoft license or demo account.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Import MuleSoft APIs (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Register More API Specs with Revised and Expanded Operation, Action, and Object
Limits
You can register even more complex, publicly available API specifications. Most registration limits have been rescoped from a per API
spec limitation to a per org limitation, and have been expanded.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
How: This change of scope also addresses use cases where, due to the previous limitations, certain specs had to be registered multiple
times in order to include all operations of interest within an API. Now, in many cases, you can include such a large API spec and activate
all desired operations within a single registration. Simpler workflow, anyone?
Here are the previous limits, and the new, rescoped values for Winter ’22.
Limit Previous Value New Value for Winter ’22
Max External Service registrations 25 per org 25 per org
Max schema size 1.5 MB 4.0 MB
Max active operations 25 per registration 625 per org
Max active objects 25 per registration 625 per org
Max active and inactive operations 200 per registration 5,000 total per org
Max active and inactive objects 500 per registration 5,000 total per org
Max properties None 200,000 total per org
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: External Services Considerations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Map Non-Standard Media Types in Your Registration

A Salesforce administrator, developer, or ISV can edit the compatible media type mappings in an external service registration for OpenAPI
specifications with unknown or non-standard request or response media types.
170
How: There are certain public APIs, including a number from AWS, that require domain specific, custom header key-value pairs in order
to complete the request. Some of these headers don’t adhere to OpenAPI specification standards, and therefore, don’t comply with the
requirements of External Services. To mitigate the non-compliance, External Services overwrites these custom headers with a default
value at registration time. This results in incomplete requests.
For Winter ’22, we’ve provided a workaround. With the Metadata API, you can manipulate a registration and override the definition of
the custom header.
To achieve this workaround, you:
1. Register the spec.
2. Use the Metadata API to retrieve the metadata about your registration.
3. Edit your registration’s metadata to include the correct custom header key-value pair.
4. Redeploy the metadata back into your org using the Salesforce CLI.
You can use this workaround to successfully integrate External Services with non-standard media types.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: MIME Type Mapping in External Service Registrations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Unlock the Power of External Services in Einstein Bot Builder

Use External Services in more parts of the Salesforce Platform! Integrating your Einstein bot with an external service is now as easy as
adding an action to a Bot Builder dialog. You can add an external service’s action to your bot from the Bot Builder. Previously, you could
only add an external service’s action to your bot via a flow.
SEE ALSO:
Unlock the Power of External Services in Bot Builder
Salesforce Help: Add an External Service Action
Major Enhancements to the Trailhead Experience

We've made some major enhancements to the External Services Trailhead module based on your feedback. Understand how External
Services works and exchanges data with Salesforce Flow! Oh yes... you’ll want to pick up this badge.
SEE ALSO:
Trailhead: External Services
External Services UI Is Now Fully Compliant with Salesforce Accessibility Standards

We’ve made External Services more accessible.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Product Accessibility Status
171
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Globalization
Globalization
New time zones, locales, and platform-only languages are available in Salesforce. We updated existing locales to the latest formats, and
you can enable the new locale format standard via a release update.
IN THIS SECTION:
To improve accuracy, to enhance integration with external systems, and to support your users wherever they work, users can now
select from 430 time zones. With this change, Salesforce supports all time zones in the latest Time Zone Database version, 2021a.
Connect with More Customers with New Languages and Locales
To help you do business all over the world, French (Morocco), Greek (Cyprus), Greenlandic, and seven new English locales are available
as platform-only languages. Users can also select locales related to these languages.
To provide you with up-to-date formats, we updated the locale formats in Salesforce. We recommend that you evaluate how the
format changes affect you. This release includes International Components for Unicode (ICU) version 69.1, which uses Common
Locale Data Repository (CLDR) version 39. Whether you’re using ICU or Java Development Kit (JDK) locale formats, this change
updates the currency symbol for the Yoruba (Benin) locale. If you’re using ICU locale formats, this change modifies a date time format
for six Chinese locales.
Enable ICU Locale Formats (Release Update)
To do business wherever you are, adopt the International Components for Unicode (ICU) formats for dates and times. ICU sets the
international standard for locale formats. The ICU formats provide a consistent experience across the Salesforce platform and improve
integration with ICU-compliant applications across the globe. The ICU formats replace Oracle’s Java 8 Development Kit (JDK) formats.
This update was first made available in Winter ’20.

To improve accuracy, to enhance integration with external systems, and to support your users wherever they work, users can now select
from 430 time zones. With this change, Salesforce supports all time zones in the latest Time Zone Database version, 2021a.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in all editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Supported Time Zones (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Edit Your Language and Locale Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Connect with More Customers with New Languages and Locales

To help you do business all over the world, French (Morocco), Greek (Cyprus), Greenlandic, and seven new English locales are available
as platform-only languages. Users can also select locales related to these languages.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce app in all editions.
Why: Admins can enable these new platform-only languages, and users can select the corresponding locales. The locale time, date, and
currency formats vary based on whether you use the International Components for Unicode (ICU) or Oracle’s Java Development Kit (JDK)
locale formats.
• English (Belgium): en_BE
• English (Cyprus): en_CY
172
• English (Germany): en_DE

• English (Israel): en_IL
• English (Malta): en_MT
• English (Netherlands): en_NL
• English (United Arab Emirates): en_AE
• French (Morocco): fr_MA
• Greek (Cyprus): el_CY
• Greenlandic: kl
In addition to the locales for the new languages, users can select the new Kalaallisut (Greenland) [kl_GL] locale.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Supported Languages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Locales Overview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

To provide you with up-to-date formats, we updated the locale formats in Salesforce. We recommend that you evaluate how the format
changes affect you. This release includes International Components for Unicode (ICU) version 69.1, which uses Common Locale Data
Repository (CLDR) version 39. Whether you’re using ICU or Java Development Kit (JDK) locale formats, this change updates the currency
symbol for the Yoruba (Benin) locale. If you’re using ICU locale formats, this change modifies a date time format for six Chinese locales.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce app in all editions, except
Database.com.
Why: For both JDK and ICU formats, the currency for the Yoruba (Benin) locale changed from CFA to F CFA.
Locale Name Format Type Winter ’22 Format Summer ’21 Format
and Code
Yoruba (Benin) Currency: Positive F CFA 1,234,567.57 CFA 1,234,567.57
yo_BJ Currency: Negative -F CFA 1,234,567.57 -CFA 1,234,567.57
Accounting Currency: Positive F CFA 1,234,567.57 CFA 1,234,567.57
Accounting Currency: Negative (F CFA 1,234,567.57) (CFA 1,234,567.57)
If you’re using ICU locale formats, the spacing of the medium date time format changed for six Chinese locales.
Note: We recommend viewing this information in Salesforce Help. Not all characters appear correctly in PDFs.
Format Type Winter ’22 Format Summer ’21 Format

Date Time: Medium 2008 1 28 4:30:05 2008 1 28 4:30:05
This updated ICU date time format applies to these locales.

• Chinese [zh]
173
• Chinese (China) [zh_CN]

• [zh_CN_PINYIN]
• [zh_CN_STROKE]
• Chinese (Malaysia) [zh_MY]
• Chinese (Singapore) [zh_SG]
How: Review the changes to date, time, and currency formats for the locales that you use in Salesforce and evaluate how they affect
you. Then test your filters, code, and components as needed.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Determine Whether Your Salesforce Org Is Using ICU or JDK Locale Formats
Salesforce Help: Locales Overview (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce app in all editions, except
Database.com.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’22. Salesforce orgs created in Winter ’20 or later have ICU locale formats enabled by
default. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance
tab. When this release update is enabled, the ICU formats are available in API version 45.0 and later.
How: Before enabling this update in production, check with your package providers to make sure that all your installed packages are
compatible with the ICU formats. Then evaluate the impact on each locale. Use this SOQL query to find the locales in use in your org
and a user count.
SELECT toLabel(LocaleSidKey) LocaleName, LocaleSidKey, Count(id) UserCount FROM User where
IsActive=true GROUP BY LocaleSidKey
For recommended areas of testing and details on the changes for each locale, see “Go Global with New International Locale Formats”
in Salesforce Help.
To enable this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Enable
ICU Locale Formats, follow the testing and activation steps.
The English (Canada) locale (en_CA) requires separate activation. In the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and select User
Interface. Select Enable ICU formats for en_CA locale and save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Go Global with New International Locale Formats (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: Determine Whether Your Salesforce Org Is Using ICU or JDK Locale Formats
Release Updates
174
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Sharing
Sharing
Find out how to hide fields containing personal information from external users with an enhanced user management setting. Manage
access to sensitive data on contracts, tasks, events, time sheets, and time sheet entries. And limit the default records that your users see
so that they only see what’s necessary.
IN THIS SECTION:
Hide More Personal Information Fields from External Users
To prevent external users, such as portal or partner users, from viewing personal information in your user records, enable the Enhanced
Personal Information Management permission. Salesforce then blocks view and edit access to 20 fields that are considered personal
information. You can configure which fields you consider personal information from User Management Settings. This permission
replaces the less-configurable Hide Personal Information setting, which will be retired in the Winter ’23 release.
Control Access to Sensitive Data with Restriction Rules (Generally Available)
Secure your data and boost productivity by permitting your users to see only the records necessary for their job function. Create
restriction rules to control which subset of records you allow specified groups of users to see. Restriction rules are available for custom
objects, contracts, tasks, events, time sheets, and time sheet entries. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes
since the last release. You can now create and manage restriction rules in Setup as well as with Tooling and Metadata APIs.
Control the Default Records Your Users See with Scoping Rules (Beta)
Reduce noise and unnecessary searches while enhancing your users’ productivity. Based on criteria that you select, you can set rules
to help your users see only records that are relevant to them. By adding a scoping rule, you can help users focus on pertinent records
and prevent them from accessing records containing sensitive or inessential information. Scoping rules don’t restrict the record
access that your users already have. Your users can still open and report on all records that they have access to per your org’s sharing
settings

To prevent external users, such as portal or partner users, from viewing personal information in your user records, enable the Enhanced
Personal Information Management permission. Salesforce then blocks view and edit access to 20 fields that are considered personal
information. You can configure which fields you consider personal information from User Management Settings. This permission replaces
the less-configurable Hide Personal Information setting, which will be retired in the Winter ’23 release.
Why: When you enable the Enhanced Personal Information Management permission, these fields are masked to external users.
• About Me
• Address
• Alias
• Company Name
• Department
• Division
• Email
• Email Sender Address
• Email Sender Name
• Email Signature
• Employee Number
• Extension
175
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Sharing
• Fax
• Manager
• Mobile
• SAML Federation ID
• Phone
• Title
• User Photo badge text overlay
• Username
How: You can click to access a user record field directly from this org permission in User Management Settings. Add or remove PersonalInfo
from the field’s Compliance Categorization area. In the Winter '23 release, this setting will be enforced and the Hide Personal Information
setting will be retired.
SEE ALSO:
Manage Personal User Information Visibility for External Users
Personal User Information Considerations
Control Access to Sensitive Data with Restriction Rules (Generally Available)

Secure your data and boost productivity by permitting your users to see only the records necessary for their job function. Create restriction
rules to control which subset of records you allow specified groups of users to see. Restriction rules are available for custom objects,
contracts, tasks, events, time sheets, and time sheet entries. This feature, now generally available, includes some changes since the last
release. You can now create and manage restriction rules in Setup as well as with Tooling and Metadata APIs.
How: To create a restriction rule, navigate to Object Manager in Setup. Select the object that you want to add a restriction rule for. Click
Restriction Rules. Name and describe the rule and activate it. Select a user field and choose filter settings to determine which users
the rule applies to. Then, select a record field and choose filter settings to determine which records are accessible.
SEE ALSO:
Restriction Rules
Create a Restriction Rule
Control the Default Records Your Users See with Scoping Rules (Beta)
Reduce noise and unnecessary searches while enhancing your users’ productivity. Based on criteria that you select, you can set rules to
help your users see only records that are relevant to them. By adding a scoping rule, you can help users focus on pertinent records and
prevent them from accessing records containing sensitive or inessential information. Scoping rules don’t restrict the record access that
your users already have. Your users can still open and report on all records that they have access to per your org’s sharing settings
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance and Unlimited editions.
How: Scoping rules are available for custom objects and these standard objects.
• Account
• Case
176
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Profiles and Permissions
• Contact
• Event
• Lead
• Opportunity
• Task
For information on enabling this feature, contact Salesforce. You can create and modify scoping rules using the Tooling or Metadata
API.

Get the benefits of expanded profile and permission management. Use the power of permission set groups to configure session-based
access control. Create custom profiles using the API instead of cloning existing profiles.
IN THIS SECTION:
Grant Access Based on Activated User Sessions for Permission Set Groups
To grant your users only the access that they need when they need it, combine the management power of permission set groups
with session-based access control. Create a session-based permission set group to grant access to permission sets during an activated
user session. Previously, you created individual session-based permission sets, but now you can set sessions at the permission set
group level as well.
Create Custom Profiles from Scratch via the SOAP API
It’s easier to configure custom profiles to have the permissions you need. Use the Profile SOAP API object to create custom profiles
that start without any permissions enabled. Previously, to create a custom profile, you cloned an existing profile in Setup and then
removed permissions that you didn’t want the assigned users to have. The Profile Metadata API type functions as before.
Manage Assignment Expiration in Permission Sets and Permission Set Groups (Beta)
You can now view and update current assignment expirations for your permission sets and your permission set groups. Previously,
to update assignment expirations, you recreated them with the correct expiration date.
Grant Access to the DeveloperName Field to Users Who Require It
The DeveloperName field has new permission requirements for multiple Salesforce objects and types across various APIs.
Following the Winter ’22 release, some users can lose access to the DeveloperName field on objects that they typically interact with.
To view, group, sort, or filter the DeveloperName field on affected API objects, you must have View Setup and Configuration
OR View DeveloperName permission.
Grant Access Based on Activated User Sessions for Permission Set Groups
To grant your users only the access that they need when they need it, combine the management power of permission set groups with
session-based access control. Create a session-based permission set group to grant access to permission sets during an activated user
session. Previously, you created individual session-based permission sets, but now you can set sessions at the permission set group level
as well.
Developer editions.
Why: For example, you have a customized Salesforce app that accesses confidential information. For security reasons, you want to limit
user access to a predetermined length of time. Some users, such as a team manager, require expanded access for the same length of
time. You can create a permission set group that includes the different permission sets required for the confidential access. You can
create a flow or use the API to create custom logic to activate the session-based permission set group. In this example, the session-based
177
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Profiles and Permissions
permission set group activates only when the manager-level users authenticate into your environment using a token. When the token
expires, the users must reauthenticate to access the application again.
How: To create a session-based permission set group, select Session Activation Required on the Permission Set Group create page.
Then, activate the session for the permission set group using a flow or the SessionPermSetActivation SOAP API object.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Session-Based Permission Set Groups (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
SOAP API Developer Guide: SessionPermSetActivation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Custom Profiles from Scratch via the SOAP API

It’s easier to configure custom profiles to have the permissions you need. Use the Profile SOAP API object to create custom profiles that
start without any permissions enabled. Previously, to create a custom profile, you cloned an existing profile in Setup and then removed
permissions that you didn’t want the assigned users to have. The Profile Metadata API type functions as before.
Developer editions.
How: Use the create() call on the Profile SOAP API object and specify the Description, Name, and UserLicenseId fields.
You can enable permissions using the API or, after the profile is created, on the profile’s page in Setup. Required permissions for the
profile’s user license are automatically enabled.
SEE ALSO:
SOAP API Developer Guide: Profile (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create or Clone Profiles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Manage Assignment Expiration in Permission Sets and Permission Set Groups (Beta)
You can now view and update current assignment expirations for your permission sets and your permission set groups. Previously, to
update assignment expirations, you recreated them with the correct expiration date.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in all editions.
Why: Suppose a sales manager wants consultants to evaluate the language used in sales contracts. You give the consultants access to
the contracts object and other permissions via a permission set group so that they can perform their work. The project has an end date,
178
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Recommendation Builder
so you don’t want contractors to access sales contracts after that date. Set the expiration date for the permission set group when you
assign it to users. If the project end is extended, edit the expiration date for the permission set group to the new date.
How: Enable Permission Set Group Assignments with Expiration Dates (Beta) in User Management Settings. Then from either the
Permission Set Group or Permission Set page, click Manage Assignment Expiration. On the Current Assignments page, you can view
a list of the users that are assigned to the permission set or the permission set group. To create a user assignment, click Add Assignment.
To modify the expiration date of existing assignments, click . To remove an assignment, click .
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Permission Set and Permission Set Group Assignment Expiration (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Assignment Expiration Details for Users in Permission Sets and Permission Set Groups (Beta) (can be outdated or
unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Manage Assignment Expiration Details for Users in Permission Sets and Permission Set Groups (Beta) (can be outdated
Grant Access to the DeveloperName Field to Users Who Require It

The DeveloperName field has new permission requirements for multiple Salesforce objects and types across various APIs. Following
the Winter ’22 release, some users can lose access to the DeveloperName field on objects that they typically interact with. To view, group,
sort, or filter the DeveloperName field on affected API objects, you must have View Setup and Configuration OR View DeveloperName
permission.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
How: Restore access by giving users the View Setup and Configuration OR View DeveloperName permission via a profile or permission
set. For a list of affected objects and types, see the related knowledge article.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: New Permission Requirements for DeveloperName Field (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=admin_userprofiles.htm
https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=perm_sets_overview.htm

IN THIS SECTION:
Use a Managed Package to Deploy Custom Recommendations
With a managed package, independent software vendors (ISVs) and partners can define a custom recommendation in a developer
org and distribute it to customers. A managed package recommendation is easy to share and includes built-in version support.
179
Try Einstein and Build Recommendations Your Way

Discover how AI-driven recommendations can add value to your business. With Einstein, you can recommend anything from products
to accounts, parts to work orders, candidates to jobs, and more. Explore how to build and deploy recommendations with little effort.
Einstein Recommendation Builder is included in the first 5,000 Next Best Action strategy requests per month at no additional cost.
And you can always upgrade for additional requests.
SEE ALSO:
Use a Managed Package to Deploy Custom Recommendations

With a managed package, independent software vendors (ISVs) and partners can define a custom recommendation in a developer org
and distribute it to customers. A managed package recommendation is easy to share and includes built-in version support.
How: Create a custom recommendation in Einstein Recommendation Builder and add it to your managed package in the developer
org. After your managed package recommendation is ready, it can be deployed to Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited edition orgs.
Install your managed package in the subscriber org, and go to the list of recommendations in Einstein Recommendation Builder Setup.
An icon identifies a managed package recommendation. Hover over the icon to see the name of the package. From the action menu,
build your package. When it’s ready, review the scorecard and deploy your recommendation.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Build a Managed Package Recommendation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Try Einstein and Build Recommendations Your Way

Discover how AI-driven recommendations can add value to your business. With Einstein, you can recommend anything from products
to accounts, parts to work orders, candidates to jobs, and more. Explore how to build and deploy recommendations with little effort.
Einstein Recommendation Builder is included in the first 5,000 Next Best Action strategy requests per month at no additional cost. And
you can always upgrade for additional requests.
180
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes General Setup
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions. You can also sign up for a
Developer edition org with Einstein Recommendation Builder at no cost.
How: From Setup, select Einstein Recommendation Builder. Click Get Started to set up Einstein Recommendation Builder. Then build
your recommendation.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Next Best Action Entitlements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
General Setup
Edit external object names while syncing, perform sync asynchronously, and create external lookup relationships for table lookup fields.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Enhanced Functionality for Syncing an External Data Source
When you sync a table and the external object name conflicts with an existing name, you can edit the name inline and save time
and clicks. You can now select to execute a sync operation that’s likely to experience a connection timeout as a background operation.
Syncing two external data source tables with a lookup relationship field automatically creates an external lookup relationship for
the mapped external objects.
181
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Development
Get Enhanced Functionality for Syncing an External Data Source

When you sync a table and the external object name conflicts with an existing name, you can edit the name inline and save time and
clicks. You can now select to execute a sync operation that’s likely to experience a connection timeout as a background operation.
Syncing two external data source tables with a lookup relationship field automatically creates an external lookup relationship for the
mapped external objects.
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Performance
editions.
How: With inline editing, you can update an external object name without leaving the Validate and Sync page. Take advantage of inline
editing if syncing fails because of conflicting object names or if you want to change the default object name.
When you sync a large number of tables, execute the sync operation asynchronously as a background job and avoid connection timeout.
You can view the list of sync operations performed as background jobs in the corresponding External Data Source page.
A lookup relationship field on a table is mapped as an external lookup relationship on the external object only if the parent and child
objects are synced from the same data source. The parent object must be already synced or the parent and child objects must be in the
same sync operation. This auto mapping is supported by Cross Org, OData 4.0, and Custom Apex adapters. For the OData2.0 adapter,
it’s supported only in the default Olingo library and not supported in OData4J.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Validate and Sync an External Data Source (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Development
Whether you’re using Lightning components, Visualforce, Apex, or our APIs with your favorite programming language, these enhancements
help you develop amazing applications, integrations, and packages for resale to other organizations.
IN THIS SECTION:
Try the beta client-side security architecture for strong, flexible security for your custom Lightning web components. Configure an
event for a Lightning web component by setting up interactions between the source component and its targets right in the App
Builder UI. Use the dependencies tree viewer to see which custom components and Apex classes that a Lightning web component
uses. The Lightning Component framework now returns a 413 HTTP response status code if there are more than 2,500 actions in a
boxcar request. Use the lightning/userConsentCookie module to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your
components.
Integrate image recognition and natural language processing into your apps with Einstein Vision and Language APIs. Use Einstein
Vision OCR to detect text from multiple tables within an image of a page. Einstein Vision OCR support for PDF files is now generally
available. With Einstein Language, create intent models with as few as 20 examples per label. Read on to see how else Einstein gets
your apps working smarter.
Visualforce
Increase security of your Visualforce pages by reviewing and enabling three release updates.
Apex
Use the valueOf() Enum method to convert a specified string to an Enum constant value. Apex supports mock testing of
Salesforce Functions with the FunctionInvokeMock interface. Call invocable actions from Apex code using the
Invocable.Action class methods.
182
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Lightning Components
API
Legacy versions 7.0 though 20.0 of APIs are deprecated and no longer supported. Legacy versions 21.0 through 30.0 will be deprecated
in Summer ’22.
Packaging
Remove more metadata components from your second-generation managed packages. Test out the extended developer preview
for package conversion from first-generation to second-generation managed packages. Simplify package development by creating
and specifying an org shape.
Build applications collaboratively and deliver continuously with Salesforce Developer Experience (DX), the open and integrated
experience that makes development on the Customer 360 Platform easy.
The Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) includes the resources to create user interfaces consistent with Salesforce Lightning
principles, design language, and best practices.
Salesforce Functions extends the power of Salesforce with elastic compute and open language flexibility. Functions allows you to
build digital experiences with common abstractions in a single environment for code and low code.
Analyze Tableau CRM analytics usage data with AppExchange App Analytics. Gain new insights into your subscriber behavior with
AppExchange App Analytics package usage summary fields. Switch from Usage Metrics to AppExchange App Analytics to access
deeper managed package usage data. Increase the power of your managed package usage data with the AppExchange App Analytics
Developer Cookbook.
Change Data Capture
Install managed packages released from AppExchange without consuming the default entity selection allocation.
Platform Events
Check out the pilot for filtering platform event streams with channels.
New and Changed Items for Developers
Here is where you can find new and changed objects, calls, classes, components, commands, and more that help you customize
Salesforce features.
Try the beta client-side security architecture for strong, flexible security for your custom Lightning web components. Configure an event
for a Lightning web component by setting up interactions between the source component and its targets right in the App Builder UI.
Use the dependencies tree viewer to see which custom components and Apex classes that a Lightning web component uses. The
Lightning Component framework now returns a 413 HTTP response status code if there are more than 2,500 actions in a boxcar request.
Use the lightning/userConsentCookie module to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your components.
Note: Looking for new and changed Lightning web components, Aura components, and Aura component interfaces? See the
lists of new and changed items at the end of the Development section.
183
IN THIS SECTION:
Secure Your Components Better, Stronger, Faster with Lightning Web Security (Beta)
The Lightning Component framework introduces Lightning Web Security, a new client-side security architecture for your custom
Lightning web components. This new architecture is defined by fewer restrictions and more functionality while providing strong
sandboxing and a security posture to mitigate the most common UI attacks. The result is strong, flexible, usable security for your
Lightning web components.
As part of Dynamic Interactions, you can now define the events for a Lightning web component on a page, and then expose those
events in the Lightning App Builder. An admin can then configure the event by setting up interactions between the source component
and its targets right in the App Builder UI.
View Dependencies for Lightning Web Components
Use the dependencies tree viewer to see which custom components and Apex classes that a Lightning web component uses. You
can quickly see the structure of a component and navigate to the source for its dependencies.
Limit for Number of Actions in a Boxcar Request Was Added
The Lightning Component framework now returns a 413 HTTP response status code if there are more than 2,500 actions in a boxcar
request. Previously, there was no limit and a request with a larger number of actions was rare but led to a slow response time. If a
user sees this error, consider redesigning your custom component to follow best practices and reduce the number of actions in a
request.
Add User-Authorized Cookie Consent to Your Lightning Web Components
Use the lightning/userConsentCookie module to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your components.
Users can allow one or more specific cookie types: Required, Marketing, Preference, and Statistics.
DOM API Changes May Require UI Test Updates
The content and structure of HTML, CSS, and the DOM can change at any time and can’t be considered a stable API. Automated UI
tests that use tools like Selenium WebDriver to reach into component internals require your ongoing maintenance. We’re here to
help you adapt your automated UI tests for this release.
We’re enforcing two release updates. Also, we have a new release update, and an existing release update now affects Lightning
components.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide
Secure Your Components Better, Stronger, Faster with Lightning Web Security (Beta)
The Lightning Component framework introduces Lightning Web Security, a new client-side security architecture for your custom
Lightning web components. This new architecture is defined by fewer restrictions and more functionality while providing strong
sandboxing and a security posture to mitigate the most common UI attacks. The result is strong, flexible, usable security for your Lightning
web components.
Where: This change applies to custom Lightning web components in Lightning Experience and the Salesforce mobile app. Custom
Lightning web components in a managed package also use the new architecture when you enable it. Experience Cloud sites aren’t
affected if you enable this feature.
184
You can opt out of the Beta Service at any time using the same process you use to opt in.
Why: The new Lightning Web Security architecture is positioned to replace Lightning Locker for Lightning web components. It works
along with Lightning Locker, which is still used for Aura components.
Like Lightning Locker, the new security architecture blocks or modifies behavior of APIs that aren’t secure. In addition, the new architecture
supports features that Lightning Locker doesn’t.
• Cross-namespace component use. Your LWC components can import components or modules from other namespaces and use
them via composition or extension. Components are isolated in their own namespace JavaScript sandbox, but it’s transparent to
you because the security architecture performs virtual communication behind the scenes.
• Interactions with global objects. Because each namespace is given its own detached JavaScript sandbox, we can expose
document, window, and element global objects directly without secure wrappers. Changes made to the global objects in
your namespace can’t affect other components.
• Improved performance. Execution of your code in the namespace JavaScript sandbox is faster than in Lightning Locker.
• Better support of third-party JavaScript. Libraries can use techniques such as manipulating global objects while running in a
JavaScript sandbox. In Lightning Locker, such behaviors prevented use of some third-party libraries.
• Compatibility with standard JavaScript as it evolves. The JavaScript sandbox technology is built on standards. The new security
architecture doesn’t need frequent updates to keep pace as new APIs are added.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box enter Session, and then select Session Settings. On the Session Settings page, select Next
generation Lightning UI Security for LWC.
Important: Because Next Generation Lightning UI Security is a beta quality feature, we strongly recommend that you enable it
in a sandbox staging environment first. If testing shows that your components are working well in the sandbox staging environment,
turn it on in a production org. You can easily return to using Lightning Locker for LWC components by deselecting the setting.
To report issues, give feedback, and ask questions about the Next Generation Lightning UI Security beta, go to
https://sfdc.co/NextGenWebSecurity.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Develop Secure Code (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

As part of Dynamic Interactions, you can now define the events for a Lightning web component on a page, and then expose those
events in the Lightning App Builder. An admin can then configure the event by setting up interactions between the source component
and its targets right in the App Builder UI.
185
editions.
How: To expose an event from a component, you fire a standard JavaScript CustomEvent in its .js file. To make the event discoverable,
use the Dynamic Interactions–related targetConfig subtags in the component js-meta.xml file with the target
lightning__AppPage.
event
Exposes the event for Dynamic Interactions and makes it available for the component in the Lightning App Builder. The event
subtag supports the name, label, and description attributes.
• name—The name of the event as defined in the component’s .js file. If no label attribute is defined, the name value is
shown in the list of available events for the component in the Lightning App Builder.
• label—The admin-friendly label for the event.
• description—The description of the event, which displays in an i-bubble on the event label in the Lightning App Builder.
schema
Provides the shape of the event. Content in the schema subtag must be in JSON format.
Here’s a sample js-meta.xml configuration file for a custom Account List source component. It includes an itemselected
event, and its schema includes apiName and recordId as defined in the .js file.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<LightningComponentBundle xmlns="http://soap.sforce.com/2006/04/metadata">
<apiVersion>53.0</apiVersion>
<isExposed>true</isExposed>
<masterLabel>Account List</masterLabel>
<targets>
<target>lightning__AppPage</target>
</targets>
<targetConfigs>
<targetConfig targets="lightning__AppPage">
<property name="apiName" type="String"/>
<property name="listViewApiName" type="String"/>
<event name="itemselected" label="Item Selected" description="This event fires
when an item is selected.">
<schema>
{
"type": "object",
"properties": {
"recordId": {
"type": "string",
"title": "Record ID"
"description": "Enter an 18-digit record ID."
},
"apiName": {
"type": "string"
}
}
}
</schema>
</event>
</targetConfig>
</targetConfigs>
186
<description>Defines an event for an Account List component</description>

</LightningComponentBundle>
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: XML Configuration File Elements
View Dependencies for Lightning Web Components

Use the dependencies tree viewer to see which custom components and Apex classes that a Lightning web component uses. You can
quickly see the structure of a component and navigate to the source for its dependencies.
Where: This change applies to Lightning web components in Lightning Experience.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Lightning Components, and then select Lightning Components.
• To see its dependencies on the detail page, select a Lightning web component.
• To see the details for one of the dependencies, click a link in the Name column.
The dependency tree shows up to three levels of dependencies for a component. For example, you can see a component and its nested
child, grandchild, and great-grandchild components. To view deeper dependencies, click a link in the Name column for one of the
nested components.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Compose Components
Limit for Number of Actions in a Boxcar Request Was Added

The Lightning Component framework now returns a 413 HTTP response status code if there are more than 2,500 actions in a boxcar
request. Previously, there was no limit and a request with a larger number of actions was rare but led to a slow response time. If a user
sees this error, consider redesigning your custom component to follow best practices and reduce the number of actions in a request.
Where: This change applies to Aura and Lightning web components in Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic.
187
How: The framework queues up Apex actions before sending them to the server. This mechanism is largely transparent to you when
you’re writing code, but it enables the framework to minimize network traffic by batching multiple actions into one request (XHR). The
batching of actions is also known as boxcar’ing, similar to a train that couples boxcars together.
The framework uses a stack to track the actions to send to the server. When the browser finishes processing events and JavaScript on
the client, the enqueued Apex actions on the stack are sent to the server in a batch.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide: Queueing of Server-Side Actions
MDN Web Docs: 413 HTTP response status code

Use the lightning/userConsentCookie module to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your components. Users
can allow one or more specific cookie types: Required, Marketing, Preference, and Statistics.
Where: This change applies to Lightning web components used in LWR and Aura sites, accessed through Lightning Experience in
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Experience Builder on the Security & Privacy tab, turn on Allow only required cookies for this site. Your code can then give
users the ability to fine-tune consent for the cookie types that they do and don’t want to permit.
Import the userConsentCookie component method inside your custom component.
import {
setCookieConsent,
isCategoryAllowedForCurrentConsent,
} from 'lightning/userConsentCookie';
Use setCookieConsent() to set consent preferences for one or more cookie categories.
var consent = {
"Preferences" : true,
"Statistics" : true,
"Marketing" : false
}
Sfdc.Cookie.setCookieConsent(consent);
Use isCategoryAllowedForCurrentConsent() to check consent for the specified category.

isCategoryAllowedForCurrentConsent("Marketing");
SEE ALSO:
Component Reference: lightning/userConsentCookie (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
DOM API Changes May Require UI Test Updates

The content and structure of HTML, CSS, and the DOM can change at any time and can’t be considered a stable API. Automated UI tests
that use tools like Selenium WebDriver to reach into component internals require your ongoing maintenance. We’re here to help you
adapt your automated UI tests for this release.
188
Why: We’re calling out the fragility of these tests due to changes, in particular as Lightning Experience continues to evolve with modern
web standards. We understand the value that you gain from automated UI testing and the maintenance burden these changes put on
you. Salesforce has never guaranteed backward-compatible HTML, CSS, or DOM.
How: You may encounter issues in your automated UI tests, such as broken locators. For recommendations on how to fix issues, see the
Test Automation Trailblazers community group.

We’re enforcing two release updates. Also, we have a new release update, and an existing release update now affects Lightning
components.
IN THIS SECTION:
Securely Access Aura Components (Release Update)
This update ensures that an external component with access="public" is accessible only to other components within its
same namespace or to internal Salesforce components. This update was first made available in Summer ’21 and is enforced in Winter
’22.
This update enforces the scope of an OAuth token used to authenticate a Lightning app. Previously, the scope wasn’t enforced for
Lightning apps. The scope of an OAuth token is defined in a connected app. This change prevents a Lightning app from using OAuth
tokens with unintended permissions. This update was first made available in Summer ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
Enforce CORS Allowlist for Lightning Apps (Release Update)
The CORS allowlist in Setup isn’t currently enforced for Lightning apps. This update enforces the allowlist. Cross-Origin Resource
Sharing (CORS) requests to Lightning apps are blocked unless the request comes from a URL listed in your CORS allowlist. This update
was first made available in Winter ’22.
Prevent Consecutive API Navigation Calls (Release Update)
When the Prevent Consecutive API Navigation Calls release update was first made available, it was presented as only for Visualforce
pages. It now also applies to Lightning components.
Enable Secure Static Resources for Lightning Components (Release Update)
This release update has been postponed indefinitely while we change the implementation to reduce customer impact. The release
update won’t be enforced in its present form. Don’t enable it.

This update ensures that an external component with access="public" is accessible only to other components within its same
namespace or to internal Salesforce components. This update was first made available in Summer ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
When: This update was first available in Summer ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your
instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: Aura uses the access="public" flag to determine component access for custom components. Without this update, Aura
inconsistently determines component access for custom components with access="public". Fixing this issue can reveal other
issues that were previously undetected. For example, before this update, a callback that wasn’t wrapped in $A.getCallback()
could lose its context but still run successfully. After this update, if a callback loses its context, the access check fails with an error.
How: We recommend performing these testing steps in a sandbox environment to evaluate the release update’s impact and fix any
component access errors before it’s auto-enabled in Winter ’22.
189
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, then select Release Updates.
2. For Enable Aura Component Access Fix, enable the release update test run.
3. Test pages with custom components and watch for any error messages, such as Access Check Failed!, in the console log.
4. Fix any broken components.
5. When manual testing is complete, disable the release update test run and transfer the code changes to production.
6. In production, enable the release update or wait for it to auto-enable in Winter ’22.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

Where: This change applies to Lightning apps, including Lightning Out apps, that use OAuth for authentication in Lightning Experience,
Salesforce Classic, and custom mobile apps. Lightning apps include Lightning Experience and any resource with a URL that ends with
.app before any optional query string.
How: If you use an OAuth token to access a Lightning app, ensure that the OAuth scope is set to one of the following values, depending
on your app’s requirements.
• Allow access to Lightning applications (lightning)
• Provide access to custom applications (visualforce)
• Provide access to your data via the web (web)
• Full access (full). Use this option only if none of the other options are sufficient.
To test this update, we recommend working in a sandbox.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, then select Release Updates.
2. Find Enforce OAuth Scope for Lightning Apps, and click View Details or click Get Started.
3. Test the behavior of Lightning apps that use OAuth for authentication.
4. If you use a Lightning Out application, make sure that it’s still fully functional.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Authorize Apps with OAuth
Salesforce Help: OAuth Tokens and Scopes
Salesforce Help: Connected Apps
Salesforce Help: Enable OAuth Settings for API Integration
Release Updates
190

The CORS allowlist in Setup isn’t currently enforced for Lightning apps. This update enforces the allowlist. Cross-Origin Resource Sharing
(CORS) requests to Lightning apps are blocked unless the request comes from a URL listed in your CORS allowlist. This update was first
made available in Winter ’22.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Out and other Lightning apps in Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce app.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Spring ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: This update gives you more control over which cross-origin requests to your Salesforce org are allowed. CORS enables web browsers
to request resources from origins other than their own. For example, using CORS, JavaScript code at https://www.example.com
can request a resource from https://www.salesforce.com. To access Lightning Out from JavaScript code in a web browser,
add the origin requesting the code to your CORS allowlist in Setup.
How: To test this update, we recommend working in a sandbox.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates.
2. Find Enforce CORS Allowlist for Lightning Apps, and click View Details or Get Started.
3. Test that your CORS allowlist includes the external URLs that you allow to make cross-origin requests to Lightning apps in Salesforce.
Note: Find existing CORS violations by monitoring events whose EventType field equals CORS Violation Record
in the EventLogFile object. For more information on event monitoring, see this Trailhead module.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Perform Cross-Origin Requests from Web Browsers
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Use Components Outside Salesforce with Lightning Out (Beta)
Release Updates
Get Information About CORS Violation Records in the EventLogFile
Share Resources with Browser Extensions
Prevent Consecutive API Navigation Calls (Release Update)

When the Prevent Consecutive API Navigation Calls release update was first made available, it was presented as only for Visualforce
pages. It now also applies to Lightning components.
When: This update became available in Summer ’20 and is enforced in Spring ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your
How: Any Visualforce page or Lightning component that uses this API navigation pattern is impacted. Review all affected Visualforce
pages and Lightning components. Salesforce will provide a replacement pattern in the future.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

191
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Vision and Language
Where: This change applies to Aura and Lightning web components in Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, Experience Builder
sites, and all versions of the Salesforce app.
When: This update has been postponed indefinitely.
Why: To improve security, this update serves all static resources from the visualforce domain instead of the lightning domain. This
change prevents a script included in a static resource from accessing the document in the lightning domain due to the same-origin
security policy.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Aura Components Developer Guide: $Resource
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Access Static Resources
Release Updates

Integrate image recognition and natural language processing into your apps with Einstein Vision and Language APIs. Use Einstein Vision
OCR to detect text from multiple tables within an image of a page. Einstein Vision OCR support for PDF files is now generally available.
With Einstein Language, create intent models with as few as 20 examples per label. Read on to see how else Einstein gets your apps
working smarter.
IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Vision
Now you can detect text from multiple tables within a single page. And Einstein OCR support for PDF files, which was beta in the
Winter ’21 release, is now generally available. For Einstein Object Detection, the new object-detection-v2 algorithm reduces
the minimum number of bounding-box attributes required to train a dataset to 50.
Einstein Language
You can create intent models with less data—as few as 20 examples per label. Also, US Social Security numbers and credit card
numbers from eight card issuers are recognized.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Vision
Now you can detect text from multiple tables within a single page. And Einstein OCR support for PDF files, which was beta in the Winter
’21 release, is now generally available. For Einstein Object Detection, the new object-detection-v2 algorithm reduces the
minimum number of bounding-box attributes required to train a dataset to 50.
IN THIS SECTION:
You can now process images that contain a mix of tables on a single page. Previously, only one table was permitted. Use Einstein
OCR to read tabular data from an image. A single JSON response includes all the data found. Tables that span multiple pages are
processed as separate tables.
Detect Text in PDFs with Einstein OCR (Generally Available)
Use Einstein OCR (optical character recognition) to detect text in PDF format.
192

The new object-detection-v2 algorithm reduces the minimum number of bounding boxes of annotation per object
required to train a dataset to 50. Previously, the minimum needed to train and retrain data was 200 bounding boxes. We still support
the object-detection-v1 algorithm.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Introduction to Salesforce Einstein Vision

You can now process images that contain a mix of tables on a single page. Previously, only one table was permitted. Use Einstein OCR
to read tabular data from an image. A single JSON response includes all the data found. Tables that span multiple pages are processed
as separate tables.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the Salesforce app in Group, Professional,
Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Developer, and Contact Manager editions.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Detect Text
Detect Text in PDFs with Einstein OCR (Generally Available)

Use Einstein OCR (optical character recognition) to detect text in PDF format.
How: Use either the sampleLocation parameter or the sampleContent parameter. Here’s an example of a cURL call to the
OCR endpoint.
curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Bearer <TOKEN>" -F
sampleLocation="https://www.cloudkicks.com/annual_report.pdf" -F
task="text" -F modelId="OCRModel" https://api.einstein.ai/v2/vision/ocr
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: What is Einstein OCR
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Detect Text

The new object-detection-v2 algorithm reduces the minimum number of bounding boxes of annotation per object required
to train a dataset to 50. Previously, the minimum needed to train and retrain data was 200 bounding boxes. We still support the
object-detection-v1 algorithm.
How: Train or retrain datasets using one of these API calls by specifying object-detection-v2 for the algorithm parameter.
• POST /v2/vision/train
193
• POST /v2/vision/retrain
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Train a Dataset
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Retrain a Dataset
Einstein Language
You can create intent models with less data—as few as 20 examples per label. Also, US Social Security numbers and credit card numbers
from eight card issuers are recognized.
IN THIS SECTION:
Match Credit Card and US Social Security Numbers (Beta)
Use Einstein NER (beta) to recognize credit card numbers from eight issuers: American Express, Diner’s Club, Discover, Japan Credit
Bureau, Maestro Card, Mastercard, Visa, and a general purpose other card. We also support US Social Security numbers. Einstein NER
supports a range of number formats, including the presence or lack of delimiters, which gives you flexibility with some possible
variations in credit card and Social Security numbers.
Create an Einstein Intent Model with Less Data
Sometimes you don’t have much data or you don’t have the wide variety of examples required to create an accurate model. When
you create an intent dataset, which is what a model is created from, we now recommend just a minimum of 20 examples per label.
Previously, we recommended a minimum of 50 examples.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Introduction to Salesforce Einstein Language
Match Credit Card and US Social Security Numbers (Beta)

Use Einstein NER (beta) to recognize credit card numbers from eight issuers: American Express, Diner’s Club, Discover, Japan Credit
Bureau, Maestro Card, Mastercard, Visa, and a general purpose other card. We also support US Social Security numbers. Einstein NER
supports a range of number formats, including the presence or lack of delimiters, which gives you flexibility with some possible variations
in credit card and Social Security numbers.
Note: This Einstein NER feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try this Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the
Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Entity Reference
Create an Einstein Intent Model with Less Data

Sometimes you don’t have much data or you don’t have the wide variety of examples required to create an accurate model. When you
create an intent dataset, which is what a model is created from, we now recommend just a minimum of 20 examples per label. Previously,
we recommended a minimum of 50 examples.
194
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Visualforce
How: This change applies to datasets with a type of text-intent. You create an intent dataset using one of these API calls.
• Create a dataset asynchronously—POST /v2/language/datasets/upload
• Create a dataset synchronously—POST /v2/language/datasets/upload/sync
If you create an intent dataset with less data (a minimum of 20 examples per label), use either the multilingual-intent or
multilingual-intent-ood algorithm when you train the dataset to create a model.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Create a Dataset From a File Asynchronously
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Create a Dataset Synchronously
Einstein Platform Services Developer Guide: Train a Dataset
Visualforce
Increase security of your Visualforce pages by reviewing and enabling three release updates.
For more information on features affected by these enhancements, refer to the Visualforce Developer’s Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Securely Call the Visualforce Remoting API (Release Update)
The Visualforce Remoting API uses JavaScript to call methods in Apex controllers directly from Visualforce pages. To ensure that the
API is properly secured, calls now have stricter validation. This update was first made available in Spring ’21 and is enforced in Winter
’22.
Prevent Consecutive API Navigation Calls in Visualforce Pages (Release Update)
In Visualforce pages, API navigation calls can be fired consecutively, which can lead to unwanted behavior. This release update
prevents this API navigation call pattern, firing only the first navigation call. This update was first made available in Summer ’20 and
scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ’23.
Visualforce Expression Language Apex Method Access Modifier Enforcement (Release Update)
When accessing Apex methods defined by custom controllers, the Visualforce Expression Language doesn’t correctly validate the
access modifiers of the method. Developers can sometimes access unauthorized data on managed and system classes. To improve
security, this update validates the Apex method access modifier and throws an error if the Visualforce Expression Language can’t
access it. This update was first made available in Winter ’22.

The Visualforce Remoting API uses JavaScript to call methods in Apex controllers directly from Visualforce pages. To ensure that the API
is properly secured, calls now have stricter validation. This update was first made available in Spring ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
When: This update was first available in Spring ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance,
go to Trust Status, search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: To improve security of the Visualforce JavaScript Remoting API, this update modifies how the CSRF token is created for the
Visualforce $RemoteAction global variable. This validation adds more protection to API remoting calls by guest users. Also, this
update validates the {"apexType": "Object"} parameter used by the Visualforce $RemoteAction global variable against
195
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Visualforce
the Apex method parameter and throws an error if the apexType parameter is invalid. This validation prevents users from providing
Apex objects that they can’t access or providing Apex objects that don’t satisfy the Apex method parameter.
How: We recommend performing these testing steps in a sandbox environment to evaluate the impact and fix any validation errors
before it’s auto-enabled in Winter ’22.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates.
2. For Enable Visualforce JavaScript Remoting Enforcement, follow the testing steps, but don’t activate the release update yet.
3. To find all Visualforce Remoting API usage, search your application code.
The Remoting API invokes Apex controller methods with a @RemoteAction annotation. The Apex controller methods use this
signature:
@RemoteAction
global static String myMethod(String inputArgument) { ... }
The Visualforce pages use this JavaScript to invoke the Apex controller methods:
Visualforce.remoting.Manager.invokeAction(
'{!$RemoteAction.MyController.myMethod}',
myArgument,
function(result, event){...}
...
4. To see which Visualforce Remoting API calls fail validation, enable the release update test run. Manually test any page that uses
remoting. Watch for any exceptions and failed validations in the console log.
5. Review each validation failure, and take steps to correct the Visualforce Remoting API usage in your code.
The error messages identify how the validation is failing and how to fix the issue. For example, if an error message says that the
apexType value doesn’t satisfy the Apex method argument type, change the apexType value to the correct type.
6. More complex failures that don’t have a simple resolution can require you to redesign parts of your application. For more information,
see Declaring a Remote Method with Interface Parameters.
For example, if an apexType value isn’t accessible, redesign the Visualforce Remoting API usage so that you don’t use the invalid
apexType value.
7. When manual testing is complete, disable the release update test run and transfer the code changes to production.
8. In production, enable the release update or wait for it to auto-enable in Winter ’22.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

In Visualforce pages, API navigation calls can be fired consecutively, which can lead to unwanted behavior. This release update prevents
this API navigation call pattern, firing only the first navigation call. This update was first made available in Summer ’20 and scheduled to
be enforced in Spring ’22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ’23.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Winter ’23. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
196
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Apex
Why: Firing consecutive API navigation calls in a Visualforce page can lead to unwanted behavior due to competing API calls. To prevent
any issues, with this release update, only the first API navigation call is accepted. This release update ensures predictable and stable
behavior in your org.
How: Any Visualforce pages that use this API navigation pattern are impacted. Review all affected Visualforce pages. Salesforce will
provide a replacement pattern in the future. Alternatively, edit your pages to use Lightning components instead.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Visualforce Expression Language Apex Method Access Modifier Enforcement (Release

Update)
When accessing Apex methods defined by custom controllers, the Visualforce Expression Language doesn’t correctly validate the access
modifiers of the method. Developers can sometimes access unauthorized data on managed and system classes. To improve security,
this update validates the Apex method access modifier and throws an error if the Visualforce Expression Language can’t access it. This
update was first made available in Winter ’22.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Visualforce Expression Language Apex Method Access Modifier Enforcement, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Apex
Use the valueOf() Enum method to convert a specified string to an Enum constant value. Apex supports mock testing of Salesforce
Functions with the FunctionInvokeMock interface. Call invocable actions from Apex code using the Invocable.Action
class methods.
For more information on these enhancements, refer to the Apex Developer Guide and the Apex Reference Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use the valueOf() Enum Method to Convert a Specified String to an Enum Constant Value
The valueOf() enum method converts a specified string to an enum constant value. An exception is thrown if the input string
doesn’t match an enum value. In previous releases, using this method resulted in a runtime error.
Use Mock Responses to Test Salesforce Functions
Apex now supports mock testing of Salesforce Functions. Use the existing Test.setMock() method with the new
FunctionInvokeMock interface and MockFunctionInvocationFactory class methods to mock test Salesforce
Functions.
197
Call Invocable Actions from Apex (Developer Preview)

Invocable.Action is a new Apex class that allows you to call invocable actions from Apex code. For the developer preview, this feature
is available only in scratch orgs.
SEE ALSO:
Apex: New and Changed Items
Use the valueOf() Enum Method to Convert a Specified String to an Enum Constant
Value
The valueOf() enum method converts a specified string to an enum constant value. An exception is thrown if the input string
doesn’t match an enum value. In previous releases, using this method resulted in a runtime error.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: You can use the method for both system and user-defined enums. This example uses the method to convert a string to a known
season enum value.
public enum Season {WINTER, SPRING, SUMMER, FALL}
string currentSeasonInput = 'winter';

Season currentSeason = Season.valueOf(currentSeasonInput);
Use Mock Responses to Test Salesforce Functions

Apex now supports mock testing of Salesforce Functions. Use the existing Test.setMock() method with the new
FunctionInvokeMock interface and MockFunctionInvocationFactory class methods to mock test Salesforce Functions.
Function testing methods are only enabled in Salesforce orgs that are configured to work with Salesforce Functions.
Why: By default, test methods don’t support invocation of Salesforce Functions. Use mock responses to support effective testing and
mocking of Salesforce Functions integrations, while also meeting the minimum 75% Apex code coverage requirement.
How: Provide an implementation for the Functions.FunctionInvokeMock interface to specify the response sent to the
respond() method, which the Apex runtime calls to send a response for the function.
@isTest
public class FunctionsInvokeMockImpl implements functions.FunctionInvokeMock {
public functions.FunctionInvocation respond(String functionName, String payload) {
// return mock success response
String invocationId = '000000000000000';
String response = 'mockResponse';
return functions.MockFunctionInvocationFactory.createSuccessResponse(invocationId,
response);
}
}
Next, instruct the Apex runtime to send this mock response by calling Test.setMock() in your test method:
Test.setMock( functions.FunctionInvokeMock.class, new FunctionInvokeMockImpl())
The first argument to Test.setMock() is functions.FunctionInvokeMock.class, and the second argument is a

new instance of your implementation of the FunctionInvokeMock interface.
198
After the Test.setMock() method is called, Salesforce Functions that are called in the test context aren’t invoked. The mock
response specified in the respond() method is received instead.
Use the createSuccessResponse() and createErrorResponse() methods in the
MockFunctionInvocationFactory class to generate appropriate success or error messages.
Note: The mock doesn’t affect the Functions.Function.get method, which checks that the mocked function exists.
This example shows the minimal setup required for testing synchronous and asynchronous functions and is simplified to include both
function invocations and the FunctionCallback class.
@isTest
public class FunctionTest {
@isTest
static void testSyncFunctionCall() {
// Set mock class to respond to function invocations
Test.setMock( functions.FunctionInvokeMock.class, new FunctionsInvokeMockInner());
functions.Function mockedFunction = functions.Function.get('example.function');
Test.startTest();
// Synchronous function call
functions.FunctionInvocation invokeResult = mockedFunction.invoke('{}');
Test.stopTest();
// Verify that the received response contains expected mock values

System.assertEquals(functions.FunctionInvocationStatus.SUCCESS,
invokeResult.getStatus());
System.assertEquals('mockResponse', invokeResult.getResponse());
System.assertEquals('000000000000000', invokeResult.getInvocationId());
@isTest
static void testAsyncFunctionCall() {
// Set mock class to respond to function invocations
Test.setMock( functions.FunctionInvokeMock.class, new
FunctionsInvokeMockInner());
functions.Function mockedFunction = functions.Function.get('example.function2');
Test.startTest();
//Asynchronous function invocation with callback
mockedFunction.invoke('{}', new DemoCallback());
Test.stopTest();
// Include assertions here about the expected callback processing
}
public class DemoCallback implements functions.FunctionCallback {

public void handleResponse(functions.FunctionInvocation invokeResult) {
// Handle result of function invocation
199
// The callback is included in the example here for convenience

// It would normally be defined in the classes being tested
// Verify that the received response contains expected mock values

System.assertEquals(invokeResult.getStatus(),
functions.FunctionInvocationStatus.ERROR);
functions.FunctionInvocationError resultError = invokeResult.getError();
System.assertEquals('bang', invokeResult.getError().getMessage());
System.assertEquals('000000000000000', invokeResult.getInvocationId());
}
}
public class FunctionsInvokeMockInner implements functions.FunctionInvokeMock {

public functions.FunctionInvocation respond(String functionName, String payload)
{
// return mock success response
String invocationId = '000000000000000';
if(functionName == 'example.function2') {
return functions.MockFunctionInvocationFactory.createErrorResponse(
invocationId,
functions.FunctionErrorType.FUNCTION_EXCEPTION,
'bang');
}
String response = 'mockResponse';

return
functions.MockFunctionInvocationFactory.createSuccessResponse(invocationId, response);
}
}
Call Invocable Actions from Apex (Developer Preview)

Invocable.Action is a new Apex class that allows you to call invocable actions from Apex code. For the developer preview, this feature
is available only in scratch orgs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic scratch orgs.
Note: Feature is available as a developer preview. Feature isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce announces its general
availability in documentation or in press releases or public statements. All commands, parameters, and other features are subject
to change or deprecation at any time, with or without notice. Don't implement functionality developed with these commands or
tools.
How: To enable this feature in your scratch org, add a reference to CallIAFromApex in the project-scratch-def.json file in your
SFDX project.
{
"orgName": "my company", "edition": "Developer",
"features": [ "CallIAFromApex" ],
200
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes API
"settings": {
...
}
}
After you’ve added to your scratch org definition file, reference Invocable.Action in your Apex code. This example uses the standard
invocable action “chatterPost” to post a message to the current user's feed.
Invocable.Action action = Invocable.Action.createStandardAction('chatterPost');

action.setInvocationParameter('text', 'This is a test.');
action.setInvocationParameter('type', 'User');
action.setInvocationParameter('subjectNameOrId', UserInfo.getUserId());
List<Invocable.Action.Result> results = action.invoke();
if (results.size() > 0 && results[0].isSuccess()) {
System.debug('Created feed item with ID: ' +
results[0].getOutputParameters().get('feedItemId'));
}
This example calls a custom invocable action named Doubler that returns a number that’s twice the input value.
Invocable.Action action = Invocable.Action.createCustomAction('apex', 'Doubler');

action.setInvocationParameter('input', 1);
List<Invocable.Action.Result> results = action.invoke();
if (results.size() > 0 && results[0].isSuccess()) {

System.debug('Result is: ' + results[0].getOutputParameters().get('output'));
}
SEE ALSO:
Invocable Namespace (Developer Preview)
API
Legacy versions 7.0 though 20.0 of APIs are deprecated and no longer supported. Legacy versions 21.0 through 30.0 will be deprecated
in Summer ’22.
IN THIS SECTION:
Legacy API Versions 7.0 Through 20.0 Have Been Retired
Versions 7.0 through 20.0 of the Salesforce Platform API are now deprecated and are no longer supported by Salesforce.
Legacy API Versions 21.0 Through 30.0 Are Being Retired
In the Summer ’22 release, versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API will be deprecated and no longer supported by
Salesforce.
Note the updated referenceTo values on describeSObjects() in Tooling API
In API version 53.0 and later, the referenceTo values of a Field object within a Tooling REST or SOAP API
describeSObjects() response now include the correct API names. Previously, the referenceTo values included incorrect
names of some metadata types that each Field object is able to reference.
201
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes API
Legacy API Versions 7.0 Through 20.0 Have Been Retired

Versions 7.0 through 20.0 of the Salesforce Platform API are now deprecated and are no longer supported by Salesforce.
Where: This change affects these API versions:
Bulk API
16.0, 17.0, 18.0, 19.0, 20.0
SOAP API
7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0,11.1, 12.0, 13.0, 14.0, 15.0, 16.0, 17.0, 18.0, 19.0, 20.0
REST API
20.0
Note: This affects all REST APIs that use URIs beneath /services/data/vXX.X/.
This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Professional (with API access enabled), Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. It affects all API-enabled org editions.
When: You can continue to use these legacy API versions until Summer ’22 is released. At that time these legacy versions will be retired
and unavailable. When these legacy versions are retired, applications consuming these versions of the APIs will experience disruption.
The requests will fail with an error message indicating that the requested endpoint has been deactivated.
How: Before the Summer ’22 release, customers and partners must modify or upgrade their applications to function with more current
API versions.
For more information, see Salesforce Platform API Versions 7.0 through 20.0 Retirement.

In the Summer ’22 release, versions 21.0 through 30.0 of the Salesforce Platform API will be deprecated and no longer supported by
Salesforce.
Where: This change affects these API versions:
Bulk API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
SOAP API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
REST API
21.0, 22.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 26.0, 27.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0
Note: This affects all REST APIs that use URIs beneath /services/data/vXX.X/, including:
• Bulk API
• Connect REST API
• IoT REST API
• Lightning Platform REST API
• Metadata API
• Place Order REST API
• Reports and Dashboards REST API
• Tableau CRM REST API
202
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Packaging
• Tooling API
This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Professional (with API access enabled), Enterprise, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions. It affects all API-enabled org editions.
When: You can continue to use these legacy API versions until Summer ’23 is released. At that time, these legacy versions will be retired
and unavailable. When these legacy versions are retired, applications consuming these versions of the APIs will experience disruption.
The requests will fail with an error message indicating that the requested endpoint has been deactivated.
How:
• Before the Summer ’22 release, customers and partners should modify or upgrade their applications to function with more current
API versions available to prevent disruption. Moving to newer versions of our APIs offers advanced capabilities with improved security
and performance.
• Before the Summer ’23 release, customers and partners must modify or upgrade their applications to function with more current
API versions.
For more information, see Salesforce Platform API Versions 21.0 through 30.0 Retirement.
Note the updated referenceTo values on describeSObjects() in Tooling API

In API version 53.0 and later, the referenceTo values of a Field object within a Tooling REST or SOAP API
describeSObjects() response now include the correct API names. Previously, the referenceTo values included incorrect
names of some metadata types that each Field object is able to reference.
SEE ALSO:
Tooling API Developer Guide: describeSObjects() SOAP Call
Packaging
Remove more metadata components from your second-generation managed packages. Test out the extended developer preview for
package conversion from first-generation to second-generation managed packages. Simplify package development by creating and
specifying an org shape.
IN THIS SECTION:
Remove Metadata Components from Second-Generation Managed Packages (Beta)
Remove metadata components that you no longer want in your second-generation managed packages (2GP). The list of metadata
components that can be removed from 2GP packages is now expanded.
Get an Early Look at Converting First-Generation Managed Packages (Developer Preview)
This extended developer preview provides a sneak peek into how we’re designing the conversion of first-generation managed
packages to second-generation managed packages. With more capabilities, you can convert a first-generation managed package
and install the newly created second-generation managed package in a scratch org. In Winter ’22, we’re accepting new participants,
try it out, and share your experiences with us.
Simplify Package Development by Creating and Specifying an Org Shape
If your package’s metadata depends on a complex set of features, settings, or licenses, it can be difficult to declaratively specify these
dependencies in a scratch org definition file. Instead, create an org shape of your production org, or another development org, and
specify that source org’s ID in your scratch org definition file. During package creation, we mimic the source org’s environment when
we build and validate your package’s metadata.
203
Manage First-Generation Managed Packages More Easily

Now you can sort your list of packages on the Package Manager page in Setup. You can also filter by beta or released, or search by
version name, version number, or component name.
View Your Progress During Package Uninstalls
The Installed Packages page in Setup now helps identify whether a package uninstall request is stuck. Subscribers can see which
specific phase of the uninstall process they’re in and how many components have been removed. Subscribers can also cancel an
uninstall that is in progress.
Remove Invalid Characters from Managed Package Translations
To prevent issues with displaying translated text in Salesforce, the validation checks for the CustomObjectTranslation metadata type
no longer accept these characters: #, $, %, ;, <, =, >, [, ], ^, _, `, |, and ~. To prevent package deployment issues, remove those
invalid characters from translation text in your managed package.
Remove Metadata Components from Second-Generation Managed Packages (Beta)

Remove metadata components that you no longer want in your second-generation managed packages (2GP). The list of metadata
components that can be removed from 2GP packages is now expanded.
Where: This change applies to second-generation managed packages.
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms. You can provide feedback and suggestions
for Remove Metadata Components from 2GP in the Managed Packages group in the Partner Community.
How: To enable this feature, log a case at https://partners.salesforce.com/partnerSupport. After this feature is enabled, remove the
metadata component’s source file from your Salesforce DX project, and create a new package version. To learn which metadata
components you can remove, see Remove Metadata Components from Second-Generation Managed Packages in the Salesforce DX
Developer Guide.
Get an Early Look at Converting First-Generation Managed Packages (Developer

Preview)
This extended developer preview provides a sneak peek into how we’re designing the conversion of first-generation managed packages
to second-generation managed packages. With more capabilities, you can convert a first-generation managed package and install the
newly created second-generation managed package in a scratch org. In Winter ’22, we’re accepting new participants, try it out, and
share your experiences with us.
Where: This change applies to managed package versions created using Salesforce CLI or Tooling API.
Note: First-Generation Managed Package Conversion is available as a developer preview. It isn’t generally available unless or until
Salesforce announces its general availability in documentation or in press releases or public statements. All commands, parameters,
and other features are subject to change or deprecation at any time, with or without notice. Don't implement functionality
developed with these commands or tools.
How: For details on participating in this developer preview, see the sidebar in the 1GP=>2GP Migration - Developer Preview group in
the Partner Community.
204
Simplify Package Development by Creating and Specifying an Org Shape

If your package’s metadata depends on a complex set of features, settings, or licenses, it can be difficult to declaratively specify these
dependencies in a scratch org definition file. Instead, create an org shape of your production org, or another development org, and
specify that source org’s ID in your scratch org definition file. During package creation, we mimic the source org’s environment when
we build and validate your package’s metadata.
Where: This change applies to unlocked and second-generation managed packages.
Note: This feature depends on Org Shape for Scratch Orgs, which is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in
its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
How: Org Shape for Scratch Orgs is a beta feature. It doesn’t currently include every feature, setting, and limit. In these cases, you must
manually specify these features and settings in your scratch org definition file. Before using this feature, get familiar with how Org Shape
for Scratch Orgs works. Then enable the scratch org setting in your source org, generate the org shape, and edit your scratch org definition
file to include the org name and 15-character source org ID.
{
"orgName": "Acme",
"sourceOrg": "00DB1230400Ifx5"
}
Manage First-Generation Managed Packages More Easily

Now you can sort your list of packages on the Package Manager page in Setup. You can also filter by beta or released, or search by version
name, version number, or component name.
Where: This change applies to first-generation managed packages.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Package Manager, and then select Package Manager.
View Your Progress During Package Uninstalls

The Installed Packages page in Setup now helps identify whether a package uninstall request is stuck. Subscribers can see which specific
phase of the uninstall process they’re in and how many components have been removed. Subscribers can also cancel an uninstall that
is in progress.
Where: This change applies to unlocked packages and first- and second-generation managed packages.
How: To view in-progress package uninstalls, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then select
Installed Packages.
Remove Invalid Characters from Managed Package Translations

To prevent issues with displaying translated text in Salesforce, the validation checks for the CustomObjectTranslation metadata type no
longer accept these characters: #, $, %, ;, <, =, >, [, ], ^, _, `, |, and ~. To prevent package deployment issues, remove those invalid
characters from translation text in your managed package.
Where: This change applies to unlocked and first- and second-generation managed packages with translations.
How: If your managed package includes translations, test deploying your package in a sandbox that’s on Winter ’22. If the deployment
fails due to invalid characters in CustomObjectTranslation, review the translations included in your package and remove the invalid
characters.
205
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Platform Development Tools

Build applications collaboratively and deliver continuously with Salesforce Developer Experience (DX), the open and integrated experience
that makes development on the Customer 360 Platform easy.
IN THIS SECTION:
The Salesforce DX toolset includes Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code and Salesforce CLI. Pick the tool that works best for
your team and meets your business needs. We release new versions of both tools weekly.

The Salesforce DX toolset includes Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code and Salesforce CLI. Pick the tool that works best for your
team and meets your business needs. We release new versions of both tools weekly.
Where: This change applies to all editions.
Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code
This extension pack includes tools for developing on the Customer 360 Platform in the lightweight, extensible VS Code editor. Read
the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.
Salesforce CLI
Use Salesforce CLI to create environments for development and testing, synchronize source code, run tests, and control your
application lifecycle. Read the weekly release notes to learn about recent updates.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Extensions for Visual Studio Code
Salesforce CLI Setup Guide
Salesforce CLI Command Reference
Salesforce DX Developer Guide

The Salesforce Lightning Design System (SLDS) includes the resources to create user interfaces consistent with Salesforce Lightning
principles, design language, and best practices.
We frequently update the existing component behavior and fix bugs. For the latest changes, see What’s New in the Lightning Design
System documentation. That page lists the changes and when they were completed. The changes are also rolled up into the next major
Salesforce release. Here are some highlights for Winter ’22.
IN THIS SECTION:
Accessibility Updates for Selection List Components
In accordance with ARIA 1.2 guidance, the input was replaced with button in components that contain select-only comboboxes.
Lightning Design System Component Blueprint Updates
Get more out of SLDS component blueprints and utilities with these enhancements and bug fixes.
206
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Lightning Design System
Accessibility Updates for Selection List Components

In accordance with ARIA 1.2 guidance, the input was replaced with button in components that contain select-only comboboxes.
Where: This change applies to these component blueprints.
• Datetime Picker
• Docked Composer
• Dynamic Menu
• Expression
• Global Header
• List builder
• Lookups
• Picklist
• Rich Text Editor
• Timepicker
Lightning Design System Component Blueprint Updates

Get more out of SLDS component blueprints and utilities with these enhancements and bug fixes.
Buttons
Added aria-pressed attribute to stateful button variants.
Cards
Added annotations for Einstein themed cards.
Combobox
Changed the slds-combobox__input element from input to button per ARIA 1.2 guidance for select-only comboboxes.
Updated to ARIA 1.2 compliance, where these attributes are moved to input or button in the case of select-only:
role="combobox", aria-expanded, aria-haspopup="listbox".
Changed the @restrict annotation of .slds-combobox__input from .slds-combobox input to
.slds-combobox__form-element input,.slds-combobox__form-element button.
Changed the @restrict annotation of .slds-combobox__input-value from .slds-combobox input to
.slds-combobox__input.
Data Tables
Changed the aria-live value from assertive to polite.
Added aria-label and aria-labelledby to allow adding additional table context for screen readers.
Datepickers
Added examples for Required and Required with Error states.
Added hover style for dates.
Added aria-label to provide the full DD MM YYYY text of the date.
Fixed missing attribute aria-current="date" when today's date falls inside of a selected range.
Datetime Picker
Added hover style for dates.
Added aria-label to provide the full DD MM YYYY text of the date.
207
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Lightning Design System
Removed the usage of the deprecated combobox. The Datetime Picker now uses the current combobox.
Dynamic Menu
Removed the usage of the deprecated combobox. The Dynamic Menu now uses the current combobox.
Form Element
Correctly position help text under the corresponding input when in horizontal layout.
Input
Created new class slds-input_faux to style read-only "inputs" where necessary for accessibility best practices, like combobox.
List Builder
Removed the usage of the deprecated combobox. The List Builder now uses the current combobox.
Updated combobox to ARIA 1.2 compliance.
Lookups
Menus
Added aria-expanded attribute to menu triggers with value dependent on menu's open state.
Panels
Added aria-pressed attribute to Panel toggle button.
Picklist
Removed the usage of the deprecated combobox. The Picklist now uses the current combobox.
Progress Bar
Added aria-label attribute to the div with role of progressbar to meet accessibility requirements.
Progress Indicator
Progress Ring
Completed progress rings now use color-background-success-dark design token.
Rich Text Editor
Removed the usage of the deprecated combobox. The Rich Text Editor now uses the current combobox.
Setup Assistant
Updated checkbox toggle examples to use Off/On label and updated header text in alignment with text standards.
Switched the variant of the progress bar used in setup assistant from success to base.
Timepicker
Removed the usage of the deprecated combobox. The Timepicker now uses the current combobox.
Toast
Corrected accessibility information regarding the usage of the role attribute.
Vertical Navigation
Replaced checked radio group navigation item background token with BRAND_BACKGROUND_PRIMARY branding token.
Welcome Mat
208
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Functions
Salesforce Functions extends the power of Salesforce with elastic compute and open language flexibility. Functions allows you to build
digital experiences with common abstractions in a single environment for code and low code.
IN THIS SECTION:
Unleash the Power of Elastic Compute with Salesforce Functions (Generally Available)
Salesforce Functions empowers teams to focus on delivering apps and business logic fast instead of managing infrastructure. Your
Salesforce app can now use additional programming languages and open-source or third-party frameworks, saving you development
time and effort.
Unleash the Power of Elastic Compute with Salesforce Functions (Generally Available)
Salesforce Functions empowers teams to focus on delivering apps and business logic fast instead of managing infrastructure. Your
Salesforce app can now use additional programming languages and open-source or third-party frameworks, saving you development
time and effort.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Professional, Performance,
Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: We’ll announce when Salesforce Functions becomes generally available. Look for further announcements and details on
developer.salesforce.com and in the Salesforce Functions Trailblazer Community.
Why: With Functions, you can deploy code in a serverless environment, enabling you to run computationally heavy operations on
demand. Functions also enable teams to accelerate productivity by making it easy for developers to adopt common industry languages
and their supporting ecosystems, as well as the development tools of their choice. Salesforce Functions are fully managed by the
Salesforce Platform, which takes care of everything else necessary to invoke your code in a secure, auto-scaling environment.
How: Functions are just another element of your Salesforce project and are deployed easily with simple Salesforce CLI commands. Write
JavaScript, Typescript, or Java code that uses Salesforce Functions SDKs to communicate with your org. Then, invoke your Function using
Apex, and the Salesforce Functions infrastructure authenticates and runs your Function on demand.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Functions Documentation Center
Analyze Tableau CRM analytics usage data with AppExchange App Analytics. Gain new insights into your subscriber behavior with
AppExchange App Analytics package usage summary fields. Switch from Usage Metrics to AppExchange App Analytics to access deeper
managed package usage data. Increase the power of your managed package usage data with the AppExchange App Analytics Developer
Cookbook.
IN THIS SECTION:
Analyze Tableau CRM Lens and Dashboard Usage with AppExchange App Analytics
AppExchange App Analytics helps you gain insight into how subscribers are using your managed packages. The available usage
data now includes Tableau CRM data. Filter your package log file data by AnalyticsAssetView log_record_type.
Explore by AnalyticsLens and AnalyticsDashboard custom_entity_type in your package usage summaries
and package log files.
209
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes AppExchange Partners
Learn More About Subscriber Orgs with New AppExchange App Analytics Package Summary Fields
Drill deeper into your monthly AppExchange App Analytics package usage summary data with new subscriber
organization_edition, organization_name, and organization_status fields.
Your users can no longer retrieve new Usage Metrics data in their reporting org. Historical Usage Metrics data is available through
the Winter ’22 release. Enable AppExchange App Analytics in your security-reviewed managed packages to retrieve usage data about
how subscribers interact with your AppExchange solutions.
Deepen Your Analysis with the AppExchange App Analytics Developer Cookbook
Use the cookbook to build Tableau CRM recipes to integrate your License Management App and AppExchange App Analytics data.
Then extend your analysis and insights by building App Analytics recipes for use on Tableau CRM dashboards.
Analyze Tableau CRM Lens and Dashboard Usage with AppExchange App Analytics
AppExchange App Analytics helps you gain insight into how subscribers are using your managed packages. The available usage data
now includes Tableau CRM data. Filter your package log file data by AnalyticsAssetView log_record_type. Explore by
AnalyticsLens and AnalyticsDashboard custom_entity_type in your package usage summaries and package
log files.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Developer edition. AppExchange App Analytics is available
only for managed packages that have passed security review.
Learn More About Subscriber Orgs with New AppExchange App Analytics Package
Summary Fields
Drill deeper into your monthly AppExchange App Analytics package usage summary data with new subscriber
organization_edition, organization_name, and organization_status fields.
Why: Previously, AppExchange App Analytics package usage summary data allowed you only to identify subscribers by
organization_id. With these additional fields, you can learn more about your subscribers’ behavior.

Your users can no longer retrieve new Usage Metrics data in their reporting org. Historical Usage Metrics data is available through the
Winter ’22 release. Enable AppExchange App Analytics in your security-reviewed managed packages to retrieve usage data about how
subscribers interact with your AppExchange solutions.
How: To activate AppExchange App Analytics, log a case. Log in to the Salesforce Partner Community, select Support, and then click
New Case. Select Other AppExchange Topics | Create a Case. Then select Enable App Analytics from the Subtopic picklist.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Usage Metrics Retirement
210
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Change Data Capture
Deepen Your Analysis with the AppExchange App Analytics Developer Cookbook
Use the cookbook to build Tableau CRM recipes to integrate your License Management App and AppExchange App Analytics data. Then
extend your analysis and insights by building App Analytics recipes for use on Tableau CRM dashboards.
Change Data Capture

Install managed packages released from AppExchange without consuming the default entity selection allocation.
IN THIS SECTION:
Change Data Capture Entity Selections from AppExchange Packages No Longer Count Against Your Allocation
You can install a managed package released from AppExchange containing Change Data Capture entity selections even if you reach
the default allocation for the selected entities. AppExchange package installation errors caused by exceeding that allocation no
longer occur.
Change Data Capture Entity Selections from AppExchange Packages No Longer Count
Against Your Allocation
You can install a managed package released from AppExchange containing Change Data Capture entity selections even if you reach
the default allocation for the selected entities. AppExchange package installation errors caused by exceeding that allocation no longer
occur.
Note:
• This change applies only to managed packages released from AppExchange. It doesn’t apply to unmanaged packages or
managed packages not released from AppExchange.
• The entity selection allocation is still enforced in the package development org.
Platform Events
Check out the pilot for filtering platform event streams with channels.
IN THIS SECTION:
Filter Your Stream of Platform Events with Channels (Pilot)
Receive only the event messages that match a predefined filter on a custom channel. Create a channel and configure it with a
complex filter. CometD subscribers to the channel receive a filtered stream of events. With fewer events delivered to subscribers,
event processing is optimized. Also, CometD subscribers can make more efficient use of the event delivery allocation.
Filter Your Stream of Platform Events with Channels (Pilot)

Receive only the event messages that match a predefined filter on a custom channel. Create a channel and configure it with a complex
filter. CometD subscribers to the channel receive a filtered stream of events. With fewer events delivered to subscribers, event processing
is optimized. Also, CometD subscribers can make more efficient use of the event delivery allocation.
211
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes New and Changed Items for Developers
Why: The pilot was offered last release. In this release, we made these enhancements for the filter expression.
• Text field values must be enclosed within single quotes. Previously, you couldn’t use single quotes for Text field values. This change
breaks any filters that you’ve set up in API v52.0. Make sure that you add single quotes to your Text field values to previously defined
filters.
• Text field values are case-sensitive. Previously, they were case-insensitive.
• Support for a complex filter with up to five field-value pairs joined by the AND operator.
• Support for these comparison operators (= continues to be supported):
– !=
– >
– <
– >=
– <=
• Support for these additional field types (Text, Text Area (Long), and Number continue to be supported):
– Checkbox
– Date
– Date/Time
How: An administrator with the Customize Application permission can configure stream filtering using Tooling API or Metadata API. For
the pilot, only one filter and one custom platform event are supported per channel. To create a channel, use PlatformEventChannel. To
add a filter expression for a custom platform event, use PlatformEventChannelMember.
Example filter expressions in the PlatformEventChannelMember.FilterExpression field:
City__c='San Francisco' AND Amount__c>10.50 AND Has_Shipped__c=true
AND Delivery_Date__c > 2021-07-14T09:30:11-08:00
Note:
• Custom channels and channel members are shared features with Change Data Capture. As a result, for the pilot only, Change
Data Capture allocations are used as part of the platform event stream filter configuration. Each unique platform event you
add to a channel counts against the default allocation of 5 selected entities. Each channel counts against the maximum number
of 100 custom channels.
• This pilot feature is supported for custom platform events that you define, but it’s not supported for standard platform events
or change data capture events.
• This pilot feature is supported for CometD subscribers, but it’s not supported for other types of subscribers, such as Apex
triggers, flows, and processes.
New and Changed Items for Developers

Here is where you can find new and changed objects, calls, classes, components, commands, and more that help you customize Salesforce
features.
212
IN THIS SECTION:
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items
Build UI easily with these new and changed resources.
These classes, enums, and interfaces are new or have changes.
ConnectApi (Connect in Apex): New and Changed Classes and Enums
Create custom experiences in Salesforce using Connect in Apex. Take advantage of new B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience
functionality, including promotions, primary carts, and order summary adjustments. Check out Experience Cloud Microsites (pilot)
and externally managed accounts and Salesforce Scheduler updates.
API: New and Changed Items
Access more data objects and metadata types in API version 53.0.
Lightning Components: New and Changed Items

Build UI easily with these new and changed resources.
IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed Lightning Web Components
Build UI easily with these new and changed components.
New and Changed Modules for Lightning Web Components
Modules enable you to do more with Lightning web components.
New and Changed Aura Components
New and Changed Lightning Web Components

Changed Lightning Web Components

The following components have changed.
lightning-accordion-section
On desktop screens, the section title now truncates and displays with an ellipsis when it’s too long to display in the viewport. To see
the full text, hover over the section title with the mouse. On mobile devices, long section titles wrap to multiple lines because hover
text isn’t available.
lightning-button
This attribute is new.
• aria-labelledby—Specifies the ID or list of IDs of the element or elements that contain visible descriptive text to describe
the button.
lightning-helptext
This attribute has changed.
• icon-variant—The inverse variant is now supported. Use this variant to add a white fill for dark backgrounds.
lightning-input-field
This field type is now supported.
213
• Time—An input field that displays time selection in 15-minute increments. The time format is automatically validated against
the user’s Salesforce locale. On mobile devices, time fields use native mobile time pickers.
• field-name—The Name compound field is now supported for the User object. Previously, you had to include both the
FirstName and LastName fields.
lightning-output-field
• Time—Displays the formatted time based on the user’s locale.
lightning-tree-grid
This attribute is new for the component.
• aria-label—Labels the component for assistive technology. The attribute and its value are passed down to the rendered
<table> element.
This attribute is new for the columns property.
• wrapText—Specifies whether text in a column is wrapped instead of clipped when the table renders. Wrapped text vertically
expands a row to reveal its full content. You can’t set the number of wrapped lines to display as you can with
lightning-datatable.
SEE ALSO:
Component Library
New and Changed Modules for Lightning Web Components

Modules enable you to do more with Lightning web components.
New Module
The following module is now available.
lightning/userConsentCookie
This module includes two exported functions, isCategoryAllowedForCurrentConsent and setCookieConsent.
Use these exported functions to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your components for an Experience Cloud site.
• isCategoryAllowedForCurrentConsent—Check consent for a single cookie category.
• setCookieConsent—Grant or deny consent for one or more cookie categories.
import { LightningElement, track } from 'lwc';
import { ShowToastEvent } from 'lightning/platformShowToastEvent';
import {isCategoryAllowedForCurrentConsent,setCookieConsent}
from 'lightning/userConsentCookie'
For more information, see Add User-Authorized Cookie Consent to Your Lightning Web Components on page 188.
Changed Modules
The following modules have a new wire adapter or JavaScript function.
lightning/analyticsWaveApi (Beta)
This module includes new wire adapters and methods for implementing Tableau CRM connectors and connected objects functionality.
The new wire adapters are:
214
• getDataConnector— Returns a Tableau CRM connector by ID.

• getDataConnectors— Returns a collection of Tableau CRM connectors.
• getDataConnectorSourceFields— Returns a collection of Tableau CRM connector source fields by connector ID and
source object name.
• getDataConnectorSourceObject— Returns a Tableau CRM connector source object by connector ID and source
object name.
• getDataConnectorSourceObjects— Returns a collection of Tableau CRM connector source objects by connector
ID.
• getDataConnectorStatus— Returns the status for a Tableau CRM connector by connector ID.
• getDataConnectorTypes— Returns a collection of Tableau CRM connector types.
• getReplicatedFields— Returns a collection of fields for the specified Tableau CRM connected object.
The new methods are:
• createDataConnector— Creates a Tableau CRM connector instance.
• createReplicatedDataset— Creates a Tableau CRM replicated dataset, also known as a connected object.
• deleteReplicatedDataset— Deletes an existing Tableau CRM replicated dataset, also known as a connected object,
by ID.
• ingestDataConnector— Triggers the Tableau CRM connector to run a data sync by connector ID.
• updateDataConnector— Updates an existing Tableau CRM connector instance by ID.
• updateReplicatedDataset— Updates an existing Tableau CRM connected object by ID.
• updateReplicatedFields— Updates the fields for a Tableau CRM connected object by ID.
Use these wire adapters and methods to retrieve, create, and update Tableau CRM connector and connected objects and to run
connector data syncs.
import { LightningElement, api, wire } from "lwc";
import { getReplicatedDataset } from 'lightning/analyticsWaveApi';
export default class GetReplicatedDataset extends LightningElement {

@api rdId; // or fetch the ID
@wire(getReplicatedDataset, {id: '$rdId'})
onGetReplicatedDataset({data, error}) {
if (error) { console.log(getReplicatedDataset(${rdId}) ERROR:', error); }
else if (data) {
// Display or process the query results
console.log('(getReplicatedDataset(${rdId}) RESPONSE:', data);
}
}
}
New and Changed Aura Components

Changed Aura Components

The following components have changed.
215
lightning:accordionSection
On desktop screens, the section title now truncates and displays with an ellipsis when it’s too long to display in the viewport. To see
the full text, hover over the section title with the mouse. On mobile devices, long section titles wrap to multiple lines because hover
text isn’t available.
lightning:helptext
• iconVariant—The inverse variant is now supported. Use this variant to add a white fill for dark backgrounds.
lightning:inputField
• Time—An input field that displays time selection in 15-minute increments. The time format is automatically validated against
the user’s Salesforce locale. On mobile devices, time fields use native mobile time pickers.
• fieldName—The Name compound field is now supported for the User object. Previously, you had to include both the
FirstName and LastName fields.
lightning:outputField
• Time—Displays the formatted time based on the user’s locale.
lightning:treeGrid
This attribute is new for the component.
• ariaLabel—Labels the component for assistive technology. The attribute and its value are passed down as aria-label
in the rendered <table> element.
This attribute is new for the columns property.
• wrapText—Specifies whether text in a column is wrapped instead of clipped when the table renders. Wrapped text vertically
expands a row to reveal its full content. You can’t set the number of wrapped lines to display as you can with
lightning:datatable.
SEE ALSO:
Component Library

These classes, enums, and interfaces are new or have changes.
For more information, refer to the Apex Reference Guide.
IN THIS SECTION:
Cache Namespace
The Cache namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
Functions Namespace
The Functions namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
LxScheduler Namespace
The LxScheduler namespace has these new methods.
216
System Namespace
The System namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
The new Invocable namespace is used for calling invocable actions. It has these classes and methods.
SEE ALSO:
Apex: New Features
Cache Namespace
The Cache namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
New Exceptions
Throw an exception when execution of the cache builder fails
Use the new Cache.CacheBuilderExecutionException exception.
Changed Exceptions
Throw an exception when an incorrectly formatted key is passed to the Cache.Session or Cache.Org methods
Use the changed Cache.InvalidParamException exception, which includes extended checks for incorrect format of the
key parameter.
Functions Namespace
The Functions namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
New Classes
Use the MockFunctionInvocationFactory class in mock testing of Salesforce Functions
Use the createSuccessResponse(invocationId,message) and
createErrorResponse(invocationId,functionsErrorType,errorMsg) methods to generate messages
for mock testing of Salesforce Functions.
New Interfaces
Implement the FunctionInvokeMock interface to mock Salesforce Functions responses during testing
Specify an appropriate mock response in the FunctionInvokeMock.respond(functionName,payload) method.
LxScheduler Namespace
The LxScheduler namespace has these new methods.
New Methods in Existing Classes

Track requests from external systems using correlation ID
Use the new setCorrelationId(correlationId) method in the
lxscheduler.GetAppointmentCandidatesInputBuilder and
lxscheduler.GetAppointmentSlotsInputBuilder classes.
217
Limit the number of service resources to show during appointment scheduling when appointment distribution is enabled
Use the new setResourceLimitApptDistribution(resourceLimitApptDistribution) method in the
lxscheduler.GetAppointmentCandidatesInputBuilder class.
System Namespace
The System namespace has these new or changed classes, methods, interfaces, enums, or exceptions.
New or Changed Methods in Existing Classes

Get information about the context user’s package access
Use the new hasPackageLicense(packageId) method to verify if the context user has package access through the
assignment of a managed package license.

The new Invocable namespace is used for calling invocable actions. It has these classes and methods.
Note: Feature is available as a developer preview. Feature isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce announces its general
availability in documentation or in press releases or public statements. All commands, parameters, and other features are subject
to change or deprecation at any time, with or without notice. Don't implement functionality developed with these commands or
tools.
New Classes
Call invocable actions from Apex code
The new Invocable.Action class has these methods:
Create an empty invocation in preparation for making an action call
Use the Invocable.Action.addInvocation() method to create an empty invocation to which parameters can be
added.
Clear the existing invocations from the action
Use the Invocable.Action.clearInvocation() method.
Create a wrapper for a custom invocable action
Use the Invocable.Action.createCustomAction(type, name) method.
Create a wrapper for a custom invocable action in a specified namespace
Use the Invocable.Action.createCustomAction(type,namespace, name) method.
Create a wrapper for a standard invocable action
Use the Invocable.Action.createStandardAction(type) method to create a wrapper for a Salesforce standard
invocable action.
Get the name of an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.getName() method returns a string with the name of an invocable action.
Get the namespace of an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.getNamespace() method returns a string with the namespace of an invocable action. This
method applies to custom invocable actions only.
Get the type of an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.getType() method returns a string with the invocable action type.
218
Invoke an invocable action from Apex code

The Invocable.Action.invoke() method returns an Invocable.Action.Result object.
Determine whether an invocable action is standard
The Invocable.Action.isStandard() method returns true if the invocable action is a Salesforce standard invocable
action.
Set a value for an invocable action parameter
The Invocable.Action.setInvocationParameter(parameterName, parameterValue) method sets
a named parameter to the specified value.
Initialize the invocation for an action
The Invocable.Action.setInvocations(List<Map<String, Object>> invocations) method
initializes the invocations for an action from a preexisting list of invocations.
Return the invocable action
The Invocable.Action.Result.getAction() method returns the action that was invoked and caused a result to
be returned.
Provides error information from invocable actions called from Apex code
The new Invocable.Action.Error class has these methods:
Get the error code returned by an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.Error.getCode() method returns a string containing an error code returned by an invocable
action.
Get the error message returned by an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.Error.getMessage() method returns a string containing the error message returned by
an invocable action.
Provides results from invocable actions called from Apex code
The new Invocable.Action.Result class has these methods:
Get a list of the parameter values set for an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.Result.getInvocationParameters() method returns a list that contains the input
parameter values for each invocation of an action. Each map in the list contains a key for the name of each input parameter.
Get a list of the parameter values returned by an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.Result.getOutputParameters() method returns a list that contains the result for
each invocation of an action. Each map in the list contains a key for the name of each output parameter.
Determine if an invocable action ran without errors
The Invocable.Action.Result.isSuccess() method returns true when the invocable action ran successfully.
Get errors that were returned by an invocable action
The Invocable.Action.Result.getErrors() method returns a list of Invocable.Action.Error objects.

Create custom experiences in Salesforce using Connect in Apex. Take advantage of new B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience
functionality, including promotions, primary carts, and order summary adjustments. Check out Experience Cloud Microsites (pilot) and
externally managed accounts and Salesforce Scheduler updates.
Many Connect REST API resource actions are exposed as static methods on Apex classes in the ConnectApi namespace. These
methods use other ConnectApi classes to input and return information. We refer to the ConnectApi namespace as Connect in
Apex.
219
IN THIS SECTION:
Simplified Connect in Apex Release Notes
We streamlined the Connect in Apex release notes to get you started faster with new and changed classes. The New and Changed
Connect in Apex Classes section now includes relevant new input and output class information. Properties and property descriptions
for new input and output classes and values for new enums are no longer included in the release notes. Changed input and output
classes and changed enums continue to be documented in the release notes.
New and Changed Connect in Apex Classes
These classes are new or have changes.
Changed Connect in Apex Input Classes
These input classes have changes.
Changed Connect in Apex Output Classes
These output classes have changes.
Changed Connect in Apex Enums
These enums have changes.
SEE ALSO:
Connect REST API
Apex Reference Guide: ConnectApi Namespace
Connect REST API Developer Guide
Simplified Connect in Apex Release Notes

We streamlined the Connect in Apex release notes to get you started faster with new and changed classes. The New and Changed
Connect in Apex Classes section now includes relevant new input and output class information. Properties and property descriptions
for new input and output classes and values for new enums are no longer included in the release notes. Changed input and output
classes and changed enums continue to be documented in the release notes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app.
New and Changed Connect in Apex Classes

These classes are new or have changes.

These new methods are in the ConnectApi.CommerceBuyerExperience class.
Get adjustments for an order summary
• getOrderSummaryAdjustments(webstoreId, orderSummaryId)
• getOrderSummaryAdjustments(webstoreId, orderSummaryId, effectiveAccountId)
New output class: ConnectApi.OrderSummaryAdjustmentCollection
Get adjustments for order items
• getOrderItemSummaryAdjustments(webstoreId, orderSummaryId,
orderItemSummaryAdjustmentCollectionInput)
• getOrderItemSummaryAdjustments(webstoreId, orderSummaryId,
orderItemSummaryAdjustmentCollectionInput, effectiveAccountId)
220
New input class: ConnectApi.OrderItemSummaryAdjustmentCollectionInput

New output class: ConnectApi.OrderItemSummaryAdjustmentCollection
This new method is in the ConnectApi.CommerceCart class.
Make a secondary cart a primary cart
• makeCartPrimary(webstoreId, activeCartOrId, effectiveAccountId)
New output class: ConnectApi.CommerceActionResult
Experience Cloud Microsites (Pilot)

These new methods are in the new ConnectApi.MarketingIntegration class.
Get a marketing integration form for an Experience Cloud site
• getForm(siteId, formId)
New output class: ConnectApi.Form
Save a marketing integration form for an Experience Cloud site
• saveForm(siteId, formInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.FormInput
New output class: ConnectApi.Form
Submit a marketing integration form for an Experience Cloud site
• submitForm(siteId, formId, formSubmissionInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.FormSubmissionInput
New output class: ConnectApi.FormSubmission
Externally Managed Accounts

These new methods are in the ConnectApi.ExternalManagedAccount class.
Get externally managed accounts available to the context user, including the context user’s account, across all Experience
Cloud sites
• getCommunitiesExternalManagedAccounts(communityId, includeMyAccount)
Get externally managed accounts, including the context user’s account, for a store
• getExternalManagedAccounts(webstoreId, includeMyAccount)

This new method is in the new ConnectApi.Orchestration class.
221
Retrieve orchestration instances with work items related to a record

• getOrchestrationInstanceCollection(relatedRecordId)
New output class: ConnectApi.OrchestrationInstanceCollection
Salesforce Customer Data Platform (CDP)

This new method is in the ConnectApi.CdpQuery class.
Synchronously query Salesforce CDP data with new parameters
• queryANSISql(input, batchSize, offset, orderby)
These new methods are in the new ConnectApi.LightningScheduler class.
Create a service appointment
• createServiceAppointment(createServiceAppointmentInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.CreateServiceAppointmentInput
New output class: ConnectApi.ServiceAppointmentOutput
Update an existing service appointment
• updateServiceAppointment(updateServiceAppointmentInput)
New input class: ConnectApi.UpdateServiceAppointmentInput
New output class: ConnectApi.ServiceAppointmentOutput
Changed Connect in Apex Input Classes

These input classes have changes.

ConnectApi.CartInput
This input class has this new property.
• isSecondary—Specifies whether the cart is secondary (true) or not (false).
Field Service
ConnectApi.ShiftsFromPatternInput
This input class has these new and changed properties.
• serviceResourceId—This property is no longer available. In version 53.0 and later, use serviceResourceIdList.
• serviceResourceIdList—List of service resource IDs to assign shifts to.
Personalization
ConnectApi.AudienceCriterionValueInput
This input class has this new property.
• audienceId—ID of an audience.
222

ConnectApi.OrderSummaryInputRepresentation
This input class has this new optional property.
• businessModel—Specifies whether the order is B2C or B2B. Valid values are:
– B2B
– B2C
Changed Connect in Apex Output Classes

These output classes have changes.

ConnectApi.CartItem
This output class has this changed property.
• itemizedAdjustmentAmount—Total itemized adjustment amount for the item, including promotions and excluding
taxes.
ConnectApi.CartSummary
This output class has these new and changed properties.
• totalProductAmountAfterAdjustments—This amount now includes promotions.
• totalPromotionalAdjustmentAmount—Total promotional adjustment amount for items in the cart.

ConnectApi.ExternalManagedAccountOutput
This output class has these new properties.
• accountName—Name of the external managed account record.
• address—Default shipping address of the external managed account.
• isMyAccount—Specifies whether the account is the context user’s account (true) or not (false).
Field Service
ConnectApi.ShiftsFromPattern
This output class has these new properties.
• error—Error details for shifts from a pattern.
• isSuccess—Indicates if the request is successful (true) or not (false).
Changed Connect in Apex Enums

These enums have changes.
For information about these enums, see ConnectApi Enums in the Apex Reference Guide.
ConnectApi.AudienceCriteriaType
This enum has this new value.
223
• Audience—Criterion based on audience.
API: New and Changed Items

Access more data objects and metadata types in API version 53.0.
IN THIS SECTION:
Access more data through these new and changed standard objects.
New and Changed Standard Platform Events
Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.
REST API
REST API includes changed calls.
SOAP API
SOAP API includes new, changed, and deprecated calls.
Reports and Dashboards REST API
Create dashboards that respond dynamically to changes in business conditions and goals. For a dynamic gauge chart, specify a field
from a Salesforce object record to use as the chart measure or chart target.
Connect REST API
Integrate mobile apps, intranet sites, and third-party web applications with Salesforce using Connect REST API. Take advantage of
new B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience functionality, including promotions, primary carts, and order summary adjustments.
Check out Experience Cloud Microsites (pilot) and externally managed accounts updates.
Tableau CRM REST API
Capture Tableau CRM dashboard and lens images using the Tableau CRM REST API. Retrieve dataflow jobs by jobType,
startedAfter, or startedBefore.
User Interface API
Get the save options for a record layout.
Bulk API
These items are new, changed, or deprecated in API version 53.0.
Bulk API 2.0
Tooling API New and Changed Objects
Tooling API includes new and changed objects and fields.
Metadata API
Metadata API includes new and changed types and fields.

Access more data through these new and changed standard objects.
224
Salesforce Overall
See if a permission set license is enabled for integrations
Use the new IsAvailableForIntegrations field on the existing PermissionSetLicense object.
Choose how in-app guidance appears
To identify when and where prompts appear, we added the TargetPageKey4 field on the PromptVersion object.
Assign in-app guidance to record types
To determine if in-app guidance is specific to a record type, use the new TargetRecordType field on the PromptVersion object.
Point to specific elements on a page with targeted prompts (Generally Available)
To use the new Targeted prompt type value, which is now generally available, use the DisplayType field on the PromptVersion
object.
Update permissions to use DeveloperName field on affected objects
To view, group, sort, or filter the DeveloperName field on affected objects, you must have View Setup and Configuration OR
View DeveloperName permission. See here for more information.
Commerce
View the price adjustment for a cart item
Use the new CartItemPriceAdjustment object.
View a price adjustment group for a cart
Use the new WebCartAdjustmentGroup object.
View whether a price adjustment applies to the cart or a cart item
Use the new AdjustmentTargetType field on the CartTax object.
View the ID of a price adjustment for a cart item being taxed.
Use the new CartItemPriceAdjustmentId field on the CartTax object.
Specify that your store uses the default Apex service for promotions integration
Use the new value Promotions in the existing ServiceProviderType field on the StoreIntegratedService object.
Specify that your store uses an external Apex service for promotions integration
Use the new value Promotions in the existing ExternalServiceProviderType field on the RegisteredExternalService
object.
View tax-related information for a cart and determine if the cart is primary or secondary
Use the new IsSecondary, TaxLocaleType, TotalPromoAdjustmentTaxAmount, and
TotalPromoAdjustmentAmount fields on the WebCart object.
View information about price adjustments for a cart item
Use the new DistributedAdjustmentAmount, DistributedAdjustmentTaxAmount, ListPrice,
TotalPriceAfterAllAdjustments, TotalPromoAdjustmentAmount, and
TotalPromoAdjustmentTaxAmount fields on the CartItem object.
Customization
Create custom profiles
Use the create() call on the Profile object. You can specify the Description, Name, PermissionsPermissionName,
and UserLicenseId fields during create.
REMOVED: The SecureAgent object has been removed
The object is removed in API version 53.0 and later.
225
Development
Link AsyncApexJob records to the applicable CronTrigger.
Use the new CronTriggerId field on the existing AsyncApexJob object.
Einstein Automate
View all triggering objects and platform events for triggered flows
Use the new TriggerObjectOrEventLabel and TriggerObjectOrEventLabelId fields on the FlowDefinitionView
object. For more information, see View All Triggering Objects and Platform Events for Triggered Flows.
View details about a run-time instance of an orchestration (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationInstance object.
View details about a run-time stage in an orchestration instance (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationStageInstance object.
View details about a run-time step in an orchestration stage instance (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationStepInstance object.
Event Monitoring
Analyze your flows’ usage trends and troubleshoot performance issues in Event Monitoring
Use the new supported value FlowExecution in the existing EventType field on the EventLogFile object. For more
information, see Analyze Your Flows in the Flow Execution Event Type.
Get the names of installed managed packages that access named credentials
Use the new Named Credential event type of the EventLogFile object.
Experience Cloud
Customize device activation emails for Experience Cloud sites
Use the new DeviceActEmailTemplateId field on the existing Network object.
Create scorecards and track partner performance
Use the Scorecard and ScorecardMetric objects. Introduced in API version 40.0, these objects have been added to the Object Reference
Guide.
Associate your scorecards with accounts, channel programs, or channel program levels
Use the ScorecardAssociation object. Introduced in API version 41.0, this object has been added to the Object Reference Guide.
Field Service
Save dispatchers time by using a pattern of templates for creating shifts
Use the new ShiftPattern and ShiftPatternEntry objects.
Functions
Check the status of your org’s connection to Salesforce Functions
Use the FunctionConnection object to inspect how your org is connected to Salesforce Functions. This object was previously named
SfFunctionsConnection.
226
View information about CORS violation records for Lightning apps in your event log files
The CORS Violation Record event type in the EventLogFile object captures information about Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS)
violations. Cross-origin requests to Lightning apps are blocked unless the request comes from a URL listed in your CORS allowlist.
Quip
DEPRECATED: CollabUserEngmtRecordLink object
The CollabUserEngmtRecordLink object is now deprecated. You can still access user engagement metrics for metric dates before
August 12, 2021. To obtain user engagement metrics for dates starting from August 12, 2021, follow the instructions in the Quip
Engagement Metrics documentation.
Order Management
Define the business type of a sales channel, such as B2C or B2B
Use the new Type and Type Category fields on the SalesChannel object. In existing Order Management orgs, the version
234 automated update process sets both fields to B2C for each sales channel that’s associated with at least one managed order
summary.
Categorize an order summary as B2C or B2B
Use the new BusinessModel field on the OrderSummary object.
Identify fulfillment orders for reshipments
Use the new IsReship field on the FulfillmentOrder object.
Identify fulfillment order line items and reasons for reshipments
Use the new IsReship and ReshipReason fields on the FulfillmentOrderLineItem object.
Track reshippable and reshipped order item quantities
Use the new QuantityAvailableToReship and QuantityReshipped fields on the OrderItemSummary object.
Associate return shipments with return orders
Use the new ReturnOrder field on the Shipment object.
Associate return shipment items with return order line items
Use the new ReturnOrderLineItem field on the ShipmentItem object.
Sales
Include more in the Subject field of a Lightning email template
The Subject field in the EmailTemplate object now holds 1,000 characters. For Classic email templates, the limit remains
230 characters.
Get more accurate data for closed tasks and events
The CompletedDateTime field is now in the ActivityHistory, LookedUpFromActivity, OpenActivity,
and Task objects.
Track the date when a forecast type was activated in Collaborative Forecasts
Use the LastActivatedDate field on the ForecastingType object.
Add another forecast category to better support your business processes
Use the new MostLikely picklist value in the ForecastCategory and ForecastCategoryName fields on the
Opportunity, OpportunityStage, and OpportunityHistory objects.
Learn how many times an opportunity’s close date has been pushed out
Use the new PushCount field on the Opportunity object.
227
Create custom pipeline views and saved filters in Pipeline Inspection

Use the new PipelineInspectionListView object.
Flag important opportunities to track their progress in Pipeline Inspection
Use the new UserPrioritizedRecord object. See which opportunities have been marked as important by using the
IsPriorityRecord field on the Opportunity object.
Learn when sales teams haven’t updated opportunity next steps
Use the new NextStep value in the FieldName field on the RecentFieldChange object.
Learn when the last edit was made to a sales cadence
Use the new LastEditedDateTime field on the ActionCadence object.
Learn the status of a sales cadence step
Use the new GraphState field on the ActionCadenceStep object.
Learn whether a sales cadence step has more than one email template or call script assigned for variant testing
Use the new HasVariant field on the ActionCadenceStep object.
Learn which step follows a specific sales cadence step
Use the new GoToStepName field on the ActionCadenceStep object.
Learn the status of a sales cadence branch step
Use the new GraphState field on the ActionCadenceRule object.
Learn whether an error has occurred on a sales cadence step
Use the new ErrorCode field on the ActionCadenceStepTracker object.
Learn the details of email templates and call scripts used on sales cadence steps for variant testing
Use the new ActionCadenceStepVariant object.
Learn whether a target exited a sales cadence because its current step was deleted
Use the new AutomaticallyExitedDeletedStep value in the CompletionReason field on the ActionCadenceTracker
object.
Learn whether a target exited a sales cadence because its parent step was deleted
Use the new AutomaticallyExitedInvalidParentStep value in the CompletionReason field on the
ActionCadenceTracker object.
Learn how many times a target has looped through a series of linked sales cadences
Use the new DaisyChainIteration field on the ActionCadenceTracker object.
Specify the frequency at which the utilization of service resources is calculated
Use the new PolicyApplicableDuration field on the AppointmentAssignmentPolicy object.
Specify the count type for resource utilization
Use the new UtilizationFactor field on the AppointmentAssignmentPolicy object.
Record service resource utilization by date for the Load Balancing appointment assignment policy
Use the new AppointmentScheduleAggr object.
Store service appointments for each service resource
Use the new AppointmentScheduleLog object.
Set the rules for scheduling appointments
Use the new AppointmentSchedulingPolicy object.
228
Look up a work type or a work type group for a time slot

Use the new AppointmentTopicTimeSlot object.

BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The urlPatterns field on the CorsWhitelistEntry object now supports Mozilla® Firefox® and Google
Chrome™ extensions as valid entries
You can now include Firefox and Chrome browser extensions in your cross-origin resource (CORS) allowlist.
Monitor which users register built-in authenticators (beta)
Use the new HasBuiltInAuthenticator field on the existing TwoFactorMethodsInfo object.
Track when users verify their identity with a built-in authenticator (beta)
Use the new BuiltInAuthenticator value in the existing VerificationMethod field on the VerificationHistory object.
See when a user is prompted for identity verification when registering a built-in authenticator (beta)
Use the new ConnectWebAuth value in the existing Activity field on the VerificationHistory object.
Monitor when users are logged out due to forced authentication
Use the new ForceAuthNLogout value in the ErrorCode field on the IdpEventLog object.
Get information on Security Health Check scores for connected tenants in Security Center
Use the new TenantSecurityHealthCheckTrend, TenantSecurityHealthCheckDetail, and TenantSecurityMonitorMetric objects.
Store details for connected apps that are added to Security Center
Use the new TenantSecurityConnectedApp object.
Get information on detected threats to your Security Center tenants
Use the new TenantSecurityApiAnomaly, TenantSecurityCredentialStuffing, TenantSecurityReportAnomaly, and
TenantSecuritySessionHijacking objects.
Monitor how and when Security Center users log in to your org
Use the new TenantSecurityLogin and TenantSecurityUserActivity objects.
Track managed and unmanaged packages that are added to Security Center tenants
Use the new TenantSecurityPackage object.
See details of user permissions assigned in Security Center
Use the new TenantSecurityUserPerm object.
Define security setting Alerts in Security Center
Use the new TenantSecurityNotification Rule object.
Assign different roles to individuals within an org
Use the new Customer and Seller objects.
Define unique brands as children of a parent org
Use the new BusinessBrand object.
Service
Define the mapping between a job profile and a queue in the Omni-based workflow for Workforce Engagement
Use the new JobProfileQueueGroup object.
Indicate whether records are associated with the Omni-based workflow for Workforce Engagement
Use the new IsOmni field on the Workload, WorkloadUnit, WorkforceCapacity, and WorkforceCapacityUnit objects.
Specify a group identifier for a work demographic record in the Omni-based workflow for Workforce Engagement
Use the new GroupIdentifier field on the WorkDemographic object.
229
Inspect pending service routing interaction information that is used when work is routed to an agent
Use the new PendingServiceRoutingInteractionInfo object.
Use the Service Setup Assistant to get sample surveys and email templates
Use the new OOTBSurveyQuestionEmailTemplates, OOTBSurveyRecords, and SurveyEnable values on the
TaskName field on the existing ServiceSetupProvisioning object.
Track the record action history associated with scorecards
Use the new Scorecard value in the ParentRecordId field on the existing RecordActionHistory object. We also removed
18 values from the ParentRecordId field related to records that don’t use RecordActionHistory.
Track the state change of the record action history with an additional state value
Use the new Resumed value in the State field on the existing RecordActionHistory object.
Track incidents and problems associated with business interruptions
Use the new Problem and Incident objects.
Manage change requests associated with problems and incidents
Use the new ChangeRequest, ChangeRequestRelatedIssue, CaseRelatedIssue objects.
Map an external system’s call center with a Salesforce user or queue
Use the new CallCenterRoutingMap object.
IN THIS SECTION:
Retired Objects
These objects are retired.
Retired Objects
These objects are retired.
Usage Metrics is retired
Usage Metrics and the MetricsDataFile API object are no longer available. Switch now to AppExchange App Analytics, which
provides richer usage data about how subscribers interact with your AppExchange solutions.
New and Changed Standard Platform Events

Receive real-time notifications from Salesforce by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.
Commerce
Be notified of quantity changes for FulfillmentOrderLineItem records
Subscribe to FulfillOrdItemQtyChgEvent to receive notifications when the Quantity field changes on a FulfillmentOrderLineItem
record.
Salesforce CDP
Be notified of an action that occurs within Salesforce CDP
Subscribe to DataObjectDataChgEvent.
Be notified of metadata changes for Data Lake, Data Model, and Calculated Insight objects
Subscribe to DataObjectMetadataChgEvent.
230
REST API
REST API includes changed calls.
Changed Calls
These calls are changed in API version 53.0.
Changed Calls
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: DateTime values must use specific formats
Use one of these two DateTime formats.
• yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss.SSSZ
• yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss.SSS+/-HH:mm
In API version 53.0 and later, requests that use a non-supported DateTime format (such as 123456000) result in an error. In earlier
versions, such requests sometimes work, but don’t rely on that happening.
DateTime values that use more than 3 digits after the decimal place are handled correctly
In API version 53.0 and later, the API correctly handles DateTime values in JSON requests that use more than 3 digits after the decimal
point. In earlier versions, such values are interpreted incorrectly.
For example, consider this request, which uses more than 3 digits after the decimal point.
POST /sobjects/Contact
{
"LastName": "Smith",
"EmailBouncedDate": "2020-07-29T19:10:18.182314Z"
}
In API version 52.0 and earlier, the Contact is created successfully, but the EmailBouncedDate is set to 2020-07-29T19:13:20.000+0000,
which is incorrect. The correct value is 2020-07-29T19:10:18.000+0000.
In API version 53.0 and later, the EmailBouncedDate is set correctly.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Limit the number of service resources to show during appointment scheduling when appointment
distribution is enabled
The getAppointmentCandidates resource has a new resourceLimitApptDistribution parameter.
BEHAVIOR CHANGE: Track requests coming from external systems using correlation ID
The getAppointmentSlots and getAppointmentCandidates resources have a new correlationId parameter.
Responses to sobjectsCollections now include the entity IDs related to any unsuccessful delete operation
When a request using the composite resource sobjectsCollections includes an unsuccessful delete call, the response now
contains the IDs of any failed entities. This change applies to API versions 53.0 and later.
SOAP API
SOAP API includes new, changed, and deprecated calls.
231
New, Changed, and Deprecated Calls
Changed Calls
Responses now include the entity IDs related to any unsuccessful delete() call
When a request includes an unsuccessful delete operation, the response now contains the IDs of any failed entities. This change
applies to versions 53.0 and later.
Reports and Dashboards REST API

Create dashboards that respond dynamically to changes in business conditions and goals. For a dynamic gauge chart, specify a field
from a Salesforce object record to use as the chart measure or chart target.
For more information, see the Reports and Dashboards REST API Developer Guide.
Changed Resources: Dashboard Results

We’ve added new dashboard response properties to support dynamic gauge charts that response automatically to changes in your
business goals and conditions.
Dashboards
The dynamicGaugeSegmentProperties properties identify the record field from a standard or custom object that’s used
as the measure (pointer) or target in a gauge chart.
Property Type Description

isDynamicUser Boolean Indicates whether the user ID is from the person who’s running the
dashboard (true) or from another user (false).
record String The ID of the record in a standard or custom Salesforce object that’s
used as the chart measure or chart target. This value is valid only if
isDynamicUser is false.
fieldName String A numeric field from the specified record in the standard or
custom Salesforce object.
Connect REST API

Integrate mobile apps, intranet sites, and third-party web applications with Salesforce using Connect REST API. Take advantage of new
B2B Commerce on Lightning Experience functionality, including promotions, primary carts, and order summary adjustments. Check out
Experience Cloud Microsites (pilot) and externally managed accounts updates.
IN THIS SECTION:
Simplified Connect REST API Release Notes
We streamlined the Connect REST API release notes to get you started faster with new and changed resources. The New and Changed
Connect REST API Resources section now includes relevant new request body, request parameter, and response body information.
Properties and property descriptions for new request and response bodies are no longer included in the release notes. Changed
request and response bodies continue to be documented in the release notes.
New and Changed Connect REST API Resources
These resources are new or have changes.
232

These request bodies have changes.
Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies
These response bodies have changes.
SEE ALSO:
Connect REST API Developer Guide
Apex Reference Guide: ConnectApi Namespace
Simplified Connect REST API Release Notes

We streamlined the Connect REST API release notes to get you started faster with new and changed resources. The New and Changed
Connect REST API Resources section now includes relevant new request body, request parameter, and response body information.
Properties and property descriptions for new request and response bodies are no longer included in the release notes. Changed request
and response bodies continue to be documented in the release notes.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app.
New and Changed Connect REST API Resources


Make a secondary cart a primary cart
Make a POST request to the new
/commerce/webstores/webstoreID/carts/cartStateOrId/actions/make-primary resource.
New response body: Commerce Action Result
Get promotions associated with a cart
Make a GET request to the new /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/carts/cartStateOrId/promotions
resource.
New response body: Cart Promotion Collection
Get promotions associated with items in a cart
/commerce/webstores/webstoreId/carts/cartStateOrId/cart-items/promotions resource.
POST methods typically create an item, but for this resource POST is used to retrieve information.
New request body: Cart Item Promotion Collection Input
New response body: Cart Item Promotion Collection
Get the associated promotions and price adjustments for a cart and its items
Make a POST request to the new /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/promotions/actions/associate
resource.
New request body: Promotion Association Input
New response body: Promotion Association Collection
233
Apply associated promotion discounts to a cart and its items

Make a POST request to the new /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/promotions/actions/execute resource.
New request body: Promotion Execution Input
New response body: Promotion Execution
Get adjustments for an order summary
Make a GET request to the new /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/order-summaries
/orderSummaryId/adjustments resource.
New response body: Order Summary Adjustment Collection
Get adjustments for order items
Make a POST request to the new /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/order-summaries
/orderSummaryId/items/adjustments resource.
POST methods typically create an item, but for this resource POST is used to retrieve information.
New request body: Order Item Summary Adjustment Collection Input
New response body: Order Item Summary Adjustment Collection
CMS Managed Content

Get a managed content folder
Make a GET request to the new /connect/cms/folders/folderId resource.
New response body: Managed Content Space Folder Detail
Experience Cloud Microsites (Pilot)

Get a marketing integration form for an Experience Cloud site
Make a GET request to the new /sites/siteId/marketing-integration/forms/formId resource.
New response body: Form
Save a marketing integration form for an Experience Cloud site
Make a POST request to the new /sites/siteId/marketing-integration/forms resource.
New request body: Form Input
New response body: Form
Submit a marketing integration form for an Experience Cloud site
Make a POST request to the new /sites/siteId/marketing-integration/forms/formId/data resource.
New request body: Form Submission Input
New response body: Form Submission
234

Get externally managed accounts available to the context user, including the context user’s account, across all Experience
Cloud sites
Make a GET request to the /connect/communities/communityId/external-managed-accounts resource.
New request parameter: includeMyAccount
Get externally managed accounts, including the context user’s account, for a store
Make a GET request to the /commerce/webstores/webstoreId/external-managed-accounts resource.
New request parameter: includeMyAccount

Retrieve orchestration instances with work items related to a record
Make a GET request to the new /connect/interaction/orchestration/instances resource.
New required request parameter: relatedRecordId
New response body: Flow Orchestration Instance Collection
Salesforce Customer Data Platform (CDP)

Synchronously query Salesforce CDP data with new query parameters
Make a POST request to the /ssot/query resource.
New request parameters: batchSize, offset, orderBy


Cart Input
This request body has this new property.
Field Service
Shifts from Pattern Input
This request body has these new and changed properties.
• serviceResourceId—This property is no longer available. In version 53.0 and later, useserviceResourceIdList.
• serviceResourceIdList—List of service resource IDs to assign shifts to.
Marketing Cloud
Social Customer Service Configuration Input
235
• inboundProcessingConcurrencyEnabled—Indicates whether your org allows concurrent processing of inbound

social posts written by different people (true) or not (false). Social posts written by the same person are processed one at
a time instead of simultaneously. Default value is false.
Personalization
Audience Criterion Value Input
• audienceId—ID of an audience.

Order Summary Input
This request body has this new optional property.
• businessModel—Specifies whether the order is B2C or B2B. Valid values are:
– B2B
– B2C
Available Territory Slots Input
This request body has these new properties.
• correlationId—Track requests from external systems.
• resourceLimitApptDistribution—Limit the number of resources to show during appointment scheduling when
appointment distribution is enabled.
Changed Connect REST API Response Bodies


Cart Item
This response body has this changed property.
• itemizedAdjustmentAmount—Total itemized adjustment amount for the item, including promotions and excluding
taxes.
Cart Summary
This response body has these new and changed properties.
• totalProductAmountAfterAdjustments—This amount now includes promotions.
• totalPromotionalAdjustmentAmount—Total promotional adjustment amount for items in the cart.
B2B2C Commerce
Product Import
This response body has these new properties.
236
• cmsWorkspaceId—Reserved for future use.

• productAttributeSetProductsCreated—Number of product attribute set products created by the import.
• productAttributesCreated—Number of product attributes created by the import.
• productAttributesUpdated—Number of product attributes updated by the import.
• productMediaCreated—Reserved for future use.
• productMediaUpdated—Reserved for future use.
• strikethroughPricebookId—ID of the strikethrough pricebook.

External Managed Account Output
• accountName—Name of the external managed account record.
• address—Default shipping address of the external managed account.
• isMyAccount—Specifies whether the account is the context user’s account (true) or not (false).
Field Service
Shifts from Pattern
• error—Error details for shifts from a pattern.
• isSuccess—Indicates if the request is successful (true) or not (false).
Marketing Cloud
Social Customer Service Configuration
This response body has this new property.
• inboundProcessingConcurrencyEnabled—Indicates whether your org allows concurrent processing of inbound
social posts written by different people (true) or not (false). Social posts written by the same person are processed one at
a time instead of simultaneously.
Tableau CRM REST API

Capture Tableau CRM dashboard and lens images using the Tableau CRM REST API. Retrieve dataflow jobs by jobType,
startedAfter, or startedBefore.
The API release notes have been simplified. For details, see Simplified Connect REST API Release Notes.
IN THIS SECTION:
New and Changed Tableau CRM REST API Resources
Changed Tableau CRM REST API Request Bodies
Changed Tableau CRM REST API Response Bodies
237
New and Changed Tableau CRM REST API Resources

Get a dashboard image capture
Make a GET request to the new /wave/dashboard/dashboardId/capture resource.
New request parameters: pageId, savedViewId, and type
New response body: Capture
Get a lens image capture
Make a GET request to the new /wave/lens/lensId/capture resource.
New request parameter: type
New response body: Capture
Get dataflow jobs by job types and started before or after times
Make a GET request to the /wave/dataflowjobs resource.
New request parameters: jobTypes, startedAfter, and startedBefore
Get a collection of datasets by IDs
Make a GET request to the /wave/datasets resource.
New request parameter: ids
Get a folder with MRU disabled
Make a GET request to the /wave/folders/folderId resource.
New request parameter: disableMru
Get a filtered collection of connected objects using search terms
Make a GET request to the /wave/replicatedDatasets resource.
New query parameter: q
Use a Direct Report Step in a dashboard
Make a GET request to the /wave/dashboards/dashboardIdOrApiName resource.
Response body includes new Direct Report Step and Direct Report Step Query representations.
Create a Direct Report Step in a dashboard
Make a POST request to the /wave/dashboards resource or a PATCH request to
/wave/dashboards/dashboardIdOrApiName resource.
Request body includes new Direct Report Step Input and Direct Report Step Query Input representations.
Use a Repeater Widget in a dashboard
Response body includes new Repeater Widget Card Properties, Cell Properties, and Parameters representations.
Create a Repeater Widget in a dashboard
Request body includes new Repeater Widget Card Properties, Cell Properties, and Parameters Input representations.
Use a Tooltip Widget in a dashboard
Response body includes the new Tooltip Widget representation.
238
Create a Tooltip Widget in a dashboard

Request body includes the new Tooltip Widget Input representation.
Use a Recommendation Node in a recipe
Make a GET request to the /wave/recipes/id resource.
Response body includes new Recommendation Node and Recommendation Node Parameters representations.
Changed Tableau CRM REST API Request Bodies

Aggregate Parameters Input
The request body has these new properties.
• nodeType—The type of aggregate node. Valid values are Hierarchical and Standard.
• parentField—The parent field.
• percentageField—The percentage field.
• selfField—The self field.
Cluster Parameters Input
The request body has these new properties.
• findOptimalClusters—Indicates whether to find optimal clusters (true) or not (false).
• produceScaledColumns—Indicates whether to produce scaled columns (true) or not (false)
• scaling—The scaling measure. Valid value is MinMaxScaling.
• targetScaledFields—The collection of target scaled fields.
Export Parameters Input
The request body has this new property.
• csvHeaderRowValueType—The export CSV header row value type.
Save Dataset Input
• isStaged—Indicates whether the data is staged (true) or not (false)
Saql Query Input
• licenseAttributes—The license attributes for the SAQL query.
Tooltip Content Input
• widget—The widget in the tooltip.
Changed Tableau CRM REST API Response Bodies

239
Aggregate Parameters
The response body has these new properties.
• nodeType—The type of aggregate node. Valid values are Hierarchical and Standard.
• parentField—The parent field.
• percentageField—The percentage field.
• selfField—The self field.
Cluster Parameters
• findOptimalClusters—Indicates whether to find optimal clusters (true) or not (false).
• produceScaledColumns—Indicates whether to produce scaled columns (true) or not (false).
• scaling—The scaling measure. Valid value is MinMaxScaling.
• targetScaledFields—The collection of target scaled fields.
Data Connector Type
The response body has this new property.
• bundle—The connector bundle that this data connector belongs to. Valid values are AmazonS3, Cdp, Salesforce,
Snowflake, and Tableau.
Dataflow Job
• waitTime—The wait time in seconds before starting of a dataflow job.
Event Driven Schedule
• triggerRule—The event-based trigger rule that causes a Tableau CRM asset to run.
Export Parameters
• csvHeaderRowValueType—The export CSV header row value type. Valid values are FullyQualifiedName and
Label.
Live Connection
• connectionType—The type of connection. Valid values are listed in Data Connecter Types Resources.
Recipe
• scheduleAttributes—The schedule for the recipe.
Replicated Field Collection
• replicatedDataset—The reference to the connected object that the fields belong to.
Save Dataset
240
• isStaged—Indicates whether the data is staged (true) or not (false).

Source Field Collection
• dataConnector—A reference to the data connector that the field collection belongs to.
• sourceObjectName—The name of the source object that the field collection belongs to.
Source Object Collection
• nextPageUrl—The URL to get the next page of contents in the collection.
• totalSize—The total count of elements in the collection.
• url—The URL to get the collection.
Source Object
• dataConnector—A reference to the data connector that the source object belongs to.
Sql Step
• useGlobal—Indicates whether the SQL step is tied to the global step (true) or not (false).
Tooltip Content
• widget—The widget in the tooltip.
Wave Features
• orgHasRecipeStageData—Indicates whether the org has staged data for recipes enabled (true) or not (false).
Xmd Date
• format—The format of the date.
User Interface API

Get the save options for a record layout.
Get the save options for a record layout
The new saveOptions property on the Record Layout response body returns a list of save options for the record layout. Save
options define behavior that occurs when objects are created or modified using the given layout.
Send an email notification when a Case or CaseComment is created or updated
Use the new triggerOtherEmail and triggerUserEmail request parameters when creating or updating a record via
/ui-api/records and /ui-api/records/{recordId}.
Use triggerOtherEmail to specify whether to send email to users outside the organization. In the Salesforce user interface,
this email can be triggered by creating, editing, or deleting a contact for a Case.
Use triggerUserEmail to specify whether to send email to users in the organization. In the Salesforce user interface, this
email can be triggered by resetting a password, creating a user, or adding comments to a Case.
241
Specify an assignment rule when creating or updating an Account, Case, or Lead

Use the new useDefaultRule request parameter when creating or updating a record via /ui-api/records and
/ui-api/records/{recordId}.
For a Case or Lead, specifies whether to use the default (active) assignment rule. For an Account, specifies whether to apply all
territory assignment rules when updating the Account.
Specify the record type when checking for duplicate records
Use the new recordTypeID request parameter when creating or updating a record with
/ui-api/duplicates/{objectApiName}.
This parameter is optional, except for the Person Account object. If you're searching for duplicate Person Account records, you must
specify the recordTypeID for the Person Account object.
Bulk API
Use More Objects with PK Chunking
Extended coverage across more objects improves query performance. Use eight new PK chunking enabled objects with Bulk API
and Bulk API 2.0.
You can now request PK-chunking for Bulk API queries for the following objects. Bulk 2.0 makes the request automatically.
• AssignedResource
• ConversationDefinitionEventLog
• LinkedArticle
• MlRetrainingFeedback
• TaskRelation
• VoiceCallRecording
• WebCart
• WorkloadUnit
For a complete list of PK chunking supported objects, see:
Salesforce Developer Documentation: PK Chunking Header
Reminder: Bulk API v16-20 Requests Are No Longer Supported
Migrate to a more current version of the API by May 2022, or (best practice) transition to Bulk API 2.0!
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Platform API Versions 7.0 through 20.0 Retirement
Bulk API 2.0

Get More Information About Bulk 2.0 Workloads With Event Monitoring
We’ve enhanced Event Monitoring’s EventLogFile with the addition of a new event type: BulkApi2. If you’re an Event Monitoring
customer, you can now get BulkApi2 events from the EventLogFile object every time a job is created, a status is updated, or a
job is deleted. This new event monitoring coverage for Bulk API 2.0 is an improvement over the monitoring capabilities of the original
Bulk API.
Previously, you obtained Bulk API 2.0 information from the Bulk Data Load Jobs page in Setup. Now, you have the option of analyzing
the EventLogFile object for Bulk API 2.0 job information. With the addition of this new event type, you can monitor the following
Bulk API 2.0 parameters:
242
• The type of data processed via Bulk API 2.0 operations, and how much of that data was processed.
• Bulk API 2.0 limits.
• For jobs, track how long it takes to complete, database, and CPU usage.
• Understand users and the operations they performed.
• Detailed errors and failures.
Events represent the steps in the Bulk API 2.0 workflow and changes in job state.
Salesforce Help: Bulk API 2.0 Event Type
New Location for Links to Bulk API 2.0 Older Documentation
Links to older versions of the Bulk API 2.0 documentation (Winter ’18 - Spring ’21) have been relocated to the Bulk API and Bulk API
2.0 Developer Guide. The new topic with all of the links is under the Bulk API 2.0 topic:
Salesforce Help: Bulk API 2.0 Older Documentation
Tooling API New and Changed Objects

Tooling API includes new and changed objects and fields.
Salesforce Overall
Update permissions to use DeveloperName field on affected Tooling API objects
To view, group, sort, or filter the DeveloperName field on affected Tooling API objects, you must have View Setup and Configuration
OR View DeveloperName permission. See the knowledge article for more information.
Customization
Indicate that a permission set group is session-based
Use the new HasActivationRequired field on the existing PermissionSetGroup object.
Create field visibility rules for the User object
The existing TargetEntity field on the FieldRestrictionRule object now supports the User object.
See if a field is classified as containing personal info
Use the new supported value PersonalInfo in the existing ComplianceGroup field on the FieldDefinition object.
Einstein Automate
Package input parameter translations for custom flow screen components
Use the new inputParameter field on the FlowScreenFieldTranslation object.
Pardot
Track external activity with Pardot
Use the new MarketingAppExtension object to submit external activities to Pardot.
Assign external activities to a Pardot business unit
Use the new MarketingAppExtAssignment object to associate tracked external activities to a specific Pardot business unit.
Create external activity types
Use the new MarketingAppExtActivity object to choose which activity types to track in Pardot .
243
Metadata API
Metadata API includes new and changed types and fields.
Salesforce Overall
Update permissions to use developerName field on affected Metadata API types
To view, group, sort, or filter the developerName field on affected Metadata API types, you must have View Setup and Configuration
OR View DeveloperName permission. See the knowledge article for more information.
Choose how in-app guidance appears
Use the targetPageKey3 field (introduced in API version 51.0, this type has been added to the Metadata API Developer Guide)
and targetPageKey4 field on the PromptVersion subtype of the Prompt metadata type.
Assign in-app guidance to record types to determine if in-app guidance is specific to a record type
Use the new targetRecordType field on the PromptVersion subtype of the Prompt metadata type.
Point to specific elements on a page with targeted prompts (Generally Available)
Use the value Targeted, which is now generally available, in the displayType field on the PromptVersion subtype of the
Prompt metadata type.
DEPRECATED: The enableIBILOptOutDashboards, enableIBILOptOutEvents, enableIBILOptOutReports,
and enableIBILOptOutTasks fields on the UserEngagementSettings metadata type are deprecated
These fields are deprecated in API version 51.0 and later.
Analytics
Enable new Analytics features for using LWC in Dashboards, editing reports inline, managing recipe settings, and using SQL
in the Query API
Enable these features using new fields on the AnalyticsSettings metadata type.
• Enable the use of Lightning Web Components in Tableau CRM dashboards with the enableLwcInDashboards field
(beta).
• Enable the ability to edit Lightning Experience reports inline with the enableReportInlineEdit field.
• Enable the use of SQL in the Tableau CRM Query API with the enableWaveSqlInQueryApi field (beta).
• Enable the use of SQL in the Tableau CRM Query API with the enableWaveSqlInQueryApi field (beta).
• Enable opt out for Data Prep recipe pre-step caching with the recipePreCachingOptOut field.
• Enable the use of staged data in Data Prep recipes with the recipeStagedDataPref field.
REMOVED: The enableSqlDataset and enableSqlLiveDataset fields on the AnalyticsSettings metadata type
have been removed
These fields are removed in API version 53.0 and later. SQL and SQL live datasets are always enabled for Tableau CRM.
Customization
Define events associated with a Lightning page
Use the new events field and the new subtypes on the FlexiPage metadata type: FlexiPageEvent, FlexiPageEventSourceProperty,
FlexiPageEventTarget, FlexiPageEventPropertyMapping, FlexiPageEventTargetProperty.
Identify unique instances of a component or field on a Lightning page
Use the new identifier field on the ComponentInstance and FieldInstance subtypes on the FlexiPage metadata type.
Indicate that a permission set group is session-based
Use the new hasActivationRequired field on the existing PermissionSetGroup metadata type.
244
Create field visibility rules for the User object

The existing targetEntity field on the FieldRestrictionRule metadata type now supports the User object.
Hide your chosen personal information fields in user records from external users
Use the new enableEnhancedConcealPersonalInfo field on the existing UserManagementSettings metadata type.
Einstein Automate
Roll back a transaction and cancel all its pending record changes in Flow Builder
Use the new recordRollbacks field on the Flow metadata type. For more information, see Roll Back Pending Record Changes
When a Flow Element Fails at Run Time.
Connect Nonconsecutive Elements in Auto-Layout (Beta)
Use the new isGoTo field on the FlowConnector subtype of the Flow metadata type. When set to true, this connector is a Go To
connector. For more information, see Connect to More Elements Across the Auto-Layout Canvas (Beta).
Package input parameter translations for custom flow screen components
Use the new inputParameter field on the FlowScreenFieldTranslation metadata type.
Send email notifications every time a workflow rule, process, or Apex trigger updates the same record that triggered the
automation
Use the new sendEmailsEvenWhenAutomationUpdatesSameRecord field on the EmailAdministrationSettings
metadata type. For more information, see Send Email Notifications for Every Automated Field Update.
Track when a running orchestration is ready to be resumed (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationEvent metadata type.
View details about a run-time instance of an orchestration (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationInstance metadata type.
View details about a run-time stage in an orchestration instance (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationStageInstance metadata type.
View details about a run-time step in an orchestration stage instance (Beta)
Use the new FlowOrchestrationStepInstance metadata type.
Create Einstein Next Best Action strategies with Flow (Pilot)
Use the new RecommendationStrategy value in the processType field on the Flow metadata type. For more information,
see Build Einstein Next Best Action Strategies in Flow Builder (Pilot).
Map values to a collection of recommendations (Pilot)
Use these new fields and values on the FlowCollectionProcessor subtype of the Flow metadata type.
• To specify that a FlowCollectionProcessor is used to map values to recommendations, use the new
RecommendationMapCollectionProcessor value in the FlowCollectionProcessorType field.
• To define the variable to which the current value in the collection is assigned, use the new assignNextValueToReference
field.
• To define a mapping to apply to a collection field, use the new mapItems field.
• To define the object of the collection defined in the collectionReference field, use the new outputSObjectType
field. The valid value is Recommendation.
Experience Cloud
Include an audience within another audience
Use the new Audience value of the type field of the AudienceCriterion subtype and the new audienceDeveloperName
field of the AudienceCriteriaValue subtype of the Audience metadata type.
245
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein
Allow the Builder-based Service Not Available page to override an existing Service Not Available page when an experience
is published.
Use the new enableExperienceBundleBasedSnaOverrideEnabled field on the existing Network metadata type.
Customize the device activation email for community users.
Use the new deviceActEmailTemplate field on the existing Network metadata type.
Hide badges in Experience sites from guest users
Use the new enablePreventBadgeGuestAccess field on the existing CommunitiesSettings metadata type.
Sales
REMOVED: The adjustmentsSettings, forecastRangeSettings, and quotasSettings fields on the
ForecastingTypeSettings metadata type were removed
Use the globalAdjustmentsSettings, globalForecastRangeSettings, and globalQuotasSettings
fields on the ForecastingSettings metadata type instead.
Skip territory assignment rules during account insert jobs
Use the tm2BypassRealignAccInsert field on the Territory2Settings metadata type.
Salesforce CDP
Create a top-level data kit container definition
Use the new DataPackageKitDefinition metadata type.
Retrieve information about a data kit, such as CRM bundle and Data Models
Use the new DataPackageKitObject metadata type.
Security and Identity

BEHAVIOR CHANGE: The urlPatterns field on the CorsWhitelistOrigin metadata type now supports Mozilla® Firefox®
and Google Chrome™ extensions
You can now include Firefox and Chrome browser extensions in your cross-origin resource (CORS) allowlist.
Service
Enable the Workforce Engagement Configuration App
Use the new enableWorkforceEngagementConfiguration field on the WorkforceEngagementSettings metadata
type.
Hide record information in emails sent when Web-to-Case case creation fails
Use the new shouldHideRecordInfoInEmail field on the existing WebToXSettings metadata type.
Einstein
Einstein Search is turned on by default in Lightning Experience, so everyone can benefit from AI-powered search at no extra cost. Use
your own external models in Einstein Discovery for even better predictions. Einstein Key Accounts Identification ranks your best accounts
to help you optimize your account-based marketing efforts. Launch one Einstein Bot in many languages, helping to reduce administrative
workload and providing more choices for interaction. Read up on these features and more, and get ready to work smarter with all that
Einstein has to offer.
246
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein
Salesforce Overall
Einstein Search
All features of Einstein Search are now on by default at no extra cost. Users gain a smarter search without giving up search features that
they rely on. Einstein Search delivers three main features. Personalization returns relevant search results based on a user’s activity. Natural
language search lets users type common words and phrases in their queries to filter search results. And the actionable UI lets your users
accomplish tasks right from the search box, such as logging a case or creating a contact.
Analytics
Einstein Discovery
Operationalize externally built models that you easily upload and deploy into Salesforce. Translate unstructured data into valuable insights
with sentiment analysis. Get predictive and prescriptive intelligence directly in your automated business processes.
Customization
Development
Integrate image recognition and natural language processing into your apps with Einstein Vision and Language APIs. Use Einstein Vision
OCR to detect text from multiple tables within an image of a page. Einstein Vision OCR support for PDF files is now generally available.
With Einstein Language, create intent models with as few as 20 examples per label. Read on to see how else Einstein gets your apps
working smarter.
Einstein Automate
Einstein Bots
Thanks to an overhaul of how bots process multiple languages, you can launch one bot in many languages, reducing your administrative
workload. Article Answers’ expanded language support and an 87% decrease in build time means your bot delivers AI-driven responses
in record time. Support for External Services and Model Sharing means you can extend bots across the Salesforce platform. Updates to
Input Recommender, Bot Analytics, and the Template Bot set up your bots for success.
Pardot
Explore Einstein Key Accounts on List Views (Generally Available)
Einstein Key Account Identification is now generally available. This handy tool helps you prioritize your account-based marketing tactics
by assigning a tier ranking and providing insights, which show characteristics that an account has in common with other successful
accounts. The Einstein tier and insights appear on its record, and you can add the tier field to list views for ranking data at a glance.
247
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Automate
Sales
See Which Deals Are Unlikely to Close This Month with Einstein Deal Insights
Einstein Deal Insights predicts when opportunities scheduled to close this month are unlikely to be won during the same month. With
this new insight, sales managers and their teams can forecast more accurately and maintain more accurate pipelines.
Service
Help your agents respond to customer queries quickly and consistently with Einstein for Service Cloud. We refined the template generation
process for Reply Recommendations to remove short or repetitive replies and focus Einstein’s predictive powers on the more complex
parts of conversations.
Einstein Automate
system with Mulesoft Composer for Salesforce. Build and deliver personalized recommendations with Einstein Recommendation Builder
and Einstein Next Best Action.
IN THIS SECTION:
MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce (Composer) makes it easy for you to build process automation for data using clicks instead of code
from within Salesforce. When you create a secure process to connect the information stored in different systems, you build a real-time,
integrated view of your customers and your business.
OmniStudio
OmniStudio provides a suite of services, components, and data model objects that combine to create Industry Cloud applications.
Create guided interactions using data from Salesforce and external sources.
Einstein Bots
Thanks to an overhaul of how bots process multiple languages, you can launch one bot in many languages, reducing your
administrative workload. Article Answers’ expanded language support and an 87% decrease in build time means your bot delivers
AI-driven responses in record time. Support for External Services and Model Sharing means you can extend bots across the Salesforce
platform. Updates to Input Recommender, Bot Analytics, and the Template Bot set up your bots for success.
Build sophisticated business processes that involve multiple people over multiple stages with multiple flows. Flow Orchestrator
gives you the power to automate complex processes without writing any code.
Salesforce Flow
Among other Salesforce Flow enhancements, now a record-triggered flow can launch other flows via Subflow elements. Without
requiring code, record-triggered flows can access external systems via flow paths that run asynchronously. In screen flows, choices
are easier than ever to set up, and you can customize footer labels (beta). Flows can send outbound messages, so you can retire all
your workflow rules.
Use Einstein Next Best Action to automatically show recommendations and flow actions to your users. You can now build
recommendation strategies using the actions and logic capabilities of Flow Builder (pilot).
248
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce

Explore ways to build recommendations with Try Einstein. Build recommendations for managed packages with Einstein
Recommendation Builder.

MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce (Composer) makes it easy for you to build process automation for data using clicks instead of code
from within Salesforce. When you create a secure process to connect the information stored in different systems, you build a real-time,
integrated view of your customers and your business.
Where: MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce is available for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions that have
enabled Lightning Experience.
For Composer release notes and help, see MuleSoft Composer for Salesforce.
OmniStudio
OmniStudio provides a suite of services, components, and data model objects that combine to create Industry Cloud applications. Create
guided interactions using data from Salesforce and external sources.
Where: OmniStudio is available for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions and works with Lightning Experience,
Experience Builder sites, and all versions of the mobile app.
Expression Sets and Decision Matrices
An expression set is a series of calculations performed on matrix lookups and user-defined variables and constants. A decision matrix
is a table that looks up information using multiple input dimensions and returns the corresponding output value. You can populate
a decision matrix with input and output values manually or from a CSV file.
Expression sets and decision matrices can automate the creation of complex quotes. Together, expression sets and decision matrices
can guide an agent through a series of questions, pull data from various sources, and present customized quotes or eligibility
determinations.
Expression sets and decision matrices accept JSON input from a REST API, an OmniScript, or an integration procedure. Inputs can
come from more than one source. The output can be a proposal or PDF, or JSON data for populating an OmniScript, integration
procedure, or REST API request.
FlexCards
Add input elements to a FlexCard, overwrite the global SLDS or Newport stylesheets on specific FlexCards, enable accessibility
support on chart and datatable elements, and refresh your FlexCard in preview. Add multiple actions to an event listener, trigger a
datasource from an action, and use a merge field to set the dynamic channel name for a pubsub event. Create a public property
from the FlexCard Designer and call it as a session variable, set a private variable in a FlexCard to define and evaluate at runtime, and
pass an object’s API name to a component in a FlexCard on a record page. Conditionally enable actions on an event listener, remove
conditionally hidden elements from the rendered HTML, and conditionally display actions in a menu element.
OmniScripts
Create and save record entries in modals, use autocomplete in input elements, display a Message element as a toast, clear Edit Block
values, and set a fixed footer on mobile devices. Run decision matrices with the Decision Matrix Action and run expression sets with
the Calculation Action. OmniStudio's DocuSign integration includes security enhancements for the connection between your
Salesforce org and a DocuSign account.
Integration Procedures
Run decision matrices with the Decision Matrix Action and run expression sets with the Calculation Action. Run Apex methods or
Invocable Actions with the Remote Action.
For OmniStudio details and pricing, contact your Salesforce account executive.
249
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Bots
Einstein Bots
Thanks to an overhaul of how bots process multiple languages, you can launch one bot in many languages, reducing your administrative
workload. Article Answers’ expanded language support and an 87% decrease in build time means your bot delivers AI-driven responses
in record time. Support for External Services and Model Sharing means you can extend bots across the Salesforce platform. Updates to
Input Recommender, Bot Analytics, and the Template Bot set up your bots for success.
IN THIS SECTION:
Teach Your Bot to Speak Multiple Languages (Beta)
When you enable your bot to speak multiple languages, you can reduce administrative time and deliver a consistent customer
experience across multiple markets. Add secondary bot-supported languages and define translations at the dialog level to deliver
multiple translations of the same bot at once. Intent model scoring at the language level helps you measure language performance
and improve the bot experience for all customers.
Get More from Your Knowledge Base with Article Answers Improvements (Beta)
Learn about improvements that make Article Answers more convenient and customizable. These changes are automatically available.
Generate Utterances in More Languages with Input Recommender (Beta)
Input Recommender now supports Chinese (Simplified and Traditional) and Portuguese (Brazil and European), so you can build
high-quality training data for new and existing intents in even more languages.
Solve Bot Problems Fast with Improved Bot Analytics
Respond to in-dialog notifications that flag dialogs causing errors over the past 7 days. Direct linking takes you to the specific error
logs, reducing search time to seconds. Now available directly in the product, time-based bot reports help you assess bot performance
per dialog. View data over days or by the hour for specific insights on customer interactions with your bot. The new Conversation
Definition Session Metric object makes it easier to access session-level reporting fields. New metrics give you a deeper understanding
of bot conversations.
Integrating your bot with a registered external service is now as easy as adding an action to a dialog. You can add an external service
action to your bot from the Bot Builder. Previously, you could add an external service action to your bot only with a flow or Apex.
Build Bots Faster from a Template (Generally Available)
Get a new bot up and running with the help of Einstein Bots’ first template, now generally available. The template comes prebuilt
with conversational text and Salesforce flows. You can choose dialogs for common service and sales use cases, such as creating a
case or lead, looking up an order, or adding a comment to an existing case. Plus, the template comes with intent data preloaded,
allowing the bot to process customer inputs right away.
Reuse Your Einstein.ai Intent Models Across Other External Orgs (Beta)
Use your well-tuned Einstein.ai intent models with external orgs to extend your investment. You can now share intent classification
models in the Einstein Bot Builder, which you can use to classify intent on other Salesforce datasets. Remove sharing of intent models
at any time using the Model Sharing dashboard.
Collect and Manage Customer Information with New System Entities
The new Email Address and Phone Number system entities make it easier to collect, store, and share these data types in Einstein
Bots—no regex required.
Access Bots Faster Using the Improved Setup Home Page
User experience enhancements help you easily navigate around the Einstein Bots Setup page. Smart features, such as Input
Recommender and Article Answers, are available on a new tab for easy access, and notifications flag you when they need attention.
The list of bots loads faster, and a search bar delivers the bot you need in seconds. The Date Created column replaces Bot User to
help you find the bot you need faster. New in-app guidance guides admins toward implementing smart features.
250

We renamed the Channels section on the Bot Overview page to Connections to reflect the expanded Einstein Bots connection
universe. Bots is a platform designed to connect the best in digital automation to the digital spaces that your customers use everyday,
and we expect Bots to connect to more things.
SEE ALSO:
Teach Your Bot to Speak Multiple Languages (Beta)

When you enable your bot to speak multiple languages, you can reduce administrative time and deliver a consistent customer experience
across multiple markets. Add secondary bot-supported languages and define translations at the dialog level to deliver multiple translations
of the same bot at once. Intent model scoring at the language level helps you measure language performance and improve the bot
experience for all customers.
Setup for Einstein Bots is available only in Lightning Experience.
How: Add the secondary language on Translation Workbench first, and then add it to the Bot Overview page. To edit translations for a
particular language, select it in the dropdown at the top of the screen. To give your users the option to choose a language, use a question
dialog step and use the language names as static choices.
251
Get More from Your Knowledge Base with Article Answers Improvements (Beta)
Learn about improvements that make Article Answers more convenient and customizable. These changes are automatically available.
Why: You get the same AI-powered search of previous versions of Article Answers with enhancements based on your feedback.
Add knowledge articles faster with reduced training time
We reduced the average time it takes to create a build from your knowledge base from up to 2 hours to as little as 15 minutes. Your
actual build time depends on the size of your knowledge base.
Respond in more languages
Now your bot can automatically return conversational answers in English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish. Article Answers
returns articles based on the preferred language the user selects for the bot. If the user doesn’t select a preferred language, Article
Answers uses the bot’s primary language, which you can set on the Bot Overview page.
Choose how many knowledge articles to return
You can choose to return up to five knowledge articles when Article Answers finds multiple relevant articles. Previously, bots with
Article Answers returned up to three articles by default. Specify a maximum number of results for your bot in the Article Answers
section of the Bot Overview page.
Troubleshoot with UI enhancements and new documentation
More detailed error messages for training job failures make it easier to create a successful build from your knowledge base. Popovers
guide you seamlessly through Article Answers setup. Plus, we’ve published troubleshooting tips to help you solve problems fast.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Deliver Knowledge Articles with Article Answers (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Article Answers Troubleshooting Tips (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Generate Utterances in More Languages with Input Recommender (Beta)

Input Recommender now supports Chinese (Simplified and Traditional) and Portuguese (Brazil and European), so you can build high-quality
training data for new and existing intents in even more languages.
How: You can activate Input Recommender on the Einstein Bots main page. To launch Input Recommender, click Get Recommendations
from a new intent, or click Find Similar next to any utterance.
To view the available languages, click View details in the Active Languages section of the setup page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Input Recommender to Generate Utterances (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
252
Solve Bot Problems Fast with Improved Bot Analytics

Respond to in-dialog notifications that flag dialogs causing errors over the past 7 days. Direct linking takes you to the specific error logs,
reducing search time to seconds. Now available directly in the product, time-based bot reports help you assess bot performance per
dialog. View data over days or by the hour for specific insights on customer interactions with your bot. The new Conversation Definition
Session Metric object makes it easier to access session-level reporting fields. New metrics give you a deeper understanding of bot
conversations.
How: Bot error reporting is available automatically for all users. New Einstein Bots customers can view the Einstein Bots Reports folder
in the Reports tab. Existing customers must turn on Einstein Bots on the Bots Setup page to install the new folder.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Improve Your Bot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Bot Data Reference Guide (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Integrating your bot with a registered external service is now as easy as adding an action to a dialog. You can add an external service
action to your bot from the Bot Builder. Previously, you could add an external service action to your bot only with a flow or Apex.
Who: To register an external service, you must have the Customize Application user permission.
Why: Sometimes the data that your bot needs to personalize customer requests is stored outside of Salesforce. For example, a banking
customer wants to update their account password and billing address in a single bot conversation. Or a retail customer starts a return
process for a purchase and expects the bot to return a unique tracking number. Now you can automate these multi-platform requests
directly from the Bot Builder, without writing a single line of code.
How: To register an external service, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter External Services, and then select External
Services. Click New External Service, and then follow the steps in the External Services Wizard.
253
To add an external service action to your bot, from the Bot Builder menu, click Dialogs. Edit your desired dialog, and then add an Action
element. From the Action Type field, select External Service.
The external services registered in your Salesforce org and their associated actions are available in the Service Name and Action Name
dropdown menus.
Use bot variables to specify inputs and outputs.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add an External Service Action (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: External Services (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Trailhead: External Services
Build Bots Faster from a Template (Generally Available)

Get a new bot up and running with the help of Einstein Bots’ first template, now generally available. The template comes prebuilt with
conversational text and Salesforce flows. You can choose dialogs for common service and sales use cases, such as creating a case or lead,
looking up an order, or adding a comment to an existing case. Plus, the template comes with intent data preloaded, allowing the bot
to process customer inputs right away.
254
Why: When you create a bot from the core bot template, you can go live right out of the box. Or you can customize any part of the bot
template to meet your business needs.
How: New bot users can click Create a New Bot on the Bot main page to launch Guided Setup. Users with existing bots can click New
on the Bot main page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create an Einstein Bot from a Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Learn About the Template Bot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Reuse Your Einstein.ai Intent Models Across Other External Orgs (Beta)
Use your well-tuned Einstein.ai intent models with external orgs to extend your investment. You can now share intent classification
models in the Einstein Bot Builder, which you can use to classify intent on other Salesforce datasets. Remove sharing of intent models
at any time using the Model Sharing dashboard.
How: To share a model on the Model Management page, select the Model Sharing tab. Enter the destination Einstein.ai org ID and click
Share. You can share models only with external Einstein.ai orgs using an org ID obtained through signup at Einstein Platform Services.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Share Your Intent Model Externally (Beta)(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Collect and Manage Customer Information with New System Entities

The new Email Address and Phone Number system entities make it easier to collect, store, and share these data types in Einstein Bots—no
regex required.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: What’s an Entity? (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Access Bots Faster Using the Improved Setup Home Page

User experience enhancements help you easily navigate around the Einstein Bots Setup page. Smart features, such as Input Recommender
and Article Answers, are available on a new tab for easy access, and notifications flag you when they need attention. The list of bots
loads faster, and a search bar delivers the bot you need in seconds. The Date Created column replaces Bot User to help you find the bot
you need faster. New in-app guidance guides admins toward implementing smart features.
255
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Flow Orchestrator (Beta)
How: Access the Smart Features tab on the Bot Setup page.

We renamed the Channels section on the Bot Overview page to Connections to reflect the expanded Einstein Bots connection universe.
Bots is a platform designed to connect the best in digital automation to the digital spaces that your customers use everyday, and we
expect Bots to connect to more things.

Build sophisticated business processes that involve multiple people over multiple stages with multiple flows. Flow Orchestrator gives
you the power to automate complex processes without writing any code.
IN THIS SECTION:
Orchestrate Multi-User Processes with Flow Orchestrator (Beta)
Combine your automated processes in a single interface with Flow Orchestrator. Use Flow Orchestrator’s no-code approach to create
orchestrations and transform flows into steps organized by stages. Benefits of Flow Orchestrator include more flexibility to create
approval processes, better ability to assign work to any Salesforce user, and more control over record lifecycles.
Display assigned work items generated by orchestrations on relevant records. Users can then see and complete their assigned work
without wasting time switching between tools.
Identify Bottlenecks and Opportunities with Flow Orchestrator (Beta)
Flow Orchestrator gives you a unique perspective on the execution of your business processes. It can help you identify inefficiencies
over multiple execution cycles, drive continuous enhancements, and improve your overall business productivity.
256
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Flow
Orchestrate Multi-User Processes with Flow Orchestrator (Beta)

Combine your automated processes in a single interface with Flow Orchestrator. Use Flow Orchestrator’s no-code approach to create
orchestrations and transform flows into steps organized by stages. Benefits of Flow Orchestrator include more flexibility to create approval
processes, better ability to assign work to any Salesforce user, and more control over record lifecycles.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited,
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms
How: From the Flows page in Setup, click New Flow. In New Flow, click All + Templates and select Flow Orchestrator (Beta). Select
either Autolaunched Orchestration (Beta) or Record-Triggered Orchestrations (Beta) and click Next. Add stages to your
orchestration, and then add steps to your stages. Use Decision elements, stage exit conditions, and step entry and exit conditions to
determine how your orchestration runs.

Display assigned work items generated by orchestrations on relevant records. Users can then see and complete their assigned work
without wasting time switching between tools.
editions.
How: When you create an interactive step in an orchestration, specify the record where work for the assigned user is to be displayed.
In Lightning App Builder, place the Flow Orchestrator Work Guide (Beta) component on the record page. A running orchestration
generates work for an assigned user, and the user receives an email with a link to the specified record page. There, they can complete
their assigned work in the Work Guide component.
Identify Bottlenecks and Opportunities with Flow Orchestrator (Beta)

Flow Orchestrator gives you a unique perspective on the execution of your business processes. It can help you identify inefficiencies
over multiple execution cycles, drive continuous enhancements, and improve your overall business productivity.
editions.
How: To see the details for a running orchestration, click the orchestration name in the Work Guide component on the associated record
page. On the Orchestration Instance page, click the Related tab.
Salesforce Flow
Among other Salesforce Flow enhancements, now a record-triggered flow can launch other flows via Subflow elements. Without
requiring code, record-triggered flows can access external systems via flow paths that run asynchronously. In screen flows, choices are
easier than ever to set up, and you can customize footer labels (beta). Flows can send outbound messages, so you can retire all your
workflow rules.
257
IN THIS SECTION:
Flow Builder
Record-triggered flows now support Subflow elements and asynchronous paths that integrate with external systems. Screen flows
offer easier choice setup and custom footer labels (beta), and they can roll back pending record changes when an element fails at
run time. Scheduled paths offer to-the-minute granularity and let you set the batch size. Outbound messages are now available as
a flow core action, so you can retire more workflow rules. Translate the input attributes of flow screen components with Translation
Workbench.
Flow Debugging
In Flow Builder, you can now debug scheduled paths and paths that run asynchronously. When debugging record-triggered flows,
you can update the triggering record’s fields right in the Debug flow window.
Flow and Process Management
The Flows page in Setup can now display triggering objects and platform events. Before you import a large set of records or publish
numerous platform event messages, you can easily check whether any flows are triggered by the object or platform event.
Flow Extensions
Use External Services with MuleSoft Anypoint Platform APIs to quickly generate invocable actions for flows. Elevate the intelligence
of your flows with predictions, predictive factors, and improvement recommendations from Einstein Discovery actions.
Salesforce Flow has several release updates that are scheduled to be enforced in future releases.
These updates affect only flows and processes that are configured to run on API version 53.0 or later. Versioned updates let you test
and adopt run-time behavior changes for individual flows and processes at your convenience. To change the run-time API version
of a flow, open it in Flow Builder and edit the flow version properties. To change the run-time API version of a process, open it in
Process Builder and edit its properties.
Flow Builder
Record-triggered flows now support Subflow elements and asynchronous paths that integrate with external systems. Screen flows offer
easier choice setup and custom footer labels (beta), and they can roll back pending record changes when an element fails at run time.
Scheduled paths offer to-the-minute granularity and let you set the batch size. Outbound messages are now available as a flow core
action, so you can retire more workflow rules. Translate the input attributes of flow screen components with Translation Workbench.
IN THIS SECTION:
Connect a Record-Triggered Flow to an External System Using an Asynchronous Path
Finally, you can use a record-triggered flow to integrate with an external system and update external objects—without writing any
code. Add an asynchronous path that runs after the original transaction for the triggering record is successfully committed. Now
your record-triggered flows can perform actions that were previously limited by transaction boundaries. For example, use an
asynchronous path to post a message to Slack, update a record in Heroku, or place an order using a third-party fulfillment system.
Both asynchronous and scheduled paths are subject to the same asynchronous per-transaction Apex limits.
Call Another Flow from a Record-Triggered Flow Using a Subflow Element
You asked for it! Subflow elements are now available for record-triggered flows that run after a record is saved or before a record is
deleted. Now you can break your automation into building blocks and reduce the complexity of a flow. From within a flow, call
another reusable flow to perform a common task. For example, when you create an opportunity, call an autolaunched flow that
determines which region to assign the opportunity to.
258
Roll Back Pending Record Changes When a Flow Element Fails at Run Time
To roll back a transaction and cancel all its pending record changes in a screen flow, add the new Roll Back Records element in a
fault path. Previously, when a transaction ended, its pending record changes were saved to the database even if a flow element
failed in the transaction.
Supercharge Scheduled Paths with Enhancements for Minutes, Batching, and Limits
It’s been a minute since you asked, but we heard you. Now you can specify in minutes the time that you want a scheduled path to
run. You can also set a batch size to improve performance and avoid hitting Apex governor limits. And now the less restrictive
asynchronous limits apply to scheduled paths, making it easier to complete complex operations without hitting limits.
Send an Outbound Message from Your Record-Triggered Flow
Outbound messages are available as a core action in Flow Builder. Send a SOAP message from a record-triggered flow to a designated
endpoint. For example, notify an external service when a high-priority case is created. Perhaps you used outbound message actions
with workflow rules and approval processes. Now outbound message actions are available for record-triggered flows that run after
the record is saved.
Enjoy a Streamlined Trigger Setup Experience in Flow Builder
We heard your requests and redesigned how you set up and configure triggers in Flow Builder. The process now follows the order
that most admins expect. Select the triggering object, configure the trigger, set entry conditions, and choose how best to optimize
your flow—all within a single window.
Translate Labels for More Flow Screen Components with Translation Workbench
Developers can now control which custom flow screen component labels and other flow screen fields are available to be translated
by using Translation Workbench. We also provide packaging support for the translated fields. And most Salesforce-provided flow
screen components are updated to support this functionality.
Get Rich Text Email Line Breaks from Long Text Area Fields
Rich text emails now honor line breaks in long text area fields. We convert line breaks to HTML for rich text emails. This update doesn’t
affect existing customer work-arounds to fix this issue.
Customize Button Labels in the Flow Screen Footer (Beta)
In Flow Builder, you can now easily customize the Previous, Pause, Next, and Finish button label text. With customized screen
navigation options, you can let a user know what to expect when the user clicks the button. Previously, to customize the footer
labels, you built a custom component.
In Auto-Layout, you can now connect to elements that don’t follow the usual consecutive auto-layout paths. Use the new Go To
connector to connect an element to any other element except an End element. Because Auto-Layout now supports certain
nonconsecutive paths, you can use it to work on more of your flows.
Read Loops More Easily in Auto-Layout (Beta)
We updated loops in Auto-Layout to make them easier to follow. Loops in Auto-Layout now travel in a clockwise direction and
display the After Last path to the right of the Loop element.
Set Up Flow Screen Choice Options with Fewer Clicks
Easily create standalone choice options as you configure choice components, and reduce the number of clicks it takes to configure
a choice component.
Edit Choice Resources Directly from Flow Screen Editor
You can easily edit a flow screen’s choice resources with the new edit button for each choice option. For example, you realize that
you misspelled the label after creating a choice option. Now you can correct the choice label with a click. Previously, even simple
changes to a choice resource required you to stop editing the screen so that you could find and edit the choice resource from the
toolbox.
259
Avoid Creating Incompatible Resources from Choice Components

When you select New Choice Resource, the Resource Type option now lists only valid resources for a choice option: Picklist Choice
Set, Record Choice Set, and standalone choice. So when you create a resource from a choice component, such as Picklist, it’s no
longer necessary to remember which resources are valid options and which ones aren’t.
Navigate Flow Builder More Easily with Improved Keyboard Shortcuts (Beta)
A number of keyboard shortcuts in Flow Builder are now updated. In auto-layout, element menus are easier to navigate, and you
can reach the zoom panel via the F6 key. In freeform and auto-layout, some keyboard shortcuts now provide greater browser
compatibility.
Create a Managed-Installed Flow That Admins Can Override and Customize
Most flows installed from managed packages serve as integral parts of a larger application, such as order management. Now a
developer can create a flow that an admin can override and use to customize parts of an application. After the admin creates and
activates the flow override, any requests then execute the override and not the original flow. The admin no longer spends time
updating any of the references to the original flow.
Other Changes to Salesforce-Provided Flow Screen Components
Some flow screen components were rebuilt using Lightning Web Components (LWC). For existing LWC screen components that
are configured to provide help, users now click instead of hover over the info bubble to see the help text. Also, we fixed an issue
with rich text formatting in help text.
Connect a Record-Triggered Flow to an External System Using an Asynchronous Path

Finally, you can use a record-triggered flow to integrate with an external system and update external objects—without writing any
code. Add an asynchronous path that runs after the original transaction for the triggering record is successfully committed. Now your
record-triggered flows can perform actions that were previously limited by transaction boundaries. For example, use an asynchronous
path to post a message to Slack, update a record in Heroku, or place an order using a third-party fulfillment system. Both asynchronous
and scheduled paths are subject to the same asynchronous per-transaction Apex limits.
Why: In Spring ’21, scheduled paths became available in record-triggered flows. Now we added asynchronous paths that run in the
background and don’t delay the execution of your original triggered transaction. Use an asynchronous path to execute a long-running
operation, such as a callout to an external web service or any operation that you want to run on its own time. You can also use an
asynchronous path to avoid the mixed DML error. For example, in a flow that’s triggered to run when an opportunity is created or
updated, use an asynchronous path to update a value on a user record.
You can’t define a time for an asynchronous path to run as you can for a scheduled path. And in situations when system resources are
unavailable, the execution of an asynchronous path will be delayed.
How: Asynchronous paths are available for record-triggered flows that run after the record is saved. Open the Start element.
Configure the flow to run only when a record is updated to meet the condition requirements, or select the Is Changed operator in a
condition. Select Include a Run Asynchronously path to access an external system after the original transaction for the
triggering record is successfully committed.
260
When a new or updated record triggers your flow to run, an asynchronous path is queued until it runs. You can monitor an asynchronous
path on the Time-Based Workflow page in Setup.
If you deselect Include a Run Asynchronously path, an asynchronous path is removed from your flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Spring '21 Release Notes: Run Part of a Record-Triggered Flow After the Triggering Event
Apex Developer Guide: Execution Governors and Limits
Apex Developer Guide: sObjects That Cannot Be Used Together in DML Operations
Heroku Dev Center: Heroku External Objects with Salesforce Connect
Call Another Flow from a Record-Triggered Flow Using a Subflow Element

You asked for it! Subflow elements are now available for record-triggered flows that run after a record is saved or before a record is
deleted. Now you can break your automation into building blocks and reduce the complexity of a flow. From within a flow, call another
reusable flow to perform a common task. For example, when you create an opportunity, call an autolaunched flow that determines
which region to assign the opportunity to.
How: Create an autolaunched referenced flow that performs a common task. As necessary, create input and output variables that are
sObjects of the same type.
Then open a record-triggered flow. Drag the Subflow element onto the canvas. Search for and select the referenced flow. Assign the
values of the $Record and $Record__Prior global variables to the input and output variables. When the record-triggered flow
executes the Subflow element, the triggering record’s values are available in the referenced flow’s $Record and $Record__Prior
global variables.
Roll Back Pending Record Changes When a Flow Element Fails at Run Time
To roll back a transaction and cancel all its pending record changes in a screen flow, add the new Roll Back Records element in a fault
path. Previously, when a transaction ended, its pending record changes were saved to the database even if a flow element failed in the
transaction.
Why: Oftentimes, when a flow element fails, you also want to cancel pending record changes that make sense only when the flow
element succeeds. If the element fails, saving the pending record changes in the current transaction doesn't make sense. For example,
your screen flow creates a lead and the associated appointment. The flow ends with the Screen element that shows a success message.
The Create Records element for the appointment has a fault connector to the Roll Back Records element. After the Roll Back Records
element, the flow executes the initial Screen element.
261
If the flow fails to execute the Create Records element for the appointment, the flow executes the elements in the fault path. The Roll
Back Records element rolls back the current transaction and cancels all its pending records. The current transaction starts after the first
Screen element executes and ends when another Screen element executes. Because the Create Records element for the lead is part of
the current transaction, the pending lead isn’t saved to the database.
Previously, if the flow failed to execute the Create Records element for the appointment, the flow executed the elements in the fault
path. The pending lead was saved when the transaction ended, so a lead was created without an appointment.
If the flow fails to execute the Create Records element for the appointment without a fault connector or Roll Back Records element, the
entire flow fails. The flow rolls back all transactions and their pending records are canceled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Flows in Transactions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Supercharge Scheduled Paths with Enhancements for Minutes, Batching, and Limits
It’s been a minute since you asked, but we heard you. Now you can specify in minutes the time that you want a scheduled path to run.
You can also set a batch size to improve performance and avoid hitting Apex governor limits. And now the less restrictive asynchronous
limits apply to scheduled paths, making it easier to complete complex operations without hitting limits.
Why: Previously, you could specify only a number of hours or days before or after the time source for a scheduled path to run. The time
source for a scheduled path is either when the triggering record is created or updated, or the value of a record date/time field.
Note: In some cases, a scheduled-path interview won’t execute until after system resources become available.
And to help avoid hitting a per-transaction Apex limit with a scheduled path, now you can specify a batch size for it. The batch size is
the number of records that a path can process at the same time. The default and maximum value is 200, and the minimum is 1. For
example, if you specify a batch size of two and seven records are scheduled to be processed in the same time interval, Flow Builder
groups them into four batches.
Scheduled paths and asynchronous paths are batched differently. In a scheduled path, all the records that meet the conditions and are
scheduled to be processed in the same minute are grouped up to the batch size into one batch.
In an asynchronous path, a set of records is always processed together in one batch and never combined with other records. For example,
if 20 accounts are updated in a single update operation, those same 20 accounts are processed in one batch.
262
How: Configure a scheduled path for a record-triggered flow that runs after the record is saved.
Specify the number of minutes before or after the time source for a scheduled path to run (1). Set a batch size smaller than 200 to improve
performance (2).
SEE ALSO:
Apex Developer Guide: Execution Governors and Limits
Send an Outbound Message from Your Record-Triggered Flow

Outbound messages are available as a core action in Flow Builder. Send a SOAP message from a record-triggered flow to a designated
endpoint. For example, notify an external service when a high-priority case is created. Perhaps you used outbound message actions
with workflow rules and approval processes. Now outbound message actions are available for record-triggered flows that run after the
record is saved.
How: Drag an Action element onto the canvas.
263
In the Action field, begin to enter outbound. You can also filter by the Outbound Message category or the Core Action type. Select
an outbound message action that has the same object type as the triggering record, for example, case.
You don’t need to enter input parameters when you configure an outbound message action. The triggering record’s ID is passed implicitly
to an outbound message action, which is different than other flow core actions.
After the flow runs, review the Outbound Messages page in Setup to confirm that the message was sent.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Outbound Message Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
264
Enjoy a Streamlined Trigger Setup Experience in Flow Builder

We heard your requests and redesigned how you set up and configure triggers in Flow Builder. The process now follows the order that
most admins expect. Select the triggering object, configure the trigger, set entry conditions, and choose how best to optimize your
flow—all within a single window.
How: Create a record-triggered flow, or open the Start element of one.
Select the object (1), and configure the trigger (2). Specify the entry conditions (3). Choose how you want to optimize the flow. A flow
that makes fast field updates (4) runs before the record is saved to the database. A flow that can update any record and perform actions
(5) runs after the record is saved to the database.
Translate Labels for More Flow Screen Components with Translation Workbench
Developers can now control which custom flow screen component labels and other flow screen fields are available to be translated by
using Translation Workbench. We also provide packaging support for the translated fields. And most Salesforce-provided flow screen
components are updated to support this functionality.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To allow translation of a custom component’s input attribute, in the definition file, add the translatable property to the attribute,
and set it to true.
Note: Salesforce Flow ignores default values for input properties that are specified in custom component definitions. As a result,
you can’t use Translation Workbench to translate default values specified in a custom component’s definition file.
265
Get Rich Text Email Line Breaks from Long Text Area Fields
Rich text emails now honor line breaks in long text area fields. We convert line breaks to HTML for rich text emails. This update doesn’t
affect existing customer work-arounds to fix this issue.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Customize Button Labels in the Flow Screen Footer (Beta)

In Flow Builder, you can now easily customize the Previous, Pause, Next, and Finish button label text. With customized screen navigation
options, you can let a user know what to expect when the user clicks the button. Previously, to customize the footer labels, you built a
custom component.
Why: Sometimes you need a flow screen’s navigation buttons to more accurately indicate what happens when a user clicks a button.
For example, you’re designing a screen flow and using a Create Records element that creates a contact record. On the flow screen, you
change the Finish button to Create Contact and the Previous button to Go Back. After the user clicks Create Contact, the screen flow
creates the contact record.
How: To relabel a button, select Use a custom label (Beta), and enter the text you want to use.
266
Note: Custom footer labels don’t support merge fields.

In Auto-Layout, you can now connect to elements that don’t follow the usual consecutive auto-layout paths. Use the new Go To connector
to connect an element to any other element except an End element. Because Auto-Layout now supports certain nonconsecutive paths,
you can use it to work on more of your flows.
How: To connect to an element that isn’t next on the auto-layout path, click on the connector that you want to change, and then
select Connect to element. This menu option replaces and improves upon the Merge with another path option, as connecting some
elements merges their paths for you.
To finish creating the Go To connector, click in the element that you want to connect.
267
To change the destination of a Go To connector, click on that connector, and then select Reroute connector. To delete a Go To
connector, click on that connector, and then select Delete connector.
Read Loops More Easily in Auto-Layout (Beta)

We updated loops in Auto-Layout to make them easier to follow. Loops in Auto-Layout now travel in a clockwise direction and display
the After Last path to the right of the Loop element.

Easily create standalone choice options as you configure choice components, and reduce the number of clicks it takes to configure a
choice component.
How: To add a standalone choice, enter your text in the Choice field, and select the option to create that choice. Flow Builder creates
the standalone choice for you and adds a reference to it in the Choice field.
268
Curious how Flow Builder creates the choice resource for you? Here’s how it maps what you entered in the Choice field to the various
settings in the choice resource.
Choice Setting Flow Builder Sets It To

Choice Label The value you entered in the choice text field
Choice Value
API Name The text you entered, formatted for API name requirements
Data Type The data type of the choice component
Note: This quick-create functionality is supported only for choice components with a Text data type.
SEE ALSO:

You can easily edit a flow screen’s choice resources with the new edit button for each choice option. For example, you realize that you
misspelled the label after creating a choice option. Now you can correct the choice label with a click. Previously, even simple changes
to a choice resource required you to stop editing the screen so that you could find and edit the choice resource from the toolbox.
269
How: After you add a choice option, click the pencil icon.
SEE ALSO:

When you select New Choice Resource, the Resource Type option now lists only valid resources for a choice option: Picklist Choice Set,
Record Choice Set, and standalone choice. So when you create a resource from a choice component, such as Picklist, it’s no longer
necessary to remember which resources are valid options and which ones aren’t.
How: To create a choice resource, click in the choice text field and select New Choice Resource in the dropdown menu.
270
In the list of resource types, notice that the list now only includes what’s valid in this context: Choice, Record Choice Set, and Picklist
Choice Set. In previous releases, it was easy to accidentally create a resource that wasn’t compatible in the context of the component.
271
And for another enhancement that makes your choice-building life easier: After choosing a choice component, the New Choice Resource
editor automatically inherits the data type value from the choice component.
SEE ALSO:
Navigate Flow Builder More Easily with Improved Keyboard Shortcuts (Beta)
A number of keyboard shortcuts in Flow Builder are now updated. In auto-layout, element menus are easier to navigate, and you can
reach the zoom panel via the F6 key. In freeform and auto-layout, some keyboard shortcuts now provide greater browser compatibility.
Note: This update includes changes to some keyboard shortcuts in auto-layout, which is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try
such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at
Agreements and Terms.
How: In auto-layout, use the Tab key to cycle through the open element menu controls, and use the arrow keys to cycle through the
open element menu options.
In auto-layout and freeform, these keyboard shortcuts are updated.
Action macOS Windows

Show keyboard shortcuts Cmd+/ Ctrl+/
Zoom in Cmd+Option+= Ctrl+Alt+=
Zoom out Cmd+Option+- Ctrl+Alt+-
Zoom to fit Cmd+Option+1 Ctrl+Alt+1
Reset zoom Cmd+Option+0 Ctrl+Alt+0
Create a Managed-Installed Flow That Admins Can Override and Customize

Most flows installed from managed packages serve as integral parts of a larger application, such as order management. Now a developer
can create a flow that an admin can override and use to customize parts of an application. After the admin creates and activates the
flow override, any requests then execute the override and not the original flow. The admin no longer spends time updating any of the
references to the original flow.
Why: For example, a developer makes a screen flow overridable. An admin wants to make org-specific customizations to the screen
flow, which is embedded in a Lightning page. The admin overrides the flow and changes a screen. After the admin saves and activates
the override, the newly customized flow, and not the original flow, appears on the page. No changes to the page are necessary.
Previously, if an admin wanted to change a managed-installed flow, their only option was to create a new, editable flow from a template.
Then they changed all the references to the flow, such as processes, REST API calls, or custom buttons or links. Changing all the references
can be challenging and in some cases impossible.
Also, now when you save a flow or do a save as, you see some new fields in advanced settings:
272
For a flow created from a template, the name of the template appears in Source Template (1). When a flow is a template, Template (2)
is automatically selected. When a flow overrides another flow, the name of the flow that it overrides appears in Original Flow (3). When
a flow is overridable, Overridable (4) is automatically selected. In most cases, the values in Source Template (1) and Original Flow (3) are
set automatically and not edited.
How: For a developer to make a flow overridable: You create a flow and select Overridable (4). Typically, a flow that’s overridable is
included as part of a managed package.
For a developer to make a flow a template: You create a flow and select Template (2). Typically, a flow template is included as part of
a managed package.
For an admin to create a flow override from an overridable flow: You can’t change a managed-installed flow that’s overridable. But you
can do a save as:
We also added these column headings to the flows list view in Setup: Overridable, Overridden By, Overrides, and Source Template.
273
Other Changes to Salesforce-Provided Flow Screen Components

Some flow screen components were rebuilt using Lightning Web Components (LWC). For existing LWC screen components that are
configured to provide help, users now click instead of hover over the info bubble to see the help text. Also, we fixed an issue with rich
text formatting in help text.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Essentials, Professional,
How: Review the changes for each type of screen component. If needed, update the affected components in your flow screens.
Some Flow Screen Components Rebuilt Using LWC
These Salesforce-provided screen components were rebuilt: Address, Display Text, Email, Long Text Area, Slider, and Toggle. Now
screen readers can read the labels associated with those components. The components are also easier for Salesforce to support in
all the places that can run screen flows. With a few exceptions, the rebuilt screen components look and behave the same as in
previous releases.
• For each rebuilt component that’s configured to validate user input, the error message appears when the user shifts the focus
to another screen component. Previously, the error message appeared when users navigated away from the flow screen.
• For each rebuilt component that’s configured to provide help, the help text appears in a popover. Previously, the help text
appeared in a separate window.
• For the Display Text component:

– Text indentation now works. Previously, if you clicked to indent some text, the text wasn’t indented at run time.
– The HTML tag <dfn> is no longer supported. At run time, content inside a <dfn> tag is displayed without any special
styling.
– The HTML tag <bdo> is no longer supported. At run time, content inside a <bdo> tag is displayed but doesn’t override
the base direction of text on the page. For example, if the page’s text direction is left to right, content inside a <bdo> tag
is no longer changed to go right to left.
Users Click Info Bubbles to View Help Text in LWC Screen Components
The behavior of info bubbles has changed for these Salesforce-provided screen components: Checkbox, Currency, Date, Date &
Time, Multi-Select Picklist, Number, Password, Picklist, Radio Buttons, and Text. For each LWC component that’s configured to provide
help, the user clicks the info bubble to view the help text in a white popover. Previously, the user hovered over the info bubble to
view the help text in a blue popover.
Rich Text Issue Fixed for Help Text in LWC Screen Components
For LWC screen components that are configured to provide help, we fixed an issue that prevented rich text formatting and images
from appearing at run time.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Provided Flow Screen Components (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Validate User Input on Flow Screens (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
274
Flow Debugging
In Flow Builder, you can now debug scheduled paths and paths that run asynchronously. When debugging record-triggered flows, you
can update the triggering record’s fields right in the Debug flow window.
IN THIS SECTION:
Change Record Field Values Temporarily While Debugging Record-Triggered Flows
Busy testing your record-triggered flows? Now, when you debug record updates, you can update field values in the Debug flow
window. No need to go back to a record and make updates there. You can even debug entry conditions and decision outcomes
that use the Is Changed operator to determine whether a flow will run when certain field values on the record change.
Debug Scheduled Paths in Record-Triggered Flows
We added paths to the list of debugging enhancements for record-triggered flows. You can debug a scheduled path, a path that
runs immediately, or a path that runs asynchronously.
View the Flow Interview GUID in a Flow Error Email
In each flow error email, you now get the globally unique identifier (GUID) of the failed flow interview. Previously, when a batch of
flow interviews failed unexpectedly, the email didn’t specify which interview was saved.
Choose More Options When You Debug a Flow
When you debug a flow, you now see element labels in Flow Builder and in flow error emails. In Flow Builder, choose whether to
show element API names and expand or collapse debug details. Previously, element API names always appeared. In Flow Builder,
all debug details always appeared.
When you debug a flow, Flow Builder now shows flow error details when the governor limit is reached for maximum CPU time.
Previously, Flow Builder could take several minutes to show error details.
When a flow that’s installed from a managed package fails, Flow Builder and flow error emails don't show some error details. If the
flow from a managed package contains a Pause element that fails, the element’s error details aren’t shown. If a flow that’s created
in your org executes a Subflow element that references a flow installed from a managed package, the referenced flow can fail. The
Subflow element’s error details show only the input and output values for the referenced flow.
Change Record Field Values Temporarily While Debugging Record-Triggered Flows

Busy testing your record-triggered flows? Now, when you debug record updates, you can update field values in the Debug flow window.
No need to go back to a record and make updates there. You can even debug entry conditions and decision outcomes that use the Is
Changed operator to determine whether a flow will run when certain field values on the record change.
Why: Previously, while you debugged a flow, you could select a record to test but you couldn’t view or update any of its fields. Now you
can temporarily update fields on the triggering record while you test specific scenarios. Rest assured that any record updates you make
while you debug flows are rolled back and aren’t permanently saved in your org.
For example, a flow is configured to run when a record is created or updated. The flow includes a Decision element that checks to see
whether the Mailing City value is changed. While debugging the flow, you change the Mailing City value. Then in debug details, you
can confirm that the Mailing City value was changed and the expected decision outcome executed.
How: Debug a record-triggered flow.
275
Run the flow as if the record is updated (1). Select the triggering record for the debug run (2). Update field values on the triggering record
to test specific scenarios (3). Click Run. The flow runs as if your updates were made.
Debug Scheduled Paths in Record-Triggered Flows

We added paths to the list of debugging enhancements for record-triggered flows. You can debug a scheduled path, a path that runs
immediately, or a path that runs asynchronously.
How: Debug a record-triggered flow. Select the path you want to debug.
276
View the Flow Interview GUID in a Flow Error Email

In each flow error email, you now get the globally unique identifier (GUID) of the failed flow interview. Previously, when a batch of flow
interviews failed unexpectedly, the email didn’t specify which interview was saved.
Choose More Options When You Debug a Flow

When you debug a flow, you now see element labels in Flow Builder and in flow error emails. In Flow Builder, choose whether to show
element API names and expand or collapse debug details. Previously, element API names always appeared. In Flow Builder, all debug
details always appeared.
How: In Flow Builder, expand all debug details or show the element API names or both. When you select preferences, the number of
selected preferences appears instead of the preference labels.
By default, the debug details are collapsed and show element labels.
277
If an error occurs for an element, the debug details for that element are expanded. If the flow executes a Pause element, the pause
configuration is shown.
When a flow interview resumes, we now show the Resume heading. Previously, no heading appeared.

When you debug a flow, Flow Builder now shows flow error details when the governor limit is reached for maximum CPU time. Previously,
Flow Builder could take several minutes to show error details.
When a flow that’s installed from a managed package fails, Flow Builder and flow error emails don't show some error details. If the flow
from a managed package contains a Pause element that fails, the element’s error details aren’t shown. If a flow that’s created in your
org executes a Subflow element that references a flow installed from a managed package, the referenced flow can fail. The Subflow
element’s error details show only the input and output values for the referenced flow.
Flow and Process Management

The Flows page in Setup can now display triggering objects and platform events. Before you import a large set of records or publish
numerous platform event messages, you can easily check whether any flows are triggered by the object or platform event.
278
IN THIS SECTION:
View All Triggering Objects and Platform Events for Triggered Flows
The new Triggered Flows list view shows the object or platform event that triggers each flow. Previously, you opened a flow in Flow
Builder to view the triggering object or platform event. Now, before you save or delete a batch of records, you can quickly check
whether your changes trigger a flow. You can add the new Triggering Object or Platform Event Label column to an editable list view
on the Flows page in Setup.
Analyze Flow Execution Events in Event Monitoring
Use the new Flow Execution event type in Event Monitoring to analyze trends in usage of your flows and troubleshoot performance
issues more efficiently.
Send Email Notifications for Every Automated Field Update
Send email notifications each time a workflow rule, process, or Apex trigger updates the same record that triggered the automation.
When you choose to notify users after operations, such as assigning a task, configure the new process automation setting to send
the email notifications. Previously, a workflow rule, process, or Apex trigger suppressed email notifications for updates to the same
record that triggered the automation. A previously released update required that you contact Salesforce Customer Support to stop
suppressing email notifications. You can now use this new setting to stop suppressing email notifications.
Run Optimizer to Get Recommendations for Migrating Your Workflow Rules to Flows
We updated the Salesforce Optimizer app to help you move from using workflow rules to using Flow Builder, the application that
automates complex business processes. Optimize your implementation by reviewing workflow limits and deleting inactive workflow
rules and validation rules. We updated these functions: Migrating Workflow Rules to Flow Builder, Active Workflow Rule Limits,
Inactive Workflow Rules, and Inactive Validation Rules.
We’re retiring the Run Flows permission in Experience Cloud sites to provide a more detailed permission structure and improve flow
security. Starting in Winter ‘21, the permission is no longer available in new orgs. Run Flows will be removed from all orgs in the
Summer ‘22 release.
The value for the Interview Status field on the FlowInterivew object and custom flow interview list views is now Paused for all paused
flow interviews. Previously, the value was null for flow interviews that were paused before Summer ’21.
View All Triggering Objects and Platform Events for Triggered Flows
The new Triggered Flows list view shows the object or platform event that triggers each flow. Previously, you opened a flow in Flow
Builder to view the triggering object or platform event. Now, before you save or delete a batch of records, you can quickly check whether
your changes trigger a flow. You can add the new Triggering Object or Platform Event Label column to an editable list view on the Flows
page in Setup.
editions.
Why: For example, before you import 100 new accounts, view the Triggered Flows list view to see whether creating accounts triggers
a flow.
279
How: To access the Triggered Flows list view and Triggering Object or Platform Event Label column, enable this process automation
setting: In Lightning Experience, use the enhanced Flows page and separate Paused and Scheduled Automations page.
Analyze Flow Execution Events in Event Monitoring

Use the new Flow Execution event type in Event Monitoring to analyze trends in usage of your flows and troubleshoot performance
issues more efficiently.
This event type is available in API version 53.0 and later but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Who: To access the Flow Execution event type in Event Monitoring, you need the Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring
add-on subscription.
SEE ALSO:
Analyze Your Flows in the Flow Execution Event Type
Send Email Notifications for Every Automated Field Update

Send email notifications each time a workflow rule, process, or Apex trigger updates the same record that triggered the automation.
When you choose to notify users after operations, such as assigning a task, configure the new process automation setting to send the
email notifications. Previously, a workflow rule, process, or Apex trigger suppressed email notifications for updates to the same record
that triggered the automation. A previously released update required that you contact Salesforce Customer Support to stop suppressing
email notifications. You can now use this new setting to stop suppressing email notifications.
Why: Consider these examples.
• You create a user and choose to welcome the user by email.
• You create a task and choose to notify the task owner by email.
• You create an assignment rule and choose to notify users when they’ve been assigned a case.
How: From Setup, enter process in the Quick Find box, and then select Process Automation Settings. Select Send an email each
time automation updates the same record.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Winter ’21 Release Notes: Stop Automated Field Updates from Suppressing Email Notifications (Previously Released Update)
Run Optimizer to Get Recommendations for Migrating Your Workflow Rules to Flows
We updated the Salesforce Optimizer app to help you move from using workflow rules to using Flow Builder, the application that
automates complex business processes. Optimize your implementation by reviewing workflow limits and deleting inactive workflow
rules and validation rules. We updated these functions: Migrating Workflow Rules to Flow Builder, Active Workflow Rule Limits, Inactive
Workflow Rules, and Inactive Validation Rules.
280

We’re retiring the Run Flows permission in Experience Cloud sites to provide a more detailed permission structure and improve flow
security. Starting in Winter ‘21, the permission is no longer available in new orgs. Run Flows will be removed from all orgs in the Summer
‘22 release.
Where: This change applies to Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise,
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
SEE ALSO:
Bid Farewell to Run Flows for Guest Users
The value for the Interview Status field on the FlowInterivew object and custom flow interview list views is now Paused for all paused
flow interviews. Previously, the value was null for flow interviews that were paused before Summer ’21.
Flow Extensions
Use External Services with MuleSoft Anypoint Platform APIs to quickly generate invocable actions for flows. Elevate the intelligence of
your flows with predictions, predictive factors, and improvement recommendations from Einstein Discovery actions.
IN THIS SECTION:
Generate Actions for Flow Builder from External Services for MuleSoft (Generally Available)
Import your MuleSoft Anypoint Platform APIs in a few clicks with External Services for MuleSoft. Every endpoint is then converted
into an action within your organization and immediately available in Flow Builder.
You can now associate a custom component’s error element with an input component. When you build a new custom component
for a flow, set an ID for the error element so that a screen reader can read the error message text that describes the custom component.
For example, you’re building a custom component that searches through a to-do list. You want to make sure that screen readers
properly associate errors with the to-do list component.
Design a flow screen with custom screen components that respond to updates on the same screen, and reduce the number of
screens for a user to navigate through. Previously, you placed these components on separate screens.
As new actions in Flow Builder, Einstein Discovery predictions provide prescriptive intelligence that augment the decisions and other
logic in your flows.
Generate Actions for Flow Builder from External Services for MuleSoft (Generally Available)
Import your MuleSoft Anypoint Platform APIs in a few clicks with External Services for MuleSoft. Every endpoint is then converted into
an action within your organization and immediately available in Flow Builder.
281
Who: To use External Services for MuleSoft, you need a valid MuleSoft license or demo account.
SEE ALSO:
You can now associate a custom component’s error element with an input component. When you build a new custom component for
a flow, set an ID for the error element so that a screen reader can read the error message text that describes the custom component.
For example, you’re building a custom component that searches through a to-do list. You want to make sure that screen readers properly
associate errors with the to-do list component.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic for flow screens that are rendered in Lightning runtime.
Developing a custom Lightning web component is available in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Developing
an Aura component is available in sandboxes and in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: Develop a custom component with input validation so that it lets the flow know whether the component is valid. If the custom
component is invalid, the flow displays an error message below the custom component. The flow passes the ID of the element that
displays the error message to a property called ariaDescribedBy in the custom component. The component receives the updated
ariaDescribedBy property and assigns the ID to the appropriate input component that has its own ariaDescribedBy
property. As a result, the error gets associated with the custom component’s input property.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Lightning Runtime vs. Classic Runtime for Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Design a flow screen with custom screen components that respond to updates on the same screen, and reduce the number of screens
for a user to navigate through. Previously, you placed these components on separate screens.
Why: For example, you design a flow screen where a user searches for a knowledge article. As they enter a Text component, a custom
Knowledge Article Search component searches with that text input value and returns the search results on the same screen. Another
example is a component that uses numerical values and performs a calculation within the same screen.
How: Add these components to a flow screen.
• Add a standard input component like a text or a number, or add a custom component with an output attribute.
• Add a custom component that responds to any changes made to the first component by setting its inputs to the output of the first
component. To follow the earlier example, set the Knowledge Article Search component’s query input to the output of the Text
component.
282

As new actions in Flow Builder, Einstein Discovery predictions provide prescriptive intelligence that augment the decisions and other
logic in your flows.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Developer Edition. Tableau CRM is available for an extra
cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Who: A valid Tableau CRM license is required to use Einstein Discovery.
SEE ALSO:

Salesforce Flow has several release updates that are scheduled to be enforced in future releases.
IN THIS SECTION:
Accurately Measure the CPU Time Consumption of Flows and Processes (Release Update)
This update lets Salesforce accurately measure, log, and limit the CPU time consumed by flows and processes. Because CPU time is
now accurately counted, flows and processes fail after executing the element, criteria node, or action that pushes a transaction over
the CPU limit. We recommend testing all complex flows and processes, which are more likely to exceed this limit. This update was
first made available in Spring ’21.
Analyze Screen Flow Usage (Release Update)
With this update, you can use reports to examine run-time details about your screen flows. Use these metrics to discover usage
patterns and in turn to optimize your screen flows for users. This update is available for Salesforce orgs that don’t already capture
run-time metrics for screen flows. This update was first made available in Spring ’21.
Check for Null Record Variables or Null Values of Lookup Relationship Fields in Process and Flow Formulas (Release Update)
This update enables process and flow formulas to reference a record’s field when the field is accessed via a null lookup relationship
field or null record variable. Now process and flow formulas can return null values when the calculations involve a null record variable
or null lookup relationship field. This update was first made available in Spring ’19. This update was enabled in Salesforce orgs that
received Summer ’20 before July 10, 2020. If this is true for your org and you disabled the update, you must enable it in Spring ’22.
In Spring ’21, Salesforce enabled the test run option for this update because of a known issue with the scheduled enforcement. You
can still disable the test run until the update is enforced in Spring ’22.
Disable Rules for Enforcing Explicit Access to Apex Classes (Release Update)
This update disables the requirement for a user running a flow to have explicit access to Apex classes invoked by that flow. This
update was first made available in Summer ’20 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’22, but we postponed the enforcement
date to Summer ’22.
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder (Release Update)
This update fixes a bug with the evaluation criteria in processes that have multiple criteria and a record update. This release update
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with
a value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
Make Paused Flow Interviews Resume in the Same Context with the Same User Access (Release Update)
With this update enabled, paused autolaunched flows always resume in the same context and with the same user access they had
before they were paused. This update was first made available in Winter ’21 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’22, but
we postponed the enforcement date to Summer ’22.
283
This update lets Salesforce accurately measure, log, and limit the CPU time consumed by flows and processes. Because CPU time is now
accurately counted, flows and processes fail after executing the element, criteria node, or action that pushes a transaction over the CPU
limit. We recommend testing all complex flows and processes, which are more likely to exceed this limit. This update was first made
available in Spring ’21.
When: Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search
Why: Salesforce accurately measures, logs, and limits the CPU time consumed by flows and processes that are configured to run in API
version 51.0 or later. With this update enabled, the behavior applies to all flows and processes, regardless of their run-time API versions.
Previously, the CPU time consumed was occasionally incorrect or misattributed to other automation occurring later in the transaction,
such as Apex triggers. With this update enabled, you can properly identify performance bottlenecks that cause the maximum
per-transaction CPU time consumption limit to be exceeded.
How: To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get
the Accurately Measure the CPU Time Consumption of Flows and Processes release update, follow the testing and activation steps.
Flows and processes fail if they cause a transaction to exceed the CPU time limit, and complex flows and processes are more likely to
exceed this limit. To decrease the CPU time usage of a flow or process, reduce the number of elements, formulas, and cross-object
references. You can check the debug logs to see how much CPU time is taken by each element, criteria node, and action.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

With this update, you can use reports to examine run-time details about your screen flows. Use these metrics to discover usage patterns
and in turn to optimize your screen flows for users. This update is available for Salesforce orgs that don’t already capture run-time metrics
for screen flows. This update was first made available in Spring ’21.
Why: With this update, run-time details from screen flows are saved in Flow Interview Logs and Flow Interview Log Entries records. You
can quickly start analyzing that data by running the Sample Flow Report: Screen Flows report.
You can also create custom reports using the Screen Flows custom report type. Or you can create a custom report type using the Flow
Interview Logs and Flow Interview Log Entries objects. Users then can create custom reports using the custom report type.
Review the Sample Flow Report: Screen Flows report or your own custom report to discover usage metrics for your screen flows. The
screen flow metrics can help you identify and improve the usability of screens that take users an unnecessarily long time to complete.
How: To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. To get
the Analyze Screen Flow Usage release update, follow the testing and activation steps.
284
As users run and navigate through screen flows, their usage data is collected and becomes available in the Sample Flow Report: Screen
Flows report. Run the report and confirm that it contains data from your screen flows.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Check for Null Record Variables or Null Values of Lookup Relationship Fields in Process and Flow
Formulas (Release Update)
This update enables process and flow formulas to reference a record’s field when the field is accessed via a null lookup relationship field
or null record variable. Now process and flow formulas can return null values when the calculations involve a null record variable or null
lookup relationship field. This update was first made available in Spring ’19. This update was enabled in Salesforce orgs that received
Summer ’20 before July 10, 2020. If this is true for your org and you disabled the update, you must enable it in Spring ’22. In Spring ’21,
Salesforce enabled the test run option for this update because of a known issue with the scheduled enforcement. You can still disable
the test run until the update is enforced in Spring ’22.
Why: In processes and flows, a formula can reference a record’s field via a record variable or lookup relationship field. At run time, when
the record variable or lookup relationship field is null, the formula sometimes returns null. Otherwise, it returns an unhandled exception.
With this update, the formula always returns a null value when the record variable or lookup relationship field is null. This update doesn’t
affect merge fields.
For example, when you update an account, a process starts and checks the criteria before it performs actions. The criteria includes a
formula that references the parent account’s name via the account’s Parent Account field. The Parent Account field is a lookup relationship
field: [Account].Parent.Name.
If the value of the lookup relationship field is null, the formula returns null. Without this update, the formula sometimes returns an
unhandled exception instead of null.
How: To test this critical update, we recommend working in a sandbox. Test all process and flow formulas that reference lookup
relationship fields or record variable fields. Processes have formulas in criteria and in actions. Flows have formulas in resources and in
validation of input components.
To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Check for
Null Record Variables or Null Values of Lookup Relationship Fields in Process and Flow Formulas, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
This update disables the requirement for a user running a flow to have explicit access to Apex classes invoked by that flow. This update
was first made available in Summer ’20 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’22, but we postponed the enforcement date to
Summer ’22.
285
When: This update is postponed to Summer ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for
your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Who: This update is available only for Salesforce orgs that enabled the Require User Access to Apex Classes Invoked by Flow update.
If you enabled the Require User Access to Apex Classes Invoked by Flow update, this Disable Rules for Enforcing Explicit Access to Apex
Classes update returns your org to its original and preferred state. In that state, user access to Apex classes is no longer required for flows
built in Flow Builder and processes built in Process Builder to invoke Apex. When users can run a flow or process, they implicitly have
access to its Apex actions.
Note:
• Neither release update affects legacy Apex actions (Apex plug-ins) in flows. User access was never restricted for legacy Apex
actions.
• If your flows or processes start to fail in Spring ’21 when they invoke Apex, we recommend that you enable this update as
soon as possible. Doing so can fix those errors, which typically display this message: “An unhandled fault has occurred in the
flow.” For details, see this Known Issue: Restricted Access Causing Flows to Fail in Spring ’21.
How: If you have a flow or process that invokes Apex, we strongly recommend that you take these preparation steps.
• If you granted users access to Apex classes via profiles or permission sets, apply the principle of least privilege by revoking that access.
But first confirm that the users don’t require access to those Apex classes for reasons other than running flows and processes.
• Override the default user access for your flows. By default, users can run a flow if they have the Flow User feature license, the Run
Flows permission, or the Manage Flow permission. For each flow, we recommend that you override that default behavior and restrict
access to enabled profiles or permission sets.
For example, to prevent unauthenticated guest users in Experience Cloud sites from running a flow, restrict the flow’s user access
to enabled profiles or permission sets. Then grant access to the appropriate users by enabling the specific profiles or permission sets.
Note: For detailed instructions for the preparation steps, see this Knowledge Article: Prepare for the "Disable Rules for Enforcing
Explicit Access to Apex Classes" Release Update.
The preparation steps are recommended as security best practices. But they’re not required, and enabling the Disable Rules for Enforcing
Explicit Access to Apex Classes update doesn’t impact existing implementations. For example, users’ permission sets and profiles can
continue to grant them explicit access to Apex classes.
To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Disable
Rules for Enforcing Explicit Access to Apex Classes, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with a
value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
286
How: To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For
Evaluate Criteria Based on Original Record Values in Process Builder, follow the testing and activation steps.
If you have a process with the Do you want to execute the actions only when specified changes are made to the record? option
selected, or it uses the ISCHANGED() function in your criteria, this update can cause the process to behave differently.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Make Paused Flow Interviews Resume in the Same Context with the Same User Access (Release
Update)
With this update enabled, paused autolaunched flows always resume in the same context and with the same user access they had before
they were paused. This update was first made available in Winter ’21 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’22, but we postponed
the enforcement date to Summer ’22.
Why: When an autolaunched flow resumes after a time-based resume event, the flow runs in system context without sharing. The flow
resumes this way regardless of the context and user access that it had before it was paused. With this update enabled, flows resume in
the same context and with the same permissions they had before they were paused.
For example, say that a user clicks a custom button to run an autolaunched flow, and that user doesn’t have permission to edit Record
A. At first, the autolaunched flow runs in user context. But after it’s paused and resumed, the flow runs in system context and can edit
Record A. Enabling this update prevents such flows from editing records that the running user doesn’t have permission to edit.
This update affects only autolaunched flows with Pause elements that are configured to resume at a specific time.
This update improves security in your Salesforce org by preventing you from unintentionally allowing users to create or edit records that
they don’t have access to.
How: Autolaunched flow interviews can fail if they’re paused and then resumed after a time-based resume event. To avoid failed flow
interviews, ensure that running users have the permissions required to execute all flow elements after each Pause element. Alternatively,
you can configure autolaunched flows to always run in system context.
To apply this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Make
Paused Flow Interviews Resume in the Same Context with the Same User Access, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates

These updates affect only flows and processes that are configured to run on API version 53.0 or later. Versioned updates let you test and
adopt run-time behavior changes for individual flows and processes at your convenience. To change the run-time API version of a flow,
open it in Flow Builder and edit the flow version properties. To change the run-time API version of a process, open it in Process Builder
and edit its properties.
287
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Next Best Action
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Essentials, Professional,
Get Date Without Time Values from Date Objects
Previously, when a flow ran as an invocable action via REST API, date type output variables returned strings with both date and time.
Now those values contain a date in the YYYY-MM-DD” format without the time component.
Reset Screen Components to Admin-Configured Defaults When Making Hidden Components Visible
When a user navigates back to a screen where a component was hidden and makes the component visible, the component now
resets to use the admin-configured input values. This change applies to most standard components, including Toggle, Dependent
Picklist, Lookup, Email, Name, Address, Phone, URL, and File Upload, and all custom components.
In API version 52.0 and earlier, the hidden component on the previous screen would sometimes not work as expected or show an
error message. This issue occurred after the user navigated back to that screen and interacted with other components that made
the hidden component visible.
For example, when a Toggle component was made visible again, the component reverted to the default labels defined in the
underlying component. The labels changed to Toggle, Active, and Inactive rather than the default labels set by the admin. When a
Dependent Picklist component was made visible again, the component rendered as a blank picklist with no inputs and showed an
error message.
Specify the default workflow user to run schedule-triggered flows
Now you can specify the default workflow user in your org’s process automation settings to run schedule-triggered flows. Previously,
the Automated Process user ran schedule-triggered flows. If you don’t specify the default workflow user to run schedule-triggered
flows, the Automated Process user runs them by default instead.
Correctly evaluate the true and false global constants in conditions in some elements
When you select the {!$GlobalConstant.True} value for a text field in a condition in the Start, Update Records, Get
Records, or Delete Records elements of a flow, a string value of true is returned. When you select the
{!$GlobalConstant.False} value in the same scenarios, a string value of false is returned. Previously, these conditions
returned null values at run time.

Use Einstein Next Best Action to automatically show recommendations and flow actions to your users. You can now build recommendation
strategies using the actions and logic capabilities of Flow Builder (pilot).
IN THIS SECTION:
Build Einstein Next Best Action Strategies in Flow Builder (Pilot)
Sort collections and assign data into recommendations while taking advantage of Flow Builder’s features and structure.
Show Flow-Driven Recommendations on Lightning App Pages (Pilot)
After building a recommendation strategy in Flow Builder, display that strategy’s recommendations on Lightning app pages. Just
as you would with a strategy built in Strategy Builder, add an Einstein Next Best Action component to each Lightning app page, but
specify Flow Builder as the strategy source.
Build Einstein Next Best Action Strategies in Flow Builder (Pilot)

Sort collections and assign data into recommendations while taking advantage of Flow Builder’s features and structure.
288
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Next Best Action
How: If you’re interested in participating in the pilot program, ask your Salesforce account executive.
To create a strategy in Flow Builder, go to the Flows page in Setup and click New Flow.
Select the All + Templates tab (1), then select the Recommendation Strategy category (2). Select the Recommendation Strategy
flow type (3), then click Next (4).
When building a recommendation strategy, use the Get Records element to add your recommendations to the outputRecommendations
collection variable. Lightning app pages only show recommendations that are in outputRecommendations.
Use the Collection Sort element the same way you use the Sort element in Strategy Builder. You can also use the Recommendation
Assignment element in place of Strategy Builder’s Map element. And keep in mind that in Flow Builder, all elements are executed in the
order they’re connected. Strategy Builder’s multiple-branch logic isn’t supported in Flow Builder.
Show Flow-Driven Recommendations on Lightning App Pages (Pilot)

After building a recommendation strategy in Flow Builder, display that strategy’s recommendations on Lightning app pages. Just as you
would with a strategy built in Strategy Builder, add an Einstein Next Best Action component to each Lightning app page, but specify
Flow Builder as the strategy source.
How: To use a recommendation strategy to display recommendations on a Lightning app page, first create or edit a Lightning app page
in Lightning App Builder.
289
In Lightning App Builder, select an existing Einstein Next Best Action component (1) or add a new one (2). Change the Strategy Source
(3) to Flow Builder (Pilot), then select your recommendation strategy in Action Strategy (4). Save your work.
If the page isn’t already active, click Activation and select an activation option for the page.

Explore ways to build recommendations with Try Einstein. Build recommendations for managed packages with Einstein Recommendation
Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Experience Cloud
the overhead of developing a complete website. Archive sites that outlived their usefulness and free up space to create the sites you
need. Optimize your site performance with several content delivery network (CDN) enhancements. And build LWR sites more quickly
with several new drag-and-drop components.
Tip: The recent rename to Experience Cloud introduced some new terminology, and it can be tricky to know what’s what. Here’s
the rundown.
• Experience Builder sites, formerly called Lightning communities, are template-based sites that you customize in Experience
Builder. And with the launch of the Lightning Web Runtime, we added two new terms for even greater clarity.
– LWR sites are built with the latest LWR-based templates, such as the Build Your Own (LWR) template.
– Aura sites are built with our original templates that run on Aura, such as Customer Service, Partner Central, and Customer
Account Portal.
• Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce sites are sites that you develop using Visualforce.
So to help identify which new features apply to your sites, we use the terms LWR sites, Aura sites, and Visualforce sites.
290
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Capture Leads and Deliver Fresh Content with the Microsite
Template
IN THIS SECTION:
Capture Leads and Deliver Fresh Content with the Microsite Template
Enjoy the flexibility to create a site and deploy it to customers without the bulk of a full website. The new Microsite template showcases
best practices and gives you a new way to use Experience Cloud’s latest technology. With the ability to gather user data and create
leads directly from your site, opportunities are easy to track.
Archive Experience Cloud Sites (Closed Beta)
We heard you loud and clear: You want a way to archive a site in Salesforce after it has outlived its usefulness for your business needs.
To archive an inactive site, use the Archive Site button on your site's detail page (accessed through the Salesforce CMS app). Don’t
worry, though. If you change your mind, you can always unarchive it. When a site is archived, its URL is unavailable to all users,
including admins. Instead, users see a Site under maintenance page. You can archive up to 100 sites, and archived sites don’t count
against your Salesforce limit of 100 sites.
Customize the look of buttons and forms in LWR sites with additional branding properties. Set the default language in your LWR
sites. And to maintain SEO equity, add URL redirects within your LWR and Aura sites.
Components in Experience Builder
Take advantage of several new drag-and-drop components for LWR sites.
Develop sites and custom components more efficiently with support for expression language and @salesforce scoped modules.
Performance
Optimize your site performance by using enhanced domains and enforcing only single certificates to serve your domain. Support
high-traffic sites during self-registration.
Hide more personal information fields with a new user setting, retain guest users’ access to products, and give more granular access
to flows.
Other Changes
Learn about additional Experience Cloud improvements.
Enjoy the flexibility to create a site and deploy it to customers without the bulk of a full website. The new Microsite template showcases
best practices and gives you a new way to use Experience Cloud’s latest technology. With the ability to gather user data and create leads
directly from your site, opportunities are easy to track.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites using the Microsite template, accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic.
The template is available when you purchase Salesforce CMS in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Why: Gather user information from your site and store it directly in the Salesforce Leads object using the new Lead Form component.
Using the power of Lightning Web Runtime (LWR), microsites provide enhanced page performance and Lightning components that
are easier for your developers to customize. New components include:
• Lead Form
• Header
• Banner
• Tile
• Image
• Video
291
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Archive Experience Cloud Sites (Closed Beta)
• Text
• Button
• Horizontal Line
SEE ALSO:
Make Cross-Cloud Connections with the Marketing Cloud Form Component (Pilot)
Archive Experience Cloud Sites (Closed Beta)

We heard you loud and clear: You want a way to archive a site in Salesforce after it has outlived its usefulness for your business needs.
To archive an inactive site, use the Archive Site button on your site's detail page (accessed through the Salesforce CMS app). Don’t
worry, though. If you change your mind, you can always unarchive it. When a site is archived, its URL is unavailable to all users, including
admins. Instead, users see a Site under maintenance page. You can archive up to 100 sites, and archived sites don’t count against your
Salesforce limit of 100 sites.
Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this feature.
How: Contact Salesforce Customer Support to enable the Archive Site feature. After it’s enabled in your org, access your site’s detail
page from App Launcher > Salesforce CMS > CMS Experiences after turning on CMS-related tabs for your profile.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Start Using Salesforce CMS

Customize the look of buttons and forms in LWR sites with additional branding properties. Set the default language in your LWR sites.
And to maintain SEO equity, add URL redirects within your LWR and Aura sites.
IN THIS SECTION:
Redirect Users Within an Experience Cloud Site
Redirect users to URLs within the same Experience Cloud site to retain the discoverability and SEO equity of your web pages.
Fine-Tune Your LWR Sites with New Branding Properties
Customize the size and shape of the buttons and input fields on your LWR site. Specify the color of individual elements, such as
headings, body text, links, buttons, and input fields. On the reorganized Site Spacing tab, you can more easily adjust the space above,
below, and between section components on your desktop and mobile sites.
Now you can set your LWR site’s default language to any language that Experience Cloud supports. Previously, LWR sites supported
only English (US).
Use Lightning Message Service in Aura and LWR Site Pages (Generally Available)
Communicate across the DOM within an Aura or LWR site page using Lightning Message Service. You can also communicate between
Aura and Lightning web components.
292
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Experience Builder Sites
Automatically Complete Addresses in Aura Sites

When customers and partners who use your Aura sites begin to enter an address on the site, it’s completed using Google location
services. The autocomplete option for Aura sites is enabled when you enable it in Salesforce.
Differentiate Between the Build Your Own Templates for Aura and LWR Sites
For clarity, the original Build Your Own template is now called Build Your Own (Aura). This rename makes it easier to distinguish
between Aura and LWR when choosing a Build Your Own template in the site-creation wizard.
Use Audiences as Criteria for Other Audiences
Instead of recreating audience criteria, reuse an audience as criteria in another audience.
Paste Images in Chatter Posts and Comments
Quickly add images to your Chatter posts and comments by copying and pasting them instead of saving them to a file and then
uploading them.
Display Both the Hamburger Menu and the Back Button in the iOS Mobile Publisher App
Make the mobile publisher app navigation easier to use for iOS users by including both the hamburger menu and the back button
in your site header.
Redirect Users Within an Experience Cloud Site

Redirect users to URLs within the same Experience Cloud site to retain the discoverability and SEO equity of your web pages.
Where: This change applies to Aura and LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
How: To set up URL redirects, add the source and target URLs to a CSV file that you can upload to your site’s Experience Workspace. You
can use the provided sample CSV template to add your URLs. The source URL is the Experience Cloud site page you want to direct your
users away from. The target URL is the page in the same Experience Cloud site where you want to redirect your users to. For the source
and target URLs, include everything after the domain name.
Sample CSV
/source, /target
/TargetSite/s/account/001RM000005Su9JYAS/acme, /newaccount/001RM000005Su9JYAS/acme
To import the CSV file to your Experience Cloud site, select Workspaces > Administration > URL Redirects > Import.
Note: Importing a new CSV file overwrites the existing redirect file. To add URLs redirects without replacing existing redirect rules,
first export your existing redirects as a CSV file. Add the new URLs to the file you downloaded, and then import the CSV file again.
293
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Redirect Users to Your Experience Builder Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Fine-Tune Your LWR Sites with New Branding Properties

Customize the size and shape of the buttons and input fields on your LWR site. Specify the color of individual elements, such as headings,
body text, links, buttons, and input fields. On the reorganized Site Spacing tab, you can more easily adjust the space above, below, and
between section components on your desktop and mobile sites.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
Why: The Theme panel in Experience Builder includes new selections for adjusting the branding properties of the buttons and forms
on your site.
For buttons, adjust the appearance and size of the button text. You can also modify the width, font size, and edges of standard, small,
and large buttons.
294
For forms, adjust how rounded the corners of your input fields are, and how heavy the border is around these fields.
Customize the colors for these elements and more on the new Advanced tab on the Colors panel. Text, heading, link, button, and form
colors default to the customizations that you apply on the Basic tab. The hover color for links derives from the link color, and the colors
for button hover, focus, and active states are based on the button color. You can override all these defaults to refine the branding color
of each of these elements across your site.
The Site Spacing panel now organizes your customization options onto separate tabs for your desktop and mobile sites.
295
Tip: Each property in the Theme panel maps to --dxp styling hooks, which you can use when creating custom Lightning web
components. When a user updates the branding property in the Theme panel, the system automatically updates any Lightning
web components that use the hooks associated with that property.

Now you can set your LWR site’s default language to any language that Experience Cloud supports. Previously, LWR sites supported only
English (US).
Why: When you update the site’s default language in Settings > Languages in Experience Builder, system and custom labels are
updated with translations, if they exist in Translation Workbench. Values in the @salesforce/site/activeLanguages scoped
module in custom Lightning web components are also updated.
296
Use Lightning Message Service in Aura and LWR Site Pages (Generally Available)
Communicate across the DOM within an Aura or LWR site page using Lightning Message Service. You can also communicate between
Aura and Lightning web components.
SEE ALSO:
Developer Documentation: Communicate Across the DOM with Lightning Message Service
Developer Documentation: Message Service
Automatically Complete Addresses in Aura Sites

When customers and partners who use your Aura sites begin to enter an address on the site, it’s completed using Google location
services. The autocomplete option for Aura sites is enabled when you enable it in Salesforce.
Where: This change applies to Aura sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance,
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Autocomplete on Standard Addresses
Differentiate Between the Build Your Own Templates for Aura and LWR Sites
For clarity, the original Build Your Own template is now called Build Your Own (Aura). This rename makes it easier to distinguish between
Aura and LWR when choosing a Build Your Own template in the site-creation wizard.
Why: Select the template that suits your needs in the site creation wizard.
• Build Your Own (LWR) is powered by the Lightning Web Runtime (LWR) and based exclusively on the Lightning Web Components
programming model. It includes drag-and-drop functionality and is suitable for anyone familiar with developing custom Lightning
web components and working with Salesforce DX, User Interface API, and Apex.
• Build Your Own (Aura) is Aura-based and provides the basic pages that every Experience Cloud site requires. With drag-and-drop
functionality, you can easily add more pages and components to customize the site.
297
Use Audiences as Criteria for Other Audiences

Instead of recreating audience criteria, reuse an audience as criteria in another audience.
Paste Images in Chatter Posts and Comments

Quickly add images to your Chatter posts and comments by copying and pasting them instead of saving them to a file and then uploading
them.
298
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Components in Experience Builder
Display Both the Hamburger Menu and the Back Button in the iOS Mobile Publisher
App
Make the mobile publisher app navigation easier to use for iOS users by including both the hamburger menu and the back button in
your site header.
Where: This change applies to iOS Mobile Publisher Apps in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Components in Experience Builder

Take advantage of several new drag-and-drop components for LWR sites.
IN THIS SECTION:
Add Content to LWR Sites with New Components
Create pixel-perfect sites, populated with content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources, with new Lightning web components
for your LWR sites. Look for these new components in Experience Builder: Banner, Button, Horizontal Line, Image, Text Block, Tile,
and Video.
Dynamically Add Content to Your LWR Sites with Data Binding in LWC Components
Use data binding to quickly select content to dynamically populate your LWR sites. Save your content one time and use it anywhere.
Create content that matches your branding and messaging, save it in your Salesforce CMS, and then use it on any LWR site. Use the
Banner or Tile components to automagically populate content from Salesforce CMS.
Experience Cloud and Marketing Cloud make a great team. With the new Marketing Cloud Form, you can use your microsites to
capture visitor information and send it directly to Marketing Cloud. Spin up a new site, and use the Marketing Cloud Form component
to create Marketing Cloud data extensions and collect contacts that can be stored directly in Marketing Cloud.
Add Content to LWR Sites with New Components

Create pixel-perfect sites, populated with content from Salesforce CMS and other data sources, with new Lightning web components
for your LWR sites. Look for these new components in Experience Builder: Banner, Button, Horizontal Line, Image, Text Block, Tile, and
Video.
Unlimited, and Developer editions. You must have at least one active community license in your org to use this feature.
299
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Components in Experience Builder
Dynamically Add Content to Your LWR Sites with Data Binding in LWC Components
Use data binding to quickly select content to dynamically populate your LWR sites. Save your content one time and use it anywhere.
Create content that matches your branding and messaging, save it in your Salesforce CMS, and then use it on any LWR site. Use the
Banner or Tile components to automagically populate content from Salesforce CMS.
How: On the property panel of the Banner or Tile components, select data from content saved in Salesforce CMS. Use the fields in the
component’s property editor to map content from CMS to the component.
You can even nest components within one another. The nested component inherits content from the parent component
Note:
• The HTML Editor, Image, Text Block, Video, and Button components don’t support direct data binding (in that they don’t have
a Select Content button in the properties), but you can nest them in other data-bound components and CMS or CRM detail
pages. The nested component inherits the content from the data-bound component in which it’s nested.
• Data binding isn’t supported with ExperienceBundle.
Experience Cloud and Marketing Cloud make a great team. With the new Marketing Cloud Form, you can use your microsites to capture
visitor information and send it directly to Marketing Cloud. Spin up a new site, and use the Marketing Cloud Form component to create
Marketing Cloud data extensions and collect contacts that can be stored directly in Marketing Cloud.
Where: This change applies to LWR sites using the Microsite template, accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic.
The template is available when you purchase Salesforce CMS in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
300
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Developer Productivity
Connect REST API and Connect in Apex support Marketing Cloud Forms.
SEE ALSO:
Develop sites and custom components more efficiently with support for expression language and @salesforce scoped modules.
IN THIS SECTION:
Use Expression Language with Data Binding in LWR Sites
Use the following expressions in Experience Builder when working with LWR sites: {!Item.fieldName} to get a field’s value
in data-bound contexts, {!Route.param} to get a query or route parameter from the URL, and {!Site.basePath} to
resolve the basePath of the LWR site. Anything inside the {! } delimiters is evaluated and dynamically replaced when the
component is rendered.
Page References Now Support External Record Routes
The PageReference object, which generates a unique URL format and defines attributes that apply to all pages of that type,
now supports External Record Pages (for CMS Connect) and External Record Relationship Pages (for Quip Related List pages).
Set Up Tab Bar Navigation for Mobile Publisher Apps in ExperienceBundle
Do you prefer to work in the API? Starting in Winter ’22, you can programmatically set up the tab bar navigation for mobile publisher
apps in the ExperienceBundle metadata type.
Get Information About the Current Site in Lightning Web Components
Use the @salesforce/site scoped module to import information about the current Experience Builder site when developing
custom Lightning web components.
Incorporate User-Authorized Cookie Consent into Your Sites
Use the lightning/userConsentCookie module to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your Lightning web
components. Users can allow one or more specific cookie types: Required, Marketing, Preference, and Statistics.
Use the @salesforce/apexContinuation Scoped Module in LWR Sites
The @salesforce/apexContinuation scoped module, which lets you import Apex methods that can return a continuation
in custom Lightning web components, is now supported in LWR sites.
Use Expression Language with Data Binding in LWR Sites

Use the following expressions in Experience Builder when working with LWR sites: {!Item.fieldName} to get a field’s value in
data-bound contexts, {!Route.param} to get a query or route parameter from the URL, and {!Site.basePath} to resolve
the basePath of the LWR site. Anything inside the {! } delimiters is evaluated and dynamically replaced when the component is
rendered.
301
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Performance
Page References Now Support External Record Routes

The PageReference object, which generates a unique URL format and defines attributes that apply to all pages of that type, now
supports External Record Pages (for CMS Connect) and External Record Relationship Pages (for Quip Related List pages).
Set Up Tab Bar Navigation for Mobile Publisher Apps in ExperienceBundle

Do you prefer to work in the API? Starting in Winter ’22, you can programmatically set up the tab bar navigation for mobile publisher
apps in the ExperienceBundle metadata type.
Get Information About the Current Site in Lightning Web Components

Use the @salesforce/site scoped module to import information about the current Experience Builder site when developing
custom Lightning web components.
Where: This change applies to Lightning web components used in LWR and Aura sites accessed through Lightning Experience and
Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Incorporate User-Authorized Cookie Consent into Your Sites

Use the lightning/userConsentCookie module to incorporate user-authorized cookie consent into your Lightning web
components. Users can allow one or more specific cookie types: Required, Marketing, Preference, and Statistics.
Where: This change applies to Lightning web components used in LWR and Aura sites, accessed through Lightning Experience in
SEE ALSO:
Use the @salesforce/apexContinuation Scoped Module in LWR Sites

The @salesforce/apexContinuation scoped module, which lets you import Apex methods that can return a continuation
in custom Lightning web components, is now supported in LWR sites.
Where: This change applies to Lightning web components used in LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce
Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Performance
Optimize your site performance by using enhanced domains and enforcing only single certificates to serve your domain. Support
high-traffic sites during self-registration.
302
IN THIS SECTION:
Automatically Get CDN for Digital Experiences
The content delivery network (CDN) for Digital Experiences ensures top-level performance at peak traffic levels, allowing your site
to scale to meet the demands of your business. All orgs that are using enhanced domains now automatically use Salesforce’s included
CDN for Digital Experiences.
Use Single Certificates with the CDN for Digital Experiences
Keep brands separate and ensure site safety by serving your site domain with a single certificate. Shared domain certificates are no
longer available for new sites using the CDN for Digital Experiences.
Improve Self-Registration Performance for High-Scale Sites (Pilot)
Large-scale business-to-consumer experiences often involve higher than usual registration traffic. Improve the performance of
high-traffic sites during self-registration using bulk processing, with minimal coding required. Instead of processing requests one at
a time, they’re accumulated into batches and processed in bulk asynchronously. After users are successfully processed, they receive
a welcome email, along with information to complete the registration.
Get Improved Self-Registration Performance with Account Role Optimization
We improved the self-registration process for orgs using account role optimization for their high-traffic sites. The registration process
is now 10 times faster than before.
Use the Customizable Service Not Available Page for LWR and Aura Sites
Maintain business continuity when your site is down regardless of which template you’re using. The Service Not Available page is
available to orgs that have enabled the content delivery network with a custom URL for their Digital Experiences. The page is also
included in packaged and exported sites.
Load Pages Faster with HTML Document Caching in LWR Sites
To improve page load times for LWR sites, HTML document caching is now enabled in orgs that use Salesforce’s included CDN for
Digital Experiences.
Get Ready for Salesforce Edge Network for Custom Domains
To deliver a consistent user experience regardless of a user’s location, Salesforce is migrating custom domains that serve Experience
Cloud sites to the Salesforce Edge Network infrastructure. Salesforce Edge Network routes requests to the closest Salesforce location
where Salesforce Edge Network is deployed. This routing brings Salesforce services closer to the user on trusted Salesforce infrastructure.
Automatically Get CDN for Digital Experiences

The content delivery network (CDN) for Digital Experiences ensures top-level performance at peak traffic levels, allowing your site to
scale to meet the demands of your business. All orgs that are using enhanced domains now automatically use Salesforce’s included
CDN for Digital Experiences.
How: Enable Enhanced Domains for your org and automatically get Salesforce’s CDN for Digital Experiences. When you enable Enhanced
Domains, your Experience Cloud sites are served on <customer-defined>.my.site.com instead of <customer-defined>.force.com and
the my.site.com domain is automatically enabled with the CDN for Digital Experiences.
Use Single Certificates with the CDN for Digital Experiences

Keep brands separate and ensure site safety by serving your site domain with a single certificate. Shared domain certificates are no longer
available for new sites using the CDN for Digital Experiences.
303
Improve Self-Registration Performance for High-Scale Sites (Pilot)

Large-scale business-to-consumer experiences often involve higher than usual registration traffic. Improve the performance of high-traffic
sites during self-registration using bulk processing, with minimal coding required. Instead of processing requests one at a time, they’re
accumulated into batches and processed in bulk asynchronously. After users are successfully processed, they receive a welcome email,
along with information to complete the registration.
It isn’t part of your purchased Services. This feature is subject to change, may be discontinued with no notice at any time in SFDC’s
How: Contact Salesforce Customer Support to participate in the High-Traffic Self-Registration pilot program.
Get Improved Self-Registration Performance with Account Role Optimization

We improved the self-registration process for orgs using account role optimization for their high-traffic sites. The registration process is
now 10 times faster than before.
Who: This feature is available to Experience Cloud license users who have enabled account role optimization for their org.
Use the Customizable Service Not Available Page for LWR and Aura Sites
Maintain business continuity when your site is down regardless of which template you’re using. The Service Not Available page is available
to orgs that have enabled the content delivery network with a custom URL for their Digital Experiences. The page is also included in
packaged and exported sites.
Load Pages Faster with HTML Document Caching in LWR Sites

To improve page load times for LWR sites, HTML document caching is now enabled in orgs that use Salesforce’s included CDN for Digital
Experiences.
Where: This change applies to Lightning web components used in LWR sites accessed through Lightning Experience and Salesforce
Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.

Cloud sites to the Salesforce Edge Network infrastructure. Salesforce Edge Network routes requests to the closest Salesforce location
where Salesforce Edge Network is deployed. This routing brings Salesforce services closer to the user on trusted Salesforce infrastructure.
Where: This change applies to custom domains serving Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and
Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. It applies only to custom domains with the HTTPS
option, “Salesforce serves the domain over HTTPS on Salesforce’s servers using your HTTPS certificate.”
When: Salesforce started migrating custom domains to Salesforce Edge Network in August 2021.
304
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Security and Sharing
How: To determine whether your custom domain uses Salesforce Edge Network, look for references to edge when you view your custom
domain’s HTTP headers or resolve the domain name. For more information, see the knowledge article, “What is Salesforce Edge Network?”
If you use allowlists for Salesforce IP addresses and you allow only regional IP addresses, we recommend that you include our current
IP ranges for regions where you have users. Including these IP ranges enables your users to connect to the closest available Salesforce
data center where Salesforce Edge Network is deployed.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Salesforce IP Addresses and Domains to Allow
Knowledge Article: What is Salesforce Edge Network?
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Edge Network (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Hide more personal information fields with a new user setting, retain guest users’ access to products, and give more granular access to
flows.
IN THIS SECTION:
Prevent external users, such as portal or partner users, from viewing personal information in your user records. Now when you apply
the Enhanced Personal Information Management setting, Salesforce blocks view access to 20 fields that are considered personal
information. This setting is also more flexible than the Hide Personal Information setting. To implement this setting, in User Management
Settings, add or remove the PersonalInfo compliance category for any field.
Create Sharing Rules to Retain and Control Guest Users’ Product Access (Release Update)
To better protect your Salesforce data, this update changes how unauthenticated guest access to product records is controlled. To
prevent guest users from losing access to products, create and test guest user sharing rules. The Product org-wide sharing default
for external users is no longer applied to guest users, and guest user access is set to Private. This setting can’t be changed. This update
The Run Flows permission for the Guest User and Experience Cloud External User profiles is no longer available in new orgs, starting
in Winter ’21. Without the Run Flows permission, you’re free to use the more granular permission structure embedded in Flows and
give your users the detailed access they need. Run Flows will be removed from all orgs in the Summer ’22 release. To avoid future
access issues, we recommend updating your existing sites to the new permission structure before the Summer ’22 release.
Default Guest User Access to Recognition Badges Disabled (Release Update)
To make sure that recognition badges aren’t visible to guest users unintentionally, the default rules now allow only authenticated
users to see them. But you can turn off the default setting if you prefer.

Prevent external users, such as portal or partner users, from viewing personal information in your user records. Now when you apply the
Enhanced Personal Information Management setting, Salesforce blocks view access to 20 fields that are considered personal information.
This setting is also more flexible than the Hide Personal Information setting. To implement this setting, in User Management Settings,
add or remove the PersonalInfo compliance category for any field.
305
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Security and Sharing
SEE ALSO:
Create Sharing Rules to Retain and Control Guest Users’ Product Access (Release
Update)
prevent guest users from losing access to products, create and test guest user sharing rules. The Product org-wide sharing default for
external users is no longer applied to guest users, and guest user access is set to Private. This setting can’t be changed. This update was
first made available in Winter ’22.
When: The setting Secure guest user record access isn’t applied to products in Winter ’22. Salesforce will enforce this update in Spring
’22.
SEE ALSO:
Create Sharing Rules to Retain and Control Guest Users’ Access to Products (Release Update)
Set Organization-Wide Sharing for Products (Release Update)

The Run Flows permission for the Guest User and Experience Cloud External User profiles is no longer available in new orgs, starting in
Winter ’21. Without the Run Flows permission, you’re free to use the more granular permission structure embedded in Flows and give
your users the detailed access they need. Run Flows will be removed from all orgs in the Summer ’22 release. To avoid future access
issues, we recommend updating your existing sites to the new permission structure before the Summer ’22 release.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: How Does Flow Security Work? (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Default Guest User Access to Recognition Badges Disabled (Release Update)

To make sure that recognition badges aren’t visible to guest users unintentionally, the default rules now allow only authenticated users
to see them. But you can turn off the default setting if you prefer.
How: To turn off Hide badges from guest users in Experience Builder sites, go to Setup>Feature Settings>Digital
Experiences>Settings.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Release Updates
306
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Other Changes
Other Changes
Learn about additional Experience Cloud improvements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get More Contact Information on Portal Users
Now when a portal user is added, the user’s middle name, suffix, and informal name are included from the Contact record. To view
these fields on the record, select the settings on the User Interface page. Then add the fields to the Contact page layout.
Customize Your Experience Cloud Site’s Device Activation Emails
Maintain consistent branding for your site with the Device Activation email template. If you have device activation enabled for your
site, Salesforce sends users a one-time password (OTP) via a generic email anytime they log in from an unfamiliar browser, app, or
location. You can now customize the email to tailor your communication with site users.
Specify a Language for Email and SMS Messages When Using initSelfRegistration
When you’re using Apex to manage identity verification for Experience Cloud sites, guarantee that self-registration verification
messages are sent in the correct language. The initSelfRegistration method now detects the user’s language through
the User object. Use the LanguageLocaleKey field on the User object to specify a language for email and SMS verification
messages. Previously, the method determined the user’s language through request parameters, cookies, or the user’s browser.
Files Connect for SharePoint On-Premises is Being Retired
Files Connect for SharePoint On-Premises and Secure Agent will be retired on October 1, 2021. We recommend that you move to
Files Connect for SharePoint Online or plan for an alternative solution.
Get More Contact Information on Portal Users

Now when a portal user is added, the user’s middle name, suffix, and informal name are included from the Contact record. To view these
fields on the record, select the settings on the User Interface page. Then add the fields to the Contact page layout.
Customize Your Experience Cloud Site’s Device Activation Emails

Maintain consistent branding for your site with the Device Activation email template. If you have device activation enabled for your site,
Salesforce sends users a one-time password (OTP) via a generic email anytime they log in from an unfamiliar browser, app, or location.
You can now customize the email to tailor your communication with site users.
How: Add the Device Activation email template from the Emails page of the Administration workspace. Then you can personalize the
template through the Classic Email Templates page in Setup. You can also edit the template through the API using the
DeviceActEmailTemplateId field on the API Network object.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize the Device Activation Email Template (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize Email Sent from Experience Cloud Sites for Email Verification (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Object Reference: Network (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
307
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service
Specify a Language for Email and SMS Messages When Using

initSelfRegistration
When you’re using Apex to manage identity verification for Experience Cloud sites, guarantee that self-registration verification messages
are sent in the correct language. The initSelfRegistration method now detects the user’s language through the User object.
Use the LanguageLocaleKey field on the User object to specify a language for email and SMS verification messages. Previously,
the method determined the user’s language through request parameters, cookies, or the user’s browser.
SEE ALSO:
Apex Reference Guide: UserManagement Class (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Files Connect for SharePoint On-Premises is Being Retired

Files Connect for SharePoint On-Premises and Secure Agent will be retired on October 1, 2021. We recommend that you move to Files
Connect for SharePoint Online or plan for an alternative solution.
When: October 1, 2021
Why: Microsoft has ended mainstream support for both SharePoint 2010 and 2013, the on-premises versions supported by Files Connect.
Secure Agent, which serves as the communication layer between Salesforce first-party data centers and SharePoint hosted in customer
data centers, is also being retired on October 1.
SEE ALSO:
Files Connect for SharePoint On-Premises Retirement
Field Service
Let customers efficiently set and manage their appointments without calls with Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment Assistant. Save
time and money by giving your customers technical support without going on-site with Visual Remote Assistant. Prevent costly
maintenance missteps by creating criteria-based asset maintenance plans. Enhanced features in shift patterns and templates help you
streamline resource planning and scheduling. And with custom actions, make Work Plans work better for your business.
IN THIS SECTION:
Field Service Resource Management
Let dispatchers focus on schedules, not clocks, with the time zone toggle to view shift schedules in the resource’s time zone. Shift
pattern enhancements make it even easier and faster to create repeating shifts for multiple resources. And with manual sharing,
your team can share records with users not included in sharing rules.
Field Service Asset Management
Use maintenance work rules to schedule preventive maintenance for your assets to avoid downtime. And you can streamline work
rule scheduling with the calendar interface.
Field Service Administration and Processes
Boost Work Plans Lightning web component usability with custom actions. Let workers access the Work Plans Lightning web
component on their Experience Builder site to keep them on track with guided steps for completing their work.
308
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Resource Management
Field Service Customer Engagement

Enable customers to manage their own appointments and reduce appointment handling with Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment
Assistant. Enhance the use of Real-Time Location for Appointment Assistant by adding the component to the service appointment
details and customizing location markers on the map. Allow end users to schedule future virtual appointments with Visual Remote
Assistant, and invite them to join a video session using a mobile app. Share images and customize augmented reality markers for
an enhanced remote user experience.
Field Service Mobile
Get more out of Work Plans with custom actions. Keep needed supplies stocked and ready before heading out on service appointments
with mobile product transfers. Hide security warnings when opening page links so workers can get right to the info they’re looking
for.
Field Service Resource Management

Let dispatchers focus on schedules, not clocks, with the time zone toggle to view shift schedules in the resource’s time zone. Shift pattern
enhancements make it even easier and faster to create repeating shifts for multiple resources. And with manual sharing, your team can
share records with users not included in sharing rules.
IN THIS SECTION:
Make Resource Planning Easier with Enhanced Shift Patterns and Templates
Create multiple shifts for multiple resources and eliminate repetitive scheduling. Quickly create shifts from patterns with a shift
template in Experience Builder (formerly Communities). Easily add recordset filter criteria to shifts by adding it to the shift templates.
Take the Guesswork Out of Scheduling Shifts in Different Time Zones
Use the time zone toggle to accurately view shifts instead of calculating time zones on your own.
Ease Shift Planning with Calendar and Shift Schedule Enhancements
Quickly navigate dates by jumping from week to week or across months when creating shifts. See shift lengths more accurately with
horizontal color bars for each shift on the schedule.
Share Records with Manual Sharing for Field Service
Now you can include users and user groups not covered by sharing rules by manually sharing records in Lightning Experience for
Field Service. For example, share service appointment records with team members other than the service worker.
Make Resource Planning Easier with Enhanced Shift Patterns and Templates
Create multiple shifts for multiple resources and eliminate repetitive scheduling. Quickly create shifts from patterns with a shift template
in Experience Builder (formerly Communities). Easily add recordset filter criteria to shifts by adding it to the shift templates.
Who: The shift templates and pattern feature in Experience Builder is now available with the Field Service Contractor and Contractor
Plus licenses.
Why: Add multiple service resources when you create shifts from shift pattern templates.
309
Take the Guesswork Out of Scheduling Shifts in Different Time Zones

Use the time zone toggle to accurately view shifts instead of calculating time zones on your own.
How: Create resource schedules, then to view a schedule in the resource’s time zone, turn on Territory Time Zone (1). Toggle it off to
see the schedule in the shift manager’s time zone.
310
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Video: Resource Time Zone
Ease Shift Planning with Calendar and Shift Schedule Enhancements

Quickly navigate dates by jumping from week to week or across months when creating shifts. See shift lengths more accurately with
horizontal color bars for each shift on the schedule.
How: Use the arrows (1) to move forward and backward by one week, or use the calendar (2) to navigate across months.
311
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Asset Management
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: View Your Shift Schedule (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Share Records with Manual Sharing for Field Service

Now you can include users and user groups not covered by sharing rules by manually sharing records in Lightning Experience for Field
Service. For example, share service appointment records with team members other than the service worker.
How: Click Sharing on the record that you want to share. In the Share window, you can add users who aren’t included in sharing rules
and share any associated records. All Field Service objects allow manual sharing except Asset, which allows manual sharing only in
Salesforce Classic.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Grant Access to Records with Manual Sharing in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Limit Access to Field Service Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Field Service Asset Management

Use maintenance work rules to schedule preventive maintenance for your assets to avoid downtime. And you can streamline work rule
scheduling with the calendar interface.
IN THIS SECTION:
Prevent Unscheduled Downtime and Increase Asset Reliability with Filter Criteria (Beta)
Proactively avoid downtime by creating preventive maintenance plans based on asset use, condition, and recommended maintenance
schedules. You can use any criteria to create a plan. For example, you can automatically schedule service for an asset if its temperature
exceeds the specified threshold.
312
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Asset Management
Schedule Recurring Work Rules Without Guesswork

Reduce your chances of error when scheduling recurring work rules by using a recurrence pattern instead of manually entering
RRULE values.
Prevent Unscheduled Downtime and Increase Asset Reliability with Filter Criteria (Beta)
Proactively avoid downtime by creating preventive maintenance plans based on asset use, condition, and recommended maintenance
schedules. You can use any criteria to create a plan. For example, you can automatically schedule service for an asset if its temperature
exceeds the specified threshold.
Note: This feature is a Beta Service. Customers may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service
How: Select Maintenance Work Rule as the Source Object and Asset as the Filtered Object. Select a Logical Operator to define if the
criteria is valid if all conditions are true or at least one of the conditions is true. Select the field to match on, operator, and the match
value. Save the filter criteria.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for Generating Work Orders from a Maintenance Plan (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Video: Any Criteria Based Maintenance
Schedule Recurring Work Rules Without Guesswork

Reduce your chances of error when scheduling recurring work rules by using a recurrence pattern instead of manually entering RRULE
values.
313
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Administration and Processes
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for Generating Work Orders from a Maintenance Plan (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Video: Advanced Preventive Maintenance
Field Service Administration and Processes

Boost Work Plans Lightning web component usability with custom actions. Let workers access the Work Plans Lightning web component
on their Experience Builder site to keep them on track with guided steps for completing their work.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance the Usability of the Work Plans Lightning Web Component with Custom Actions
Add custom actions to the action menus of work plan and work step records in the Work Plans Lightning web component. For
example, add an action that lets users change the status of a work step to In Progress.
314
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Customer Engagement
Give Users Access to Work Plans on Their Experience Builder Site

Make the Work Plans Lightning web component accessible to users on their Experience Builder site so that they can view and
complete assignments more quickly and with less guesswork.
Enhance the Usability of the Work Plans Lightning Web Component with Custom
Actions
Add custom actions to the action menus of work plan and work step records in the Work Plans Lightning web component. For example,
add an action that lets users change the status of a work step to In Progress.
How: In Object Manager, go to Buttons, Links, and Actions and create a new action for the work plan or work step object. Then add the
action to the page layout of the work plan or work step record.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Work Plans (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Customize Work Plans Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Give Users Access to Work Plans on Their Experience Builder Site

Make the Work Plans Lightning web component accessible to users on their Experience Builder site so that they can view and complete
assignments more quickly and with less guesswork.
Where: This change applies to Experience Builder sites for Field Service in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Experience Builder, from the Components panel, drag the Work Plans component onto an editable area of your site’s page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Edit Pages and Components in Experience Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Field Service Customer Engagement

Enable customers to manage their own appointments and reduce appointment handling with Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment
Assistant. Enhance the use of Real-Time Location for Appointment Assistant by adding the component to the service appointment
details and customizing location markers on the map. Allow end users to schedule future virtual appointments with Visual Remote
Assistant, and invite them to join a video session using a mobile app. Share images and customize augmented reality markers for an
enhanced remote user experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Give Your Customers Control Over Their Appointments
Let your customers book, reschedule, cancel, and confirm appointments. Use Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment Assistant to
reduce call volumes, balance agent workload, and help avoid no-shows.
Let Back-Office Workers See What Customers See
Show your admins, dispatchers, and agents the same Real-Time Location component that customers see in the service appointment
details. The estimated time of arrival, map view, and mobile worker details in the component help back-office workers provide
customers with better service.
315
Personalize the Real-Time Location Map with Custom Icons

Add your own icons to mark the mobile worker’s location and the customer’s location on the map in Appointment Assistant. For
example, use the company logo to give your map a personal touch.
Expand Remote Video Capabilities for Mobile Workers with the Visual Remote Assistant Mobile App
Provide mobile workers with professional video capabilities to enhance the visual quality during a video session. Benefit from using
camera features, such as Exposure, Focus, Zoom, and Flashlight, with the Visual Remote Assistant mobile app.
Facilitate Virtual Appointments Using Visual Remote Assistant
Save time, reduce costs, and promote safety by scheduling virtual appointments between agents or mobile workers and customers
with Visual Remote Assistant.
Improve Collaboration by Sharing Images during a Remote Visual Session
Save time on repeating explanations and cut down call handling time by sharing annotated images during a Visual Remote Assistant
session.
Deliver Service Anytime, Anywhere with Visual Remote Assistance for Sales and Experience Clouds
You can now use Visual Remote Assistant from the Sales and Experience clouds to engage with communities, customers, and partners
via video. Remote visual sessions keep workers, partners and customers safe, improve efficiency, and reduce costs.
Boost Customer Support by Connecting Customers to the Mobile App from Their Regional App Store
Improve support by letting agents select the customer’s App Store regional location, such as North America or Europe, for Mobile
Screen Mirroring and Video Application modes. This setting redirects customers to the regional App Store for downloading the
mobile app when joining a Visual Remote Assistant session.
Enhance Your Visual Experience by Customizing Augmented Reality Magic Markers
Let your creativity do the magic! Create a better augmented reality experience with customized markers that trigger the display of
virtual information. For example, select a different color for each user, change the line width, or set the fading timeout.
Give Your Customers Control Over Their Appointments

Let your customers book, reschedule, cancel, and confirm appointments. Use Self-Service Scheduling for Appointment Assistant to
reduce call volumes, balance agent workload, and help avoid no-shows.
Where: This feature applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Field Service managed
package and Appointment Assistant installed.
How: Set up flows, and send your customers links to the Self-Service Scheduling webpages.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Video: Appointment Assistant Self-Service Scheduling
Salesforce Help: Set Up Appointment Assistant Self-Service Scheduling (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Notify Customers When Workers Are Arriving
Let Back-Office Workers See What Customers See

Show your admins, dispatchers, and agents the same Real-Time Location component that customers see in the service appointment
details. The estimated time of arrival, map view, and mobile worker details in the component help back-office workers provide customers
with better service.
How: Add the Appointment Assistant Real-Time Location component to the Service Appointment layout.
316
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add the Real-Time Location Component to the Service Appointment Layout for Back-Office Users (can be outdated
Personalize the Real-Time Location Map with Custom Icons

Add your own icons to mark the mobile worker’s location and the customer’s location on the map in Appointment Assistant. For example,
use the company logo to give your map a personal touch.
How: From Setup, create static resources for your custom icons, and copy their URLs. In Experience Builder, add the URLs to the
Appointment Assistant’s Real-Time Location component.
317
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage What Customers See (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Expand Remote Video Capabilities for Mobile Workers with the Visual Remote Assistant
Mobile App
Provide mobile workers with professional video capabilities to enhance the visual quality during a video session. Benefit from using
camera features, such as Exposure, Focus, Zoom, and Flashlight, with the Visual Remote Assistant mobile app.
318
How: From the mobile app Invite component, select the Video Application session type, and send the customer an invitation link. After
the customer accepts the invitation to connect via video, they can download the app from their App Store and instantly start a session.
SEE ALSO:
Trailhead: Visual Remote Assistant
Salesforce Video: Visual Remote Assistant
Facilitate Virtual Appointments Using Visual Remote Assistant

Save time, reduce costs, and promote safety by scheduling virtual appointments between agents or mobile workers and customers with
Visual Remote Assistant.
How: When the meeting time arrives, the agent or mobile worker starts the session to connect with the customer.
SEE ALSO:
Improve Collaboration by Sharing Images during a Remote Visual Session

Save time on repeating explanations and cut down call handling time by sharing annotated images during a Visual Remote Assistant
session.
How: During the Visual Remote Assistant session, the agent can select an image and share it with the customer.
319
SEE ALSO:
Deliver Service Anytime, Anywhere with Visual Remote Assistance for Sales and
Experience Clouds
You can now use Visual Remote Assistant from the Sales and Experience clouds to engage with communities, customers, and partners
via video. Remote visual sessions keep workers, partners and customers safe, improve efficiency, and reduce costs.
How: Add the Visual Remote Assistant components to the page layout and objects configuration.
SEE ALSO:
Boost Customer Support by Connecting Customers to the Mobile App from Their
Regional App Store
Improve support by letting agents select the customer’s App Store regional location, such as North America or Europe, for Mobile Screen
Mirroring and Video Application modes. This setting redirects customers to the regional App Store for downloading the mobile app
when joining a Visual Remote Assistant session.
SEE ALSO:
Enhance Your Visual Experience by Customizing Augmented Reality Magic Markers

Let your creativity do the magic! Create a better augmented reality experience with customized markers that trigger the display of virtual
information. For example, select a different color for each user, change the line width, or set the fading timeout.
How: Configure the Magic Marker in the Visual Remote Assistant configuration wizard.
320
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Mobile
SEE ALSO:
Field Service Mobile

Get more out of Work Plans with custom actions. Keep needed supplies stocked and ready before heading out on service appointments
with mobile product transfers. Hide security warnings when opening page links so workers can get right to the info they’re looking for.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance Work Plans Usability with Custom Actions
Add custom actions to the action menus of work plan and work step records in the mobile app. For example, add an action that lets
users change the status of a work step to In Progress.
Easily Transfer Products Between Locations
Move products from the warehouse to the work van or other locations with just a few taps on the mobile app. Mark products as
received to update your inventory so that you don’t run out of supplies or have too many sitting on the shelf.
Stop Deep Link Security Dialogs from Interrupting Your Work (Beta)
Hide persistent security warnings when opening deep links to actions.
Enhance Work Plans Usability with Custom Actions

Add custom actions to the action menus of work plan and work step records in the mobile app. For example, add an action that lets
users change the status of a work step to In Progress.
Where: This change applies to Field Service for Android and iOS in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: In Object Manager, go to Buttons, Links, and Actions and create a new action for the work plan or work step object. Then add the
action to the page layout of the work plan or work step record.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Work Plans Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: View and Complete Work Plans on the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
321
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Field Service Mobile
Easily Transfer Products Between Locations

Move products from the warehouse to the work van or other locations with just a few taps on the mobile app. Mark products as received
to update your inventory so that you don’t run out of supplies or have too many sitting on the shelf.
Where: This change applies to Field Service for Android and iOS in Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: From the Actions menu, tap the Inventory tab to open product transfers (1). Select the products and quantity to transfer (2), then
save your changes (3).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Transfer Inventory (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Video: Mobile Base Product Transfer
Stop Deep Link Security Dialogs from Interrupting Your Work (Beta)
Hide persistent security warnings when opening deep links to actions.
322
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Industries
Where: This change applies to Field Service for iOS and Android.
How: When a user opens a deep link to an action within the Field Service mobile app, the user sees a security warning asking if they
trust the link to the redirected page. Developers or admins can hide the warning by configuring the deep link URL with a security key.
The deep link URL then processes the security check.
SEE ALSO:
Developer Guide: Deep Linking Schema for the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Industries
Industries solutions for business verticals keep getting smarter and easier to use. Consumer Goods Cloud helps manage store visits and
monitor stock better. Financial Services Cloud adds deal management and branch management. Health Cloud introduces automated
benefit verification and self-service appointments. Manufacturing Cloud brings enhanced forecasting and SKU management. Public
Sector Cloud makes licensing and permitting simpler and faster. Industries products that you can use in more than one Industries cloud,
such as the data processing engine and decision tables, get significant enhancements.
323
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Consumer Goods Cloud
IN THIS SECTION:
Give field reps a productivity boost with product sequencing. Enable account hierarchy for products to help your sales managers
easily manage product availability across stores.
Enhance financial deal management by leveraging interaction summaries, actions plans, and paths. Relate multiple financial deals
to a single interaction or interaction summary. Improve performance tracking by associating standard and custom object records
with branches using the enhanced Record Association Builder. Manage multiparty authorization requests with the Intelligent
Document Automation: Consent and Disclosures feature. Get actionable insights into claims management and policy administration
with the Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app.
Health Cloud
Check what services a patient is eligible for right when you book their appointment. Automated benefit verification helps providers
improve access to care and the patient experience. Patients and caregivers can manage appointments on their own when you set
up a portal site with OmniStudio. Set a confidence-level score threshold for incoming document content to speed up document
review. And we're retiring the Candidate Patient object now that there are better ways to bring patients into Health Cloud.
Manufacturing Cloud
Develop holistic, accurate, and aligned forecasts to improve revenue, profits, and customer satisfaction. Define sales agreements
flexibly with agreements for product categories. Leverage the out-of-the-box Data Processing Engine templates for your account
forecast calculations.
Perform your inspection visits virtually and efficiently by using the Inspection Management desktop app. Create and use permission
sets to give your employees access to Public Sector objects and data.
Rebate Management
Manage products for program rebate types easily with new features and enhancements. Do more with the new and enhanced
out-of-the-box Data Processing Engine templates.
Loyalty Management
Let members pool points in groups. Hold a member's points in escrow for a period. Update member’s points balance immediately
after points are credited. Offer members promotions that match their profile and activities. Flexibly manage vouchers. Use content
blocks in Marketing Cloud to send personalized emails. Trigger business processes with transaction journals.
Industries: Common Components
Some Industries products are available for use in more than one Industries solution, or in Clouds outside of Industries. In this release,
we've enhanced filtering and performance for the Data Processing Engine, improved monitoring for branch management, added
decision tables to flows, provided templates for rebate management, added invocable actions and Apex class for loyalty management,
and much more.

Give field reps a productivity boost with product sequencing. Enable account hierarchy for products to help your sales managers easily
manage product availability across stores.
324
IN THIS SECTION:
Boost Field Reps’ Productivity with Product Sequencing
Help your reps perform their visit tasks in the most effective order and make the most of the time they spend at stores during visits.
With a predefined, logical sequence of products, you eliminate confusion and guesswork so that reps understand which product’s
assessment indicator to capture next.
Manage Product Availability with Account Hierarchy for Products (Generally Available)
The products that a sales manager assigns to a retail store parent account are now automatically available to all stores in that account
hierarchy. Previously, the sales manager assigned products to each store individually. This feature includes some changes since the
pilot release. We added a View More button on the product list page to help you load more products in batches.
Maximize Store Sales by Using Predictions
Use predictions to provide intelligent visual insights into store activities and help sales managers make smart decisions to improve
sales. Use the out-of-the-box templates to quickly import customer data and prepare and create your smart sell story. Use smart sell
story predictions to schedule store visits logically and to identify best-selling activities for your sales reps. Use recipes and data flows
to customize story predictions and prediction fields.
Changed Objects in Consumer Goods Cloud
Do more with updated Consumer Goods Cloud objects.
Integrate your route to market by planning, executing, and servicing B2B customers to drive business growth. The assets in this
guide help consumer goods companies build a vision and make a plan for digital transformation. Architectural diagrams and business
scenarios show you how Salesforce products combine with industry best practices to expand your business capabilities. Solution
Kits included in the guide show you how to implement Salesforce-recommended cross-cloud solutions to common retail use cases.
Boost Field Reps’ Productivity with Product Sequencing

Help your reps perform their visit tasks in the most effective order and make the most of the time they spend at stores during visits. With
a predefined, logical sequence of products, you eliminate confusion and guesswork so that reps understand which product’s assessment
indicator to capture next.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce app in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled.
How: On a retail store record page, in the Store Product related list, click Add. Enter a display order for the new store product.
325
SEE ALSO:
Associate a Product with a Store
Manage Product Availability with Account Hierarchy for Products (Generally Available)
The products that a sales manager assigns to a retail store parent account are now automatically available to all stores in that account
hierarchy. Previously, the sales manager assigned products to each store individually. This feature includes some changes since the pilot
release. We added a View More button on the product list page to help you load more products in batches.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce app in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions where Consumer Goods Cloud is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Retail Execution Settings, and then select Retail Execution Settings.
Enable Account hierarchy for products.
SEE ALSO:
Enable Account Hierarchy for Products
Associate a Product with a Store
Maximize Store Sales by Using Predictions

Use predictions to provide intelligent visual insights into store activities and help sales managers make smart decisions to improve sales.
Use the out-of-the-box templates to quickly import customer data and prepare and create your smart sell story. Use smart sell story
predictions to schedule store visits logically and to identify best-selling activities for your sales reps. Use recipes and data flows to
customize story predictions and prediction fields.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Consumer
Goods Cloud is enabled.
326
Who: To use this feature, users need the Retail Execution Lightning Plus permission set. For administrators, enable the TCRM Plus SKU
add-on. For users, enable the Einstein Prediction SKU add-on.
How: In Analytics Studio, click Create > App, and then select one of the app templates.
• Use the External Sales Data (1) app to import your point of sales data that you can map to the Salesforce objects.
• Use the Predictions to Power Sales (2) app to map datasets and to run the preconfigured recipes to generate predictions for visit
recommendations.
• Use the Store Revenue Story (3) app to select training and scoring datasets for the models and insights that you want to generate
for visit recommendations.
After Einstein Discovery generates the model and insights data, you can load the data in a flow or create the next best action to get a
visit recommendation. You can view the prediction-based recommendations in the Predictions Reasons section of the details page.
Changed Objects in Consumer Goods Cloud

Do more with updated Consumer Goods Cloud objects.
New Field on RetailVisitKpi

Specify the order to display products, product categories, promotions, and other contexts for an assessment task
Use the new PrimaryDisplayOrder field.
New Field on StoreProduct

Specify the order to display products in a retail store
Use the new DisplayOrder field.

Integrate your route to market by planning, executing, and servicing B2B customers to drive business growth. The assets in this guide
help consumer goods companies build a vision and make a plan for digital transformation. Architectural diagrams and business scenarios
show you how Salesforce products combine with industry best practices to expand your business capabilities. Solution Kits included in
the guide show you how to implement Salesforce-recommended cross-cloud solutions to common retail use cases.
327
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Financial Services Cloud
IN THIS SECTION:
Business scenarios help you bridge the gap between your organization's business capabilities and the solutions needed to achieve
your goals. For each scenario, discover a variety of Salesforce solutions that reduce your time to value and allow you to define a
roadmap to build out your organization’s functionality.
SEE ALSO:

Business scenarios help you bridge the gap between your organization's business capabilities and the solutions needed to achieve your
goals. For each scenario, discover a variety of Salesforce solutions that reduce your time to value and allow you to define a roadmap to
build out your organization’s functionality.
How: Visit the four Business Scenarios for the Customer 360 Guide for Consumer Goods:
• Manage Key Accounts
• Optimize Field Execution
• Transform B2B Commerce
• Incentivize Channel Partners

Enhance financial deal management by leveraging interaction summaries, actions plans, and paths. Relate multiple financial deals to a
single interaction or interaction summary. Improve performance tracking by associating standard and custom object records with
branches using the enhanced Record Association Builder. Manage multiparty authorization requests with the Intelligent Document
Automation: Consent and Disclosures feature. Get actionable insights into claims management and policy administration with the
Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app.
IN THIS SECTION:
Relate multiple financial deals to a single interaction or interaction summary using the enhanced Financial Deal data model. Improve
a deal team’s success rate by using action plans and paths with financial deals.
Now your users can find interactions faster and at one place using the new options on the Interaction Summaries component. Your
users can sort interaction summaries, preview attendees and open activities, and do more without navigating away from the
component.
Record Association Builder is the new name for the powerful association engine that lets you create relationships between records
and branch units in response to record creation and update events. Record Association Builder now supports more Financial Services
Cloud objects and custom objects. You can customize which user or contact ID field to use for associations, and even program
custom logic for creating association records. All of the previous Branch Management (beta) functionality to associate records with
branches can now be handled using Record Association Builder.
328

The Intelligent Document Automation Consent and Disclosures feature now supports multiparty authorization requests. Send
requests to multiple parties, gather their responses, and automatically evaluate whether consent is reached.
The new Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app gives you actionable insights to manage your claims and policies better.
Do more with other Financial Services Cloud enhancements.
New and Changed Financial Services Cloud Object Fields
Do more with new and updated Financial Services Cloud objects.

Relate multiple financial deals to a single interaction or interaction summary using the enhanced Financial Deal data model. Improve a
deal team’s success rate by using action plans and paths with financial deals.
IN THIS SECTION:
Relate Multiple Financial Deals to Interactions and Interaction Summaries
You can now create one interaction or interaction summary to track details of multiple financial deals. Adopt the enhanced Financial
Deal data model that supports many-to-many relationships between financial deals and interaction summaries, and financial deals
and interactions.
Ensure Consistency and Compliance in Financial Deal Engagements with Action Plans
You can now use Action Plans with the Financial Deal object. Action plans let you capture repeatable tasks in templates and then
automate the task sequences. With action plans, you can also enhance collaboration and productivity by automatically assigning
task owners and deadlines for specific financial deal engagements.
Enable Path for the Financial Deal object to increase a deal team's success. You can define steps that are important for financial deal
execution and include customized guidance at each step of a path.
Relate Multiple Financial Deals to Interactions and Interaction Summaries

You can now create one interaction or interaction summary to track details of multiple financial deals. Adopt the enhanced Financial
Deal data model that supports many-to-many relationships between financial deals and interaction summaries, and financial deals and
interactions.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Financial Services Cloud is
enabled.
How: To adopt the data model that supports many-to-many relationships, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Deal Management,
and then select Deal Management Settings. Enable Use Many-to-Many Relationships.
329
If you want the components for financial deal management (Manage Participants and Interaction Summaries) to use the mappings from
the financial deal junction objects, turn on Map Interaction and Interaction Summary to a Financial Deal using Junction Objects.
If you enable mappings from junction objects, the components ignore the direct lookup relationships from the Interaction or Interaction
Summary objects.
Ensure Consistency and Compliance in Financial Deal Engagements with Action Plans
You can now use Action Plans with the Financial Deal object. Action plans let you capture repeatable tasks in templates and then
automate the task sequences. With action plans, you can also enhance collaboration and productivity by automatically assigning task
owners and deadlines for specific financial deal engagements.
enabled.
How: Add Action Plans to the related list on the Financial Deal page layout.

Enable Path for the Financial Deal object to increase a deal team's success. You can define steps that are important for financial deal
execution and include customized guidance at each step of a path.
enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Path Settings, select Path Settings, and then click Enable.
Provide a name for the Path, select the Object as Financial Deal, and then select the required picklist value.
330
Select the fields that you want to appear for your users, and provide guidance for each step in the path.
Now your users can find interactions faster and at one place using the new options on the Interaction Summaries component. Your
users can sort interaction summaries, preview attendees and open activities, and do more without navigating away from the component.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Details for an Interaction Summary Faster
Your users can now quickly find details of attendees and open activities without navigating away from the component.
Your users have a new way to stay current on their partner and client interactions. They can now sort interaction summary records
based on the creation date, interaction start date and time, or the last modified date.
You can now add the Interaction Summaries component to the Financial Deal, Opportunity, and Interaction record pages. You can
also choose how to populate the interaction summary records—on the Interaction Summaries component—by selecting the lookup
field that the component uses to populate records. Previously, the component populated records based only on the accountId
lookup field.
Get Details for an Interaction Summary Faster

Your users can now quickly find details of attendees and open activities without navigating away from the component.
enabled.
How: Add the Interaction Summaries component to the record page. To preview interaction attendees for an interaction summary, click
the interaction attendees icon ( ). To preview open activities related to an interaction summary, click the open activities icon ( ). The
previews display only 30 records. To view all records, click View All.

Your users have a new way to stay current on their partner and client interactions. They can now sort interaction summary records based
on the creation date, interaction start date and time, or the last modified date.
enabled.
How: On the Interaction Summaries component, click the sort icon ( ).
331

You can now add the Interaction Summaries component to the Financial Deal, Opportunity, and Interaction record pages. You can also
choose how to populate the interaction summary records—on the Interaction Summaries component—by selecting the lookup field
that the component uses to populate records. Previously, the component populated records based only on the accountId lookup field.
enabled.
How: To configure the lookup field value, edit the record page and select the Interaction Summaries component. In the properties pane,
select a value from the Lookup Field dropdown. The values in the dropdown vary depending on the record page that you’re editing.
For the Home page layout, the component shows a list of all interaction summaries that a user can access. You can’t override this behavior
for home pages.

Record Association Builder is the new name for the powerful association engine that lets you create relationships between records and
branch units in response to record creation and update events. Record Association Builder now supports more Financial Services Cloud
objects and custom objects. You can customize which user or contact ID field to use for associations, and even program custom logic
for creating association records. All of the previous Branch Management (beta) functionality to associate records with branches can now
be handled using Record Association Builder.
IN THIS SECTION:
Record Association Builder Supports More Financial Services Cloud Objects
The Financial Account and Assets and Liabilities objects can now be automatically associated to branch units using the Record
Association Builder. Previously, the Record Association Builder supported four standard objects: Accounts, Cases, Leads, and
Opportunities. Now the Financial Account and Assets and Liabilities objects have joined the list. No additional work is required to
enable automatic record associations for these objects.
332

Create automatic associations for any custom object that you care about using Record Association Builder’s declarative and
programmatic mapping features. Record Association Builder now supports custom objects and lets you specify customized logic
for creating associations and related data in response to record creation and update events.
Enhance Branch Performance Tracking with Record Association Builder
The Branch Management (beta) functionality to associate records with branches can now be handled by Record Association Builder.
To prevent data conflicts, don’t activate the Record Association Builder and the Branch Management Associate records to branches
(Beta) feature at the same time. We recommend using Record Association Builder because it offers the same record linking capability
plus the flexibility to use custom objects and customized association logic. The Branch Management (beta) feature that associates
records with branches will eventually be retired.
The Association Criteria setup object can now be included in reports. Make sure your association data supports your key performance
indicators by using Association Criteria reports to see all the active criteria at a glance.
Record Association Builder Supports More Financial Services Cloud Objects

The Financial Account and Assets and Liabilities objects can now be automatically associated to branch units using the Record Association
Builder. Previously, the Record Association Builder supported four standard objects: Accounts, Cases, Leads, and Opportunities. Now the
Financial Account and Assets and Liabilities objects have joined the list. No additional work is required to enable automatic record
associations for these objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.

Create automatic associations for any custom object that you care about using Record Association Builder’s declarative and programmatic
mapping features. Record Association Builder now supports custom objects and lets you specify customized logic for creating associations
and related data in response to record creation and update events.
is enabled.
How: Record Association Builder now supports custom objects at each step of the association process. You can:
• Listen for events that occur when custom object records are created or updated.
• Define association criteria that evaluate custom object fields to decide whether to create an association.
• Generate an association record that uses the default owner ID field for an object, or choose a different ID field.
• Program custom Apex class logic to create the association record and even take additional actions when an association criteria is
met.
To automatically create associations in response to custom object events, select the custom object in the Reference Object dropdown
on the Association Criteria page and specify the event type. Then add a precondition formula to determine when a custom object event
results in a new association.
333
By default, Record Association Builder uses the Owner ID field in the custom object record to determine which Branch Unit to associate
the record with. The association uses the current branch unit assignment for the user or contact that’s specified in the Owner ID field.
You can choose to associate the records based on a different field, such as Created By Id or Last Modified Id. To change the default, select
Use an alternate owner ID and then select an alternate ID field on the custom object.
You can also program your own custom association handler logic and deploy it as an Apex Class. The handler is called whenever the
association criteria evaluation logic is met. An Apex Class handler can control the Branch Unit Related Record data that’s created and
also execute other custom logic at that time.
Enhance Branch Performance Tracking with Record Association Builder

The Branch Management (beta) functionality to associate records with branches can now be handled by Record Association Builder. To
prevent data conflicts, don’t activate the Record Association Builder and the Branch Management Associate records to branches
(Beta) feature at the same time. We recommend using Record Association Builder because it offers the same record linking capability
plus the flexibility to use custom objects and customized association logic. The Branch Management (beta) feature that associates records
with branches will eventually be retired.
is enabled.
How: Record Association Builder creates associations using the same Branch Unit Related Record object as the Branch Management
(Beta) feature does. Record Association Builder also provides new capabilities such as listening for events on custom objects and
customizing the logic for creating associations and related data. You can create association criteria that exactly match the Branch
334
Management logic to automatically associate records with branch units, and then move forward using the more flexible Record Association
Builder.
Record Association Builder doesn’t currently support creating Branch Unit Customer records. The Branch Settings page in Setup now
includes a separate Associate accounts with branches setting to let you keep creating Branch Unit Customer associations even if the
main Associate records with branches (Beta) feature is disabled.

The Association Criteria setup object can now be included in reports. Make sure your association data supports your key performance
indicators by using Association Criteria reports to see all the active criteria at a glance.
is enabled.
How: Create a Custom Report Type that references the Association Criteria object. Then use that report type to generate reports that
include the Association Criteria fields.
335

The Intelligent Document Automation Consent and Disclosures feature now supports multiparty authorization requests. Send requests
to multiple parties, gather their responses, and automatically evaluate whether consent is reached.
IN THIS SECTION:
Handle Multiparty Consent Authorization Requests
Track authorization responses from multiple parties using the Intelligent Document Automation Consent and Disclosures feature.
Request consent from multiple people for a document, gather their responses, and automatically evaluate whether consent is
granted.
Handle Multiparty Consent Authorization Requests

Track authorization responses from multiple parties using the Intelligent Document Automation Consent and Disclosures feature. Request
consent from multiple people for a document, gather their responses, and automatically evaluate whether consent is granted.
is enabled.
How: When creating an Info Authorization Request, add a new Multiparty Info Authorization Request. Specify the Authorization Type
to control how multiparty consensus is determined.
The Authorization Type picklist values are:
• All: Every person approves the request.
• Any: At least one person approves.
• Half or Majority: Half or more of the people approve.
• Majority: More than half the people must approve.
The response status for the Info Authorization Request is calculated according to the specified Authorization Type whenever a response
is received from one of the parties.

The new Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app gives you actionable insights to manage your claims and policies better.
336
IN THIS SECTION:
Manage Claims and Policies Effectively with Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics (Generally Available)
Use the Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app to get actionable insights into claims management and policy administration.
Claim handlers and producers can prioritize tasks, claims, quotes, and policies that need immediate attention to improve customer
satisfaction. Team leaders can assess their team’s performance based on key metrics for claims and tasks.
Manage Claims and Policies Effectively with Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics (Generally
Available)
Use the Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app to get actionable insights into claims management and policy administration. Claim
handlers and producers can prioritize tasks, claims, quotes, and policies that need immediate attention to improve customer satisfaction.
Team leaders can assess their team’s performance based on key metrics for claims and tasks.
Where: This change applies to Tableau CRM in Lightning Experience and all versions of the Salesforce app in Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Performance editions where Financial Services Cloud is enabled.
Who: To create an app from the Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app, you need the FSCAnalyticsPlus add-on license.
How: From Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and then select App > Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics. Follow the
instructions in the wizard to create your app.

Do more with other Financial Services Cloud enhancements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Increase Security for Interaction Summaries and Financial Deals with Shield Platform Encryption
Use Shield Platform Encryption to add another layer of protection to client and partner interactions and deal-related information.
Now you can encrypt fields on Interaction, Interaction Summary, Financial Deal, Interaction Summary Discussed Account, Financial
Deal Interaction Summary, and Financial Deal Interaction objects.
You can now use Opportunity and Financial Deal participants as suggestions to enable your users to easily share interactions and
interaction summaries. You can configure the Manage Participants component to list users or groups from these participant types
as suggestions.
Remove Participants Selected for Sharing Records with a Single Click
We’ve added user experience optimizations to the Manage Participants component. Your users can now remove participants more
easily from the selected participants list.
337
Use Shield Platform Encryption to add another layer of protection to client and partner interactions and deal-related information. Now
you can encrypt fields on Interaction, Interaction Summary, Financial Deal, Interaction Summary Discussed Account, Financial Deal
Interaction Summary, and Financial Deal Interaction objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Financial Services Cloud
and Shield Platform Encryption is enabled.
SEE ALSO:

You can now use Opportunity and Financial Deal participants as suggestions to enable your users to easily share interactions and
interaction summaries. You can configure the Manage Participants component to list users or groups from these participant types as
suggestions.
enabled.
How: Edit an interaction summary or interaction record page. Click the Manage Participants component to select it. In the properties
pane, under Participant Types for Suggestion List, click Select. Move the required participant types to the Selected list, and then click
OK.
Remove Participants Selected for Sharing Records with a Single Click

We’ve added user experience optimizations to the Manage Participants component. Your users can now remove participants more easily
from the selected participants list.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud
is enabled.
How: On the Manage Participant component, select the user or group that you want to remove, and then click the delete icon ( ).
New and Changed Financial Services Cloud Object Fields

Do more with new and updated Financial Services Cloud objects.
Interaction Summary and Financial Deal

Capture information about companies discussed in an interaction.
Use the new InteractionSumDiscussedAccount object.
Represent a many-to-many relationship between an interaction summary and a financial deal.
Use the new FinclDealInteractionSummary object.
Represent a many-to-many relationship between an interaction and a financial deal.
Use the new FinancialDealInteraction object.
Link a financial deal with itself.
The Financial Deal object now supports a self-lookup relationship.
338
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Health Cloud
New Fields on Financial Deal

Capture the parent financial deal record.
Use the new ParentFinancialDeal field.
New Fields on Financial Deal Party

View the type of the financial deal party.
Use the new PartyType field.
Link a contact as a financial deal party.
Use the new Contact field. The Financial Deal Party object now has a lookup to the Contact object.
Intelligent Document Automation: Consent and Disclosures

Manage responses from multiple parties for an authorization request.
Use the new MultipartyInfoAuthRequest object.
Health Cloud
Check what services a patient is eligible for right when you book their appointment. Automated benefit verification helps providers
improve access to care and the patient experience. Patients and caregivers can manage appointments on their own when you set up a
portal site with OmniStudio. Set a confidence-level score threshold for incoming document content to speed up document review. And
we're retiring the Candidate Patient object now that there are better ways to bring patients into Health Cloud.
IN THIS SECTION:
Patients can schedule their own appointments through a portal, and the new setup assistant makes it easier and faster to get
Appointment Management up and running.
Empower clinicians to manage their patients’ medications better with the new Medication Management feature in Health Cloud.
The Lightning component of Medication Management shows a patient’s medications as a list. This component has a built-in flow
that helps users seamlessly add medications for relevant patients. Medication Management is also integrated with RxNorm to bring
in normalized drug information from the U.S. National Library of Medicine. The comprehensive list view and normalized drug
information help your users reduce medication-related errors, enhance patient care quality, and lower healthcare costs.
Get expanded Network Management capabilities in Provider Network Management. Two new objects and a Lightning component
help you register network participations and associate contracts with them.
Use the setup assistant to get going with Provider Search. You can also access documentation right from the interface. Verify your
progress using the progress indicator.
If you're switching from the individual data model to the person account model, now you can improve performance for your users
by skipping some database queries.
339

Integrate benefit verification into the end-to-end patient access workflow to make it easier and faster for patients to get the care
they need. Help caregivers and patients reduce the time and effort it takes to find out what coverage is available under each patient's
benefit plan, throughout the patient journey.
Improve Data Extraction Efficiency by Using Confidence-Level Scores
Health Cloud can help indicate values in a received document that require more attention. Users can quickly scan the extracted
values that fall below a confidence-level score threshold you set, and fix them manually if needed. You can specify a threshold value
from 0 through 100.
The Candidate Patient custom object is being retired. Users are no longer able to create new records in this object. Consider using
Lead instead.
Health Cloud Has New and Changed Objects
Access more data through these new and changed Health Cloud objects
Connect REST API
Patients REST API includes new calls.

Patients can schedule their own appointments through a portal, and the new setup assistant makes it easier and faster to get Appointment
Management up and running.
IN THIS SECTION:
Self-Schedule Appointments from Anywhere
Patients and caregivers can now book and manage appointments for acute or chronic ailments from their own mobile device or
desktop. Call center agents (CCA) and care coordinators still make specialized appointments that require clinical knowledge, such
as appointments for surgeries.
Set Up Intelligent Appointment Management Faster
Set up Intelligent Appointment Management easily and quickly by following the new setup assistant, complete with a progress
indicator and links to detailed instructions.
Give Users Appointment Scheduling Access Quicker
To schedule and manage patient appointments, call center agents and care coordinators need the right access to the objects in
Intelligent Appointment Management. Use the new Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set to save time.
Self-Schedule Appointments from Anywhere

Patients and caregivers can now book and manage appointments for acute or chronic ailments from their own mobile device or desktop.
Call center agents (CCA) and care coordinators still make specialized appointments that require clinical knowledge, such as appointments
for surgeries.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Health Cloud is enabled.
Who: This feature is available to portal users (users who’re signed in) and guest users with the Customer Community Plus for Health
Cloud or the Customer Community for Health Cloud add-on and the Health Cloud Appointment Self-Service permission set.
How: For portal users, add the user to Salesforce, and then assign the permission set. For guest users, access the user profile from the
Experience Cloud site builder, and then view the users for the profile. Assign the Health Cloud Appointment Self-Service permission set
to the guest user.
340
SEE ALSO:
Create Experience Cloud Site Users
Set Up Intelligent Appointment Management Faster

Set up Intelligent Appointment Management easily and quickly by following the new setup assistant, complete with a progress indicator
and links to detailed instructions.
Who: To create Health Cloud Provider Data objects, users need the Health Cloud Foundation permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Intelligent Appointment Management Settings, and then select
Intelligent Appointment Management Settings. To access the setup assistant, turn on Patient Appointment Scheduling.
Give Users Appointment Scheduling Access Quicker

To schedule and manage patient appointments, call center agents and care coordinators need the right access to the objects in Intelligent
Appointment Management. Use the new Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set to save time.
How: To assign the Health Cloud Appointment Management permission set, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and
select Users > Permission Set Assignments, and then edit assignments.
341
Empower clinicians to manage their patients’ medications better with the new Medication Management feature in Health Cloud. The
Lightning component of Medication Management shows a patient’s medications as a list. This component has a built-in flow that helps
users seamlessly add medications for relevant patients. Medication Management is also integrated with RxNorm to bring in normalized
drug information from the U.S. National Library of Medicine. The comprehensive list view and normalized drug information help your
users reduce medication-related errors, enhance patient care quality, and lower healthcare costs.
Important: Health Cloud Medication Management is not intended for use by, and should not be used by, organizations located
in, or otherwise engaged in the provision of medical, healthcare, disease treatment or management, health benefits, research or
similar services, in jurisdictions outside of the United States. See more.
This product uses publicly available data provided courtesy of the U.S. National Library of Medicine, National Institutes of Health,
Department of Health and Human Services; NLM is not responsible for the product and does not endorse or recommend this or
any other product.
IN THIS SECTION:
Plan Medications Better with the Patient Medication Manager Lightning Component
Give your clinicians a comprehensive view of all the medications that their patients take by using the Patient Medication Manager
Lightning component. The list view in this component enables clinicians to easily spot conflicting prescriptions and avoid possible
drug adverse events.
Add Medications Seamlessly Using the Built-In Add Medication Flow
Clinicians can use the Add Medication flow in the Patient Medication Manager Lightning component to add medications for patients
without navigating multiple objects.
Plan Medications Better with the Patient Medication Manager Lightning Component
Give your clinicians a comprehensive view of all the medications that their patients take by using the Patient Medication Manager
Lightning component. The list view in this component enables clinicians to easily spot conflicting prescriptions and avoid possible drug
adverse events.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Health Cloud and Person Accounts are
enabled.
Why: Medication-related information in Health Cloud is stored across multiple objects. The Patient Medication Manager Lightning
component gathers all the information together and displays it in one place. Clinicians can then quickly scan the information and make
updates as required without going to each record.
342
How: From Setup, go to Medication Management Settings, and then enable Medication Management. Then use the Lightning App
Builder to add the Patient Medication Manager Lightning component to Person Account record pages.
Add Medications Seamlessly Using the Built-In Add Medication Flow

Clinicians can use the Add Medication flow in the Patient Medication Manager Lightning component to add medications for patients
without navigating multiple objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Health Cloud and Person Accounts are
enabled.
Why: The Lightning component reduces the steps required to record medications. Because this flow is integrated with RxNorm, the
flow can also gather normalized drug information from the U.S. National Library of Medicine. With this integration, users can avoid
manually entering drug information, such as drug names, drug forms, and ingredients, which helps reduce the possibility of
medication-related errors.
343
How: From Setup, go to Medication Management Settings, and then enable Medication Management. Then use the Lightning App
Builder to add the Patient Medication Manager Lightning component to Person Account record pages.

Get expanded Network Management capabilities in Provider Network Management. Two new objects and a Lightning component help
you register network participations and associate contracts with them.
IN THIS SECTION:
Now you can integrate providers, provider practice locations, payer networks, and contracts using the new Network Participations
component.

Now you can integrate providers, provider practice locations, payer networks, and contracts using the new Network Participations
component.
Where: This component is available in Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions of Health Cloud provisioned with the
Health Cloud Provider Network Management Add-On license.
How: Use the Lightning App Builder to add the Network Participations component to the business account record page or the person
account record page. The component is also available on the Healthcare Payer Network.
344

Use the setup assistant to get going with Provider Search. You can also access documentation right from the interface. Verify your
progress using the progress indicator.
Who: To create Health Cloud Provider Data objects, users need the Health Cloud Foundation permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Provider Search, and then select Provider Search Settings. Enable Provider
Search.

If you're switching from the individual data model to the person account model, now you can improve performance for your users by
skipping some database queries.
Why: The individual model uses the Primary Contact field to connect an account and a contact record. The person account model uses
the Person Contact field. If your org started out using the individual data model to represent people, some UI components and all triggers
related to the concept of a patient—such as account, contact, opportunity, and lead triggers—still reference Primary Contact. Removing
these dependencies can improve performance for your users.
How: Just select the new Disable Primary Contact ID option in the Custom Settings section of Setup.

Integrate benefit verification into the end-to-end patient access workflow to make it easier and faster for patients to get the care they
need. Help caregivers and patients reduce the time and effort it takes to find out what coverage is available under each patient's benefit
plan, throughout the patient journey.
Where: The benefits verification objects are available to users with the Health Cloud and the Health Cloud Platform permission set
licenses and the Health Foundation permission set.
Why: Automated benefit verification helps care providers, pharma suppliers, and device makers improve access to care and patient
experience. It supports a variety of service types and benefit models and seamlessly integrates this step into the end-to-end patient
access workflow.
345
How: Connect Health Cloud to an external service that stores benefit codes so users can see eligibility status in real time as part of the
patient intake flow.
SEE ALSO:
Admin Guide: Set Up Benefit Verification
Developer Guide: Benefit Verification Data Model
Improve Data Extraction Efficiency by Using Confidence-Level Scores

Health Cloud can help indicate values in a received document that require more attention. Users can quickly scan the extracted values
that fall below a confidence-level score threshold you set, and fix them manually if needed. You can specify a threshold value from 0
through 100.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where the Intelligent Form Reader
setting is enabled. This feature is available in Health Cloud.
Who: To use the extraction capability, users need the AWSTextract1000LimitAddOn license.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Intelligent Form Reader, and then select Intelligent Form Reader.
To edit the confidence score threshold value, click Edit Settings (1). Enter a threshold value in the Confidence Score Threshold field (2).
The default value is 0.
The updated settings apply to all the field mappings.

The Candidate Patient custom object is being retired. Users are no longer able to create new records in this object. Consider using Lead
instead.
How: We recommend that you use the Lead object in place of the Candidate Patient object. If your organization needs a field in Candidate
Patient that isn’t supported by Lead, we recommend creating fields as needed.
Health Cloud Has New and Changed Objects

Access more data through these new and changed Health Cloud objects
Where: This change applies to Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
346

Set up unique tiers for each provider network
Use the new ProviderNetworkTier object.
Associate providers and facilities participating in a network with a contract
Use the new ProviderNetworkContract object.
Associate a healthcare facility with a healthcare practitioner facility
Use the new HealthcareFacilityId field in the HealthcarePractitionerFacility object.
Associate a healthcare provider with a healthcare practitioner facility
Use the new HealthcareProviderId field in the HealthcarePractitionerFacility object.
Associate a healthcare facility with a facility network
Use the new HealthcareFacilityId field in the HealthcareFacilityNetwork object.
Associate a healthcare provider with a facility network
Use the new HealthcareProviderId field in the HealthcareFacilityNetwork object.
Specify a network tier for a facility network
Use the new ProviderNetworkTierId field in the HealthcareFacilityNetwork object.
Reference an association of a provider, a network, and a contract with a facility
Use the new ProviderNetworkContractId field in the HealthcareFacilityNetwork object.
Specify the line of business of a payer network
Use the new LineofBusiness picklist in the HealthcarePayerNetwork object.
Specify the parent healthcare payer network of a healthcare payer network
Use the new ParentPayerNetworkId field in the HealthcarePayerNetwork object.
Benefit Verification
Submit a request to verify a patient's coverage
Use the new CareBenefitVerifyRequest object.
Set up and configure care benefit verification requests
Use the new CareBenefitVerifySettings object.
Define a limit on patient coverage
Use the new CareLimitType object.
Check whether a patient benefit can be verified with an external service
Use the new isVerifiable field on the PurchasePlan object.
Store information about coverage limits for specific services
Use the new CoverageBenefitItemLimit object.
Record general information about a coverage benefit
Use the new Disclaimers field on the CoverageBenefit object.
Check whether a coverage benefit is currently in force
Use the new Active field on the CoverageBenefit object.
347
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Manufacturing Cloud
Specify the general category of service covered under a patient benefit

Use the new Coverage Type field on the CoverageBenefit object.
Store the date on which the benefit was verified.
Use the new Verification Date field on the CoverageBenefit object.
Record the first day of the coverage benefit period.
Use the new Benefit Period Start Date field on the CoverageBenefit object.
Record the last day of the coverage benefit period.
Use the new Benefit Period End Date field on the CoverageBenefit object.
Check whether a benefit item requires a prior expenditure by the patient.
Use the new DoesDeductibleApply field on the CoverageBenefitItem object.
Check whether a service must be approved before use.
Use the new IsPreauthorizationRequired field on the CoverageBenefitItem object.
Verify if a benefit item is currently available.
Use the new IsActive field on the CoverageBenefitItem object.
Look up the ID of a Code Set Service Type in the Code Set object.
Use the new CodeSetServiceType field on the CoverageBenefitItem object.
Connect REST API

Patients REST API includes new calls.
Patients
Create a patient record
Make a POST request to the new /connect/health/patients resource.
New Request body: FHIR Patient
New response body: Patient Upsert Output
Retrieve details of a patient record
Make a GET request to the new /connect/health/patients/${patientId} resource.
New response body: Patient Get Output
Update a patient record
Make a PUT request to the new /connect/health/patients/${patientId} resource.
New request body: FHIR Patient
New response body: Patient Update Output
SEE ALSO:
Health Cloud Developer Guide: Create Patient
Manufacturing Cloud
Develop holistic, accurate, and aligned forecasts to improve revenue, profits, and customer satisfaction. Define sales agreements flexibly
with agreements for product categories. Leverage the out-of-the-box Data Processing Engine templates for your account forecast
calculations.
348
IN THIS SECTION:
Generate Holistic and Accurate Account Forecasts
Develop aligned forecasts to improve revenue, profit, and customer satisfaction. Get forecasts based on opportunities, orders, sales
agreements, historical orders, and other custom measures considering all aspects of the business from Salesforce and beyond. With
Advanced Account Forecasting, create forecasts across regions, products, product categories, or other custom dimensions in a single
instance of Manufacturing Cloud. Use forecast sets to independently configure and manage forecasts for different regions and
business units. You can calculate forecasts on a monthly, quarterly, or yearly cadence giving your account managers the flexibility
to make forecast adjustments.
Leverage Data Processing Engine Definitions for Forecast Calculations
For improved productivity and accuracy, use the out-of-the-box Advanced Account Forecast Data Processing Engine templates to
calculate account forecasts. You can customize your jobs, generate, regenerate, or recalculate the forecast data, or schedule the Data
Processing Engine job to run during rollover at the end of a period.
Define Sales Agreements Flexibly with Agreements for Product Categories
Now you can create sales agreements for product categories also. It isn’t necessary to create separate sales agreements for products
that belong to the same product category.
New and Changed Objects for Manufacturing Cloud
Do more with these new and changed Manufacturing Cloud objects.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Manufacturing Cloud
Use the new and changed invocable actions for Manufacturing Cloud.
New Action Type Value in Manufacturing Cloud
Manufacturing Cloud has a new actionType enumeration value.
Generate Holistic and Accurate Account Forecasts

Develop aligned forecasts to improve revenue, profit, and customer satisfaction. Get forecasts based on opportunities, orders, sales
agreements, historical orders, and other custom measures considering all aspects of the business from Salesforce and beyond. With
Advanced Account Forecasting, create forecasts across regions, products, product categories, or other custom dimensions in a single
instance of Manufacturing Cloud. Use forecast sets to independently configure and manage forecasts for different regions and business
units. You can calculate forecasts on a monthly, quarterly, or yearly cadence giving your account managers the flexibility to make forecast
adjustments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Manufacturing Cloud is
enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Manufacturing, and then select Advanced Account Forecasting. Create dimensions
and period groups, and then create and configure forecast sets.
349
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Holistic Forecasts with Advanced Account Forecasting
Leverage Data Processing Engine Definitions for Forecast Calculations

For improved productivity and accuracy, use the out-of-the-box Advanced Account Forecast Data Processing Engine templates to
calculate account forecasts. You can customize your jobs, generate, regenerate, or recalculate the forecast data, or schedule the Data
Processing Engine job to run during rollover at the end of a period.
enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Processing Engine, and then select Data Processing Engine. Customize
the out-of-the-box templates. Associate the Data Processing Engine templates with forecast sets.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Streamline Calculations with Data Processing Engine Definitions
Define Sales Agreements Flexibly with Agreements for Product Categories

Now you can create sales agreements for product categories also. It isn’t necessary to create separate sales agreements for products
that belong to the same product category.
enabled.
How: Set the product level as Product Category when creating a sales agreement.
350
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Track Sales Compliance with Sales Agreements
New and Changed Objects for Manufacturing Cloud

Do more with these new and changed Manufacturing Cloud objects.
New Objects
Create advanced account forecast sets
Use the new AdvAccountForecastSet object.
Manage advanced account forecast facts
Use the new AdvAccountForecastFact object.
Define advanced account forecast measures
Use the new AdvAcctForecastMeasureDef object.
Define advanced account forecast dimensions
Use the new AdvAcctForecastDimSource and AdvAcctForecastDimension objects.
Define advanced account forecast adjustments
Use the new AdvAcctForecastFactAdj and AdvAcctForecastAdjPeriod objects.
Define advanced account forecast periods
Use the new AdvAcctForecastPeriodGroup and AdvAccountForecastPeriod objects.
Define advanced account forecast formulas
Use the new AdvAccountForecastFormula object.
Define advanced account forecast set partners
Use the new AdvAcctForecastSetPartner object.
351
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Public Sector Solutions
Updated Objects
Manage sales agreements for product categories
Use the Product Level field on the SalesAgreement object, the PlannedAmount and ProposedPlannedAmount
fields on the SalesAgreementProductSchedule object, and the ProductCategory field on the OrderItem
object.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Manufacturing Cloud

Use the new and changed invocable actions for Manufacturing Cloud.
Update the status of the Advanced Account Forecast Set Partner record
Use the new updateAdvancedAccountForecastSetPartner action.
SEE ALSO:
Manufacturing Cloud Developer Guide: Manufacturing Cloud Standard Invocable Actions (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
New Action Type Value in Manufacturing Cloud

Manufacturing Cloud has a new actionType enumeration value.
Update the status of the Advanced Account Forecast Set Partner record in Flows
Use the new updateAdvancedAccountForecastSetPartner value in the existing actionType field on the
FlowActionCall subtype of the Flow metadata type.

Perform your inspection visits virtually and efficiently by using the Inspection Management desktop app. Create and use permission sets
to give your employees access to Public Sector objects and data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Complete Inspections Virtually with the Inspection Management Desktop App
Field inspectors can now conduct inspections virtually with the Public Sector: Inspection Management desktop app. Similar with
mobile app, inspectors can view visit details such as an establishments’ location, priority, estimated visit time, and the assessment
tasks associated with a visit. While entering their observations, inspectors can also verify the associated regulatory codes and attach
files.
Empower Your Employees with the Employee Experience for Public Sector Permission Set
Grant your employees access to Public Sector objects and features with the Employee Experience for Public Sector permission set.
By unifying data across departments to create a single view of every candidate and employee, government agencies can streamline
recruiting, onboarding, talent management, and retention processes of the next generation of service members and civilian employees.
Complete Inspections Virtually with the Inspection Management Desktop App

Field inspectors can now conduct inspections virtually with the Public Sector: Inspection Management desktop app. Similar with mobile
app, inspectors can view visit details such as an establishments’ location, priority, estimated visit time, and the assessment tasks associated
with a visit. While entering their observations, inspectors can also verify the associated regulatory codes and attach files.
352
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Public Sector Solutions
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Public Sector
Solutions are enabled.
Who: To access the Inspection Management desktop app, your users need the ActionPlans, IndustriesVisit, and Public Sector Field Access
permission sets.
How: From the App Launcher, inspectors can launch the Public Sector: Inspection Management app to track their inspections and other
compliance tasks.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Inspection Management Desktop App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Empower Your Employees with the Employee Experience for Public Sector Permission
Set
Grant your employees access to Public Sector objects and features with the Employee Experience for Public Sector permission set. By
unifying data across departments to create a single view of every candidate and employee, government agencies can streamline
recruiting, onboarding, talent management, and retention processes of the next generation of service members and civilian employees.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Public Sector
Solutions are enabled.
Who: To access Public Sector objects and features, your employees need the Employee Experience for Public Sector permission set.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select Permission Sets. Click the Employee Experience
for Public Sector permission set.
To assign employees a permission set, use one of these methods:

• To assign access to multiple employees at the same time, click Manage Assignments > Add Assignments. Choose the employees
you want to add, and then click Assign.
• To assign access to employees individually, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select Users. Search for an
employee and click on their profile to assign a permission set. On the Permission Set Assignments section, click Edit, and then move
the Employee Experience for Public Sector permission set to the Enabled Permission Sets column.
353
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Rebate Management
To give more employees access to an existing permission set, clone the permission set, and then add more employees to the cloned
set.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Public Sector Solutions Permission Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Rebate Management
Manage products for program rebate types easily with new features and enhancements. Do more with the new and enhanced
out-of-the-box Data Processing Engine templates.
IN THIS SECTION:
Define Product-Based Eligibility Easily and Quickly with Product Filter Type on Program Rebate Type
Manage products for program rebate types easily with new features and enhancements. Use product list views to include or exclude
products for a program rebate type, or use an API. When calculating the rebate amounts for a program rebate type, transactions are
filtered based on your selection.
Do More with the New and Enhanced Template Data Processing Engine Definitions
Rebates Data Processing Engine templates are renamed to clearly indicate their purpose. A new Data Processing Engine template
called Aggregate by Account was added to allow transactions to be attributed to an account instead of a rebate program member.
Your account managers can use the enhanced Data Processing Engine templates to process rebate amounts by including or excluding
transactions with products based on a new Product Filter Type field on Program Rebate Type.
Rebate Analytics
Get insights into purchases and incentives to drive partner sales. View accruals for a rebate program and plan your financials.
New and Changed Objects for Rebate Management
Do more with these new and changed Rebate Management objects.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Rebate Management
Use the new and changed invocable actions for Rebate Management.
New Action Type Value in Rebate Management
Rebate Management has a new actionType enumeration value.
354
Define Product-Based Eligibility Easily and Quickly with Product Filter Type on Program
Rebate Type
Manage products for program rebate types easily with new features and enhancements. Use product list views to include or exclude
products for a program rebate type, or use an API. When calculating the rebate amounts for a program rebate type, transactions are
filtered based on your selection.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Rebate Management is
enabled.
How: When creating a program rebate type, select a product filter type. Then add the products that you want to include or exclude
from the list.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define Product Eligibility for Rebate Types
Do More with the New and Enhanced Template Data Processing Engine Definitions
Rebates Data Processing Engine templates are renamed to clearly indicate their purpose. A new Data Processing Engine template called
Aggregate by Account was added to allow transactions to be attributed to an account instead of a rebate program member. Your
account managers can use the enhanced Data Processing Engine templates to process rebate amounts by including or excluding
transactions with products based on a new Product Filter Type field on Program Rebate Type.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Rebate Management is
enabled.
How: Activate the out-of-the-box Data Processing Engine jobs, or use the existing templates to create and run your own jobs.
355
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Streamline Calculations with Data Processing Engine Definitions
Rebate Analytics
Get insights into purchases and incentives to drive partner sales. View accruals for a rebate program and plan your financials.
IN THIS SECTION:
Improve your business by using the Partner Insights dashboard to get insights into purchases and incentives. Analyze order data
and plan your business better. Get visibility into current period payouts and effectively manage your financials. Identify purchases
required to maximize your rebate earnings. You can also embed this dashboard on an Experience Cloud site.
Track Your Accruals
Use the enhanced Rebate Program Embedded dashboard to view the accruals for a rebate program and plan your financials better.

Improve your business by using the Partner Insights dashboard to get insights into purchases and incentives. Analyze order data and
plan your business better. Get visibility into current period payouts and effectively manage your financials. Identify purchases required
to maximize your rebate earnings. You can also embed this dashboard on an Experience Cloud site.
Developer editions.
Who: To use the Rebate Analytics dashboards, you need Rebate Management, Rebate Management User, and Manufacturing Analytics
Plus add-on licenses. To embed the Partner Insights dashboard on an Experience Cloud site, you need the Rebate Management for
Experience Cloud Users and TCRM for Communities permission sets.
356
How: From Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and then select App > Analytics for Manufacturing. Follow the instructions
in the wizard to create your app.
Track Your Accruals

Use the enhanced Rebate Program Embedded dashboard to view the accruals for a rebate program and plan your financials better.
Developer editions.
Who: To use the Rebate Analytics dashboards, you need Rebate Management, Rebate Management User, and Manufacturing Analytics
Plus add-on licenses.
How: From Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and then select App > Analytics for Manufacturing. Follow the instructions
in the wizard to create your app.
357
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Loyalty Management
New and Changed Objects for Rebate Management

Do more with these new and changed Rebate Management objects.
New Object
Define program rebate type products
Use the new ProgramRebateTypeProduct object.
Updated Objects
Define included or excluded products for program rebate types
Use the ProductFilterType field on the ProgramRebateType object.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Rebate Management

Use the new and changed invocable actions for Rebate Management.
Insert or delete records in the Program Rebate Type Product Object
Use the new processProgramRebateTypeProducts action.
SEE ALSO:
Rebate Management Developer Guide: Rebate Management Standard Invocable Actions
New Action Type Value in Rebate Management

Rebate Management has a new actionType enumeration value.
Insert or delete records in the Program Rebate Type Product object
Use the new processProgramRebateTypeProducts value for the existing actionType field on the FlowActionCall
subtype of the Flow metadata type.
Loyalty Management
Let members pool points in groups. Hold a member's points in escrow for a period. Update member’s points balance immediately after
points are credited. Offer members promotions that match their profile and activities. Flexibly manage vouchers. Use content blocks in
Marketing Cloud to send personalized emails. Trigger business processes with transaction journals.
IN THIS SECTION:
Member Groups
Increase your loyalty program adoption by creating groups and adding a member’s friends and family into the member’s loyalty
program. You can automatically transfer non-qualifying points from a member’s balance to the group’s balance based on their
contribution percentage for a group. A group's balance updates automatically when a member's balance changes. Members can
redeem points through their groups.
Escrow Points
Keep the points allocated for a member's transaction on hold for a specified period. Roll over escrow points to a member's balance
after the escrow period ends.
358

Members' nonqualifying points balance automatically update when points are credited manually or through the Credit Points action.
To update member points balance, it’s not necessary to run the Credit Non-Qualifying Points to Members Data Processing Engine
definition.
Decide which promotions to offer to a member or for a transaction. Automate the process of updating members' progress on a
cumulative promotion.
Voucher Management
Give more flexibility to members and users who manage vouchers. A member can choose to redeem a voucher in multiple transactions.
You can determine the value of a voucher while you issue the voucher.
Use content blocks to send contextual emails to members.
Trigger Automated Process Using Transaction Journals
Trigger business processes in Flows and Process Builder when Transaction Journal records are created or updated. Whenever
transaction journals are created or updated, you can trigger processes such as crediting points, updating other records, or sending
the member an email.
Added validations align tier group settings with both fixed tier and anniversary tier models. They allow you to specify the tier period
as months or years, thus simplifying the tier assessment process. For anniversary model tiers, you can align a member's tier expiration
date with their enrollment anniversary. For fixed model tiers, you can align the tier expiration date with the member's qualifying
points reset date. The points for fixed model tiers are then reset in years.
Start Your Journey with the Loyalty Management Learning Map
Take the path to success with the Salesforce Loyalty Management learning map. The learning map guides you through every step
of your journey from creating a loyalty program with targeted resources to running the program. Find articles, help topics, and
Trailhead modules in one place, and get your loyalty program up and running in no time!
Get insights into your program’s revenue and view the liability forecast. Use the Predictions for Promotion Revenue app to get
predictions on promotion revenue.
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty Management
Do more with the new and updated Loyalty Management objects.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Loyalty Management
Use the new and changed invocable actions for Loyalty Management.
New Action Type Value in Loyalty Management
Loyalty Management has a new actionType enumeration value.
Connect REST API
Loyalty Management REST API includes changed call.
Apex: New Items in Loyalty Management
These classes are new.
359
Member Groups
Increase your loyalty program adoption by creating groups and adding a member’s friends and family into the member’s loyalty program.
You can automatically transfer non-qualifying points from a member’s balance to the group’s balance based on their contribution
percentage for a group. A group's balance updates automatically when a member's balance changes. Members can redeem points
through their groups.
IN THIS SECTION:
Grow Your Loyalty Program with Group Memberships
Members often join a loyalty program with their friends and family. Create a Group type membership, and add Individual or Corporate
type members to it. Members of a group can pool their nonqualifying points and redeem points from the pool.
Set Up a One-Time Process to Transfer Points
To automate the transfer of non-qualifying points from a member's point balance to the member's group, use the new Transfer
Member Points to Groups action in Flows. The action automatically picks up the member's contribution percentage for associated
groups and then transfers the points.
Get a Snapshot of the Points Transferred by a Member
Easily track the number of points transferred by members to their groups for each of their accrual transactions. The Additional Notes
field of the Transfer type Loyalty Ledger records shows the number of points transferred to the member's groups.
The point balances of a group automatically update when you adjust a member's non-qualifying points or reverse a transaction.
After considering a member's group transfer pattern, the Data Processing Engine definitions provided with Loyalty Management
ensure that non-qualifying points are either credited or expire. Non-qualifying points pooled in a group also expire when the currency
is eligible for expiration.
Track points that are credited to or debited from a group using the Transaction Journal related list on the group's Loyalty Program
Member record. To transfer a member's points to a group, an Accrual type transaction journal is created for the group. Reversal or
adjustment of points of a member’s transaction creates Manual Adjustment type transaction journals for the group.
Give your members easy access to information about their groups when you create a site using the Loyalty Member Portal template.
Members can also view details such as the number of points that they transfer to the group and the group’s current balance.
Grow Your Loyalty Program with Group Memberships

Members often join a loyalty program with their friends and family. Create a Group type membership, and add Individual or Corporate
type members to it. Members of a group can pool their nonqualifying points and redeem points from the pool.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Loyalty
Management is enabled.
How: Create a Loyalty Program Member record and select the Member Type as Group. Specify the group's membership number,
enrollment date, and associated loyalty program. In the Group Created By field, select the member who requested the group to be
created, and save your changes. From the Group Members related list, click Add Member to Group to add a member.
360
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Member Groups (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Set Up a One-Time Process to Transfer Points

To automate the transfer of non-qualifying points from a member's point balance to the member's group, use the new Transfer Member
Points to Groups action in Flows. The action automatically picks up the member's contribution percentage for associated groups and
then transfers the points.
How: The action uses Transaction Journal records of Accrual type as input. Non-qualifying points are transferred to the groups of the
member associated with the Transaction Journal records. The action transfers points only from the Credit type Loyalty Ledger records
associated with the transaction journal. To transfer the points, the action creates ledger records. Each ledger record debits points for one
non-qualifying currency. The action credits points to the group by using a Transaction Journal record that's created and associated with
the group's Loyalty Program Member record.
In a flow, drag the Action element to the canvas. Select the Category as Loyalty. Search and select Transfer Member Points to Groups.
In the Journal ID field, enter the transaction journal ID or use a resource to automatically populate transaction journal IDs from previous
elements in the flow.
361
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Transfer Member Points to Groups (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get a Snapshot of the Points Transferred by a Member

Easily track the number of points transferred by members to their groups for each of their accrual transactions. The Additional Notes
field of the Transfer type Loyalty Ledger records shows the number of points transferred to the member's groups.
How: From the App Launcher, search and select Loyalty Management. Open the loyalty program that the member is associated with.
From the Loyalty Program Members related list, open the member's record. From the Transaction Journal related list, open the Transaction
Journal record for which points were transferred. From the Loyalty Ledger related list, click View All.
362

The point balances of a group automatically update when you adjust a member's non-qualifying points or reverse a transaction. After
considering a member's group transfer pattern, the Data Processing Engine definitions provided with Loyalty Management ensure that
non-qualifying points are either credited or expire. Non-qualifying points pooled in a group also expire when the currency is eligible for
expiration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Learn How a Group’s Point Balances Are Managed (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Track points that are credited to or debited from a group using the Transaction Journal related list on the group's Loyalty Program
Member record. To transfer a member's points to a group, an Accrual type transaction journal is created for the group. Reversal or
adjustment of points of a member’s transaction creates Manual Adjustment type transaction journals for the group.
How: From the App Launcher, search and select Loyalty Management. Open the loyalty program that the group is associated with.
From the Loyalty Program Members related list, open the group's record. From the Transaction Journal related list, click View All. To
view the points credited or debited for each non-qualifying currency per transaction, open a Transaction Journal record. To view the
details of the points credited or debited for each non-qualifying currency, see the Loyalty Ledger related list.

Give your members easy access to information about their groups when you create a site using the Loyalty Member Portal template.
Members can also view details such as the number of points that they transfer to the group and the group’s current balance.
How: To see which groups they’re part of, members can look at the Associated Groups related list on the Related tab of the member's
record. To view details, members can click the name of the group on the Associated Groups related list. A member can view the number
of points that they transferred to a group for an activity. To view the points, the member can open the record of that activity from the
Transaction Journals related list.
Escrow Points
Keep the points allocated for a member's transaction on hold for a specified period. Roll over escrow points to a member's balance after
the escrow period ends.
IN THIS SECTION:
Keep Member Points in Escrow Until a Transaction Is Completed
Reward members after an activity's lifecycle is completed. And reduce complicated point adjustment calculations whenever a
member cancels an activity. Keep member points in escrow for a specific period. Points are automatically transferred to a member's
point balance when the escrow period is over. For example, you can hold a member's points in escrow until the return period for
an order is complete. If the member returns or cancels the order before the escrow period is over, points are automatically removed
from the escrow balance. Multiple currencies in your loyalty program can hold points in escrow.
363
Release a Member's Points from Escrow Automatically

Automatically roll over a member's points from their escrow point balance to their point balance after a transaction's escrow period
is over. Make a copy of the Roll Over Escrow Points to Members Data Processing Engine template definition, and then run the template
to roll over the members' points.
On the Loyalty Program Member record of a member, see the member's escrow points in the Loyalty Member Currency related list.
You can view the number of points the member has in escrow for all the associated currencies.
You can now ignore the escrow period while crediting points to members for transactions. For example, you can override the escrow
period and credit points to members for orders that don't have a return period. To ignore the escrow period, in the Escrow Points
Credit Date field of a Transaction Journal record, specify the date to credit points. On the specified date, points are rolled over to the
member's point balance.
Use Updated Flow Actions to Easily Process Escrow Points
The Credit Points action now moves points to the member's escrow balance in real-time based on whether the associated currency
has escrow. The Get Member Points Balance action also provides the escrow points balance as an output.
Keep Member Points in Escrow Until a Transaction Is Completed

Reward members after an activity's lifecycle is completed. And reduce complicated point adjustment calculations whenever a member
cancels an activity. Keep member points in escrow for a specific period. Points are automatically transferred to a member's point balance
when the escrow period is over. For example, you can hold a member's points in escrow until the return period for an order is complete.
If the member returns or cancels the order before the escrow period is over, points are automatically removed from the escrow balance.
Multiple currencies in your loyalty program can hold points in escrow.
How: In the Escrow Period field of a Loyalty Program record, specify the number of days to hold points in escrow for the program's
currencies. When creating a Loyalty Program Currency record, select Has Escrow to hold member's points of this currency type in escrow.
364
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Loyalty Program (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Loyalty Program Currency (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Release a Member's Points from Escrow Automatically

Automatically roll over a member's points from their escrow point balance to their point balance after a transaction's escrow period is
over. Make a copy of the Roll Over Escrow Points to Members Data Processing Engine template definition, and then run the template
to roll over the members' points.
How: From Setup, search and select Data Processing Engine. Open the Roll Over Escrow Points to Members template definition. Click
Save As. Enter a name and API name of the copy, and then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Roll Over Escrow Points to Members (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

On the Loyalty Program Member record of a member, see the member's escrow points in the Loyalty Member Currency related list. You
can view the number of points the member has in escrow for all the associated currencies.
365

You can now ignore the escrow period while crediting points to members for transactions. For example, you can override the escrow
period and credit points to members for orders that don't have a return period. To ignore the escrow period, in the Escrow Points Credit
Date field of a Transaction Journal record, specify the date to credit points. On the specified date, points are rolled over to the member's
point balance.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Understand How Escrow Points Work (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use Updated Flow Actions to Easily Process Escrow Points

The Credit Points action now moves points to the member's escrow balance in real-time based on whether the associated currency has
escrow. The Get Member Points Balance action also provides the escrow points balance as an output.

Members' nonqualifying points balance automatically update when points are credited manually or through the Credit Points action.
To update member points balance, it’s not necessary to run the Credit Non-Qualifying Points to Members Data Processing Engine
definition.
How: In Setup, search and select Loyalty Management Setting. Turn on Update point balances in real-time.
366
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Real-Time Update of Non-Qualifying Points Balance (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Decide which promotions to offer to a member or for a transaction. Automate the process of updating members' progress on a cumulative
promotion.
IN THIS SECTION:
Determine Applicable Promotions for a Transaction
To determine which promotions work for Accrual or Redemption type transactions, use the Get Loyalty Promotions for Transactions
action instead of using multiple elements in a flow.
Find out which promotions are best suited for members based on the Salesforce CDP market segment the member belongs to. The
Get Loyalty Promotions for Salesforce CDP action in Flows shows a list of promotions associated with the market segment that a
member is associated with.
Update Member Progress Towards Unlocking a Promotion
Use the Update Progress For Cumulative Promotion action in Flows to easily update a member’s progress towards attaining a
cumulative promotion. The action either adds the change in usage to the member's cumulative promotion record or creates a Loyalty
Program Member Promotion record.
The Apply Promotions Flows template now uses the Update Progress For Cumulative Promotion action. This action makes updating
a member's progress towards achieving a cumulative promotion easy. The Flows template either credits points or issues a voucher
to the member based on the standard or cumulative promotion's fulfillment action.
Determine Applicable Promotions for a Transaction

To determine which promotions work for Accrual or Redemption type transactions, use the Get Loyalty Promotions for Transactions
action instead of using multiple elements in a flow.
367
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the B2C -
Loyalty or the B2C - Loyalty Plus license is enabled.
How: In a flow, drag the Action element on to the canvas. Select the Category as Loyalty. Search and select Get Loyalty Promotions
for Transactions. In the JournalId field, either enter the transaction journal ID or use a resource to automatically populate transaction
journal IDs from previous elements in the flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get a List of Promotions Applicable for a Transaction (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: getLoyaltyPromotion Invocable Action (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Find out which promotions are best suited for members based on the Salesforce CDP market segment the member belongs to. The Get
Loyalty Promotions for Salesforce CDP action in Flows shows a list of promotions associated with the market segment that a member
is associated with.
Loyalty or the B2C - Loyalty Plus license and Salesforce CDP are enabled.
How: In a flow, drag the Action element on to the canvas. Select the Category as Loyalty. Search and select Get Loyalty Promotions
for Salesforce CDP. In the MemberId field, either enter the member ID or use a resource to automatically populate member IDs from
previous elements in the flow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Get a List of Promotions Applicable for a Member (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: getLoyaltyPromotionBasedOnSalesforceCDP Invocable Action (can be outdated or unavailable
during release preview)
368
Update Member Progress Towards Unlocking a Promotion

Use the Update Progress For Cumulative Promotion action in Flows to easily update a member’s progress towards attaining a cumulative
promotion. The action either adds the change in usage to the member's cumulative promotion record or creates a Loyalty Program
Member Promotion record.
How: In a flow, drag the Action element on to the canvas, and select the Category as Loyalty. Search and select Update Progress For
Cumulative Promotion. Specify the promotion ID, the member ID, and the value to add to the member's cumulative usage.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Update Member's Progress Toward Attaining a Cumulative Promotion (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: updateProgressForCumulativePromotionUsage Invocable Action (can be outdated or unavailable

The Apply Promotions Flows template now uses the Update Progress For Cumulative Promotion action. This action makes updating a
member's progress towards achieving a cumulative promotion easy. The Flows template either credits points or issues a voucher to the
member based on the standard or cumulative promotion's fulfillment action.
How: To use the updated Apply Promotions Flow template, open the template. Click Save As, and then create a flow using the template.
369
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Flow for Applying a Promotion (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Voucher Management
Give more flexibility to members and users who manage vouchers. A member can choose to redeem a voucher in multiple transactions.
You can determine the value of a voucher while you issue the voucher.
IN THIS SECTION:
Give Members Flexibility to Use a Voucher Across Multiple Activities
Issue partially redeemable vouchers to enable members to use a voucher over multiple transactions. You can track the amount spent
and the amount remaining on the voucher.
You can now determine a voucher’s value or discount percentage while issuing the voucher. You can decide the voucher value
based on why, when, and to who you issue the voucher to, or on the value of the transaction the voucher is issued for. For example,
for a delayed shipment, you can offer members a 5% discount on their next purchase. But for a different business scenario, such as
receiving an incorrect order, you can offer a member a 10% discount on the same voucher.
370

When you reverse a transaction, the associated vouchers are automatically canceled. But already redeemed vouchers can’t be
canceled even after you reverse the transaction.
Give Members Flexibility to Use a Voucher Across Multiple Activities

Issue partially redeemable vouchers to enable members to use a voucher over multiple transactions. You can track the amount spent
and the amount remaining on the voucher.
How: When creating a Fixed Value type voucher definition, select Partial Redeemable. After issuing a partially redeemable voucher,
use the Redeemed Value and Remaining Value fields in the Voucher record to track the voucher’s usage across transactions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Voucher Definitions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

You can now determine a voucher’s value or discount percentage while issuing the voucher. You can decide the voucher value based
on why, when, and to who you issue the voucher to, or on the value of the transaction the voucher is issued for. For example, for a
delayed shipment, you can offer members a 5% discount on their next purchase. But for a different business scenario, such as receiving
an incorrect order, you can offer a member a 10% discount on the same voucher.
371
How: When using the Issue Voucher action in Flows, you can let your business scenario automatically determine the voucher value. On
a member's Loyalty Program Member record, click the Issue Voucher quick action. Based on the voucher definition that you select,
enter either the face value or the discount percentage that you want to offer to the member for the voucher.
SEE ALSO:
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: Redeem Voucher (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Issue Vouchers to Members (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Issue Vouchers Automatically (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

When you reverse a transaction, the associated vouchers are automatically canceled. But already redeemed vouchers can’t be canceled
even after you reverse the transaction.
How: From the App Launcher, find and select Transaction Journals. Open the transaction journal to reverse. Click Reverse Transaction.
The transaction journal and the vouchers associated with the transaction are canceled. But a voucher isn't canceled if the voucher's
status is Redeemed.

Use content blocks to send contextual emails to members.
IN THIS SECTION:
Keep Members Informed About Points Earned or Spent
Two new Loyalty Management content blocks in Marketing Cloud enable you to email members about the points that they earned
or spent for a transaction. To access the new Loyalty Management content blocks in Marketing Cloud, install the Loyalty Management
Content Blocks package. To email details about transactions that members earned points for, use the Loyalty Accrual Transactions
content block. To email details about transactions that members spent points for, use the Loyalty Redemption Transactions content
block.
Get an Early Start on Your Tier Upgrade Emails
Email members immediately after upgrading them to a new tier. Use the Loyalty Tier Upgrade content block to personalize emails.
To access the Loyalty Management content blocks in Marketing Cloud, install the Loyalty Management Content Blocks package.
The content block helps you pull data from your Loyalty Management records to use in your emails or email templates.
Keep Members Informed About Points Earned or Spent

Two new Loyalty Management content blocks in Marketing Cloud enable you to email members about the points that they earned or
spent for a transaction. To access the new Loyalty Management content blocks in Marketing Cloud, install the Loyalty Management
Content Blocks package. To email details about transactions that members earned points for, use the Loyalty Accrual Transactions content
block. To email details about transactions that members spent points for, use the Loyalty Redemption Transactions content block.
372
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions that have Loyalty
Management and Marketing Cloud enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Loyalty Management Content Blocks in Email Templates and Template-Based Emails (can be outdated or
Salesforce Help: Install the Loyalty Management Content Blocks Package (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get an Early Start on Your Tier Upgrade Emails

Email members immediately after upgrading them to a new tier. Use the Loyalty Tier Upgrade content block to personalize emails. To
access the Loyalty Management content blocks in Marketing Cloud, install the Loyalty Management Content Blocks package. The content
block helps you pull data from your Loyalty Management records to use in your emails or email templates.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions that have Loyalty
Management and Marketing Cloud enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use Loyalty Management Content Blocks in Email Templates and Template-Based Emails (can be outdated or
Salesforce Help: Install the Loyalty Management Content Blocks Package (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Trigger Automated Process Using Transaction Journals

Trigger business processes in Flows and Process Builder when Transaction Journal records are created or updated. Whenever transaction
journals are created or updated, you can trigger processes such as crediting points, updating other records, or sending the member an
email.
373
How: In Process Builder, use the Transaction Journal object as the basis for starting a process. In a Record-Triggered flow, select the
Transaction Journal object to trigger the flow.

Added validations align tier group settings with both fixed tier and anniversary tier models. They allow you to specify the tier period as
months or years, thus simplifying the tier assessment process. For anniversary model tiers, you can align a member's tier expiration date
with their enrollment anniversary. For fixed model tiers, you can align the tier expiration date with the member's qualifying points reset
date. The points for fixed model tiers are then reset in years.
When: This change applies from the Summer ’21 release onwards.
How: When you create a Loyalty Tier Group record, the tier model that you select determines the available options. If tier groups in your
LoyaltyManagementapp use values that are no longer valid, change the setting to ensure that the processes associated with the tiers
work.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Loyalty Tier Group (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Start Your Journey with the Loyalty Management Learning Map

Take the path to success with the Salesforce Loyalty Management learning map. The learning map guides you through every step of
your journey from creating a loyalty program with targeted resources to running the program. Find articles, help topics, and Trailhead
modules in one place, and get your loyalty program up and running in no time!
How: Click a stop on the map to see content relevant to that stop.
374
SEE ALSO:
Learning Map: Salesforce Loyalty Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get insights into your program’s revenue and view the liability forecast. Use the Predictions for Promotion Revenue app to get predictions
on promotion revenue.
IN THIS SECTION:
Increase Promotion Revenue with Einstein Discovery Predictions (Beta)
Get predictions on revenue generated from promotions, identify target segments that generate higher revenue, and devise strategies
to improve promotion revenue. View the predicted revenue by states, loyalty tiers, and member interests.
Anticipate Liabilities with Time Series Forecasting
Use the new Liability Forecast dashboard to analyze your loyalty program’s revenue and liability, and manage your liabilities based
on the forecasts.
The improvements help you to effectively manage loyalty programs and grow business.
Increase Promotion Revenue with Einstein Discovery Predictions (Beta)

Get predictions on revenue generated from promotions, identify target segments that generate higher revenue, and devise strategies
to improve promotion revenue. View the predicted revenue by states, loyalty tiers, and member interests.
Where: This change applies to Tableau CRM in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
where Loyalty Management is enabled.
375
Who: To create an app from the Predictions for Promotion Revenue (beta) template, you need the Loyalty Analytics Plus add-on license.
How: From Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and then select App. Select Predictions for Promotion Revenue, and then
follow the instructions in the wizard to create your app.
Anticipate Liabilities with Time Series Forecasting

Use the new Liability Forecast dashboard to analyze your loyalty program’s revenue and liability, and manage your liabilities based on
the forecasts.
Where: This change applies to Tableau CRM in Lightning Experience Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where
Loyalty Management is enabled.
Who: To use liability forecasting, you need either the Loyalty Analytics Plus add-on license or the CLAAnalytics Base App license. Users
who are assigned a CLAAnalytics Base App license can use liability forecasting only for one period.
376
How: From Tableau CRM Analytics Studio, click Create, and then select App > Analytics for Loyalty. Follow the instructions in the
wizard to create your app.

The improvements help you to effectively manage loyalty programs and grow business.
Where: This change applies to Tableau CRM in Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions
where Loyalty Management is enabled.
Who: These improvements are available to users with the Loyalty Analytics Plus add-on license.
Why:
• Use the enhanced Program Performance dashboard to know the financial impact of accrued non-qualifying points (NQP), redeemed
NQP, expired NQP, and points balance. You can also analyze a program’s performance based on the transaction location and member
location, and design relevant promotions.
377
• Identify the reasons for manual point adjustments and provide better service to
members.
• Embed the lighter version of the Program Overview dashboard on your home page to get instant insight into your loyalty
program.
• Embed the Likelihood of Member Being Inactive model card on a loyalty member page and get real-time predictions on a member
turning inactive.
• Remember that the default values for the Tier Group and NQP Currency global filters are now set based on the program’s primary
tier group and primary currency.
New and Changed Objects in Loyalty Management

Do more with the new and updated Loyalty Management objects.
Add a member to a group
Use the new LoyaltyPgmGroupMbrRlnsp object.
Create vouchers
Use the newly supported Create call of the Voucher object.
Create a member group
Use the new Group value in the MemberType field of the LoyaltyProgramMember object.
Indicate whether vouchers are redeemable across multiple transactions
Use the new IsPartialRedeemable field of the VoucherDefinition object.
378
See the amount a member has redeemed from a partially redeemable voucher
Use the new RedeemedValue field of the Voucher object.
See the amount remaining on a voucher after the member has partially redeemed it
Use the new RemainingValue field of the Voucher object.
Specify the number of days after which escrow points are credited to a members' point balance
Use the new EscrowPeriod field of the LoyaltyProgram object.
Indicate whether to place points of a currency in escrow
Use the new HasEscrow field of the LoyaltyProgramCurrency object.
See the number of points that are still in escrow
Use the new TotalEscrowPointsAccrued field of the LoyaltyMemberCurrency object.
See the number of points that were credited to the member from escrow
Use the new TotalEscrowRolloverPoints field of the LoyaltyMemberCurrency object.
See the date to credit escrow points to a member for an associated journal
Use the new EscrowPointsCreditDate field of the TransactionJournal object.
See the date to credit escrow points to a member for an associated ledger
Use the new EscrowPointsCreditDate field of the LoyaltyLedger object.
New and Changed Invocable Actions in Loyalty Management

Use the new and changed invocable actions for Loyalty Management.
Transfer points to member’s associated groups
Use the new transferMemberPointsToGroups action.
Get promotions that are eligible for a transaction journal
Use the new getLoyaltyPromotion action.
Get promotions that are eligible for a program member
Use the new getLoyaltyPromotionBasedOnSalesforceCDP action.
Update the progress a member has made towards attaining a cumulative promotion
Use the new updateProgressForCumulativePromotionUsage action.
Specify the face value and discount percentage for a voucher
Use the new FaceValue and DiscountPercent fields on the existing issueVoucher action.
Get the escrow points balance of a program member
Use the new EscrowPointsBalance output field on the existing getPointsBalance action.
New Action Type Value in Loyalty Management

Loyalty Management has a new actionType enumeration value.
Transfer points from an individual member or a corporate member to the member's associated group
Use the new transferMemberPointsToGroups value in the existing actionType field on the FlowActionCall subtype
of the Flow metadata type.
Get promotions that are eligible for a transaction journal
Use the new getLoyaltyPromotion value in the existing actionType field on the FlowActionCall subtype of the Flow
metadata type.
379
Get promotions that are eligible for a program member

Use the new getLoyaltyPromotionBasedOnSalesforceCDP value in the existing actionType field on the
Update the progress a member has made towards attaining a cumulative promotion
Use the new updateProgressForCumulativePromotionUsage value in the existing actionType field on the
Connect REST API

Loyalty Management REST API includes changed call.
Loyalty Management
Redeem a voucher for a program member using a request body
Make a GET request to the
/services/data/vXX.X/loyalty/programs/${programName}/members/${membershipNumber}/
vouchers/${voucherCode}/redeem resource.
New request body: Redeem Voucher Input
New response body: Redeem Voucher Output
SEE ALSO:
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: Redeem Voucher (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Apex: New Items in Loyalty Management

These classes are new.
ConnectApi Namespace
The ConnectApi namespace has this new method and these new classes.
Methods
This new method is in the ConnectApi.LoyaltyVoucherConnect class.
Redeem a voucher for a member by using a request body
redeem(programName, membershipNumber, voucherCode, amount)
New input class— ConnectApi.RedeemVoucherInput
New output class— ConnectApi.RedeemVoucherOutput
loyalty_management Namespace
The loyalty_management namespace has these new methods and classes.
Call Loyalty Management actions from Apex code
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyResources class. This class has these new methods.
• changeTier(changeTierList)—This method changes the tier for a loyalty program member.
380
• creditPoints(creditPointsList)—This method credits loyalty points to a loyalty program member’s balance.

• deditPoints(deditPointsList)—This method debits loyalty points from a loyalty program member’s balance.
• getLoyaltyPromotionBasedOnCustomer360Audiences(loyaltyPromotionInputList)—This method
retrieves a member’s eligible promotions based on the member’s market segment.
• getLoyaltyPromotions(loyaltyPromotionInputList)—This method retrieves active promotions that are
eligible for a transaction journal.
• getPointsBalance(getPointsBalanceList)—This method gets loyalty points balance for a loyalty program
member.
• getTier(getTierList)—This method gets the current tier information for a loyalty program member.
• issueVoucher(issueVoucherList)—This method issues a voucher for a loyalty program member.
• transferMember(transferMemberList)—This method transfers points from an individual member or a corporate
member to the member's associated group.
Change tier for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.ChangeTierInput class. This class receives the input parameter values for the
Change Tier action.
Credit points to or debit points from a loyalty program member’s balance
Use the new loyalty_management.PointsInput class. This class receives the input parameter values for the Credit and
Debit point actions.
Get active promotions that are eligible for a transaction journal
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyPromotionInput class. This class receives the input parameter values
for the Loyalty Promotion action.
Get current tier for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.MemberTierInput class. This class receives the input parameter values for the Get
Member Tier action.
Get points balance for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.MemberPointBalanceInput class. This class receives the input parameter values
for the Get Member Points action.
Get a member’s eligible promotions based on the member’s market segment
Use the new loyalty_management.CdpBasedLoyaltyPromotionInput class. This class receives the input parameter
values for the Customer Data Platform-based Loyalty Promotion action.
Issue a voucher to a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.IssueVoucherInput class. This class receives the input parameter values for the
Issue Voucher action.
Transfer points from an individual member or a corporate member to the member's associated group
Use the new loyalty_management.TransferMemberPointsToGroupInput class. This class receives the input
parameter values for the Transfer Member Points To Groups action.
Set inputs to change the tier for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.ChangeTierInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.ChangeTierInput object.
• setChangeReason(changeReason)—This method sets the reason to change a member tier.
• setLoyaltyProgramMemberId(loyaltyProgramMemberId)—This method sets the ID of the loyalty program
member.
• setProgramName(programName)—This method sets the loyalty program name associated with the tier.
381
• setTargetTierName(targetTierName)—This method sets the new tier to associate with the loyalty program
member.
• setTierGroupName(tierGroupName)—This method sets the name of the loyalty tier group.
Set inputs to credit points to or debit points from a loyalty program member’s balance
Use the new loyalty_management.PointsInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.PointsInput object.
• setAdditionalNotes(additionalNotes)—This method sets extra information about the transactions performed
by the loyalty program member.
• setCorrelationId(correlationId)—This method sets the ID of the Salesforce entity.
• setFlowId(flowId)—This method sets the ID of the flow associated with the credit or debit points action.
• setJournalId(journalId)—This method sets the ID of the transaction journal.
member.
• setPoints(points)—This method sets the points available with the loyalty program member.
• setProgramCurrencyName(programCurrencyName)—This method sets the name of the loyalty program currency.
• setProgramName(programName)—This method sets the name of the loyalty program.
Set inputs to get the current tier for a given loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.MemberTierInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.MemberTierInput object.
member whose tier details are to be fetched.
• setTierGroupName(tierGroupName)—This method sets the name of the tier group.
Set inputs to get points balance for a given loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.MemberPointBalanceInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.MemberPointBalanceInput object.
member whose points balance is to be fetched.
• setProgramCurrencyName(programCurrencyName)—This method sets the name of the program currency.
Set inputs to get a member’s eligible promotions based on the member’s market segment
Use the new loyalty_management.CdpBasedLoyaltyPromotionInputBuilder class. This class has these new
methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.CdpBasedLoyaltyPromotionInput
object.
• setMemberId(memberId)—This method sets the ID of a loyalty program member.
• setPromotionIds(promotionIds)—This method sets the list of promotion IDs to filter the promotions that are
eligible for a member.
Set inputs to get eligible promotions for a transaction journal
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyPromotionInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.LoyaltyPromotionInput object.
382
• setJournalIds(journalIds)—This method sets the transaction journal that retrieval of active loyalty promotions is
based on.
Set inputs to issue a voucher for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.IssueVoucherInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the loyalty_management.IssueVoucherInput object.
• setAdditionalNotes(additionalNotes)—This method sets the extra information about the voucher.
• setBenefitId(benefitId)—This method sets the benefits associated with the voucher.
• setContactId(contactId)—This method sets the contact associated with the loyalty program member.
• setDiscountPercent(discountPercent)—This method sets the discount percentage provided by the voucher.
• setEffectiveDate(effectiveDate)—This method sets the start date of the validity of the voucher.
• setExpiryDate(expiryDate)—This method sets the expiry date of the voucher.
• setFaceValue(faceValue)—This method sets the discount amount provided by the voucher.
• setJournalId(journalId)—This method sets the transaction journal associated with the member voucher.
member.
• setPromotionId(promotionId)—This method sets the promotions associated with the voucher.
• setVoucherCode(voucherCode)—This method sets the voucher identifier.
• setVoucherDefinitionName(voucherDefinitionName)—This method sets the voucher definition associated
with the voucher code.
Set inputs to transfer points from an individual member or a corporate member to the member’s associated group
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyPromotionInputBuilder class. This class has these new methods.
• build()—This method returns an instance of the
loyalty_management.TranserMemberPointsToGroupsInput object.
• setJournalId(journalId)—This method sets the transaction journal that is used to transfer points to groups.
Provide active promotions for a transaction journal
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyPromotionOutput class. This class has this new method.
• getPromotionIds()—This method returns the records of active loyalty promotions.
Provide changed tier details for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.ChangeTierOutput class. This class has these new methods.
• getLoyaltyProgramMemberId()—This method returns the loyalty program member ID.
• getMembertier()—This method returns the tier associated with the member.
• getProgramName()—This method returns the program name.
• getTierGroupName()—This method returns the tier group name.
Provide details of points credited to a loyalty program member’s balance
Use the new loyalty_management.CreditPointsOutput class. This class has these new methods.
• getCurrencyName()—This method returns the name of the loyalty program currency.
• getJournalId()—This method returns the ID of the transaction journal.
• getLoyaltyProgramMemberId()—This method returns the ID of the loyalty program member.
• getProgramName()—This method returns the name of the loyalty program.
383
Provide details of points debited from a loyalty program member’s balance

Use the new loyalty_management.DebitPointsOutput class. This class has these new methods.
• getCurrencyName()—This method returns the name of the loyalty program currency.
• getJournalId()—This method returns the ID of the transaction journal.
• getLoyaltyProgramMemberId()—This method returns the total points available for the loyalty program member.
• getPoints()—This method returns the ID of the loyalty program member.
• getProgramName()—This method returns the name of the loyalty program.
Provide error information from Loyalty Management actions called from Apex code
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyActionError class. This class has these new methods.
• getCode()—This method returns a string containing an error code returned by a Loyalty Management action.
• getMessage()—This method returns a string containing the error message returned by a Loyalty Management action.
Provide a member’s eligible promotions based on the member’s market segment
Use the new loyalty_management.CdpBasedLoyaltyPromotionOutput class. This class has this new method.
• getPromotionIds()—This method returns the promotions that are eligible for a member.
Provide points balance for a given loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.MemberPointBalanceOutput class. This class has these new methods.
• getCurrencyName()—This method returns the name of the program currency.
• getEscrowPointsBalance()—This method returns the points balance with escrow for a loyalty program member.
• getPoints()—This method returns the points available for the loyalty program member.
• getProgramName()—This method returns the name of the program.
Provide tier details for a specified loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.MemberTierOutput class. This class has these new methods.
• getMemberTier()—This method returns the name of the tier associated with the program member.
• getProgramName()—This method returns the name of the program.
• getSequenceNumber()—This method returns the ranking of the tier.
• getTierGroupName()—This method returns the name of the tier group.
Provide results from Loyalty Management actions called from Apex code
Use the new loyalty_management.LoyaltyActionResult class. This class has these new methods.
• getErrors()—This method returns a list of loyalty_management.LoyaltyActionError objects.
• isSuccess()—This method returns true when the Loyalty Management action runs successfully.
Provide voucher details issued for a loyalty program member
Use the new loyalty_management.IssueVoucherOutput class. This class has this new method.
• getVoucherId()—This method returns the voucher ID issued for a loyalty program member.
SEE ALSO:
Loyalty Management Developer Guide: LoyaltyVoucherConnect Methods (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
384
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Industries: Common Components
Industries: Common Components

Some Industries products are available for use in more than one Industries solution, or in Clouds outside of Industries. In this release,
we've enhanced filtering and performance for the Data Processing Engine, improved monitoring for branch management, added decision
tables to flows, provided templates for rebate management, added invocable actions and Apex class for loyalty management, and much
more.
IN THIS SECTION:
Filter records based on words or phrases of your choice. Find out the length of field values. Run Data Processing Engine definitions
more frequently. Create definitions for more complex business scenarios, and start multiple runs of a definition simultaneously.
Batch Management
Create Batch Management jobs with Manufacturing Cloud. Create Batch Management jobs using a Metadata API instead of objects.
Get deeper relationship insights by configuring additional person and company record objects. Learn how Einstein Relationship
Insights now saves your object configurations. Use various content sources to explore relationships. Refine your search results with
keywords when exploring relationships in the Smart Tag view. Learn about the small changes in the UI that provide a better user
experience.
Omnistudio
OmniStudio provides a suite of services, components, and data model objects that combine to create Industry Cloud applications.
Create guided interactions using data from your Salesforce org and external sources.
Action Plans
Enable your users to print action plan items to collaborate better, create reports for action plan items to get better insights, and get
task reminders.
Monitor Documents as They're Transformed
Users can now view a document and the new record window simultaneously when they create records from transformed documents.

Filter records based on words or phrases of your choice. Find out the length of field values. Run Data Processing Engine definitions more
frequently. Create definitions for more complex business scenarios, and start multiple runs of a definition simultaneously.
IN THIS SECTION:
Filter records based on whether a set of phrases, words, or characters is present in a specific field's value. Define criteria to filter
records based on whether the values you specify are present in a field's value.
Use the new Length function in a formula to get a field value’s character count. You can store the character count in a Number type
field.
Run Data Processing Engine definitions without worrying about the daily or monthly Salesforce Data Pipeline limits. You can increase
your Salesforce Data Pipeline limits with add-on licenses.
385
Get More Out of Your Definitions with Increased Limits

Use Data Processing Engine for more business scenarios. A Salesforce org can contain up to 50 active definitions. Create more
complex definitions with up to 500 nodes and 500 fields in each node. A definition can now have 50 Data Source nodes and 10
Writeback Object nodes.
With some minor tweaks, you get a better user experience. The aliases of selected fields in Data Source and Join nodes are now
autopopulated. When selecting fields or looking at selected fields, use type-ahead search to find fields quicker.
Run Definitions with Different Input Variable Values Simultaneously
If you use definitions for multiple business scenarios, you don't have to run the definition for each business scenario one at a time.
As long as each definition has unique input variable values, you can run them simultaneously. You can start multiple definitions runs
using the Data Processing Engine action twice in a flow or on the Data Processing Engine builder. You can also start a run by invoking
dataProcessingEngineAction.
Data Processing Engine is now available with Manufacturing Cloud. Use the definitions provided with Manufacturing Cloud for
advanced account forecasting, or create your own.
Do more with the updated Data Processing Engine fields.
Data Processing Engine Has a Changed Metadata Type
BatchCalcJobDefinition metadata type includes new picklist values.

Filter records based on whether a set of phrases, words, or characters is present in a specific field's value. Define criteria to filter records
based on whether the values you specify are present in a field's value.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions where Financial Services Cloud,
Manufacturing Cloud, Rebate Management, or Loyalty Management is enabled. Data Pipelines must be enabled in the Salesforce org.
How: In a Data Processing Engine definition, click New Node. Select the node type as Filter. Select the data source node that contains
the field whose value determines which records are filtered. Select the In operator if you want to keep records that contain the values
you specify. Select the Not In operator if you want to keep records that don't contain the values you specify. Select Field as the Type.
In the Value field, enter the phrases, words, or characters that you want to use as filter criteria.
386
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Filters (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the new Length function in a formula to get a field value’s character count. You can store the character count in a Number type
field.
How: In a Data Processing Engine definition, click New Node. Select the node type as Formula. Select the source node that contains
the field you want to find the length for. In the Formulas section, provide an alias for the field that stores the character count, and select
Number for the data type. Select the Length function, place the cursor within the parenthesis, and select the field where you want to
determine the character count. Here’s the formula to get the length of the value stored in a field named Annual Revenue:
LENGTH({AnnualRevenue}).
387
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Formulas (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Run Data Processing Engine definitions without worrying about the daily or monthly Salesforce Data Pipeline limits. You can increase
your Salesforce Data Pipeline limits with add-on licenses.
How: Contact your Salesforce representative to learn more about the Salesforce Data Pipelines add-on license.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Processing Engine Limits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get More Out of Your Definitions with Increased Limits

Use Data Processing Engine for more business scenarios. A Salesforce org can contain up to 50 active definitions. Create more complex
definitions with up to 500 nodes and 500 fields in each node. A definition can now have 50 Data Source nodes and 10 Writeback Object
nodes.
388
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Data Processing Engine Limits (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

With some minor tweaks, you get a better user experience. The aliases of selected fields in Data Source and Join nodes are now
autopopulated. When selecting fields or looking at selected fields, use type-ahead search to find fields quicker.
Run Definitions with Different Input Variable Values Simultaneously

If you use definitions for multiple business scenarios, you don't have to run the definition for each business scenario one at a time. As
long as each definition has unique input variable values, you can run them simultaneously. You can start multiple definitions runs using
the Data Processing Engine action twice in a flow or on the Data Processing Engine builder. You can also start a run by invoking
dataProcessingEngineAction.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Run Data Processing Engine Definitions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: What Happens If a Definition Has Two or More Runs in Progress Simultaneously? (can be outdated or unavailable

Data Processing Engine is now available with Manufacturing Cloud. Use the definitions provided with Manufacturing Cloud for advanced
account forecasting, or create your own.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, and Unlimited editions where Manufacturing Cloud is
enabled.

Do more with the updated Data Processing Engine fields.
Use updated picklist values
Use the updated Canceled picklist value instead of Cancelled in the Status field of BatchJob, BatchJobPart, and
BatchJobStatusChangedEvent objects.
Data Processing Engine Has a Changed Metadata Type

BatchCalcJobDefinition metadata type includes new picklist values.
389
Filter records based on values that you define

Use the operator field's new In and NotIn values in the BatchCalcJobFilterCriteria field collection of the BatchCalcJobDefinition
metadata type.
Batch Management
Create Batch Management jobs with Manufacturing Cloud. Create Batch Management jobs using a Metadata API instead of objects.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create Batch Management Jobs with Manufacturing Cloud
Batch Management is now available with Manufacturing Cloud. Use Batch Management jobs to process records for business flows
related to the manufacturing industry.
Use Metadata API instead of Objects to Create Batch Management Jobs
Use Batch Management's Metadata API to create Batch Management jobs. You can no longer use Batch Management objects to
create Batch Management jobs.
Do more with the new Batch Management fields.
Create Batch Management Jobs with Manufacturing Cloud

Batch Management is now available with Manufacturing Cloud. Use Batch Management jobs to process records for business flows
related to the manufacturing industry.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Rebate Management,
Manufacturing Cloud, or Loyalty Management is enabled.
Use Metadata API instead of Objects to Create Batch Management Jobs

Use Batch Management's Metadata API to create Batch Management jobs. You can no longer use Batch Management objects to create
Batch Management jobs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Rebate Management,
Manufacturing Cloud, or Loyalty Management is enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Industries Common Resources Developer Guide: Batch Management Metadata API (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Do more with the new Batch Management fields.
Use updated picklist values
Use the updated Canceled picklist value instead of Cancelled in the Status field of BatchJob, BatchJobPart, and
BatchJobStatusChangedEvent objects.
390

Get deeper relationship insights by configuring additional person and company record objects. Learn how Einstein Relationship Insights
now saves your object configurations. Use various content sources to explore relationships. Refine your search results with keywords
when exploring relationships in the Smart Tag view. Learn about the small changes in the UI that provide a better user experience.
IN THIS SECTION:
Explore More Object Relationships with Additional Person and Company Record Objects
Explore object relationships with as much data as possible. Now your sales teams can configure up to five company and person
record objects. For example, when you configure Leads, Contacts, and two custom objects as your person records, your sales team
can search for relationships with all these record objects.
Store Object Configurations in a Dedicated Database
Object configurations for Einstein Relationship Insights are now stored in a dedicated database. These configurations were previously
stored in your org, which made storing large number of configurations difficult. With the new database, you can manage a large
number of object mappings and configurations. For the mandatory database migration to take effect, turn off and then turn on
Einstein Relationship Insights, and then save your object mappings and configurations to the new database. This task isn’t optional.
Get Relationship Recommendations from Multiple Sources
Expand the scope of your relationship recommendations by including various content sources. You can select Slack, Twitter, news,
and information on the internet as the content sources. For example, when you select Slack as a content source, Einstein Relationship
Insights explores Slack attachments to discover relationships between people and companies. Your sales teams can then identify
prospective customers and business opportunities, and build a network of people and companies using the Slack content.
Find Items in Smart Tag View Easily by Searching with Keywords
Now you can easily find a person or company that you’re looking for when exploring relationships in the Smart Tag view by using
keyword searches. All references to the keyword in the search results appear in bold. You can find references to the keyword without
reading every search result. To find a person or company, on the Smart Tag view for Relationships, in the Search field, enter the
keyword.
Smarttagscanvasapp Is Renamed Einstein Relationship Insights Canvas App
The Einstein Relationship Insights app in the App Manager is now named Einstein Relationship Insights Canvas App. All the awesome
features that enable you to explore people and company connections and uncover key relationship networks remain unchanged.
Turn off and then turn on Einstein Relationship Insights to ensure seamless integration of the UI changes.
Experience Improved Usability with Updated Labels
Learn about updated labels that improve your experience with Einstein Relationship Insights.
Explore More Object Relationships with Additional Person and Company Record Objects
Explore object relationships with as much data as possible. Now your sales teams can configure up to five company and person record
objects. For example, when you configure Leads, Contacts, and two custom objects as your person records, your sales team can search
for relationships with all these record objects.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions where Einstein Relationship
Insights is enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein, and then select Einstein Relationship Intelligence. To configure person
record objects, click Add Person Record Object. To configure company record object, click Add Company Record Object.
391
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable and Configure Einstein Relationship Insights (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Store Object Configurations in a Dedicated Database

Object configurations for Einstein Relationship Insights are now stored in a dedicated database. These configurations were previously
stored in your org, which made storing large number of configurations difficult. With the new database, you can manage a large number
of object mappings and configurations. For the mandatory database migration to take effect, turn off and then turn on Einstein Relationship
Insights, and then save your object mappings and configurations to the new database. This task isn’t optional.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein, and then select Einstein Relationship Intelligence. Turn off and then
turn on Einstein Relationship Insights, verify your object mappings, and then save your changes.
Get Relationship Recommendations from Multiple Sources

Expand the scope of your relationship recommendations by including various content sources. You can select Slack, Twitter, news, and
information on the internet as the content sources. For example, when you select Slack as a content source, Einstein Relationship Insights
explores Slack attachments to discover relationships between people and companies. Your sales teams can then identify prospective
customers and business opportunities, and build a network of people and companies using the Slack content.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein, and then select Einstein Relationship Intelligence. In the Content Sources
section, select the applicable content sources.
392
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Connect Slack as a Content Source (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Find Items in Smart Tag View Easily by Searching with Keywords

Now you can easily find a person or company that you’re looking for when exploring relationships in the Smart Tag view by using
keyword searches. All references to the keyword in the search results appear in bold. You can find references to the keyword without
reading every search result. To find a person or company, on the Smart Tag view for Relationships, in the Search field, enter the keyword.
Why: For example, to find references to the Acme account in the relationship evidence for John Smith, enter Acme as the keyword in
the Search field. All references to Acme in the search results show in bold.
393
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Refine Evidence for Relationships with Keywords (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Smarttagscanvasapp Is Renamed Einstein Relationship Insights Canvas App

The Einstein Relationship Insights app in the App Manager is now named Einstein Relationship Insights Canvas App. All the awesome
features that enable you to explore people and company connections and uncover key relationship networks remain unchanged. Turn
off and then turn on Einstein Relationship Insights to ensure seamless integration of the UI changes.
394
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein, and then select Einstein Relationship Intelligence. Turn off and then
turn on Einstein Relationship Insights, verify your object mappings, and then save your changes.
Experience Improved Usability with Updated Labels

Learn about updated labels that improve your experience with Einstein Relationship Insights.
Why: The Salesforce ERI Alpha browser extension on Chrome Web Store is now named Salesforce Einstein Relationship Insights.
The browser menu for the Einstein Relationship Insights extension has different menu options.
• Invite Einstein to this Page section header is now named Let Einstein Explore.
• Invited Einstein to Page button is now named Explore the Page.
Omnistudio
OmniStudio provides a suite of services, components, and data model objects that combine to create Industry Cloud applications. Create
guided interactions using data from your Salesforce org and external sources.
IN THIS SECTION:
Connect REST API
Omnistudio REST API includes new calls.
Connect REST API

Omnistudio REST API includes new calls.
395
Expression Set (Also Known as Calculation Procedure or Evaluation Service)

Activate a calculation procedure version
Make a PATCH request to the new
/connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services/version-definitions/${id} resource.
New response body: Calculation Procedure Activation Output
Retrieve the details for a given calculation procedure
Make a GET request to the new /connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services/${id} resource.
New response body: Calculation Procedure Detail Output
Retrieve a list of calculation procedures that contain a specified keyword
Make a GET request to the new /connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services resource.
New response body: Calculation Procedure List Output
Retrieve the details of calculation procedure version
Make a GET request to the new /connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services/version-definitions/${id}
resource.
New response body: Calculation Procedure Version Definition Output
Retrieve the information about the input variables of a calculation procedure version
Make a GET request to the new
/connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services/version-definitions/${id}/simulation resource.
New request body: Simulation Evaluation Service Input
New response body: Simulation Input Variables Result List
Run a simulation on a calculation procedure version
Make a PATCH request to the new
/connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services/version-definitions/${id}/simulation resource.
New request body: Simulation Evaluation Service Input
New response body: Simulation Eval Service Output
Update a calculation procedure version or save a calculation procedure version as a new version
Make a POST request to the new /connect/omnistudio/evaluation-services/version-definitions
resource.
New request body: Calculation Procedure Version Definition Input
New response body: Calculation Procedure Version Definition Output
Decision Matrix (Also Known as Calculation Matrix)

Add, delete, or update columns in a decision matrix
Make a POST request to the new /connect/omnistudio/decision-matrices/${matrixId}/columns resource.
New request body: Decision Matrix Columns Input
New response body: Decision Matrix Output
Add, delete, or update rows in a decision matrix
/connect/omnistudio/decision-matrices/${matrixId}/versions/${versionId}/rows resource.
New request body: Decision Matrix Rows Input
New response body: Decision Matrix Output
396
Retrieve the details for a given decision matrix

Make a GET request to the new /connect/omnistudio/decision-matrices/${matrixId} resource.
New response body: Decision Matrix Result
Retrieve a list of decision matrices that contain a specified keyword
Make a GET request to the new /connect/omnistudio/decision-matrices resource.
New response body: Decision Matrix Basic
Retrieve a list of columns in a decision matrix
Make a GET request to the new /connect/omnistudio/decision-matrices/${matrixId}/columns resource.
New response body: Decision Matrix Columns Output
Retrieve a paginated list of rows in a decision matrix
Make a GET or POST request to the new
/connect/omnistudio/decision-matrices/${matrixId}/versions/${versionId}/rows resource.
New response body: Decision Matrix Rows Output
SEE ALSO:
Industries Common Resources Developer Guide: Omnistudio Business APIs(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Action Plans
Enable your users to print action plan items to collaborate better, create reports for action plan items to get better insights, and get task
reminders.
IN THIS SECTION:
Collaborate Better on Action Plans Even Offline
Now you can enable your users to print tasks and document checklist items related to action plans using the enhanced printable
view.
Provide Better Insights Into Action Plan Items
Now your users can get unified reports for action plans to track the performance of business processes and monitor compliance.
Set up report types that enable your users to create action plan reports that contain tasks or document checklist items.
Monitoring tasks across action plans is a manual, error-prone process. You can now set reminders for tasks in an action plan template
to improve task completion rate. When your users create action plans, reminders are automatically set for the corresponding tasks
in the action plans.
You can now delete draft action plan templates that you no longer require.
Collaborate Better on Action Plans Even Offline

Now you can enable your users to print tasks and document checklist items related to action plans using the enhanced printable view.
enabled.
How: Edit the Action Plan page layout, and then add the Tasks and Document Checklist Items related lists.
397
When users open an action plan and click the Printable View button, the view shows the plan’s details, tasks, and document checklist
items. The printable view displays dependent tasks only if their prerequisite tasks are completed. You can’t modify the list of fields shown
in the printable view.
Provide Better Insights Into Action Plan Items

Now your users can get unified reports for action plans to track the performance of business processes and monitor compliance. Set up
report types that enable your users to create action plan reports that contain tasks or document checklist items.
enabled.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Report Types, and then select Report Types. Create report types with action plans
as the primary object, and tasks or document checklist items as the dependent object.

Monitoring tasks across action plans is a manual, error-prone process. You can now set reminders for tasks in an action plan template
to improve task completion rate. When your users create action plans, reminders are automatically set for the corresponding tasks in
the action plans.
enabled.
How: In the New Task dialog box on the Action Plan Template page, set the reminder and specify a time.
398
When your user creates an action plan, a reminder is set—based on the time specified in the template—for the task's due date. Users
can modify the reminder date and time if necessary.

You can now delete draft action plan templates that you no longer require.
enabled.
How: Click the Delete Template button on the Action Plan Template page.
Monitor Documents as They're Transformed

Users can now view a document and the new record window simultaneously when they create records from transformed documents.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Health Cloud is enabled.
How: Your users create the record using the Transform Document quick action.
399
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Marketing
Marketing
Marketing Cloud is the premier platform for delighting customers with 1:1 customer journeys. It enables you to build a single view of
your customer, leveraging data from any source. Plan and optimize unique customer journeys based on your business objectives. Deliver
personalized content across every channel and device at precisely the right time. Measure the impact of each interaction on your business
so that you can optimize your approach in real time and deliver better results.
Learn about our latest features and enhancements in Marketing Cloud Release Notes.
SEE ALSO:
Marketing Cloud Overview
Salesforce Marketing Cloud Facebook Page
Mobile
Get more done in the Salesforce mobile app with new features like the new full-width tablet app experience on iPad and Android tablets.
Briefcase Builder helps make offline record data available to your users. Mobile Publisher offers users new distribution methods to best
fit your org’s needs.
IN THIS SECTION:
Enhance your mobile experience with a personalized landing page using Mobile Home (generally available), view Lightning record
pages in full-width on tablets (beta), and use the new in-app Lightning-based navigation changes.
Briefcase Builder
Explore a better way to make offline record data available to your users with Briefcase Builder. Briefcase Builder helps you select
records to share offline with Field Service workers by efficiently narrowing down record data based on the users, groups, and
connected apps that you select. Now you can create an offline platform experience that is flexible, easy to use, and responsive to
your mobile workers’ needs.
Mobile Publisher
Improved sandbox switching for the Experience Cloud app (iOS), URL management, and new distribution methods to best suite
your org’s needs.

Enhance your mobile experience with a personalized landing page using Mobile Home (generally available), view Lightning record
pages in full-width on tablets (beta), and use the new in-app Lightning-based navigation changes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Our latest round of new and improved Salesforce mobile app features makes it easier to access Salesforce on the go.

Our latest round of new and improved Salesforce mobile app features makes it easier to access Salesforce on the go.
400
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Mobile App
The Salesforce mobile app is available for all editions, except Database.com, without an additional license. Your org’s Salesforce edition
and licenses, as well as assigned user profiles and permission sets, determine the Salesforce data and features that are available to each
user.
Most features become available for the Salesforce mobile app the week of October 10, 2021.
Set Up in
Salesforce for Salesforce for
Salesforce App Enhancements and Changes the Full
Android iOS
Site
Browser and Operating System
Salesforce Mobile App Requirements Have Changed on page 401
Data Access and Views
Help Your Users Personalize Their Content With Mobile Home (Generally Available)
on page 402
Run Your Business on Tablets (Beta) on page 404
Sales Features
Track Forecast Categories Your Way on page 436
Access and Security
Protect Your Data with Enhanced Mobile Security Updates on page 403
Miscellaneous Enhancements
Limited Access for New Users with Community Licenses on page 404
Take Advantage of the Salesforce Mobile App Defaulting to Lightning Apps on

page 406
Salesforce Mobile App Requirements Have Changed

Salesforce is revising the requirements for using the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android. Learn about the mobile platform
requirements and the devices that we use for feature and performance testing as we continue to improve the Salesforce experience.
Mobile Devices Used for Salesforce Testing

Salesforce performs automated and manual testing of the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android on a select set of mobile devices.
Here’s the list of devices for Winter ’22.
Platform Phones Tablets

Android • Google Pixel 4 XL • Samsung Galaxy S7 Tablet
• Google Pixel 3 • Samsung Galaxy S6 Tablet
• Samsung Galaxy S10 / S10+ / S10e • Samsung Tab A (8 inch) Tablet
• Samsung Galaxy S9 / S9+
401

• Samsung Galaxy S7
• Samsung Galaxy Note 10+
• Samsung Galaxy Note 9
iOS • iPhone 12 Pro / Pro Max / mini • iPad Pro 10.5”

• iPhone 12 • iPad Air 2
• iPhone 11 Pro / Pro Max • iPad Mini 4
• iPhone 11
• iPhone XR
• iPhone XS / XS Max
• iPhone X
• iPhone 8 / 8 Plus
• iPhone SE
• iPhone 6S
Customers aren’t blocked from using Salesforce on untested devices that meet current platform requirements. Salesforce might not be
able to replicate some issues for customers using Salesforce on untested devices on due to manufacturer-specific customizations.
To allow for innovation and to keep Salesforce current in the rapidly evolving mobile market, the list of Salesforce-tested devices is
subject to change at the sole discretion of Salesforce, with or without advance notice.
Help Your Users Personalize Their Content With Mobile Home (Generally Available)
Mobile Home is generally available as a standard navigation item for the Salesforce mobile app on iOS and Android. Mobile Home is a
landing page that your end users can personalize with the content they care about most. As an admin, you can add Mobile Home to
any phone-activated Lightning app, or to the Mobile Only navigation, the same way you customize any other navigation tab. After it’s
added, the Mobile Home tab appears only on users’ mobile devices and doesn’t show up on desktop. Set it as the first tab and your
mobile users have a brand new landing screen every time they open the app.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in all editions, except Database.com.
Why: Mobile Home is a new standard navigation item for the Salesforce mobile app.
402
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Mobile Home for iOS and Android
Protect Your Data with Enhanced Mobile Security Updates

More protection has been built into the enhanced mobile security for the Salesforce mobile app. You can now enforce new policies
such enforcing certificate pinning (iOS only). If a user tries to use the app and the server’s certificate doesn’t match the expected value,
a secure connection won’t be established. These new policies further secure your Salesforce app data and users’ personal data.
Where: Available for an extra cost for the Salesforce mobile app in all editions, except Essentials and Database.com.
Who: Available for users with the Enforce Enhanced Mobile App Security user permission.
How: In Setup, search for Mobile Security and select Mobile Security. Click the toggle switch to enable logging certificate
pinning.
• Authentication Server Certificate Pinning: Certificate pinning for the authentication server URLs where the user provides credentials
to log in.
• Resource Certificate Pinning: Certificate pinning for the resource URLs used by the app to fetch data for the user.
Provide the Domain Name and Certificate Hash for the certificate pins. You can also include Subdomains.
403
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Mobile Application Management (MAM) with Enhanced Mobile App Security
Limited Access for New Users with Community Licenses

For new Salesforce orgs created after the Winter ‘22 release, users with community licenses can’t log in to the Salesforce mobile app.
When they open the Salesforce mobile app, these users see a blocking screen with this message: “Your license does not include access
to the mobile app. Please contact your administrator.” Because app features and functionalities aren’t available to these users, they’re
better served through the browser experience. Community users in orgs created before Winter ’22 aren’t affected by this change.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in all editions except Database.com.
When: Winter 22’ release for new organizations only.
Run Your Business on Tablets (Beta)

The new full-width tablet app experience is now available in the Salesforce mobile app on iPad and Android tablets as an administrator
opt-in beta feature. This experience uses the tablet’s full screen to display desktop record layouts with mobile optimized components.
In addition, it supports Lightning apps, full-width Lightning record pages, Lightning navigation, and Einstein Analytics.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android on tablet in all editions, except Database.com.
Why: The full-width view is a new way to experience the Salesforce mobile app on tablet.
404
Warning: If you’re using the legacy Salesforce1 tablet experience, it’s recommended to begin testing and using this new tablet
experience in your organization. You can opt in to the beta by using the instructions on this page.
How: To turn on the full-width Lightning on tablet experience, select the Lightning on tablet: full-width option. From Setup, in the Quick
Find box enter Quickstart, and then select New Salesforce Mobile App Quickstart. Under Tablet Preferences, select Lightning
on tablet: full-width (Beta).
405
Warning: The full-width tablet experience is offered as a part of an opt-in beta and has some known limitations. For more
information, see Salesforce Mobile App Considerations for Tablets.
Note: We provide this feature to customers through a beta program that requires agreement to specific terms and conditions.
Lightning on tablet: full-width isn’t generally available unless or until Salesforce announces its general availability in documentation,
press releases, or public statements. We can’t guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your
purchase decisions only based on generally available products and features. You can provide feedback and suggestions for Lightning
on tablet: full-width in the Lightning on Mobile Trailblazer Community or the Salesforce for iOS/Android Trailblazer Community.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Mobile App Considerations for Tablets
Take Advantage of the Salesforce Mobile App Defaulting to Lightning Apps

The Salesforce mobile app now defaults to a phone-activated Lightning app if one is available to the user. Previously, all users landed
on a Mobile Only app navigation, and they could switch to a different Lightning app using the App Launcher from the Menu tab. The
Salesforce mobile app now selects the first available Lightning app by default—instead of Mobile Only—which results in a change to
the app’s bottom navigation bar. Users who don’t have access to any phone-activated Lightning apps still default to Mobile Only.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce mobile app for iOS and Android in all editions except Database.com.
406
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Briefcase Builder
Why: The navigation bar in the Mobile Only app doesn’t always match what users see in Lightning Experience. This improvement allows
users to take advantage of the latest Lightning features, like consistent navigation across devices.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Lightning Apps by Default (can be unavailable during release preview)
Briefcase Builder
Explore a better way to make offline record data available to your users with Briefcase Builder. Briefcase Builder helps you select records
to share offline with Field Service workers by efficiently narrowing down record data based on the users, groups, and connected apps
that you select. Now you can create an offline platform experience that is flexible, easy to use, and responsive to your mobile workers’
needs.
Where: The Briefcase Builder tool applies to Lightning Experience desktop and all Salesforce orgs that have Field Service (FS) enabled.
This tool supports Salesforce Field Service mobile app for iOS and Android.
How: Create and name your briefcase, select the objects, and apply filtering to retrieve only the records you want users to view offline.
Then you can assign users and groups to view the briefcase, associate connected apps with your briefcase, and activate it immediately
or later.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Briefcase Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Offline Priming in the Field Service Mobile App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Mobile Publisher
Improved sandbox switching for the Experience Cloud app (iOS), URL management, and new distribution methods to best suite your
org’s needs.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce is revising the requirements for using the Mobile Publisher for Salesforce App and Experience Cloud app. Learn about the
mobile platform requirements and the devices that we use for feature and performance testing as we continue to improve the
experience.
407
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Mobile Publisher
New Distribution Methods for Your Branded Apps

Mobile Publisher lets you choose whether you want Salesforce to manage the release of your branded app, or if you want to manage
the release of the app on your own.
Manage How URLs Open in the Experience Cloud App (Generally Available)
URL Management lets you configure how URLs open in the Experience Cloud app.
Improved Sandbox Switching for the Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud App (iOS)
Quickly switch between testing Production, Sandbox, and Custom Experience Cloud sites.

Salesforce is revising the requirements for using the Mobile Publisher for Salesforce App and Experience Cloud app. Learn about the
mobile platform requirements and the devices that we use for feature and performance testing as we continue to improve the experience.
Mobile Platform Requirements

To allow for innovation and to keep Salesforce current in the rapidly evolving mobile market, minimum platform requirements are subject
to change at the sole discretion of Salesforce, with or without advance notice.
Operating System and Version Requirements
Android 8.0 or later
iOS 13.4 or later
Mobile Devices Used for Testing

Salesforce performs automated and manual testing of the Mobile Publisher for Salesforce App and Experience Cloud app for iOS and
Android on a select set of mobile devices. Here’s the list of devices for Winter ’22.

Android • Google Pixel 4 XL
• Google Pixel 3
• Samsung Galaxy S10 / S10+ / S10e
• Samsung Galaxy S7
• Samsung Galaxy Note 10+
iOS • iPhone 12 Pro / Pro Max / mini

• iPhone 12
• iPhone 11 Pro / Pro Max
• iPhone 11
408

• iPhone XR
• iPhone XS / XS Max
• iPhone X
• iPhone SE
• iPhone 6S
Customers aren’t blocked from using Mobile Publisher for Salesforce App on untested devices as long as they meet current platform
requirements. Salesforce may not be able to replicate some issues for customers using Mobile Publisher for Salesforce App on untested
devices on due to manufacturer-specific customizations. The list of Salesforce-tested devices is subject to change, with or without
advance notice.
New Distribution Methods for Your Branded Apps

Mobile Publisher lets you choose whether you want Salesforce to manage the release of your branded app, or if you want to manage
the release of the app on your own.
Where: This change applies to Mobile Publisher setup accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions.
Who: To configure distribution methods, users need a Mobile Publisher license and the Manage mySalesforce Apps user permission.
How: The new App Distribution Method section is available to both Mobile Publisher for Salesforce app and Experience Cloud app.
• Full Managed: Salesforce builds, releases, and manages the lifecycle of the app.
• Binary Upload (Beta): Salesforce builds and uploads the app to your store account. You submit the store listing information
(screenshots, description, and so on) and manage the release of the app.
409
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: App Distribution Methods
Manage How URLs Open in the Experience Cloud App (Generally Available)
URL Management lets you configure how URLs open in the Experience Cloud app.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud sites accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions.
Who: To manage URLs, users need a Mobile Publisher license, and have Experience Cloud site access.
How: With URL Management, you can define how URLs open:
• Webview URLs: Open inside the Experience Cloud app as a webview.
• In-App Browser URLs: Open inside the Experience Cloud app using an in-app browser.
• External Browser URLs: Open outside the Experience Cloud app using the default external browser.
You can specify up to 20 URLs for each type of opening. URLs must be comma-separated.
Note: URL Management doesn’t support HTTP:// URLs.
410
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage How URLs Open in the Experience Cloud App
Improved Sandbox Switching for the Mobile Publisher for Experience Cloud App (iOS)
Quickly switch between testing Production, Sandbox, and Custom Experience Cloud sites.
Where: This change applies to Experience Cloud sites accessed through Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions.
Who: To switch between sites, users need a Mobile Publisher license, and have Experience Cloud site access.
How: Long press and hold your branded app icon to bring up the site switching menu.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Switch Between Testing Modes in the Experience Cloud App
411
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes myTrailhead
myTrailhead
requirements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Deliver Learning Content for Specific Audiences
Support the unique learning and enablement requirements of your user groups. With content permissions in myTrailhead, you can
create multiple content collections, which are groups of myTrailhead content that you can make available to specified users. Only
learners with permission to access a particular content collection can view and complete the content included in the collection.
Deliver Learning Content for Specific Audiences

Support the unique learning and enablement requirements of your user groups. With content permissions in myTrailhead, you can
create multiple content collections, which are groups of myTrailhead content that you can make available to specified users. Only learners
with permission to access a particular content collection can view and complete the content included in the collection.
Where: This change applies to myTrailhead, which is available to customers with Enterprise, Performance, or Unlimited editions.
Who: This change affects users differently depending on their enabled permissions.
Users with the View Setup and Configuration permission:
Can access the new myTrailhead Content Permissions Assistant page from Setup in your Salesforce org. This assistant provides a
guided workflow for:
1. Creating content collections
2. Enabling access to specific content collections through permission sets
3. Assigning users to permission sets and their enabled content collections
Users with the new myTrailhead Manage Content Collections permission:

Can access the new Content Collections page from Setup in your Salesforce org. This page provides a list view for:
• Creating, editing, and deleting content collections
• Viewing the permission sets for each content collection
412
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Deliver Learning Content for Specific Audiences
Users with the Manage Profiles and Permission Sets permission:

Can access the new myTrailhead Content Collections Access settings from a permission set’s overview page. Admins can use these
settings to enable specific content collections for users assigned to that permission set.
Users with the myTrailhead View All Content permission (previously named myTrailhead Content Access):
Can access all content from any collection on your myTrailhead subdomain. They can also run reports on content from any collection.
Users with the myTrailhead Release Management permission:
Can assign trails and modules to particular content collections when they prepare a release with Trailmaker. They can also view the
releases associated with each content collection.
413
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Pardot
Why: Previously, all content in your myTrailhead subdomain was published under a single namespace. A subdomain had only one
namespace, so all users with access to your myTrailhead subdomain could access all content. Now, a namespace is known as a content
collection, and a subdomain supports multiple content collections.
How: If your company is new to myTrailhead, get started by provisioning your subdomain. During this process, you set up your first
content collection. Then, as you complete the remaining configuration steps, you set up user permissions and create other content
collections.
If your company has an existing myTrailhead subdomain with published content, your current learning experience isn’t disrupted by
this change:
• All your existing content belongs to a single content collection, which inherits the API name of the namespace that you created
when you set up your subdomain.
• All your current learners can still access existing content in that single collection.
You can start creating more content collections, moving existing content to the new collections, and updating your learner permissions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Assign myTrailhead Permissions (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Your myTrailhead Subdomain and Namespace (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Pardot
IN THIS SECTION:
Marketer Experience
Try the drag-and-drop builder to create effective landing pages. Use new builder emails in Engagement Studio. Plus, explore Pardot
extensibility enhancements and mailability improvements.
Data and Content
Set up Einstein Discovery for your B2B Marketing Analytics Plus apps in fewer clicks and get updated fields in apps that use Object
Sync for Pardot.
Now you can bring your own encryption keys, and do more with the Pardot API.
Marketer Experience
Try the drag-and-drop builder to create effective landing pages. Use new builder emails in Engagement Studio. Plus, explore Pardot
extensibility enhancements and mailability improvements.
IN THIS SECTION:
Send Slack Notifications to Pardot Users with Completion Actions (Beta)
Speed up your pipeline with a completion action that notifies your team in Slack when prospects interact with your marketing assets.
Automatically send promising new leads to your Sales team, and share important prospect activity data with your Marketing team.
414
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Marketer Experience
Build Landing Pages Faster with Drag-And-Drop Editor

If you’re using the Pardot Lightning App, you can now build landing pages inside the Lightning Experience. After you enable the
feature, users can create a landing page record in a couple of clicks. Plus, stay on brand by encouraging users to start from saved
templates and to select approved images from your Salesforce CMS repository.
Take Your Automations Further with Pardot Extensibility Enhancements
Now you can improve your Pardot automations with valuable external prospect data from your third-party apps. For each third-party
app you use to collect prospect data, set up a Marketing App Extension. Then, add each activity type you want to capture. For
example, capture when a prospect attends a webinar through your third-party webinar service and use that data in any of your
Pardot automations or Engagement Studio programs. You can also view external activity data on individual prospect records.
Push Emails from Lightning Experience into Engagement Programs
When you create emails in the drag-and-drop editor in Lightning Experience, you can now save them for use in Engagement Studio.
Create your email content and activate it for use in automations.
Create Custom Components for the Email Content Builder
You can now create custom email components to use in Pardot’s drag-and-drop builder. Custom components help marketers and
managers create more engaging email content for their customers.
Enjoy Improved Prospect Mailability Insights (Generally Available)
This feature, now generally available, includes some improvements since the last release. All prospect records include a mailability
section so marketers can see what type of emails a prospect can receive and what their bounce status is. Prospect mailability and
opt-in status is easily updated via automation rules, prospect imports, and Engagement Studio programs. Plus, the Do Not Email
field and the Opt Out field on prospects records are no longer connected, so they can’t override each other.
Reset Bounce Counts on Prospect Records
Users with the Pardot Administrator or Marketing user roles can now reset the count for hard or soft bounces on prospect records
when bounce issues are resolved. When bounce counts are reset, the prospect becomes eligible to receive emails. If the next email
sent to that address returns either a hard or soft bounce, the prospect is marked Undeliverable again.
Customize Prospect Unsubscribe and Resubscribe Page Content
Your marketing team can now control all the messaging that appears on Pardot unsubscribe and resubscribe pages. Customizable
fields now include the unsubscribe prompt, plus button text and confirmation messages for the unsubscribe and resubscribe pages.
See When and How Segmentation Prospect Lists Were Updated
To give marketing users more insight on their prospect lists, the segmentation list view in Pardot now includes two new columns:
Updated At and Updated By. These columns show the date and time the list was last updated, and which user made the update.
Marketers can filter the list view based on column data.
Unarchived Dynamic Lists Retain Prospects
When you unarchive a dynamic list, the list retains the prospects that were on it when it was archived. Then the list rules are rerun
to look for matching prospects. The prospect count can change after the rules are rerun, so we recommend that you wait to receive
a confirmation email that the list is restored before you send to it.
View IP Address for Prospect Activities in Pardot
To better understand your engagement data, you can view the IP address associated with most prospect activities on prospect
records in Pardot. You can use this additional insight to create more effective visitor activity filters. For example, if you notice a lot
of test clicks coming from a single IP, you can filter out that activity based on the IP.
New and Updated Pardot User Permissions
As part of Pardot’s mailability improvements, new user permissions are available: Update Do Not Email field, Reset hard bounce
count, and Reset soft bounce count. The user permission Toggle Opt In Status is now Update Opted Out field. Any users that previously
had the Toggle Opt In Status permission now have the Update Opted Out field permission.
415
Plan for Pardot Drip Program Retirement

Pardot’s legacy Drip Program feature is scheduled for retirement with the Summer ‘22 release. If you currently use Drip Programs,
convert them to Engagement Studio programs.
Send Slack Notifications to Pardot Users with Completion Actions (Beta)

Speed up your pipeline with a completion action that notifies your team in Slack when prospects interact with your marketing assets.
Automatically send promising new leads to your Sales team, and share important prospect activity data with your Marketing team.
Where: This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is
subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
How: First, opt in to the beta in Pardot settings and ask your Slack workspace admin to configure a Slack app to connect to Pardot. Then,
set up the Slack connector in Pardot by adding your Slack workspace and selecting channels. After the connector is set up, sending a
Slack notification appears as an option for completion actions on Pardot assets.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce Pardot for Slack (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Build Landing Pages Faster with Drag-And-Drop Editor

If you’re using the Pardot Lightning App, you can now build landing pages inside the Lightning Experience. After you enable the feature,
users can create a landing page record in a couple of clicks. Plus, stay on brand by encouraging users to start from saved templates and
to select approved images from your Salesforce CMS repository.
Where: This change applies to all Pardot editions.
How: The landing page builder becomes available when you enable the new Pardot content experience and Salesforce CMS integration.
If you’re already using the drag-and-drop email editor in Pardot Lightning App, you can start using the new landing page builder right
away. If you’re using the Pardot Classic builders, just head over to Marketing Setup and follow the steps under Content Setup.
416
After setup, users can create landing page records, design landing pages, and publish them right from the Pardot Lightning App.
Salesforce Files aren’t supported in the builder, so we encourage you to follow the setup steps to integrate with Salesforce CMS.
The Landing Page Source field helps you distinguish landing pages that are built in the new experience or in Pardot Classic. Builder
landing pages are labeled Salesforce, and Classic pages are labeled Pardot.
417
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Landing Page Experience in Lightning (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Email in Pardot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Take Your Automations Further with Pardot Extensibility Enhancements

Now you can improve your Pardot automations with valuable external prospect data from your third-party apps. For each third-party
app you use to collect prospect data, set up a Marketing App Extension. Then, add each activity type you want to capture. For example,
capture when a prospect attends a webinar through your third-party webinar service and use that data in any of your Pardot automations
or Engagement Studio programs. You can also view external activity data on individual prospect records.
Where: This change applies to Pardot Plus, Advanced, and Premium editions in Lightning Experience.
Why: External activities let you take advantage of all the valuable prospect data you’re collecting in third-party apps. Setup for your
Marketing App Extensions is flexible, so you can tailor it to capture the data that gets you the most out of your Pardot automations.
How: From Marketing Setup, create a Marketing App Extension, assign it to a business unit, and create at least one activity type for the
extension. Then, send the sample API endpoint for the activity type to your developer to help you connect your third party app.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Capture External Prospect Activity in Pardot (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Push Emails from Lightning Experience into Engagement Programs

When you create emails in the drag-and-drop editor in Lightning Experience, you can now save them for use in Engagement Studio.
Create your email content and activate it for use in automations.
Who: Users with the Activate Email for Automation system permission.
How: Enable the email experience on the Content Setup page in Marketing Setup. The next time a user with the appropriate permission
creates or opens an email content record, Activate for Automation appears in the action menu.
When a user clicks the button, they can enter the campaign, sender, and reply-to settings to use for each Engagement Studio email
send. The next time they create an engagement program, the email name appears in the available dropdowns.
418
An email must be activated each time changes are made to the record, content, or sending options.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Activate an Email for Use in Engagement Studio (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Custom Components for the Email Content Builder

You can now create custom email components to use in Pardot’s drag-and-drop builder. Custom components help marketers and
managers create more engaging email content for their customers.
How: To configure a custom component to use in the Pardot email experience, define the metadata in <component>.js-meta.xml.
Define a lightning__StaticEmail target and set <isExposed> to true.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<LightningComponentBundle xmlns="http://soap.sforce.com/2006/04/metadata">
<apiVersion>53.0</apiVersion>
<isExposed>true</isExposed>
<targets>
<target>lightning__AppPage</target>
<target>lightningStatic__Email</target>
<target>lightning__HomePage</target>
</targets>
</LightningComponentBundle>
Prepare the metadata package and deploy it to a test org.
SEE ALSO:
Lightning Web Components Developer Guide: Email Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
419
Enjoy Improved Prospect Mailability Insights (Generally Available)

This feature, now generally available, includes some improvements since the last release. All prospect records include a mailability section
so marketers can see what type of emails a prospect can receive and what their bounce status is. Prospect mailability and opt-in status
is easily updated via automation rules, prospect imports, and Engagement Studio programs. Plus, the Do Not Email field and the Opt
Out field on prospects records are no longer connected, so they can’t override each other.
Where: This change applies to all Pardot editions with Salesforce Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Prospect Mailability (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: Suggested Prospect Mailability Updates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Reset Bounce Counts on Prospect Records

Users with the Pardot Administrator or Marketing user roles can now reset the count for hard or soft bounces on prospect records when
bounce issues are resolved. When bounce counts are reset, the prospect becomes eligible to receive emails. If the next email sent to
that address returns either a hard or soft bounce, the prospect is marked Undeliverable again.
How: Open a prospect record and click the link to reset either hard or soft bounces.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Reset Bounces on a Prospect Record (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Customize Prospect Unsubscribe and Resubscribe Page Content

Your marketing team can now control all the messaging that appears on Pardot unsubscribe and resubscribe pages. Customizable fields
now include the unsubscribe prompt, plus button text and confirmation messages for the unsubscribe and resubscribe pages.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Manage Email Unsubscribe Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
420
See When and How Segmentation Prospect Lists Were Updated

To give marketing users more insight on their prospect lists, the segmentation list view in Pardot now includes two new columns:
Updated At and Updated By. These columns show the date and time the list was last updated, and which user made the update. Marketers
can filter the list view based on column data.
When: This feature is available in Pardot Business Units on August 16, 2021.
Unarchived Dynamic Lists Retain Prospects

When you unarchive a dynamic list, the list retains the prospects that were on it when it was archived. Then the list rules are rerun to
look for matching prospects. The prospect count can change after the rules are rerun, so we recommend that you wait to receive a
confirmation email that the list is restored before you send to it.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Using Dynamic Lists (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Dynamic Lists for Pardot Enterprise Accounts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
View IP Address for Prospect Activities in Pardot

To better understand your engagement data, you can view the IP address associated with most prospect activities on prospect records
in Pardot. You can use this additional insight to create more effective visitor activity filters. For example, if you notice a lot of test clicks
coming from a single IP, you can filter out that activity based on the IP.
How: From a prospect record in Pardot, click the Activities tab and view the IP Address column. You can also hover over a specific activity
on the Overview tab to view more details, including the IP address associated with it.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Filtering Visitors (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
421
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Data and Content
New and Updated Pardot User Permissions

As part of Pardot’s mailability improvements, new user permissions are available: Update Do Not Email field, Reset hard bounce count,
and Reset soft bounce count. The user permission Toggle Opt In Status is now Update Opted Out field. Any users that previously had
the Toggle Opt In Status permission now have the Update Opted Out field permission.
Who: By default, the Pardot Administrator and Marketing user roles include Update Do Not Email field, Reset hard bounce count, and
Reset soft bounce count. The Update Opted Out field user permission is included for Pardot Administrators and is available when you
create a custom user role. Sales users have the Update Do Not Email field permission for prospects assigned to them only.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pardot User Roles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Plan for Pardot Drip Program Retirement

Pardot’s legacy Drip Program feature is scheduled for retirement with the Summer ‘22 release. If you currently use Drip Programs, convert
them to Engagement Studio programs.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Pardot Drips Retirement (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Engagement Studio (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Data and Content

Set up Einstein Discovery for your B2B Marketing Analytics Plus apps in fewer clicks and get updated fields in apps that use Object Sync
for Pardot.
IN THIS SECTION:
Einstein Key Account Identification is now generally available. This handy tool helps you prioritize your account-based marketing
tactics by assigning a tier ranking and providing insights, which show characteristics that an account has in common with other
successful accounts. The Einstein tier and insights appear on its record, and you can add the tier field to list views for ranking data
at a glance.
Prepare Einstein Discovery in Fewer Clicks
Setup is now consolidated for the B2B Marketing Analytics Plus apps, Marketing Campaign Intelligence and Account-Based Marketing.
You can create an app and its associated Einstein Discovery story at the same time with fewer tasks and clicks. And your users can
reconfigure these apps from the dashboard.
Some B2B Marketing Analytics Datasets Were Fixed
Datasets used in B2B Marketing Analytics and Object Sync for Pardot were changed. Unique ID fields were removed, and missing
labels were added in the Forms and Form Handlers dataset, the Landing Pages dataset, and Tags dataset. In the Prospect and Activity
dataset, we added user fields, removed some duplicate fields and added missing labels.
422
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Data and Content

As part of Salesforce’s commitment to inclusive language, we updated the name of a CSS class associated with Pardot forms. To set
styles on dependent form fields, use the new class name dependentField.

Einstein Key Account Identification is now generally available. This handy tool helps you prioritize your account-based marketing tactics
by assigning a tier ranking and providing insights, which show characteristics that an account has in common with other successful
accounts. The Einstein tier and insights appear on its record, and you can add the tier field to list views for ranking data at a glance.
Where: This change is available in Salesforce Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with Pardot Advanced or Premium edition.
Why: The Einstein account model considers your account record fields, opportunity creation data, and Pardot engagement data to
identify key factors that most influence a successful outcome.
Rankings are predicted by the model and assigned a tier (1), such as A, B, C, or D, where A is the most likely to convert within 6 months.
An uplift value (2) is calculated by comparing the conversion likelihood between an account from the given tier and a randomly selected
one.
The training period for the Einstein model is up to 72 hours, and during that time no insights appear. When an insight is available for a
given account, the data appears automatically.
How: Turn on the feature in Marketing Setup. The Einstein Key Accounts component is added to account records by default. You can
add the Einstein Account Tier field on a public list view, or users can add it to their preferred views. Users can also add the tier field to
custom reports.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Einstein Key Accounts Identification (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Prepare Einstein Discovery in Fewer Clicks

Setup is now consolidated for the B2B Marketing Analytics Plus apps, Marketing Campaign Intelligence and Account-Based Marketing.
You can create an app and its associated Einstein Discovery story at the same time with fewer tasks and clicks. And your users can
reconfigure these apps from the dashboard.
Where: This change is available in Salesforce Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions with Pardot Premium Edition or the B2B
Marketing Analytics Plus add-on.
423
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Manage and Extend Pardot
How: Users create their own B2B Marketing Analytics Plus apps. Open Tableau CRM, click Create, and follow the prompts to create a
Marketing Campaign Intelligence or Account-Based Marketing app. When the process is under way, they can move on to something
else. We send an email when the job is done.
New app and story creation now is simpler for the user. But it can take a long time to run two jobs together. If an app attempts to process
tens of millions of data rows, the creation process can time out. If it does, extend the timeframe allowed for analytics processes in
Salesforce Setup.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for B2B Marketing Analytics Plus (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Marketing Campaign Intelligence App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up the Account-Based Marketing App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Some B2B Marketing Analytics Datasets Were Fixed

Datasets used in B2B Marketing Analytics and Object Sync for Pardot were changed. Unique ID fields were removed, and missing labels
were added in the Forms and Form Handlers dataset, the Landing Pages dataset, and Tags dataset. In the Prospect and Activity dataset,
we added user fields, removed some duplicate fields and added missing labels.
Where: This change applies to Pardot Plus, Advanced, and Premium editions with Salesforce Enterprise, Unlimited, or Developer edition.
It also applies in Pardot Pro and Ultimate editions with the B2B Marketing Analytics add-on.
Changes to the marketing asset datasets are available for B2B Marketing Analytics and Object Sync for Pardot. The Prospect and Activity
dataset was updated for Object Sync for Pardot only.
How: Users must reconfigure their affected apps to receive the dataset changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: B2B Marketing Analytics Datasets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Prospect and Activity Dataset for Object Sync (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

As part of Salesforce’s commitment to inclusive language, we updated the name of a CSS class associated with Pardot forms. To set
styles on dependent form fields, use the new class name dependentField.
How: Although the legacy name still works for now, we recommend that you update the class name to ensure consistent styling on
dependent form fields.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Form CSS Classes and Examples (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Now you can bring your own encryption keys, and do more with the Pardot API.
424
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Manage and Extend Pardot
IN THIS SECTION:
Pardot API v5 has new endpoints, more enablement resources, and the developer docs have a new home.
Bring Your Own Encryption Keys to Pardot
Bring and manage your own encryption keys to protect your Pardot data. Use Bring Your Own Key for Encryption at Rest to add a
layer of security to your Pardot account, and to quickly destroy your data in a compliance emergency.
Changes to Paused Connector Sync Behavior
Clicking Sync with CRM on a prospect record or assigning a prospect to a user no longer causes a sync while the Salesforce-Pardot
v2 connector is paused.
The Pardot Classic App will no longer be available for new accounts on October 11, 2021, and it’s scheduled for retirement in all
Salesforce orgs by October 17, 2022.

Pardot API v5 has new endpoints, more enablement resources, and the developer docs have a new home.
Developer Doc and Resources

New Developer Doc Portal
The Pardot Developer Docs moved to https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/marketing/pardot/overview.
New Trailhead Modules
Two new Trailhead modules can help you learn even more about the Pardot API.
• Pardot API Quicklook
• Salesforce OAuth for the Pardot API
New Video
A new video walks you through setting up Salesforce OAuth for the Pardot API.
Version 5 Changes
Added Support for Pagination
New support for pagination lets you retrieve the next page of data by calling nextPageURL directly or constructing a call using
nextPageToken.
New Endpoint for External Activity
Allows developers to set up and automate submitting external activity to Pardot.
New and Changed For v3 & v4 Object Coverage Parity
Added customField (CRUDQ).
Added list (CRUDQ).
Added prospect(RQ).
Added visit (RQ).
Added visitor-page-views (RQ).
Added additional fields and relationships for campaign.
Added additional fields and relationships for user.
425
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Revenue
Bring Your Own Encryption Keys to Pardot

Bring and manage your own encryption keys to protect your Pardot data. Use Bring Your Own Key for Encryption at Rest to add a layer
of security to your Pardot account, and to quickly destroy your data in a compliance emergency.
Where: This change is available for an additional cost in Pardot Premium editions.
How: Add and manage keys from your Pardot Security settings page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Bring and Manage Your Own Encryption Keys (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Changes to Paused Connector Sync Behavior

Clicking Sync with CRM on a prospect record or assigning a prospect to a user no longer causes a sync while the Salesforce-Pardot v2
connector is paused.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pause the Salesforce-Pardot Connector v2 (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

The Pardot Classic App will no longer be available for new accounts on October 11, 2021, and it’s scheduled for retirement in all Salesforce
orgs by October 17, 2022.
Where: This change applies to all Pardot accounts.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Pardot Classic App Retirement Customer FAQ (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Revenue
In Salesforce CPQ, a release update adds permissions to standard permission sets and updates Access permission sets. Salesforce Billing
prevents duplicate payments by locking invoices until confirming a valid response from the payment gateway. Credit note lines now
inherit the Tax Percentage field, revenue finance books support more finance periods, and a Customer Asset Lifecycle Management field
was relabeled.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce CPQ
Permissions were added to standard permission sets, and Access permission sets were updated.
426
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce CPQ
Salesforce Billing
Salesforce Billing prevents duplicate payments by locking invoices until confirming a valid response from the payment gateway.
Use more finance periods in your revenue finance books. When you cancel and rebill an invoice, credit note lines now inherit the
Tax Percentage field from their parent invoice lines. A Customer Asset Lifecycle Management label on the Order object was changed.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: New Objects, Fields, and Permissions in Salesforce CPQ and Billing Winter ‘22 (can be outdated or unavailable
Salesforce CPQ
Permissions were added to standard permission sets, and Access permission sets were updated.
Note: Salesforce CPQ is offered for an extra cost. For pricing, contact your Salesforce account executive.
IN THIS SECTION:
Assign New Access Permission Sets and Review New Permissions (Release Update)
Ensure that users have secure and appropriate levels of access to objects and fields. Assign the new Salesforce CPQ Admin User
Access and Salesforce CPQ Partner User Access permission sets to your Salesforce CPQ admins and partner users. Review the new
permissions added to the Salesforce CPQ Customer User Access permission set. Then use a CPQ package setting to test the permission
sets before they’re enforced in Spring ’22.
SEE ALSO:
Ensure that users have secure and appropriate levels of access to objects and fields. Assign the new Salesforce CPQ Admin User Access
and Salesforce CPQ Partner User Access permission sets to your Salesforce CPQ admins and partner users. Review the new permissions
added to the Salesforce CPQ Customer User Access permission set. Then use a CPQ package setting to test the permission sets before
they’re enforced in Spring ’22.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Salesforce CPQ.
Why: A series of four Access permission sets and requirements contain data security–related permissions. In Summer ’21, we added the
permission sets User Access and Customer User Access. In Winter ’22, we added permission requirements to the Customer User Access
set, and we added two more sets, Partner User Access and Admin User Access. We also introduced the same data-security permissions
to standard CPQ permission sets.
As permission requirements are added in future releases, two methods help ensure that your users never risk missing important data
security updates.
• If you cloned or created custom permission sets for admins, users, partners, or customers, assign the appropriate Access set. We
designed Access sets for assignment directly to your users, without cloning or editing.
• If you don’t clone or use custom permission sets, you can use the standard sets alone, without assigning Access sets,
427
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Billing
For example, let’s say you assign a customized admin permission set to admins and the standard Customer User set to customers. In
this case, assign the Admin User Access permission set to your admins. Your customers can continue using the Customer User set without
changes.
For a complete list of new permissions in each Access permission set, review New and Changed Objects, Fields, and Permissions in
Salesforce CPQ and Billing Winter ’22.
How: To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates.
Data restrictions for the Access permission sets are enforced in Salesforce CPQ Spring ’22. Until then, you have some options for testing
them in your org. When the CPQ package setting Perform Enhanced Data Access Checks is active, Salesforce CPQ enforces data restrictions
for the Access permission sets. When Perform Enhanced Data Checks is inactive, the Access permission set restrictions aren't enforced.
To start testing, assign the Salesforce CPQ User Access set to your users. Then assign the Salesforce CPQ Customer User Access set to
your customer users. Next, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then click Installed Packages.
Go to Salesforce CPQ and click Configure. In the Additional Settings tab, select Perform Enhanced Data Access Checks.
You can turn Perform Enhanced Data Access Checks on and off as needed before Spring ’22. In Spring ’22, we'll remove the Perform
Enhanced Data Access Checks setting and enforce data restrictions for the Access permission sets.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Salesforce Billing
Salesforce Billing prevents duplicate payments by locking invoices until confirming a valid response from the payment gateway. Use
more finance periods in your revenue finance books. When you cancel and rebill an invoice, credit note lines now inherit the Tax
Percentage field from their parent invoice lines. A Customer Asset Lifecycle Management label on the Order object was changed.
Note: To install Salesforce Billing, you must have Salesforce CPQ. Some subscriptions offer this package for an extra cost. For
pricing, contact your Salesforce account executive.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Billing now locks invoices from payments when a user makes a charge request to the payment gateway from the Payment
Center or a force.com payment site. It also locks invoices after a payment run picks them up for evaluation. The invoice unlocks only
when Salesforce Billing confirms that the gateway provided a valid response, or when the payment run finishes processing the
invoice. Users don’t risk making duplicate payments if the gateway response is indeterminate.
Use More Finance Periods in Your Revenue Finance Books
It’s easier to track more finance periods in your revenue finance books. Revenue finance books now support up to 180 open monthly
or 180 custom finance periods per book. Closed finance periods no longer count toward the 180-period limit.
On Credit Note Lines, See the Tax Percentage After You Cancel and Rebill
When you cancel and rebill an invoice, the resulting credit note lines now inherit the Tax Percentage field from their parent invoice
lines. The credit note line’s Line Tax Status field shows a value of Copied to indicate that the tax percentage and other tax values
were inherited. Previously, after an invoice was canceled and rebilled, the credit note line didn’t inherit the tax percentage, and the
line tax status was null.
428
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Billing
A Lifecycle Management Field on Orders Was Relabeled

For clarity, a Customer Asset Lifecycle Management field was relabeled. The field Asset (CALM) on the Order object is now
Lifecycle-Managed Asset.
SEE ALSO:

Salesforce Billing now locks invoices from payments when a user makes a charge request to the payment gateway from the Payment
Center or a force.com payment site. It also locks invoices after a payment run picks them up for evaluation. The invoice unlocks only
when Salesforce Billing confirms that the gateway provided a valid response, or when the payment run finishes processing the invoice.
Users don’t risk making duplicate payments if the gateway response is indeterminate.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Salesforce Billing.
How: Invoices now have the Invoice Locked checkbox. When a user attempts to pay an invoice in the Payment Center or a force.com
payment site, Salesforce Billing evaluates the status of Invoice Locked before making the charge request to the payment gateway. If
Invoice Locked is deselected, Salesforce Billing selects it. Otherwise, Salesforce Billing shows an error and doesn’t continue with the
charge request. While Invoice Locked is selected, users can't make payments against the invoice in the Payment Center or a force.com
payment site.
If the gateway response causes an update to the value of your payment transaction’s gateway status to one of the following values,
Salesforce Billing deselects the Invoice Locked field: Success, Decline, Permanent Fail, Validation Error, or Requires Review. If the value
of your transaction’s Gateway Response field is Indeterminate or System Error, Invoice Locked remains selected.
If your invoice is still locked, you can view the indeterminate transaction in your payment gateway’s merchant portal to determine if the
payment actually went through. If it did, you can deselect Invoice Locked on the relevant invoice on your own.
When a payment run picks up an invoice for processing, Salesforce Billing also selects Invoice Locked. This way, Payment Center users
can’t pay invoices that the payment run is already evaluating. When the payment run finishes processing the invoice, Salesforce Billing
deselects Invoice Locked regardless of the gateway’s response. If the gateway’s response was Indeterminate, Salesforce Billing updates
the invoice’s Corrective Action field to Required. Payment runs don't pick up locked invoices.
Users must have Read and Edit access on the Invoice Locked field in order to change it. These permissions are available in the Salesforce
Billing Admin permission set. If your org uses custom permission sets, add Invoice Locked Read and Edit access for the following users:
• Users who create or post invoices or who need access to the Invoice Locked field.
• Users who process payments from the Payment Center, payment runs, and Guest Users for payment sites.
Important: The payment transaction’s Attempt Refund and Unlock Invoice button isn’t related to the Invoice Locked field. It’s
used to change the invoice’s Corrective Action field from Action Required to null after an unsuccessful or indeterminate payment
run.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Locked and Unlocked Invoices (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Use More Finance Periods in Your Revenue Finance Books

It’s easier to track more finance periods in your revenue finance books. Revenue finance books now support up to 180 open monthly or
180 custom finance periods per book. Closed finance periods no longer count toward the 180-period limit.
429
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Sales
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Batch Create Monthly Finance Periods (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Finance Periods for Custom Date Ranges (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
On Credit Note Lines, See the Tax Percentage After You Cancel and Rebill
When you cancel and rebill an invoice, the resulting credit note lines now inherit the Tax Percentage field from their parent invoice lines.
The credit note line’s Line Tax Status field shows a value of Copied to indicate that the tax percentage and other tax values were inherited.
Previously, after an invoice was canceled and rebilled, the credit note line didn’t inherit the tax percentage, and the line tax status was
null.
How: If you're upgrading from an earlier version of Salesforce Billing, add Copied as a global picklist value for the Line Tax Status field.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Picklist Value Sets, and then select Picklist Value Sets.
2. Select Line Tax Status.
3. In the Values section, click New.
4. Enter Copied and then select Add the new picklist value to all Record Types that use this Global Value Set.
A Lifecycle Management Field on Orders Was Relabeled

For clarity, a Customer Asset Lifecycle Management field was relabeled. The field Asset (CALM) on the Order object is now
Lifecycle-Managed Asset.
Sales
Pipeline Inspection lets you create custom filters, watch important opportunities, and see which deals are less likely to close in the current
month. Show a Most Likely forecast category on the forecasts page. Assign territories quicker and put assignment rules on pause. Add
Inbox users to any Einstein Activity Capture configuration. Salesforce Maps helps you automate assignments for large territories. Territory
Planning gives you flexibility to design territories for in-person and virtual customer visits. High Velocity Sales lets you update active sales
cadences and test different versions of email templates and call scripts on the same outreach step.
IN THIS SECTION:
Pipeline Inspection
Create pipeline views and saved filters, and track important opportunities. See Einstein Opportunity Scores in tiers with recent changes
and insights, and get predictions of deals that are unlikely to close with Einstein Deal Insights. Know when next steps aren’t updated,
and see counts for close dates that are pushed out on opportunities.
Core Sales Features
Show an additional forecast category: Most Likely. Save time when running territory assignment rules. Protect your product data
with new sharing methods. And an enforced release update deletes your original territory management sharing records to prevent
issues with Enterprise Territory Management.
430
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Pipeline Inspection
Include Inbox users in any Einstein Activity Capture configuration. Easily add predefined columns to your email templates in email
template builder. Enjoy new ways to filter and sort activities.
Einstein Conversation Insights can now match voice and video calls to related opportunities automatically. New filters allow users
to see call data sorted by opportunity or lead details, and video calls show more call participant details.
Salesforce Maps
Automate as many as 5,000 territory assignments, plot any Salesforce data on the map, and help your reps find new business using
filters for key demographics. Plan strategic territories using heat maps to visualize attributes that matter to your teams. Keep drivers
focused on the road when you automate reporting of their locations, trip-related data, and availability to pick up work using the
Salesforce mobile app for iOS.
High Velocity Sales
Edit active sales cadences, test different email templates or call scripts on the same step, get detailed insights about sales cadence,
call script, email template, and sales rep performance, and add, remove, or pause targets from reports.
Get improvements to event logging from Google calendar. For Salesforce Inbox users, manually log emails when in an Einstein
Activity Capture configuration with emails turned off.
Get improvements to event logging from Outlook. For Salesforce Inbox users, manually log emails when in an Einstein Activity
Capture configuration with emails turned off. If you’re ready to migrate from Lightning Sync to Einstein Activity Capture, the migration
assistant can help you do it quickly and easily. And if you’re still on Salesforce for Outlook, remember that the full product retirement
is scheduled for June 2023.
Learn about other changes we’ve made to improve usability.
Pipeline Inspection
Create pipeline views and saved filters, and track important opportunities. See Einstein Opportunity Scores in tiers with recent changes
and insights, and get predictions of deals that are unlikely to close with Einstein Deal Insights. Know when next steps aren’t updated,
and see counts for close dates that are pushed out on opportunities.
IN THIS SECTION:
Save Time by Creating Custom Pipeline Views and Filters
Sales managers and reps can save their most frequently used pipeline views to avoid recreating them each time they visit Pipeline
Inspection. For example, create custom filters for new business, teams, time periods, product types, and more.
Flag Important Deals to Track Progress Closely
To monitor priority opportunities in Pipeline Inspection, sales managers and reps now can mark them as important. They can see a
list view of all important opportunities or just the important opportunities for custom filters such as record types, forecast categories,
and sales teams.
Einstein Deal Insights predicts when opportunities scheduled to close this month are unlikely to be won during the same month.
With this new insight, sales managers and their teams can forecast more accurately and maintain more accurate pipelines.
431
Prioritize Deals More Effectively with Tiered Einstein Opportunity Scores

In Pipeline Inspection, Einstein Opportunity Scores are grouped into tiers to give sales teams a new way to see which deals are on
track or to spot deals that are at risk. High, medium, and low tiers, rather than numerical scores, help sales teams prioritize opportunities
and decide which sets of opportunities to focus on.
Hold Sales Reps Accountable for Updating Opportunity Next Steps
To help keep sales reps focused on moving opportunities forward, sales managers can now see when opportunity next steps aren’t
updated. An indicator shows when the last update to the Next Step field was more than 7 days ago. Hovering on the Next Step field
shows details on the last update.
See How Many Times Close Dates Are Pushed Out
With the Push Count field, your sales teams can get important information about deal health. The Push Count field shows the number
of times an opportunity’s close date is pushed out by a calendar month.
Save Time by Creating Custom Pipeline Views and Filters

Sales managers and reps can save their most frequently used pipeline views to avoid recreating them each time they visit Pipeline
Inspection. For example, create custom filters for new business, teams, time periods, product types, and more.
Where: This change applies to Sales Cloud in Lightning Experience in Performance and Unlimited editions.
Who: To use Pipeline Inspection, users must have the Pipeline Inspection permission set. To create and edit all types of list views, users
must have the Create and Customize List Views permission. To create or edit public pipeline views, users must have the Modify Public
List Views permission.
How: You create list views similarly to the way you create them in other objects.
To create pipeline views (1), use the List View Controls menu under the gear icon (2) to create, clone, or delete pipeline views. Add filters
to view the opportunities that meet your filter criteria. Using the filter panel (3), you can add time period and user filters. And you can
add even more criteria such as accounts, amounts, and record types.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Guidelines and Limits for Pipeline Inspection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Flag Important Deals to Track Progress Closely

To monitor priority opportunities in Pipeline Inspection, sales managers and reps now can mark them as important. They can see a list
view of all important opportunities or just the important opportunities for custom filters such as record types, forecast categories, and
sales teams.
Who: To use Pipeline Inspection, users must have the Pipeline Inspection permission set.
How: Mark opportunities as important in the opportunities list in Pipeline Inspection only.
432
To mark opportunities as important, use the icon next to the opportunity name (1). A list view of all important opportunities is in the
pipeline views dropdown (2). Users can also apply the important opportunities filter to any saved view to see just the important
opportunities for it (3).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Managing Pipelines with Pipeline Inspection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Einstein Deal Insights predicts when opportunities scheduled to close this month are unlikely to be won during the same month. With
this new insight, sales managers and their teams can forecast more accurately and maintain more accurate pipelines.
Why: To get details about a prediction, hover over the opportunity close date field.
How: In Pipeline Inspection settings, turn on Einstein Deal Insights and accept the Terms of Service.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Turn On Pipeline Inspection (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Einstein Deal Insights (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
433
Prioritize Deals More Effectively with Tiered Einstein Opportunity Scores

In Pipeline Inspection, Einstein Opportunity Scores are grouped into tiers to give sales teams a new way to see which deals are on track
or to spot deals that are at risk. High, medium, and low tiers, rather than numerical scores, help sales teams prioritize opportunities and
decide which sets of opportunities to focus on.
How: Tiered opportunity scores are available only in Pipeline Inspection. To show the Opportunity Score field in Pipeline Inspection, you
must enable Einstein Opportunity Scoring. To see the opportunity score, key factors, and score changes, hover over the field. The tiers
and score ranges are: High (67-99), Medium (34-66), and Low (0-33).
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable Einstein Opportunity Scoring
Salesforce Help: Understand How Einstein Scores Your Opportunities
Salesforce Help: Tiered Opportunity Scores
Hold Sales Reps Accountable for Updating Opportunity Next Steps

To help keep sales reps focused on moving opportunities forward, sales managers can now see when opportunity next steps aren’t
updated. An indicator shows when the last update to the Next Step field was more than 7 days ago. Hovering on the Next Step field
shows details on the last update.
How: To see the number of days since the last update, the user who made the update, and the date it was made, hover over the Next
Step field.
434
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Core Sales Features
To get detailed data for the Next Steps field, Historical Trending must be enabled and the Next Step field must be configured for trending.
If you enabled Pipeline Inspection in Summer ’21, check your Historical Trending settings to ensure that the Next Step field is configured
for trending.
If you enable Pipeline Inspection in Winter ’22, we configure the Next Step field in Historical Trending as part of the Pipeline Inspection
setup.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Historical Trend Reporting
See How Many Times Close Dates Are Pushed Out

With the Push Count field, your sales teams can get important information about deal health. The Push Count field shows the number
of times an opportunity’s close date is pushed out by a calendar month.
How: The Push Count field is added to Pipeline Inspection by default and is also available in Opportunity list views.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Pipeline Inspection Metrics and Fields
Core Sales Features

Show an additional forecast category: Most Likely. Save time when running territory assignment rules. Protect your product data with
new sharing methods. And an enforced release update deletes your original territory management sharing records to prevent issues
with Enterprise Territory Management.
IN THIS SECTION:
In Lightning Experience, show a Most Likely forecast category on the forecasts page. And users can add the forecasts page to their
bookmarks or favorites.
Save time by selecting a subset of assignment rules to run or by pausing rules during account inserts.
Products
Use new sharing methods introduced in release updates that help protect your product data.
435

An enforced release update deletes your original territory management sharing records to prevent issues with Enterprise Territory
Management. And we restructured the ForecastingSettings metadata type so that Metadata API works more efficiently with
Collaborative Forecasts.
In Lightning Experience, show a Most Likely forecast category on the forecasts page. And users can add the forecasts page to their
bookmarks or favorites.
IN THIS SECTION:
Now you can add a Most Likely forecast category to the standard four categories. This change gives you more flexibility to reflect
your business practices in Collaborative Forecasts.
Users can make forecasts easy to find by adding the forecasts page to their bookmarks or favorites along with other pages they often
visit. For example, sales managers can bookmark a sales rep’s or territory’s forecasts page for quick access.
SEE ALSO:

Now you can add a Most Likely forecast category to the standard four categories. This change gives you more flexibility to reflect your
business practices in Collaborative Forecasts.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in Professional, Performance, and Developer
editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Sales Cloud.
Why: After the Most Likely category is added, it’s available as a picklist value in the Forecast Category field on opportunities.
On the forecasts page in Lightning Experience, Most Likely appears between the Commit and Best Case categories.
436
Note: In Salesforce Classic, Most Likely doesn’t appear as a column on the forecasts page, but Most Likely opportunities are
included in the opportunities list. Their values are reflected in cumulative rollups for the Best Case and Open Pipeline categories
and in the total rows.
In Pipeline Inspection, Most Likely is now included as a standalone pipeline metric. And it’s included in the totals for other appropriate
pipeline metrics. Users can also filter their pipelines by the Most Likely category.
How: In the object management settings for opportunities, create a Forecast Category picklist value by selecting Most Likely in the
Status Category field.
Then map Most Likely to one or more opportunity stages in the Stage field or assign opportunities individually to the Most Likely category.
Important: If you map Most Likely to an opportunity stage in a package, in a sandbox, or via Metadata API, without adding Most
Likely in a target org, deployment to the target org fails. Before deployment from a package, from a sandbox, or via Metadata API,
make sure that Most Likely is added in the target org.
Enterprise API supports forecast categories in Collaborative Forecasts and Pipeline Inspection.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Customize Forecast Categories in Collaborative Forecasts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: View and Update Opportunity-Stage-to-Forecast-Category Mappings in Collaborative Forecasts (can be outdated

Users can make forecasts easy to find by adding the forecasts page to their bookmarks or favorites along with other pages they often
visit. For example, sales managers can bookmark a sales rep’s or territory’s forecasts page for quick access.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Performance, and Developer editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited
editions with the Sales Cloud.
How: Add the forecasts page to the bookmarks or favorites in your browser.
437

Save time by selecting a subset of assignment rules to run or by pausing rules during account inserts.
IN THIS SECTION:
Choose a subset of accounts to include when you run territory assignment rules. For example, run rules only for New York accounts
that were modified last month. Otherwise, assignment rules run for all accounts, which can take a long time.
To prevent performance issues, keep assignment rules from running during account inserts. You can run the assignment rules after
the insert job is finished.
SEE ALSO:
Delete Your Original Territory Management Sharing Records (Release Update)

Choose a subset of accounts to include when you run territory assignment rules. For example, run rules only for New York accounts that
were modified last month. Otherwise, assignment rules run for all accounts, which can take a long time.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance and Developer editions and in Enterprise
and Unlimited editions with the Sales Cloud.
How: When you run assignment rules, select Include a subset of accounts, and then specify a last-modified date range, other filter
criteria, or both. For other criteria, standard and custom account fields, excluding reference and picklist fields, are available.
438
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Preview Territory Account Assignments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Run Assignment Rules for a Territory (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

To prevent performance issues, keep assignment rules from running during account inserts. You can run the assignment rules after the
insert job is finished.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Performance and Developer editions and in Enterprise
and Unlimited editions with the Sales Cloud.
How: On the Territory Settings page, deselect Run territory assignment rules during account inserts and save your changes.
To run assignment rules after you paused them, select Run territory assignment rules during account inserts and save your changes.
Metadata API supports Enterprise Territory Management.
Products
Use new sharing methods introduced in release updates that help protect your product data.
IN THIS SECTION:
To better protect your Salesforce data, this update adds org-wide sharing settings for product records. As of Spring ’22, in new orgs
only, the update will set the org-wide sharing default for products to Private for external users. Sharing rules and manual sharing
aren’t supported. This update was first made available in Winter ’22.
439

To better protect your Salesforce data, this update adds org-wide sharing settings for product records. As of Spring ’22, in new orgs only,
the update will set the org-wide sharing default for products to Private for external users. Sharing rules and manual sharing aren’t
supported. This update was first made available in Winter ’22.
Why: You can now control users’ access to product records, changing the default from Public Read/Write to a more restrictive setting
if desired.
Set Organization-Wide Sharing for Products, follow the testing and activation steps.
If you change the default settings, we recommend testing the changes in a sandbox before the enforcement date to ensure expected
behavior.
1. Review the sharing settings. From Setup, enter Sharing Settings, and then select Sharing Settings. Review the org-wide
defaults for Product. Decide whether to change the default sharing setting for your internal or external users.
2. Test the settings with all customizations, such as flows, validation rules, and Apex triggers. Sharing settings other than Public
Read/Write can interfere with customizations.
Note: When the org-wide sharing setting for products is Private, users can’t amend or renew certain records.
• If the default is Private and you use the Large-Scale Amendment and Renewal service, users can’t amend or renew assets.
• If the default is Private and you use the Legacy Amend/Renew service, users can’t amend or renew assets or subscriptions.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults
prevent guest users from losing access to products, create and test guest user sharing rules. The Product org-wide sharing default for
external users is no longer applied to guest users, and guest user access is set to Private. This setting can’t be changed. This update was
first made available in Winter ’22.
440
Retain Guest Users’ Access to Products, follow the testing and activation steps.
If you create guest user sharing rules, we recommend testing the rules in a sandbox before the enforcement date to ensure expected
behavior.
1. Evaluate whether guest users need access to product records in Spring ’22.
2. To give guest users product access, create guest user sharing rules.
3. Test your guest user sharing rules.
• From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Product Settings, and then select Product Settings. Select Enforce secure
record access for guests accessing products. Verify that guest users can access products according to your new rules. The
setting Secure guest user record access isn’t applied to products in Winter ’22. It will be applied in Spring ’22.
• Sharing rules that restrict access can interfere with customizations. Review and test all customizations such as flows, validation
rules, and Apex triggers to ensure that they’re compatible with your new rules.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Secure Guest Users’ Sharing Settings and Record Access

An enforced release update deletes your original territory management sharing records to prevent issues with Enterprise Territory
Management. And we restructured the ForecastingSettings metadata type so that Metadata API works more efficiently with Collaborative
Forecasts.
IN THIS SECTION:
With this update, your original territory management sharing records are deleted to prevent issues in Enterprise Territory Management.
This update was first made available in Summer ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
We removed the adjustmentsSettings, forecastRangeSettings, and quotasSettings fields from the
ForecastingTypeSettings metadata type and added the globalAdjustmentsSettings,
globalForecastRangeSettings, and globalQuotasSettings fields to the ForecastingSettings metadata type.
Collaborative Forecasts settings now apply to all forecast types, and Metadata API works more efficiently with forecast types introduced
in Summer ’21.

Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic in Performance and Developer editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with
the Sales Cloud.
Why: By deleting original territory management sharing records, this update eliminates unintended user access to records and resolves
a known issue related to blank rows on Activities reports.
441
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Productivity Features
How: With this update, the enableRemoveTMGroupMembership field on the SharingSettings Metadata API type is set to true.
Records based on original territory management sharing no longer appear in reports, and users can no longer access records based on
original territory management sharing.
To review this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Delete
Your Original Territory Management Sharing Records, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Knowledge Article: Migrating from Original Territory Management to Enterprise Territory Management

We removed the adjustmentsSettings, forecastRangeSettings, and quotasSettings fields from the
ForecastingTypeSettings metadata type and added the globalAdjustmentsSettings, globalForecastRangeSettings,
and globalQuotasSettings fields to the ForecastingSettings metadata type. Collaborative Forecasts settings now apply to all
forecast types, and Metadata API works more efficiently with forecast types introduced in Summer ’21.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Professional, Performance,
and Developer editions and in Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Sales Cloud.
Metadata API supports forecast types in Collaborative Forecasts.
Include Inbox users in any Einstein Activity Capture configuration. Easily add predefined columns to your email templates in email
template builder. Enjoy new ways to filter and sort activities.
IN THIS SECTION:
Include Inbox users in any configuration. See consistent event data on the activity timeline and standard reports. Add the
Recommended Connections component with fewer clicks. A new email insight lets sales reps see when a commitment was made
to a customer or prospect.
Email Experience
Join a pilot for choosing how to send list emails.
Email Templates
With Email Template Builder it’s easy to add pre-built column layouts to your template and then add padding between the columns.
Inline references to Salesforce files and images are automatically maintained when a package is installed or a change set is received.
Activities
Enjoy a new option to sort upcoming and overdue activities. Get more details on closed activities and tasks.
Salesforce Inbox
Check out the latest improvements to Salesforce Inbox.
442

Include Inbox users in any configuration. See consistent event data on the activity timeline and standard reports. Add the Recommended
Connections component with fewer clicks. A new email insight lets sales reps see when a commitment was made to a customer or
prospect.
IN THIS SECTION:
Include Salesforce Inbox Users in Any Einstein Activity Capture Configuration
To give you more flexibility with Einstein Activity Capture, you can now add Salesforce Inbox users to configurations that have emails,
events, or contacts disabled. Or, you can add Inbox users to configurations that have events or contacts moving from Salesforce to
the connected account. Previously, Inbox users could only be included in configurations with all three data types enabled. And
events and contacts had to move both ways or from the connected account to Salesforce. Plus, now when emails are disabled, Inbox
users can manually log emails from the Outlook or Gmail integration sidebar.
See Consistent Event Data on the Activity Timeline and in Standard Reports
To ensure a consistent user experience, the activity timeline can show only events that are Salesforce records. Then the event data
in timeline and in standard reports matches, so you see a truer picture of your company’s activities.
Add the Recommended Connections Component to Standard Layouts with Fewer Clicks
Show your sales teams which colleagues have the strongest connection to a prospect. With just a single click you can add the
Recommend Connections component to standard contact, lead, and person account page layouts. Previously, you added the
component to each standard layout.
Prevent Sensitive Information from Appearing on the Activity Timeline
To protect users from inadvertently sharing sensitive information, Einstein Activity Capture attempts to identify emails with sensitive
information such as social security numbers and login credentials, and then keep them private. Previously, only automated emails
were reviewed to filter out sensitive information.
See When a Commitment Is Made to a Customer or Prospect
Knowing when a commitment is made to a customer or prospect makes it easier for sales teams to follow through. The new
Commitment Made email insight shows that a sales rep expressed an intention to take action. Some commitments are associated
with a date, and some are more general. For example, these statements are flagged as commitments: I plan to send the proposal
by Tuesday morning, and, I’m working to get you an updated invoice as soon as possible.
Ensure that User Data Doesn’t Move Until Setup Is Complete
Prevent situations where Salesforce brings in users’ data before you finish setting up Einstein Activity Capture. Now you assign each
user to a configuration before any data is moved between the connected account and Salesforce.
Choose Whether the Activities Dashboard Is Available
The Activities dashboard shows a summary of sales activities, added manually and with Einstein Activity Capture, including calls,
emails, events, and tasks. Now, you choose whether the dashboard is available to Einstein Activity Capture users. Previously, the
dashboard was available automatically.

To give you more flexibility with Einstein Activity Capture, you can now add Salesforce Inbox users to configurations that have emails,
events, or contacts disabled. Or, you can add Inbox users to configurations that have events or contacts moving from Salesforce to the
connected account. Previously, Inbox users could only be included in configurations with all three data types enabled. And events and
contacts had to move both ways or from the connected account to Salesforce. Plus, now when emails are disabled, Inbox users can
manually log emails from the Outlook or Gmail integration sidebar.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
443
How: From any Einstein Activity Capture configuration, add Inbox users to the Selected Users list. If Inbox users are in a configuration
with Emails disabled, email data continues to be captured and used for Inbox productivity features.
SEE ALSO:
Log Emails Manually from the Outlook Integration with Inbox When Einstein Activity Capture Is On
Log Emails Manually from the Gmail Integration with Inbox When Einstein Activity Capture Is On
See Consistent Event Data on the Activity Timeline and in Standard Reports
To ensure a consistent user experience, the activity timeline can show only events that are Salesforce records. Then the event data in
timeline and in standard reports matches, so you see a truer picture of your company’s activities.
How: From the Einstein Activity Capture settings in setup, go to the Settings tab. In the Event Settings section, turn on Only Show
Events that are Salesforce Records. If you’re new to Einstein Activity Capture, the setting is on by default.
When the setting is on, the events that Einstein Activity Capture users are included in get added automatically to the activity timeline
of related account, contact, and leads records. Because the events on the timeline are Salesforce records, they’re available in standard
reports and other Salesforce Platform capabilities.
When the setting is off, the events get added automatically to the activity timeline of additional records: opportunities, contracts, and
quotes. But the events aren’t Salesforce records and aren’t reflected in reports and other Salesforce Platform capabilities.
To ensure that events appear on the activity timeline as Salesforce records, make sure that the Relate synced events to Salesforce records
option is selected. It’s available from a configuration’s advanced settings and is selected by default.
444
Add the Recommended Connections Component to Standard Layouts with Fewer Clicks
Show your sales teams which colleagues have the strongest connection to a prospect. With just a single click you can add the Recommend
Connections component to standard contact, lead, and person account page layouts. Previously, you added the component to each
standard layout.
Who: To see the Recommended Connections component, users must have a Sales Cloud Einstein, Inbox, or High Velocity Sales license.
Why: Sales reps can reach out to colleagues with strong connections to the prospect, and then colleagues can help get conversations
going with the prospect.
How: From Setup, go to the Recommended Connections page under Einstein Activity Capture. Add the component to standard contact,
lead, and person account Lightning record pages. Use the Lightning App Builder to add the component to custom Lightning page
layouts.
445
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Recommended Connections to Lightning Pages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Prevent Sensitive Information from Appearing on the Activity Timeline

To protect users from inadvertently sharing sensitive information, Einstein Activity Capture attempts to identify emails with sensitive
information such as social security numbers and login credentials, and then keep them private. Previously, only automated emails were
reviewed to filter out sensitive information.
Why: To enhance security, Einstein Activity Capture now attempts to identify emails with sensitive information before they’re added to
the timeline and set sharing to Don’t Share. The emails are marked as sensitive so that users know why the sharing setting was changed.
For example, if a user receives a customer email confirming a purchase that includes a credit card number, the email is visible only to
the recipient. The email owner can later change the sharing setting to something less restrictive.
How: The filters that look for automated replies and nonautomated replies with sensitive information are on by default. You can contact
Salesforce Support to turn them off.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Considerations for Excluding Data from Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
See When a Commitment Is Made to a Customer or Prospect

Knowing when a commitment is made to a customer or prospect makes it easier for sales teams to follow through. The new Commitment
Made email insight shows that a sales rep expressed an intention to take action. Some commitments are associated with a date, and
some are more general. For example, these statements are flagged as commitments: I plan to send the proposal by Tuesday morning,
and, I’m working to get you an updated invoice as soon as possible.
How: The activity timeline shows which emails include commitments.
446
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Turn On Einstein Email Insights (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Ensure that User Data Doesn’t Move Until Setup Is Complete

Prevent situations where Salesforce brings in users’ data before you finish setting up Einstein Activity Capture. Now you assign each user
to a configuration before any data is moved between the connected account and Salesforce.
Who: Einstein Activity Capture users who have access to Inbox aren’t required to be in configurations. In order for their data to be used
by Inbox productivity features, their data starts moving after they connect an account.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Configuration for Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Choose Whether the Activities Dashboard Is Available

The Activities dashboard shows a summary of sales activities, added manually and with Einstein Activity Capture, including calls, emails,
events, and tasks. Now, you choose whether the dashboard is available to Einstein Activity Capture users. Previously, the dashboard was
available automatically.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional (when API access is purchased), Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions.
How: From Setup, go to the Einstein Activity Capture settings. From the General section on the Settings tab, turn on Activities Dashboard.
It can take a few days before the dashboard shows all activity data. If you already use Einstein Activity Capture, the setting is on by default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Activities Dashboard (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
447
Email Experience
Join a pilot for choosing how to send list emails.
IN THIS SECTION:
Let your sales reps choose how to send their list emails. Now, reps can send list emails through Gmail, Office 365, or Microsoft
Exchange. Previously, reps could send list emails via Salesforce only.
Use List Emails for Sales Cadence Automated Emails Automatically
Now sales cadence automated emails are sent as a list email.

Let your sales reps choose how to send their list emails. Now, reps can send list emails through Gmail, Office 365, or Microsoft Exchange.
Previously, reps could send list emails via Salesforce only.
Where: This update is available in Lightning Experience in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
You can provide feedback and suggestions for sending list email through external services in the Outlook/Teams, Gmail, and Inbox
Trailblazer Community.
Use of this feature is subject to the Salesforce Acceptable Use Policy.
Who: This update is available for Gmail, Office 365, and Microsoft Exchange customers. If you use Microsoft Exchange, you must use
Inbox to send list emails through a connected account. Inbox is available with an Inbox, High Velocity Sales, or Sales Cloud Einstein
license.
Why: Sending list emails through Gmail, Office 365, or Microsoft Exchange ensures that emails look like a user sent them directly instead
of an email automation. Recipients are more likely to open emails that look like they were sent directly. Also, list emails are in the user’s
sent folder, so the send history is intact.
How: For Gmail and Office 365, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Send through External Email Services, and
then select Send through External Email Services.
448
For Microsoft Exchange, assign an Inbox license to users. Then your users can choose their preferred setting for list emails. Users can
open their personal settings any time to access this setting
For Gmail and Office365 users:
For Microsoft Exchange users with an Inbox license:
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Send List Email in Lightning Experience (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Set Up Send Email from Salesforce with Gmail™ or Office 365™ (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Now sales cadence automated emails are sent as a list email.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
449
Who: This feature is available to users with the High Velocity Sales User or High Velocity Sales Cadence Creator permission.
SEE ALSO:
Send Sales Cadence Automated Emails as List Emails to Save Data
Email Templates
With Email Template Builder it’s easy to add pre-built column layouts to your template and then add padding between the columns.
Inline references to Salesforce files and images are automatically maintained when a package is installed or a change set is received.
IN THIS SECTION:
Add Rows and Columns to Your Email Templates
Use the Layout component to easily add a row to your Email Template Builder or Email Content Builder template. Select a layout
with no columns or a preconfigured set of up to four columns. This component replaces the Row component.
Get Some Breathing Room with Column Padding
In Email Template Builder, give columns some definition with padding between each column. Previously, you could pad the content
within an individual column, and now you can evenly pad space between all columns.
Add Variety with Indentations in Rich Text Components in Email Template Builder
Indented text creates visual variety and organizes text in your email templates. Varying the indentation of text emphasizes that text
and makes it easier for email recipients to notice it.
As your Email Template Builder users change component styles, breadcrumbs help guide them back to where they started.
Include Salesforce Inline Image References in Email Template Builder Packages and Change Sets
There’s no need to recreate references to inline Salesforce images after installing a package or receiving a change set. Email Template
Builder email templates can now include inline references to Salesforce files and images. These references are included in the package
or change set and maintained when the package is installed or the change set is received.
Say More in a Lightning Email Template’s Subject
Engage your readers with a longer, more descriptive subject line. The Subject field in Lightning email templates, including email
templates created in Email Template Builder, can now be up to 1,000 characters long. Previously, the limit was 230 characters.
Add Rows and Columns to Your Email Templates

Use the Layout component to easily add a row to your Email Template Builder or Email Content Builder template. Select a layout with
no columns or a preconfigured set of up to four columns. This component replaces the Row component.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions, and
all editions of Pardot in the Pardot Lightning app. This feature isn’t available in Pardot Classic or the standalone Pardot app.
How: In Email Template Builder, select a column layout and drag it to the canvas. Then add components to the columns.
450
After you drag and drop the pre-built layout, the columns appear on the canvas.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Email Template Builder (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Some Breathing Room with Column Padding

In Email Template Builder, give columns some definition with padding between each column. Previously, you could pad the content
within an individual column, and now you can evenly pad space between all columns.
How: Change the Column Spacing (px) value to adjust the spacing between every column at the same time.
451
SEE ALSO:
Add Variety with Indentations in Rich Text Components in Email Template Builder
Indented text creates visual variety and organizes text in your email templates. Varying the indentation of text emphasizes that text and
makes it easier for email recipients to notice it.
How: In the Rich Text component, click the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons to adjust your text.
452
You see the changes in your text.
SEE ALSO:
453

As your Email Template Builder users change component styles, breadcrumbs help guide them back to where they started.
How: In this example, breadcrumbs let you know whether you selected the row or the button component.
SEE ALSO:
Include Salesforce Inline Image References in Email Template Builder Packages and Change Sets
There’s no need to recreate references to inline Salesforce images after installing a package or receiving a change set. Email Template
Builder email templates can now include inline references to Salesforce files and images. These references are included in the package
or change set and maintained when the package is installed or the change set is received.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Developer Edition.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Special Behavior of Components in Packages (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Say More in a Lightning Email Template’s Subject

Engage your readers with a longer, more descriptive subject line. The Subject field in Lightning email templates, including email templates
created in Email Template Builder, can now be up to 1,000 characters long. Previously, the limit was 230 characters.
editions, and all editions of Pardot in the Pardot Lightning app. This feature isn’t available in Pardot Classic or the standalone Pardot app.
Activities
Enjoy a new option to sort upcoming and overdue activities. Get more details on closed activities and tasks.
454
IN THIS SECTION:
Sort Upcoming & Overdue Activities Intuitively
Choose to show your upcoming tasks and appointments in the order that makes sense to you. Now you can show the list with the
next item on your calendar at the top of the list followed by your other activities. Previously, the item with the closest due date was
at the bottom of the list.
Filter and Sort the Activity Timeline with a New Icon
Use the gear icon to access the new sort order setting and your other filter options. Previously, the gear was a funnel icon.
Use the new field CompletedDateTime to show the date and the time that a task was completed. Add the Completed Date
and Time column to your reports.
Split Bulk Queries on the TaskRelation Table with PK Chunking
Automatically split bulk queries into chunks to maximize your daily batch limit. Use primary key (PK) chunking, designed to extract
data from entire tables, with the TaskRelation table. Each chunk is processed as a separate batch that counts toward your daily batch
limit.

Choose to show your upcoming tasks and appointments in the order that makes sense to you. Now you can show the list with the next
item on your calendar at the top of the list followed by your other activities. Previously, the item with the closest due date was at the
bottom of the list.
editions.
How: Click the gear to open the Settings panel.
455
Select Show newest Upcoming & Overdue activities first. Now your upcoming and overdue activities are ordered with the next
item on your calendar at the top of the list.
Note: Show oldest Upcoming & Overdue activities first is the default selection.
456
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Activity Timeline (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the gear icon to access the new sort order setting and your other filter options. Previously, the gear was a funnel icon.
editions.
How: Click the gear to open the panel.
SEE ALSO:
457
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein Conversation Insights

Use the new field CompletedDateTime to show the date and the time that a task was completed. Add the Completed Date and
Time column to your reports.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Reports (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Split Bulk Queries on the TaskRelation Table with PK Chunking

Automatically split bulk queries into chunks to maximize your daily batch limit. Use primary key (PK) chunking, designed to extract data
from entire tables, with the TaskRelation table. Each chunk is processed as a separate batch that counts toward your daily batch limit.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Help: PK Chunking Header (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Inbox
Check out the latest improvements to Salesforce Inbox.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Inbox
Salesforce Inbox integrates your email and calendar with Salesforce, so sales reps can manage their work sales more efficiently. Inbox
increases reps’ productivity on every email message, whether they’re on the go or at the desk.
Salesforce Inbox
Salesforce Inbox integrates your email and calendar with Salesforce, so sales reps can manage their work sales more efficiently. Inbox
increases reps’ productivity on every email message, whether they’re on the go or at the desk.
Learn about the latest features and enhancements to Inbox mobile in Salesforce Help.
• Inbox Mobile for iOS
• Inbox Mobile for Android
To learn about the latest features and enhancements in Inbox desktop, see these sections of the release notes.
• Outlook Integration
• Gmail Integration
• Email Experience

Einstein Conversation Insights can now match voice and video calls to related opportunities automatically. New filters allow users to see
call data sorted by opportunity or lead details, and video calls show more call participant details.
458
Einstein Conversation Insights doesn’t record your calls. You connect it with your recording system such as Sales Dialer, Service Cloud
Voice, or other supported partners. It’s a customer’s responsibility to manage consent and comply with local privacy requirements in
the way that calls are recorded.
IN THIS SECTION:
Match Opportunities to Voice and Video Calls Automatically
Einstein Conversation Insights can match voice and video calls to related opportunities automatically.
Filter by Opportunity Stage, Opportunity Amount, and Lead Status
Want to see all the calls related to late-stage deals over a certain amount? Now you can! Use new filters to see call data sorted by
opportunity or lead details.
Video Calls Display Title and Opportunity Contact Role
See more relevant details directly on video call records. Users can now see a contact’s company name, title, and contact role.
Analyze Service Calls in a Dedicated Conversation Insights Dashboard
Service managers can use the new Einstein Conversation Insights dashboard to review service call data. Previously, sales and service
calls were displayed in one dashboard. ECI for Service users can apply service-specific filters to hone in on the data they care about.
Use Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony (Pilot)
Einstein Conversation Insights is now supported by Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony and Service Cloud Voice with Partner
Telephony from Amazon Connect.
Match Opportunities to Voice and Video Calls Automatically

Einstein Conversation Insights can match voice and video calls to related opportunities automatically.
Where: This change applies to Einstein Conversation Insights in Lightning Experience. Einstein Conversation Insights is available as an
add-on in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
Who: This feature is available to users with access to Einstein Conversation Insights for Sales.
Why: Einstein Conversation Insights matches related opportunity records to the Related Record field of voice and video call records.
Opportunities are matched based on call participants listed as opportunity contact roles. Closed opportunities and opportunities that
haven’t been modified within two years aren’t included. If multiple opportunities are related, the most relevant one is matched based
on call participants and the last modified date.
For voice calls, the user placing the call needs access to the related opportunity for it to be matched.
How: Turn on Opportunity Matching from General Settings under Conversation Insights in Setup.
459
Filter by Opportunity Stage, Opportunity Amount, and Lead Status

Want to see all the calls related to late-stage deals over a certain amount? Now you can! Use new filters to see call data sorted by
opportunity or lead details.
How: Filter calls by lead status, opportunity stage, or opportunity amount from the Conversation Insights dashboard.
The opportunity amount filter doesn’t support the currency format or decimals. When entering a new value in the opportunity amount
filter, tab out of the widget to update the dashboard with your changes.
Video Calls Display Title and Opportunity Contact Role

See more relevant details directly on video call records. Users can now see a contact’s company name, title, and contact role.
How: Video call records display a participant’s company name and title based on their contact record. The contact role is also shown if
they’re part of a related opportunity.
Analyze Service Calls in a Dedicated Conversation Insights Dashboard

Service managers can use the new Einstein Conversation Insights dashboard to review service call data. Previously, sales and service
calls were displayed in one dashboard. ECI for Service users can apply service-specific filters to hone in on the data they care about.
460
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Maps
Who: Users with the Conversation Insights for Service permission set can see the Einstein Conversation Insights for Service dashboard.
If users have the Conversation Insights for Sales or High Velocity Sales permission sets, they see the Sales dashboard. Users who have
both the Service and the Sales permission sets see the Sales dashboard.
How: In the Service Console, click the Conversation Insights tab to view the dashboard. The dashboard shows only the voice calls made
by users with ECI for Service.
SEE ALSO:
Analyze Service Calls in the Einstein Conversation Insights Dashboard
Use Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony (Pilot)

Telephony from Amazon Connect.
All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds. Service Cloud Voice with Amazon
Connect and Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony from Amazon Connect are available as an add-on license in Government Cloud.
How: Contact your Salesforce account executive to learn more about participating in this pilot.
SEE ALSO:
Get Actionable Call Insights with Einstein Conversation Insights for Partner Telephony (Pilot)
Salesforce Maps
Automate as many as 5,000 territory assignments, plot any Salesforce data on the map, and help your reps find new business using filters
for key demographics. Plan strategic territories using heat maps to visualize attributes that matter to your teams. Keep drivers focused
on the road when you automate reporting of their locations, trip-related data, and availability to pick up work using the Salesforce mobile
app for iOS.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce Maps
Automate territory assignments for complex territories, plot records on the map using addresses from a related object’s records, and
discover untapped markets when you filter demographic data.
Design territories for in-person and virtual customer visits. Gain insight on where to position sales and service resources when you
visualize key attributes on a heat map. And export territory models, areas, containers, and units for proprietary and third-party territory
management systems.
461

Keep drivers focused on their trips and streamline their reporting responsibilities. Capture work-related miles in drive trip records
using your drivers’ iOS mobile devices—all in the Salesforce mobile app.
Salesforce Maps
Automate territory assignments for complex territories, plot records on the map using addresses from a related object’s records, and
discover untapped markets when you filter demographic data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create as many as 5,000 assignment rules to support large sales teams. Run assignment plans in intervals that align with your team’s
goals. For example, you create an assignment plan that assigns leads to sales reps. To assign leads quickly, schedule the plan to run
in 1-hour intervals.
Visualize record data for objects that rely on addresses from a related object in Salesforce Maps. For example, your reps work with
consumer goods and want to plot visit records, but the records don’t include addresses. To get visit records to appear on the map,
set up your Visit base object to include address fields from Retail Store or other related objects.
Identify Potential Customers Within Specific Markets
Encourage your reps to find new customers in untapped markets when they plot a data layer using the Demographic Context (USA)
data source in Salesforce Maps. Sales and service reps create filters that narrow their focus to a specific population or location. Then
your reps apply styling for visualizing categories that can present promising business opportunities.
Make the most of your reps’ last-minute availability for more customer visits when you add stops to their current day’s schedules.
You can now optimize schedules that include ad hoc changes for the current day from a desktop in Salesforce Maps.

Create as many as 5,000 assignment rules to support large sales teams. Run assignment plans in intervals that align with your team’s
goals. For example, you create an assignment plan that assigns leads to sales reps. To assign leads quickly, schedule the plan to run in
1-hour intervals.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic for Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: A new, more intuitive setup experience helps you manage assignment plans and schedule them to run at specific intervals.
462
You choose the intervals for running schedule assignment plans.
Or tailor your assignment plan intervals to your company’s requirements using the AssignRecords() Apex method.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Automate Assignments for Salesforce Records (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Visualize record data for objects that rely on addresses from a related object in Salesforce Maps. For example, your reps work with
consumer goods and want to plot visit records, but the records don’t include addresses. To get visit records to appear on the map, set
up your Visit base object to include address fields from Retail Store or other related objects.
How: From the base object for the records that your reps want to plot on the map, select the address location field such as PlaceID.
Then select the related object from which you want to specify the address fields such as Address.
Select the address fields that you want to plot on the map from the related object.
463
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Plot Any Salesforce Data on the Map (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Identify Potential Customers Within Specific Markets

Encourage your reps to find new customers in untapped markets when they plot a data layer using the Demographic Context (USA)
data source in Salesforce Maps. Sales and service reps create filters that narrow their focus to a specific population or location. Then your
reps apply styling for visualizing categories that can present promising business opportunities.
How: When your reps create a data layer, they select Demographic Context (USA) as the data source. Filters and styling help your reps
focus on key topics. For example, your reps can apply a filter for a specific state, then add categories for income ranges.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Identify Potential Customers Within Specific Markets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Make the most of your reps’ last-minute availability for more customer visits when you add stops to their current day’s schedules. You
can now optimize schedules that include ad hoc changes for the current day from a desktop in Salesforce Maps.
464

Design territories for in-person and virtual customer visits. Gain insight on where to position sales and service resources when you
visualize key attributes on a heat map. And export territory models, areas, containers, and units for proprietary and third-party territory
management systems.
IN THIS SECTION:
Optimize Areas for In-Person and Remote Business
Design territories that include a mix of contiguous and noncontiguous areas in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning. Limit assignments
within an area so that all your sales and service reps get opportunities to meet customers in person and virtually. Indicate whether
to assign more or fewer units or containers to an area relative to others within the focus.
Plan and Visualize Territories Using a Heat Map
See how your territories align with an attribute that’s relevant to your territory planning efforts in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning.
For example, select annual revenue for accounts or order volumes that you import from proprietary or third-party systems. Heat
maps give visual indications for where you can bolster or reduce coverage so that you meet and beat sales and service goals.
Plan your territory models in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning and import them into proprietary and third-party systems. Choose
which territory model data you publish to CSV files, which can include your territory model or specific areas, containers, and units.
Create Territory Models from Salesforce or External Data Sources
Start building alignments in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning using data sources that contribute to your data sets or territory
models exported from other systems to CSV files. After you optimize your territory models, you can publish them to CSV files and
import them into your proprietary or third-party territory management systems.
Fine-Tune Account Assignments in Salesforce Territory Models
Create data sets that include assigned accounts in a territory model from Enterprise Territory Management. Using those data sets,
create and optimize alignments in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning, then publish them as your fine-tuned territories in Salesforce.
Optimize Areas for In-Person and Remote Business

Design territories that include a mix of contiguous and noncontiguous areas in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning. Limit assignments
within an area so that all your sales and service reps get opportunities to meet customers in person and virtually. Indicate whether to
assign more or fewer units or containers to an area relative to others within the focus.
How: For example, you start with contiguous territories in North Carolina, but you want two noncontiguous territories for reps who sell
remotely. So you select those territories and change their geographic profiles to Noncontiguous.
465
You then optimize the focus and see the results for your two noncontiguous territories: Virtual-1 and Virtual-2.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Plan Territories for In-Person and Virtual Business (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Plan and Visualize Territories Using a Heat Map

See how your territories align with an attribute that’s relevant to your territory planning efforts in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning. For
example, select annual revenue for accounts or order volumes that you import from proprietary or third-party systems. Heat maps give
visual indications for where you can bolster or reduce coverage so that you meet and beat sales and service goals.
How: Select Layers, then define your heat map. For example, define your heat map to show hot spots that represent accounts with
high annual revenue.
Add the layer to see hot spots that represent accounts with high annual revenue.
466
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Visualize Territories with a Heat Map Layer (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Plan your territory models in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning and import them into proprietary and third-party systems. Choose which
territory model data you publish to CSV files, which can include your territory model or specific areas, containers, and units.
How: When you publish an alignment or a focus, select CSV. Territory Planning creates CSV files that you then import to your territory
planning systems.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Publish Territory Data to Use in Other Systems (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Territory Models from Salesforce or External Data Sources

Start building alignments in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning using data sources that contribute to your data sets or territory models
exported from other systems to CSV files. After you optimize your territory models, you can publish them to CSV files and import them
into your proprietary or third-party territory management systems.
467
How: When you create an alignment, select Import Model. To use a data source that contributes to your data set, select Data Set. To
use a territory model exported from another system, select CSV. Select your data source or CSV file that includes your territory model
data, then work through the required fields.
The territory model appears. You can now assign owners and refine your model on the map.
468
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Alignments from a Data Set’s Source (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create Alignments from External Territory Model Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Fine-Tune Account Assignments in Salesforce Territory Models

Create data sets that include assigned accounts in a territory model from Enterprise Territory Management. Using those data sets, create
and optimize alignments in Salesforce Maps Territory Planning, then publish them as your fine-tuned territories in Salesforce.
How: When you create a data set, select Build Territory Model Query. Give it a name and select the fields you want to include in your
data set. Then select the model from Enterprise Territory Management.
469
As you select options, you build the query, which you can test before you save it.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Fine-Tune Account Assignments in Salesforce Territory Models (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Keep drivers focused on their trips and streamline their reporting responsibilities. Capture work-related miles in drive trip records using
your drivers’ iOS mobile devices—all in the Salesforce mobile app.
IN THIS SECTION:
Automate Driver Location and Metrics Reporting
Save your drivers the hassle of using multiple mobile apps to report their whereabouts, delays, and availability, and to update
Salesforce records. When drivers turn on Live Tracking in the Salesforce mobile app for iOS, you get insight into their location and
trip-related data. Shorten drive times and resolve more service requests as you dispatch available drivers to nearby jobs.
Track Work-Related Miles Using Mobile Devices
Capture miles in drive trip records only when drivers have Salesforce Maps Live Tracking turned on in the Salesforce mobile app for
iOS. Your reps can now pause mileage tracking during their breaks between stops. For vehicles with on-board sensors, drive trip
records capture all miles even during breaks between stops.
Automate Driver Location and Metrics Reporting

Save your drivers the hassle of using multiple mobile apps to report their whereabouts, delays, and availability, and to update Salesforce
records. When drivers turn on Live Tracking in the Salesforce mobile app for iOS, you get insight into their location and trip-related data.
Shorten drive times and resolve more service requests as you dispatch available drivers to nearby jobs.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile for iOS for Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
When: The Salesforce mobile app rolls out between October 11, 2021 and October 18, 2021.
How: Your drivers open the Salesforce mobile app on their iOS devices, then select Salesforce Maps Live Tracking Plugin from the
app picker.
470
When drivers receive a prompt to share their location, tell them to select Always, which Live Tracking requires. This selection gives
managers driver location and trip-related data even if drivers dismiss the Salesforce mobile app or run it in the background. But drivers
can turn off Live Tracking, or set a time for automatic shutoff.
Managers see driver locations and other metrics when they plot Live Tracking layers on the map.
Event history shows metrics for defined time frames.
Track Work-Related Miles Using Mobile Devices

Capture miles in drive trip records only when drivers have Salesforce Maps Live Tracking turned on in the Salesforce mobile app for iOS.
Your reps can now pause mileage tracking during their breaks between stops. For vehicles with on-board sensors, drive trip records
capture all miles even during breaks between stops.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and mobile for iOS for Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
When: The Salesforce mobile app rolls out between October 11, 2021 and October 18, 2021.
How: When you create or change a daily summaries configuration, select Track Mileage Using Mobile Devices.
471
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes High Velocity Sales
High Velocity Sales

Edit active sales cadences, test different email templates or call scripts on the same step, get detailed insights about sales cadence, call
script, email template, and sales rep performance, and add, remove, or pause targets from reports.
High Velocity Sales and its features are available for an extra cost. For pricing details, contact your Salesforce account executive. Sales
Dialer is also available for an extra cost as an add-on license.
IN THIS SECTION:
Sales Cadences
Edit active sales cadences and test different email templates or call scripts on the same step.
See Sales Cadence and Sales Rep Performance at a Glance
The High Velocity Sales Sample Dashboard lets sales managers see up to 20 key metrics such as email and call volume, engagement,
and pipeline generation all in one place. Managers can drill into each dashboard component for details.
Organize Sales Cadence Email Templates
Sales teams can organize and share their email templates while using them in sales cadences. Templates in sales cadences no longer
must reside in the Public Email Templates folder. Simply give your sales reps access to the shared folders containing the templates
that they use in their sales cadences. Only templates in a user’s Private Email Templates folder aren’t sharable.
Add and Remove Sales Cadence Targets from Reports
Managers can use reports to segment and prioritize sales target groups and then update their sales cadence membership directly
from the report.
Sales cadence automated email steps now send the message as a list email. With this change your sales managers can send large
batches of automated emails without accumulating unneeded data that counts against your data limits. This change also allows
more detailed email error reporting
Sales Cadences
Edit active sales cadences and test different email templates or call scripts on the same step.
IN THIS SECTION:
When sales managers want to improve a sales cadence, they can update active sales cadences without interrupting sales outreach.
Managers can add and remove steps, update step names and descriptions, email template and call script variants, sales cadence
rules, and more.
472
Find Out Which Email Templates and Call Scripts Perform Best with Variant Testing
Sales managers can use sales cadence steps to test different email templates or a call scripts to see which is most effective with
prospects. The sales cadence sends each email or displays each call script according to the proportions that managers choose when
building the sales cadence.

When sales managers want to improve a sales cadence, they can update active sales cadences without interrupting sales outreach.
Managers can add and remove steps, update step names and descriptions, email template and call script variants, sales cadence rules,
and more.
Who: This feature is available to users with the High Velocity Sales Cadence Creator permission.
How: On the sales cadence record page, click Modify Steps.
When deleting a call result or email listener step, managers can choose whether to delete the Yes or the No branch that follows it. Targets
currently on deleted steps exit the sales cadence after completing the step. Changes aren’t saved until you click Update in the Sales
Cadence Builder. Closing the Sales Cadence Builder before clicking Update causes changes to be lost.
Find Out Which Email Templates and Call Scripts Perform Best with Variant Testing
Sales managers can use sales cadence steps to test different email templates or a call scripts to see which is most effective with prospects.
The sales cadence sends each email or displays each call script according to the proportions that managers choose when building the
sales cadence.
How: In High Velocity Sales Setup, turn on Allow Email Template and Call Script Variant Testing. When managers add an email or call
step to a sales cadence, they can include up to three email templates or call scripts for the step. They can specify the percentage of
targets that see or hear each variant.
473
The Engagement tab on sales cadence records shows how much engagement each variant generates.
474
When managers see which version is most effective, they can update the percentages so that only the most effective variant is used.
See Sales Cadence and Sales Rep Performance at a Glance

The High Velocity Sales Sample Dashboard lets sales managers see up to 20 key metrics such as email and call volume, engagement,
and pipeline generation all in one place. Managers can drill into each dashboard component for details.
Why: The dashboard is a great example of what’s possible with High Velocity Sales reporting. Sales managers can add or delete
components to meet their needs.
Here are a few examples of what the dashboard shows sales managers:
• Leads in Sales Cadences—How many leads are currently in sales cadences?
• Lead Conversions by Sales Cadence—Which sales cadences lead to the most lead conversions?
• Target Disposition by Sales Cadence—What are the most common outcomes for each sales cadence?
• Pipeline Generated by Sales Cadence—Which sales cadences are creating the most pipeline?
• Leads Converted by Sales Rep and Sales Cadence—For each sales rep, which sales cadence is helping them convert the most leads?
475
• Successful Calls and Emails by Sales Rep—How many successful call and email engagements did my reps achieve in the last 30
days?
• This Month’s Most Engaged Leads: Email—Which of my leads have been most engaged with email this month?
• Most Engaged Sales Cadences—Which of my sales cadences have generated the most all-time engagement?
• Most Engaged Sales Cadence Steps—Which sales cadence steps have generated the most all-time engagement?
How: To view the dashboard in the High Velocity Sales app, choose Dashboards from the Navigation menu. Then choose the High
Velocity Sales Sample Dashboard. You can also find the dashboard in the High Velocity Sales Sample Dashboards folder. The dashboard
reports are in the High Velocity Sales Dashboard Reports folder.
If admins or managers want to edit the reports used by the dashboard, we recommend making copies of the reports and editing the
copies. Any changes to the underlying reports can cause the dashboard to stop working. The reports and dashboard components can
also change in future releases.
The dashboard is a dynamic dashboard because it has the View As Dashboard User property, so it shows statistics based on records the
user has access to. Each Salesforce org has a dynamic dashboards limit. If you’ve reached the limit, the dashboard isn’t installed. For
information about checking how many dynamic dashboards you’re using, see the knowledge article titled Find the Dynamic Dashboards
in my Organization.
To show the components including opportunity statistics, Relate Opportunities to Sales Cadences must be turned on in High Velocity
Sales Setup at the time of the release.
Organize Sales Cadence Email Templates

Sales teams can organize and share their email templates while using them in sales cadences. Templates in sales cadences no longer
must reside in the Public Email Templates folder. Simply give your sales reps access to the shared folders containing the templates that
they use in their sales cadences. Only templates in a user’s Private Email Templates folder aren’t sharable.
476
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Integration with Google
Add and Remove Sales Cadence Targets from Reports

Managers can use reports to segment and prioritize sales target groups and then update their sales cadence membership directly from
the report.
How: Use any lead, contact, or person account report to identify a group of targets. Then click Add to Sales Cadence or Remove from
Sales Cadence. Managers can add or remove up to 200 targets at a time.

Sales cadence automated email steps now send the message as a list email. With this change your sales managers can send large batches
of automated emails without accumulating unneeded data that counts against your data limits. This change also allows more detailed
email error reporting
Who: This feature is available to users with the High Velocity Sales User or High Velocity Sales Cadence Creator permission and the Allow
Sending of List Emails permission.
How: Sending automated emails as list emails creates just a single list email record for all emails sent from an automated email step on
the same day. When an automated email step uses variant testing, the system creates one list email record per day for each combination
of user, step, and email template. When a user changes their sending email address, the system creates a separate list email record for
subsequent emails. The Salesforce list email framework also provides finer error detection so that you can troubleshoot any problems
faster. To see email and other sales cadence step errors and statistics, add the new Current Sales Cadence Step: Error Code field to Action
Cadence Step Tracker reports.
SEE ALSO:

Get improvements to event logging from Google calendar. For Salesforce Inbox users, manually log emails when in an Einstein Activity
Capture configuration with emails turned off.
IN THIS SECTION:
Gmail Integration
Select all contacts automatically and capture attendees when logging events. Manually log emails from the integration for Salesforce
Inbox users in an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails turned off. Support for older versions of Chrome is ending.
Check out what’s new with Einstein Activity Capture.
Gmail Integration
Inbox users in an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails turned off. Support for older versions of Chrome is ending.
477
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Improved Event Logging in the Gmail Integration
If Salesforce is set up for shared activities, matching contact records shown when logging an event from Gmail are automatically
selected. If there are no matching contacts, the first matching lead is automatically selected. Also, all the attendees on the manually
logged event are now captured in the Salesforce event record.
Salesforce Inbox users who are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has email capture disabled can now manually
log emails from Gmail. This change allows users to benefit from the event and contact portions of Einstein Activity Capture and still
manually log the emails that they need.
Simplified Multi-Factor Authentication in the Gmail Integration
Sales reps set up for single sign-on (SSO) and assigned the Multi-Factor Authentication for User Interface Logins permission are no
longer required to enter multi-factor challenges in the Gmail integration. This change applies if the Keep Salesforce and Gmail
Connected setting is on in Gmail integration setup. This change doesn’t apply to users that are set up to require username and
passwords or for high assurance session security multi-factor authentication.
Support for the Gmail Integration in Older Versions of Google Chrome Is Ending
Starting in Winter ’22, the Gmail integration and Gmail integration with Inbox require Google Chrome version 88 or later. Changes
to the Google Chrome extensions platform require sales reps using Chrome version 87 and earlier to upgrade Chrome to continue
to use the integration. To ensure that you have the latest security enhancements, we recommend updating to the latest version
available.
Get Improved Event Logging in the Gmail Integration

If Salesforce is set up for shared activities, matching contact records shown when logging an event from Gmail are automatically selected.
If there are no matching contacts, the first matching lead is automatically selected. Also, all the attendees on the manually logged event
are now captured in the Salesforce event record.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Make sure that Allow Users to Relate Multiple Contacts to Tasks and Events in Activity Settings is enabled in Salesforce setup.
Then, when a rep logs an event from Gmail, the contacts that appear in the related record are automatically selected. Reps can log an
event to up to 50 contacts or one lead. The integration only shows the first 15 matching records in the order the attendees appear on
the event. If there are no matching contacts in the first 15 records, the first lead record is automatically selected for logging. Reps can
deselect all contacts or deselect individual contacts before logging the event. Reps can also search for other contacts to log the event
to.
478
Logging events to internal users isn’t supported. If the attendee list includes matching users in the first 15 records, reps see the users
listed but can’t select them for logging.
To include all attendees from an invitation on the Salesforce event record, make sure that the Attendees field is available on your page
layouts for the Event object in Salesforce. Then, when reps log an event, all the attendees, including internal users, are listed on the event
record. The attendee’s RSVP status isn’t shown.
Note: In Salesforce Classic, all attendees are captured in the Hasn’t Responded list on the event record. That list is available by
default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Event Logging from Outlook and Gmail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for Logging Events from Outlook and Gmail to Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Shared Activities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Inbox users who are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has email capture disabled can now manually log
emails from Gmail. This change allows users to benefit from the event and contact portions of Einstein Activity Capture and still manually
log the emails that they need.
How: If an Inbox user is part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has emails disabled, they have the option to log an email
from the integration in Gmail.
479
The process to log an email is the same for Inbox and regular Gmail integration users.
If an Inbox user is part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has emails enabled, their emails are captured and logged to
Salesforce automatically. Those users still see the sharing options available for their Einstein Activity Capture configuration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select Who Can Use Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Simplified Multi-Factor Authentication in the Gmail Integration

Sales reps set up for single sign-on (SSO) and assigned the Multi-Factor Authentication for User Interface Logins permission are no longer
required to enter multi-factor challenges in the Gmail integration. This change applies if the Keep Salesforce and Gmail Connected setting
is on in Gmail integration setup. This change doesn’t apply to users that are set up to require username and passwords or for high
assurance session security multi-factor authentication.
Where: This change applies Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
Why: By default, users who log in to Salesforce through an authentication provider that supports single sign-on (SSO) are no longer
challenged with multi-factor authentication requests. The Gmail integration supports SSO.
How: This change applies to new orgs in Winter ’22 automatically. For existing orgs, contact Salesforce Customer Support and ask to
enable suppressing MFA challenges for users in an OIDC-SSO flow.
SEE ALSO:
MFA Challenges for Authentication Provider Single Sign-On Logins Are No Longer Enforced
480
Support for the Gmail Integration in Older Versions of Google Chrome Is Ending
Starting in Winter ’22, the Gmail integration and Gmail integration with Inbox require Google Chrome version 88 or later. Changes to
the Google Chrome extensions platform require sales reps using Chrome version 87 and earlier to upgrade Chrome to continue to use
the integration. To ensure that you have the latest security enhancements, we recommend updating to the latest version available.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and
Unlimited editions.
Why: The integration with Gmail uses the Google Chrome extensions platform. As Google updates that platform with security, privacy,
and performance enhancements, we also update the Gmail integration to use the latest platform. Sometimes these updates require an
upgrade to continue using the integration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Gmail Integration System Requirements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
External Link: Update Google Chrome

Check out what’s new with Einstein Activity Capture.
IN THIS SECTION:
Check Out Einstein Activity Capture Improvements for Google Customers
If you’re a new Salesforce customer who wants to sync contacts or events with your Google account, Einstein Activity Capture is
now the go-to product for you. Or if you’re a current Lightning Sync user who’s considering the move to Einstein Activity Capture,
check out what’s new. For example, Salesforce Inbox users that are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails
disabled can manually log emails from the Gmail integration. Plus, admins can now add Inbox users to configurations that include
any Einstein Activity Capture settings.
Check Out Einstein Activity Capture Improvements for Google Customers

If you’re a new Salesforce customer who wants to sync contacts or events with your Google account, Einstein Activity Capture is now
the go-to product for you. Or if you’re a current Lightning Sync user who’s considering the move to Einstein Activity Capture, check out
what’s new. For example, Salesforce Inbox users that are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails disabled can
manually log emails from the Gmail integration. Plus, admins can now add Inbox users to configurations that include any Einstein Activity
Capture settings.
Where: Lightning Sync and Einstein Activity Capture are available in various editions.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Lightning Sync: Not Available for New Customers as of Winter ’21 (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Compare Einstein Activity Capture and Lightning Sync (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
481
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Integration with Microsoft

Get improvements to event logging from Outlook. For Salesforce Inbox users, manually log emails when in an Einstein Activity Capture
configuration with emails turned off. If you’re ready to migrate from Lightning Sync to Einstein Activity Capture, the migration assistant
can help you do it quickly and easily. And if you’re still on Salesforce for Outlook, remember that the full product retirement is scheduled
for June 2023.
IN THIS SECTION:
Outlook Integration
Inbox users in an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails turned off.
Lightning Sync for Microsoft Exchange
Let Salesforce make the move to Einstein Activity Capture for you. Check out what’s new for Einstein Activity Capture and how you
can move quickly and easily using the Lightning Sync migration assistant.
Salesforce for Outlook is still scheduled for product retirement in June 2023. In the meantime, if you need version-specific Salesforce
for Outlook release notes, you can find them in the Outlook/Teams, Gmail, and Inbox Trailblazer Community.
Outlook Integration
Inbox users in an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails turned off.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Improved Event Logging in the Outlook Integration
If Salesforce is set up for shared activities, matching contact records shown when logging an event from Outlook are automatically
selected. If there are no matching contacts, the first matching lead is automatically selected. Plus, all the attendees on the manually
Salesforce Inbox users that are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has email capture disabled can now manually
log emails from Outlook. This change allows users to benefit from the event and contact portions of Einstein Activity Capture and
still manually log the emails that they need.
Simplified Multi-Factor Authentication in the Outlook Integration
Sales reps set up for single sign-on (SSO) and assigned the Multi-Factor Authentication for User Interface Logins permission are no
longer required to enter multi-factor challenges in the Outlook integration. This change doesn’t apply to users that are set up to
require username and passwords or for high assurance session security multi-factor authentication.
Support for the Outlook Integration in Older Versions of Outlook and Windows Is Ending
Support for running the Outlook integration in Outlook 2013, Outlook 2016, and volume-licensed versions of Outlook 2019 ends
December 31, 2022. For product support after that date, you need Office version 16.0.11629 or later and Windows 10 versions 1903
or later. You can continue to use the Outlook integration after the end of December 2022. After that date, Salesforce no longer
provides support and bug fixes and doesn’t guarantee new features in the older Outlook versions.
482
Get Improved Event Logging in the Outlook Integration

If Salesforce is set up for shared activities, matching contact records shown when logging an event from Outlook are automatically
selected. If there are no matching contacts, the first matching lead is automatically selected. Plus, all the attendees on the manually
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Make sure that Allow Users to Relate Multiple Contacts to Tasks and Events in Activity Settings is enabled in Salesforce setup.
Then, when a rep logs an event from Outlook, the contacts that appear in the related record are automatically selected. Reps can log an
event to up to 50 contacts or one lead. The integration only shows the first 15 matching records in the order the attendees appear on
the event. If there are no matching contacts in the first 15 records, the first lead record is automatically selected for logging. Reps can
deselect all contacts or deselect individual contacts before logging the event. Reps can also search for other contacts to log the event
to.
Logging events to internal users isn’t supported. If the attendee list includes matching users in the first 15 records, reps see the users
listed but can’t select them for logging.
To include all attendees from an invitation on the Salesforce event record, make sure that the Attendees field is available on your page
layouts for the Event object in Salesforce. Then, when reps log an event, all the attendees on the event, including internal users, are listed
on the event record. The attendee’s RSVP status isn’t shown.
Note: In Salesforce Classic, all attendees are captured in the Hasn’t Responded list on the event record. That list is available by
default.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set Up Event Logging from Outlook and Gmail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Guidelines for Logging Events from Outlook and Gmail to Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Salesforce Help: Enable Shared Activities (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Inbox users that are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has email capture disabled can now manually log
emails from Outlook. This change allows users to benefit from the event and contact portions of Einstein Activity Capture and still
manually log the emails that they need.
483
How: If an Inbox user is part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has emails disabled, they have the option to log an email
from the integration in Outlook.
The process to log an email is the same for Inbox and regular Outlook integration users.
If an Inbox user is part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration that has emails enabled, their emails are captured and logged to
Salesforce automatically. Those users still see the sharing options available for their Einstein Activity Capture configuration.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Select Who Can Use Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Simplified Multi-Factor Authentication in the Outlook Integration

Sales reps set up for single sign-on (SSO) and assigned the Multi-Factor Authentication for User Interface Logins permission are no longer
required to enter multi-factor challenges in the Outlook integration. This change doesn’t apply to users that are set up to require username
and passwords or for high assurance session security multi-factor authentication.
Where: This change applies Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
Why: By default, users who log in to Salesforce through an authentication provider that supports single sign-on (SSO) are no longer
challenged with multi-factor authentication requests. The Outlook integration supports SSO.
484
How: This change applies to new orgs in Winter ’22 automatically. For existing orgs, contact Salesforce Customer Support and ask to
enable suppressing MFA challenges for users in an OIDC-SSO flow.
SEE ALSO:
Support for the Outlook Integration in Older Versions of Outlook and Windows Is Ending
Support for running the Outlook integration in Outlook 2013, Outlook 2016, and volume-licensed versions of Outlook 2019 ends December
31, 2022. For product support after that date, you need Office version 16.0.11629 or later and Windows 10 versions 1903 or later. You
can continue to use the Outlook integration after the end of December 2022. After that date, Salesforce no longer provides support and
bug fixes and doesn’t guarantee new features in the older Outlook versions.
Where: This change applies to the Outlook integration, formerly known as Lightning for Outlook, in all editions, for users running Outlook
2013, Outlook 2016, or volume-licensed Outlook 2019.
Why: To ensure that you have the latest Microsoft security and product updates, we recommend that you always run the latest version
of Outlook and Windows. Plus, the Outlook integration is built on the Microsoft Add-in Framework. Original versions of that framework
use Internet Explorer 11 to launch the Salesforce add-in from desktop versions of Outlook. That requirement was true for all add-ins built
on that framework, not just the Salesforce add-in. The latest versions of the Add-in Framework use Microsoft Edge to launch the add-in.
Edge is the native browser available in newer versions of Windows. We continue to build the Outlook integration on the latest framework
version to use the latest technology.
How: To ensure continued support of the Outlook integration after December 2022, plan to upgrade now to Office version 16.0.11629
or later and Windows 10 version 1903 or later.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Outlook Integration System Requirements (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Lightning Sync for Microsoft Exchange

Let Salesforce make the move to Einstein Activity Capture for you. Check out what’s new for Einstein Activity Capture and how you can
move quickly and easily using the Lightning Sync migration assistant.
IN THIS SECTION:
Considering the move to Einstein Activity Capture? The Lightning Sync migration assistant is here to help! The assistant tells you
whether you’re ready, prepares you to manage product differences, then moves your settings from Lightning Sync to Einstein Activity
Capture. The assistant is so fast and easy, your users barely even notice the change.
Check Out Einstein Activity Capture Improvements for Microsoft Exchange Customers
If you’re a new Salesforce customer who wants to sync contacts or events with your Microsoft account, Einstein Activity Capture is
now the go-to product for you. Or if you’re a current Lightning Sync user who’s considering the move to Einstein Activity Capture,
check out what’s new. For example, Salesforce Inbox users that are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails
disabled can manually log emails from the Outlook integration. Plus, admins can now add Inbox users to configurations that include
any Einstein Activity Capture settings.
485

Considering the move to Einstein Activity Capture? The Lightning Sync migration assistant is here to help! The assistant tells you whether
you’re ready, prepares you to manage product differences, then moves your settings from Lightning Sync to Einstein Activity Capture.
The assistant is so fast and easy, your users barely even notice the change.
Who: Most Lightning Sync for Microsoft Exchange customers can use the migration assistant to move to Einstein Activity Capture, but
there are some limitations.
How: Kick off the migration assistant from the Outlook Integration and Sync page in Setup. If the migration assistant is supported for
you, under the Lightning Sync section, you see a new section called Migrate to Einstein Activity Capture.
To get resources that prepare you for the process, click Explore Migration.
And when you’re ready to move forward, the migration assistant steps you through the process. Follow along, and then later you can
obtain and assign the appropriate user permissions to get your sales reps using Einstein Activity Capture.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Move from Lightning Sync to Einstein Activity Capture (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Check Out Einstein Activity Capture Improvements for Microsoft Exchange Customers
If you’re a new Salesforce customer who wants to sync contacts or events with your Microsoft account, Einstein Activity Capture is now
the go-to product for you. Or if you’re a current Lightning Sync user who’s considering the move to Einstein Activity Capture, check out
what’s new. For example, Salesforce Inbox users that are part of an Einstein Activity Capture configuration with emails disabled can
manually log emails from the Outlook integration. Plus, admins can now add Inbox users to configurations that include any Einstein
Activity Capture settings.
486
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Lightning Sync: Not Available for New Customers as of Winter ’21 (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Salesforce for Outlook is still scheduled for product retirement in June 2023. In the meantime, if you need version-specific Salesforce for
Outlook release notes, you can find them in the Outlook/Teams, Gmail, and Inbox Trailblazer Community.
IN THIS SECTION:
Salesforce for Outlook Is Being Retired in June 2023
As previously announced, Salesforce for Outlook is scheduled for full product retirement in June 2023. For the latest in integration
with Outlook, we recommend moving to our next generation products, the Outlook Integration and Einstein Activity Capture. Check
out what’s new for those products.
Find Version-Specific Salesforce for Outlook Release Notes
Wondering about the updates available in each Salesforce for Outlook version? Find those version-specific release notes in the
Outlook/Teams, Gmail, and Inbox Trailblazer Community.
Salesforce for Outlook Is Being Retired in June 2023

As previously announced, Salesforce for Outlook is scheduled for full product retirement in June 2023. For the latest in integration with
Outlook, we recommend moving to our next generation products, the Outlook Integration and Einstein Activity Capture. Check out
what’s new for those products.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Contact Manager, Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
Why: After retirement, Salesforce for Outlook no longer syncs contacts, events, or tasks. And, the Salesforce for Outlook Side Panel doesn’t
connect to Salesforce, so sales reps can’t work with their Salesforce records from Microsoft Outlook®.
How: To learn about Einstein Activity Capture and Outlook Integration improvements, see those release notes.
• Outlook Integration
• Einstein Activity Capture
To learn more about Salesforce for Outlook retirement and to compare replacement products, see Salesforce for Outlook Retirement.
And for support during your transition to the latest products, check out the migration guide, Move from Salesforce for Outlook to the
Next-Generation Products.
Find Version-Specific Salesforce for Outlook Release Notes

Wondering about the updates available in each Salesforce for Outlook version? Find those version-specific release notes in the
Outlook/Teams, Gmail, and Inbox Trailblazer Community.
487
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Other Changes in the Sales Cloud
Where: These changes apply to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Contact Manager, Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise,
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Trailblazer Community: Salesforce for Outlook Release Notes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Learn about other changes we’ve made to improve usability.
IN THIS SECTION:
Feedback Option for Einstein Email Insights Was Removed
Sales reps can no longer submit feedback for email insights. So the thumbs-up and thumbs-down options were removed.
Feedback Option for Einstein Email Insights Was Removed

Sales reps can no longer submit feedback for email insights. So the thumbs-up and thumbs-down options were removed.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Turn On Einstein Email Insights (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

with Salesforce data and records created from Salesforce live apps, or work in Salesforce with the Template Library in Lightning Experience.
Speed up your Quip setup with the New Document global quick action automatically added to all your global publisher layouts. Learn
about the latest updates to Salesforce Anywhere Beta features.
IN THIS SECTION:
When to Expect Salesforce Anywhere Features
New Salesforce Anywhere features are coming soon.
Create Documents from Templates from Anywhere
Now your users can access their Template Library galleries, such as the Created by Me or company galleries, in Lightning Experience.
Your users can create documents from templates and stay in Salesforce, making it easier to keep their free-form content and Salesforce
data in context.
Populate Salesforce Data Automatically in a Document Created from a Template in Quip
Now your users can create documents from templates in Quip that autofill based on a Salesforce record’s data. Previously, users
created a document from a template with Salesforce data from a record in Lightning Experience. If Synced Sharing is on, users with
access to the linked record can access the document via Synced Sharing.
488
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes When to Expect Salesforce Anywhere Features
Streamline Template Creation with New Settings

To add Salesforce data to your templates more easily, you can associate new templates with a Salesforce org and object. Salesforce
Data Mentions and Salesforce live apps that you add to the template are linked to the org and object by default, and users experience
fewer data autofill errors. Migrate templates from your test environment to your production environment without updating every
instance of Salesforce data in the templates. Previously, you configured this link every time you added Salesforce data to a template.
Simplify Document Creation in Lightning Experience with New Document Global Action Improvements
Now it’s easier to add the New Document global action to your global publisher layouts. Your users can create a document wherever
they are in Lightning Experience, link it to a record, and collaborate with their teams. They can add the things they know and love
to their documents such as @mentions, Salesforce data mentions, and spreadsheets.
Understand Who Can Access a Document with Synced Sharing Enhancements
Your users can now see when others can access their documents linked to a Salesforce record. When a user links their document to
a record, they can see what level of access Synced Sharing grants to other users. When Synced Sharing is enabled but users haven’t
connected their Salesforce org to Quip, they’re now prompted to connect their org to view the linked document.
Salesforce Anywhere Beta Is Being Retired
Salesforce Anywhere Beta is scheduled for retirement on September 10, 2021.
The Collaboration User Engagement Records Table Is Being Retired
The CollabUserEngmtRecordLink object is deprecated, but you can extract the same information in Tableau CRM by
linking existing tables. Previously, the Collaboration User Engagement Record table provided an association between Quip user
engagement metrics and a Salesforce record.
Share Your Live Apps with Selected Quip Sites
Streamline your live apps distribution and maintenance by building a live app once and deploying it to multiple sites. Use the new
Sites feature in the Live Apps Developer Console to share your company’s live apps with other Quip sites. They can be your own
managed sites or other companies’ sites. If you’re a Salesforce partner, you can share your live apps with multiple customers.
Simplify Quip User Account Management with the New Bulk SCIM API Method
Update or disable multiple Quip user accounts at the same time with the Bulk System for Cross-domain Identity Management (SCIM)
API method. You can use this API method to fulfill your compliance and user-management service-level agreements (SLAs).
Simplify Bulk Document Archiving with New Quip Admin API Methods
Export multiple Quip threads such as documents or spreadsheets to PDF with the Create Bulk Export PDFs Request API method. You
can also include the conversation history for each thread. Get your requested PDFs by calling the Retrieve Bulk Export PDF Response
API method.
Automate Information Sharing and Document Editing in Quip
Use the Quip Automation API method to add rows to a Quip spreadsheet, export a Quip spreadsheet to PDF, and streamline your
Quip document-editing process.
Get Better Performance with the Quip Automation API
Maximum limits have been applied to several Automation API inputs. Experience better performance when calling various Automation
API methods.
Get the Enhanced Salesforce Anywhere Experience
Learn more about the new enhancements to Salesforce Anywhere.
When to Expect Salesforce Anywhere Features

New Salesforce Anywhere features are coming soon.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
When: See when you can start using new Salesforce Anywhere features.
489
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Create Documents from Templates from Anywhere
Feature Date
Section_ids output in the Edit a Document API method Available now
Export Quip spreadsheets to PDF API Available now
Improved Quip Automation API October 2021
Add rows to a Quip spreadsheet with a Quip Automation API October 2021
method
Bulk document archiving with Quip Admin API methods September 2021
Share live apps with selected Quip sites September 2021
Bulk user account management with Quip SCIM API method September 2021
New Document Global Action Improvements Salesforce Preview
Synced Sharing Enhancements When the release goes live for your org
Salesforce Anywhere Beta Retirement September 10, 2021
Quip Engagement Metric Enhancements October 2021
Automatically Populate Salesforce Data Using a Template September 2021
Access Template Library in Salesforce September 2021
Link a Template to an Org and Object September 2021
Use printer-friendly formatting for live data November 2021
Create Documents from Templates from Anywhere

Now your users can access their Template Library galleries, such as the Created by Me or company galleries, in Lightning Experience.
Your users can create documents from templates and stay in Salesforce, making it easier to keep their free-form content and Salesforce
data in context.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Professional, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Available
in Salesforce orgs with an existing Quip for Customer 360 plan or Salesforce Anywhere Advanced.
How: From the Quip Documents component or Quip Associated Documents component, click New from Template.
Populate Salesforce Data Automatically in a Document Created from a

Template in Quip
Now your users can create documents from templates in Quip that autofill based on a Salesforce record’s data. Previously, users created
a document from a template with Salesforce data from a record in Lightning Experience. If Synced Sharing is on, users with access to
the linked record can access the document via Synced Sharing.
How: Create a document from a template that includes a Salesforce record or report, and then select a Salesforce record in the New
Document from Template window.
490
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Streamline Template Creation with New Settings
Streamline Template Creation with New Settings

To add Salesforce data to your templates more easily, you can associate new templates with a Salesforce org and object. Salesforce Data
Mentions and Salesforce live apps that you add to the template are linked to the org and object by default, and users experience fewer
data autofill errors. Migrate templates from your test environment to your production environment without updating every instance of
Salesforce data in the templates. Previously, you configured this link every time you added Salesforce data to a template.
How: When you create a template, select an org and object in the New Document from Template window. You can change the values
from the Salesforce Actions cloud or by clicking the current values in the document header.
Simplify Document Creation in Lightning Experience with New Document

Global Action Improvements
Now it’s easier to add the New Document global action to your global publisher layouts. Your users can create a document wherever
they are in Lightning Experience, link it to a record, and collaborate with their teams. They can add the things they know and love to
their documents such as @mentions, Salesforce data mentions, and spreadsheets.
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Salesforce Anywhere (Quip). Under Create a Document from Anywhere,
click Add Global Action. The New Document global quick action is automatically added to all global publisher layouts.
Understand Who Can Access a Document with Synced Sharing

Enhancements
Your users can now see when others can access their documents linked to a Salesforce record. When a user links their document to a
record, they can see what level of access Synced Sharing grants to other users. When Synced Sharing is enabled but users haven’t
connected their Salesforce org to Quip, they’re now prompted to connect their org to view the linked document.
How: To see the level of access that users have to a linked document when Synced Sharing is enabled, open the Share window.
491
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Anywhere Beta Is Being Retired
Salesforce Anywhere Beta Is Being Retired

Salesforce Anywhere Beta is scheduled for retirement on September 10, 2021.
Where: This change applies to the Salesforce Anywhere mobile app for iOS in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
It also applies to Setup for this feature in Lightning Experience. Available in Salesforce orgs with an existing Quip for Customer 360 plan
or Salesforce Anywhere Advanced.
The Collaboration User Engagement Records Table Is Being Retired

The CollabUserEngmtRecordLink object is deprecated, but you can extract the same information in Tableau CRM by linking
existing tables. Previously, the Collaboration User Engagement Record table provided an association between Quip user engagement
metrics and a Salesforce record.
How: To create the same association that CollabUserEngmntRecordLink provided, you can link a user engagements table to
a document metrics records table.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Quip Engagement Metrics (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Share Your Live Apps with Selected Quip Sites

Streamline your live apps distribution and maintenance by building a live app once and deploying it to multiple sites. Use the new Sites
feature in the Live Apps Developer Console to share your company’s live apps with other Quip sites. They can be your own managed
sites or other companies’ sites. If you’re a Salesforce partner, you can share your live apps with multiple customers.
492
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Simplify Quip User Account Management with the New Bulk
SCIM API Method
in Salesforce orgs with an existing Quip for Customer 360 plan or Salesforce Anywhere Advanced. This change also applies to users with
Quip Plus.
SEE ALSO:
Live Apps Developer Documentation (can be outdated or unavailable before September 2021)
Simplify Quip User Account Management with the New Bulk SCIM API
Method
Update or disable multiple Quip user accounts at the same time with the Bulk System for Cross-domain Identity Management (SCIM)
API method. You can use this API method to fulfill your compliance and user-management service-level agreements (SLAs).
Quip Plus. This API method is available in version 2 of the SCIM API.
SEE ALSO:
SCIM API documentation (can be outdated or unavailable before September 2021)
Simplify Bulk Document Archiving with New Quip Admin API Methods
Export multiple Quip threads such as documents or spreadsheets to PDF with the Create Bulk Export PDFs Request API method. You
can also include the conversation history for each thread. Get your requested PDFs by calling the Retrieve Bulk Export PDF Response API
method.
Quip Plus.
Why: Use the Create Bulk Export PDFs Request API method to fulfill eDiscovery and other regulatory requirements and archive threads
into other systems. You can also use one of your other systems to search all PDF thread data, including comments, and export the
matching results.
SEE ALSO:
Admin API Documentation (can be outdated or unavailable before September 2021)
Automate Information Sharing and Document Editing in Quip

Use the Quip Automation API method to add rows to a Quip spreadsheet, export a Quip spreadsheet to PDF, and streamline your Quip
document-editing process.
Quip Plus.
Why: Get more functionality with these new and updated Quip API methods.
• Add Rows to Spreadsheet
493
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Get Better Performance with the Quip Automation API
– Analyze and collaborate on data from multiple systems in a Quip spreadsheet.

– Mix and match data from different sources and automatically add it to the same Quip spreadsheet whenever new data becomes
available.
– Work with a range of data types: support cases, event registrations, approved documents, survey results, or payments.
• Create Export PDF Request

– Mark an approval cycle as complete, take a record-keeping snapshot, and share the PDF internally or with customers.
– Request to export a Quip spreadsheet to PDF. Previously, you could only request PDFs of Quip documents using the Create
Export PDF Request API method.
• Retrieve Export PDF Response

– Get your requested PDF of a Quip spreadsheet after you call the Create Export PDF Request API method. Previously, you could
only get PDFs of Quip documents using the Retrieve Export PDF Response API method.
• Edit a Document
– Get the list of identifiers (section_ids) for new content that you just added to a Quip document. You can use a section_id to
identify where you want to add new data when you make another API call. Previously, the section_ids field wasn’t returned by
the Edit a Document API method.
SEE ALSO:
Automation API Documentation (can be outdated or unavailable before October 2021)
Get Better Performance with the Quip Automation API

Maximum limits have been applied to several Automation API inputs. Experience better performance when calling various Automation
API methods.
Quip Plus.
Why: Calling some Automation API methods occasionally involves large inputs that can cause slow performance or errors. The maximum
limits can prevent performance issues and errors when you call these Automation API methods.
API Methods Inputs
• Add People to a Thread or Add a Thread to Folders • content

• Copy a Document or Template • count
• Edit a Document • ids
• Import a File • member_ids
494
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Get the Enhanced Salesforce Anywhere Experience
API Methods Inputs
• Get Threads • title

• Create a Chat Room
• Create a Document, Spreadsheet or Slides
• Get Recent Threads
• Remove People from a Thread or Remove a Thread from Folders
• Get Recent Messages
• Add People to a Folder
• Create a Folder
• Get Users
SEE ALSO:
Automation API Documentation (can be outdated or unavailable before October 2021)
Get the Enhanced Salesforce Anywhere Experience

Learn more about the new enhancements to Salesforce Anywhere.
Quip Plus.
Why: Salesforce Anywhere (Quip) features include these enhancements.
• When you use the Edit Quip Document action in Salesforce Flow or Process Builder to add content to a document, Quip by default
adds an extra line after each paragraph. Now there’s a checkbox to disable it and a new Flow API parameter, Disable Extra
Lines in Quip.
• You can export a spreadsheet to a PDF. The Export Quip Document to PDF action for Salesforce Flow and Process Builder now
includes the Sheet Name API parameter. Use Sheet Name to specify the name of the spreadsheet to export.
• To make reporting more accurate, Quip engagement metrics continue to be enhanced. And, automatic live app refreshes no longer
count in document edit metrics.
• Your users can now open Tableau CRM dashboards from the Quip mobile app for iOS. Users can launch Tableau CRM for mobile
from any dashboards embedded in their documents. They must be signed in to the Quip and Tableau CRM mobile apps with the
same username and org.
• To make printed and exported documents more readable, your users can turn on printer-friendly formatting for all the live data in
a document, including Salesforce Data Mentions.
• To find your templates more quickly, use search in the Template Library. You can search by title and narrow the search to a specific
gallery.
• Salesforce Data Mentions now supports editing multi-select picklist and dependent picklist fields. Field dependencies are visually
represented in the Edit Dependencies window.
495
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce CDP
Salesforce CDP
Commerce Cloud. Look out for a more accessible experience for mapping data and major improvements in Identity Resolution. There’s
also a new Salesforce Web SDK to unify website instrumentation across Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create CRM Bundles with Data Kits from Your Salesforce CDP Data
Streamline the CRM data bundle creation and set up experience for Salesforce CDP in a few clicks using Data Kits.
Capture Event Updates on Calculated Insights, Identity Resolution, and Schema Changes
Get the latest status change events of your Salesforce CDP schema, Calculated Insights, and Identity Resolution usage automatically.
Admin users can use these events in Flow Builder to get notifications of when something errors out in order to investigate.
Enjoy an Improved Identity Resolution Experience
Identity Resolution has a new location directly in the main navigation of Salesforce CDP. Take advantage of all that identity resolution
offers, such as creating rulesets and viewing details, alongside the rest of Salesforce CDP. The new location lets users who have the
Data Aware Specialist permission access identity resolution and create unified profiles. Previously, only admin users had access to
identity resolution because of its location in setup.
Take Control of Unified Profiles with Match Rules
Match rules for linking multiple records into unified profiles have more built-in functionality. Match rules now support custom fields,
fuzzy match for first name, and normalized match of address, phone, and email contact points. Create match rules for rulesets based
on the Individual entity in Identity Resolution.
Create Better Unified Individuals with Multiple Individual Rulesets
As part of Identity Resolutions, you can combine match rules and reconciliation rules together into a ruleset for the Individual entity
to use throughout Salesforce CDP. You can create two rulesets with different configurations for the Individual entity to explore your
data and create the best unified individuals for your use case. Use Data Explorer to compare the unified profiles created by the
different match and reconciliation rules.
Drive Actions from Salesforce CDP with Data Actions
Create data actions based on the insights stored in Salesforce CDP to leverage streaming and cross-functional organization. Data
Actions helps drive the actionability of the near real-time Insight. A Data Action containing a rich payload can be triggered based
on certain conditions and can enable downstream systems to drive an action or orchestration
Download Datasets into Salesforce CDP to Use in Tableau Desktop
Download selected entities in Salesforce CDP's data model along with their relationships with one click as a Tableau Data Source
(TDS) file. Opening a TDS in Tableau Desktop eliminates the need to remodel CDP data in Tableau.
Stream Data from Your Own External Sources using Ingestion API
Use the Ingestion API, a REST API, to stream data from your external sources into Salesforce CDP. You can create a connector, upload
your schema, and create data streams into your org. Using the API, you can stream data in incremental fashion or ingest in bulk.
Connect to Mulesoft for a User-Friendly API Experience
Use the power of Mulesoft and its robust ecosystem of data connectors to more easily bring your data into Salesforce CDP. Enrich
existing Salesforce CDP records to automate data ingestion from third-party data sources.
Switch between canvas view and table view when mapping your data. Table view provides a more accessible experience when
connecting data source objects to data model objects.
496
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce CDP
Draw Insights on Salesforce CDP Data Using Tableau CRM (Beta)

Use Salesforce CDP data in Tableau to run deep explorations on your unified customer data source without loading data or preparing
it in Tableau CRM first. After setting up a live connection to Salesforce CDP, you can run queries on Salesforce CDP data associated
with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on the queries that you run on this data.
Connect Your B2C Commerce Data to Salesforce CDP
You can connect one or more production B2C Commerce instances to Salesforce CDP with clicks, not code. The connector can bring
in transactional order data with related product catalog and profile data. You can choose which B2C Commerce site data is brought
into Salesforce CDP. For example, use enriched unified profiles with e Commerce order data to deliver more personalized cross-channel
experiences.
Salesforce Interactions Web SDK for Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio
A shared Web SDK across Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio simplifies the configuration process for you. You can instrument
the website one time and easily migrate from one product to the other. Additionally, we now support remote configuration through
the sitemap. Load the sitemap in Salesforce CDP and update it at any time without the need to redeploy the website each time you
must update tracking. With the sitemap you can update website tracking as your marketing strategy evolves.
Get a Complete View of a Salesforce CDP Unified Individual with Profile Explorer
With Profile Explorer in Salesforce CDP, you can view unified individual profiles. A Unified Individual profile shows data about Unified
Individual fields, Contact points, Identity Resolution, Engagement, and Calculated Insights. Use the new Profile Explorer to search
for Unified Individual profiles and view all the attached data.
Create metrics on streaming data coming from real-time data sources, such as website engagement or website clickstreams, to use
real-time insights. Drive more value with insights by enabling cross-functional orchestration in Salesforce CDP. This release supports
streaming engagement data from Web SDK, Mobile SDK, and Interaction Studio.
Create Calculated Insights with Insight Builder
Create metrics in Salesforce CDP using the intuitive UX tool, no SQL knowledge required.
Simplify Calculated Insights Building with Metrics on Metrics
Use metrics on metrics to build more comprehensive insights, such as engagement scores, customer health scores, and customer
attribution scores. Organize complex Calculated Insights SQL data into logical steps and stitch powerful workflows. Metrics on metrics
also allow you to improve metrics reuse for multiple use case scenarios.
Create Smarter Segments with the Power of Einstein Engagement Scores
Email Studio and MobilePush starter bundles automatically include Einstein Engagement Scores and make them available in the
attribute library when building segments. Building segments based on these scores lets marketers target the most engaged users
and suppress disengaged users for higher click-through rates, as well as create personalized and intelligent campaigns. Use the
EinsteinEmailEngagementScores and EinsteinMobileEngagementScores objects in the attribute library to build your segments.
Build Segments Based on Many-1-Many Relationships
All Related objects are now supported in the attribute library for even more flexibility in building segments. We’re now enabling
objects under Many-to-1 to 1-to-Many relationships. For example, you can build a segment based on the many ProductAttribute
object mapped to the one Product object, and the one Product object mapped to the many SalesOrderProduct object.
Use the Greater Than Last Number of Days filter in segmentation to find customers who have previously completed a task. For
example, build a segment of customers who have visited your website prior to 7 days ago, regardless of their activity in the past 7
days. Use this segment and send a targeted promotion to encourage them to come back.
Complex Calculated Insights Functions Now Supported in Segmentation
Segmentation now supports new complex Calculated Insights measures: non-numeric, such as text and date, and non-aggregatable,
such as rank, bucket, and range. Navigate to the Segmentation tab in Salesforce CDP and create a segment using measures from
Calculated Insights.
497
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Create CRM Bundles with Data Kits from Your Salesforce CDP
Data
Find Activations Easily in Marketing Cloud Shared Data Extensions

To make it easier to manage all your Salesforce CDP activations across different platforms, each activation to Marketing Cloud now
includes an automatically created unique ID. The ID includes the segment ID and activation ID from Salesforce CDP. The ID is visible
in Marketing Cloud Shared Data Extensions to make searching and finding specific activations easier in Marketing Cloud.
Activate to Commerce Cloud to Personalize Commerce Experiences
Now generally available, easily ingest transactional order data via a native connector for B2C Commerce. Build segments and generate
insights combining ecommerce and cross-cloud data. Create intelligent ecommerce experiences for registered shoppers with a B2C
Commerce activation target.
Non-Aggregatable Measures Now Supported in Activation
Non-aggregatable metrics let you personalize messages and make marketing decisions using granular metrics, for example, “last
purchase date” for a product category.
New Calculated Insights Data Types Now Supported in Activation
Activation now supports DateTime measures, dimensions, and Text measures for Calculated Insights. Expanded data types allow
you to support specific use cases like last purchase date to run promotional campaigns.
Use the Privacy Data Model to Honor Customer Consent Preferences
The privacy data model offers you a robust and extensible way to store consumer privacy preferences. Using the data model starts
with Party Consent and focuses into more granular levels of consent to suit your business needs. The Privacy data model can also
be used in Segmentation to ensure your Audience counts are properly reflective of consent preferences.
Salesforce CDP API: New and Changed Items
Use the Salesforce CDP API more effectively with more data objects in version 53.0.
Download Release Notes PDF for Salesforce CDP Releases Before Winter ’22
Looking for release notes before Winter ’22? Click this link to download them in PDF: Salesforce CDP Release Notes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce CDP (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create CRM Bundles with Data Kits from Your Salesforce CDP Data
Streamline the CRM data bundle creation and set up experience for Salesforce CDP in a few clicks using Data Kits.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience.
How: Navigate to Salesforce CDP Setup to create and view your Data Kits.
SEE ALSO:
Data Kits
Capture Event Updates on Calculated Insights, Identity Resolution, and

Schema Changes
Get the latest status change events of your Salesforce CDP schema, Calculated Insights, and Identity Resolution usage automatically.
Admin users can use these events in Flow Builder to get notifications of when something errors out in order to investigate.
How: The latest status and event of your Salesforce CDP usage updates automatically, making platform features like Reports or Flows
more accurate.
498
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Enjoy an Improved Identity Resolution Experience
Enjoy an Improved Identity Resolution Experience

Identity Resolution has a new location directly in the main navigation of Salesforce CDP. Take advantage of all that identity resolution
offers, such as creating rulesets and viewing details, alongside the rest of Salesforce CDP. The new location lets users who have the Data
Aware Specialist permission access identity resolution and create unified profiles. Previously, only admin users had access to identity
resolution because of its location in setup.
Who: Users who have the Data Aware Specialist permission gain access to Identity Resolution automatically in Winter ’22.
How: Identity Resolutions created before the Winter ’22 release automatically move to the new location in the main navigation with
the release, including all existing match rules and reconciliation rules. Navigate to Identity Resolutions in Salesforce CDP to see your new
Identity Resolution Ruleset called All Individuals.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Identity Resolution (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Take Control of Unified Profiles with Match Rules

Match rules for linking multiple records into unified profiles have more built-in functionality. Match rules now support custom fields,
fuzzy match for first name, and normalized match of address, phone, and email contact points. Create match rules for rulesets based on
the Individual entity in Identity Resolution.
SEE ALSO:
Create Better Unified Individuals with Multiple Individual Rulesets

As part of Identity Resolutions, you can combine match rules and reconciliation rules together into a ruleset for the Individual entity to
use throughout Salesforce CDP. You can create two rulesets with different configurations for the Individual entity to explore your data
and create the best unified individuals for your use case. Use Data Explorer to compare the unified profiles created by the different match
and reconciliation rules.
How: In Identity Resolutions, click New and create up to two rulesets based on the Individual entity.
SEE ALSO:
Drive Actions from Salesforce CDP with Data Actions

Create data actions based on the insights stored in Salesforce CDP to leverage streaming and cross-functional organization. Data Actions
helps drive the actionability of the near real-time Insight. A Data Action containing a rich payload can be triggered based on certain
conditions and can enable downstream systems to drive an action or orchestration
499
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Download Datasets into Salesforce CDP to Use in Tableau
Desktop
How: Navigate to the Data Action Targets tab in Salesforce CDP and create a data action target. After you create the target, navigate to
the Data Actions tab in Salesforce CDP and create a data action.
SEE ALSO:
Control and Metadata Change Events
Download Datasets into Salesforce CDP to Use in Tableau Desktop

Download selected entities in Salesforce CDP's data model along with their relationships with one click as a Tableau Data Source (TDS)
file. Opening a TDS in Tableau Desktop eliminates the need to remodel CDP data in Tableau.
How: Navigate to the Salesforce CDP Data Model tab, and click Download Tableau Source File.
Stream Data from Your Own External Sources using Ingestion API
Use the Ingestion API, a REST API, to stream data from your external sources into Salesforce CDP. You can create a connector, upload
your schema, and create data streams into your org. Using the API, you can stream data in incremental fashion or ingest in bulk.
Connect to Mulesoft for a User-Friendly API Experience

Use the power of Mulesoft and its robust ecosystem of data connectors to more easily bring your data into Salesforce CDP. Enrich existing
Salesforce CDP records to automate data ingestion from third-party data sources.
Where: This change applies to MuleSoft AnyPoint Exchange.

Switch between canvas view and table view when mapping your data. Table view provides a more accessible experience when connecting
data source objects to data model objects.
How: Navigate to the Data Streams tab in Salesforce CDP, and click the view toggle dropdown.
SEE ALSO:
Data Mapper Views
Draw Insights on Salesforce CDP Data Using Tableau CRM (Beta)

Use Salesforce CDP data in Tableau to run deep explorations on your unified customer data source without loading data or preparing
it in Tableau CRM first. After setting up a live connection to Salesforce CDP, you can run queries on Salesforce CDP data associated with
the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on the queries that you run on this data.
500
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Connect Your B2C Commerce Data to Salesforce CDP
Who: Tableau CRM Direct Data for Salesforce CDP is available to users with a Salesforce CDP license.
Why: With Tableau CRM Direct Data for Salesforce CDP, you can analyze your customer data to identify the customers most likely to
churn. Or, create powerful visualizations that reveal purchasing patterns within various customer segments.
Connect Your B2C Commerce Data to Salesforce CDP

You can connect one or more production B2C Commerce instances to Salesforce CDP with clicks, not code. The connector can bring in
transactional order data with related product catalog and profile data. You can choose which B2C Commerce site data is brought into
Salesforce CDP. For example, use enriched unified profiles with e Commerce order data to deliver more personalized cross-channel
experiences.
Where: Available in all Salesforce CDP editions.
When: B2C Commerce Connector is available in the Winter ’22 release.
How: To configure the connector and deploy B2C Commerce data streams, you must be a Salesforce CDP Admin. All other user profiles
have access to the B2C Commerce data after it’s ingested into Salesforce CDP. In Salesforce CDP, access CDP Setup and then the B2C
Commerce configurations. Connect to your B2C Commerce instance, and select one or more B2C Commerce sites you want to ingest
data from. After your B2C Commerce instance is connected, you can create data streams for that instance using the Order Bundle.
Salesforce Interactions Web SDK for Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio
A shared Web SDK across Salesforce CDP and Interaction Studio simplifies the configuration process for you. You can instrument the
website one time and easily migrate from one product to the other. Additionally, we now support remote configuration through the
sitemap. Load the sitemap in Salesforce CDP and update it at any time without the need to redeploy the website each time you must
update tracking. With the sitemap you can update website tracking as your marketing strategy evolves.
How: To set up the Salesforce Interactions Web SDK, register the website as a website app. Work with your website developer and data
aware specialist to complete the setup.
Get a Complete View of a Salesforce CDP Unified Individual with Profile

Explorer
With Profile Explorer in Salesforce CDP, you can view unified individual profiles. A Unified Individual profile shows data about Unified
Individual fields, Contact points, Identity Resolution, Engagement, and Calculated Insights. Use the new Profile Explorer to search for
Unified Individual profiles and view all the attached data.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and is available to all Salesforce CDP customers.
Who: Salesforce CDP Users with access to Data Explorer can also access Profile Explorer.
How: Access the Profile Explorer tab in the Salesforce CDP interface. Use the search to find a unified profile by selecting attributes like
First Name, Last Name, Email address, Phone number, and Individual ID.
SEE ALSO:
Profile Explorer in Salesforce CDP
Search for a Unified Individual in the Salesforce CDP Profile Explorer
501
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Create Streaming Insights in Real-Time

Create metrics on streaming data coming from real-time data sources, such as website engagement or website clickstreams, to use
real-time insights. Drive more value with insights by enabling cross-functional orchestration in Salesforce CDP. This release supports
streaming engagement data from Web SDK, Mobile SDK, and Interaction Studio.
How: Navigate to the Calculated Insights tab in Salesforce CDP and create a streaming insight.
Create Calculated Insights with Insight Builder

Create metrics in Salesforce CDP using the intuitive UX tool, no SQL knowledge required.
Why: Insight Builder is a business-analyst focused and user-friendly metrics authoring tool.
How: Navigate to the Calculated Insights tab in Salesforce CDP and create an insight with the visual builder.
Simplify Calculated Insights Building with Metrics on Metrics

Use metrics on metrics to build more comprehensive insights, such as engagement scores, customer health scores, and customer
attribution scores. Organize complex Calculated Insights SQL data into logical steps and stitch powerful workflows. Metrics on metrics
also allow you to improve metrics reuse for multiple use case scenarios.
How: Navigate to the Calculated Insights tab in Salesforce CDP and create a new calculated insight using metrics.
Create Smarter Segments with the Power of Einstein Engagement Scores

Email Studio and MobilePush starter bundles automatically include Einstein Engagement Scores and make them available in the attribute
library when building segments. Building segments based on these scores lets marketers target the most engaged users and suppress
disengaged users for higher click-through rates, as well as create personalized and intelligent campaigns. Use the
EinsteinEmailEngagementScores and EinsteinMobileEngagementScores objects in the attribute library to build your segments.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience with Einstein Engagement Scoring enabled in Marketing Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Starter Data Bundles (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Segment Canvas Interface (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Einstein Engagement Scoring Data Package (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Build Segments Based on Many-1-Many Relationships

All Related objects are now supported in the attribute library for even more flexibility in building segments. We’re now enabling objects
under Many-to-1 to 1-to-Many relationships. For example, you can build a segment based on the many ProductAttribute object mapped
to the one Product object, and the one Product object mapped to the many SalesOrderProduct object.
502
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Find Customers to Engage with Again
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Segment Canvas Interface (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Use the Greater Than Last Number of Days filter in segmentation to find customers who have previously completed a task. For example,
build a segment of customers who have visited your website prior to 7 days ago, regardless of their activity in the past 7 days. Use this
segment and send a targeted promotion to encourage them to come back.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Datatype Expression Operators (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Segments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Complex Calculated Insights Functions Now Supported in Segmentation

Segmentation now supports new complex Calculated Insights measures: non-numeric, such as text and date, and non-aggregatable,
such as rank, bucket, and range. Navigate to the Segmentation tab in Salesforce CDP and create a segment using measures from Calculated
Insights.
Find Activations Easily in Marketing Cloud Shared Data Extensions

To make it easier to manage all your Salesforce CDP activations across different platforms, each activation to Marketing Cloud now
includes an automatically created unique ID. The ID includes the segment ID and activation ID from Salesforce CDP. The ID is visible in
Marketing Cloud Shared Data Extensions to make searching and finding specific activations easier in Marketing Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience with Shared Data Extensions enabled in Marketing Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Find Segments in Marketing Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Data Extensions for Salesforce CDP (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Activate to Commerce Cloud to Personalize Commerce Experiences

Now generally available, easily ingest transactional order data via a native connector for B2C Commerce. Build segments and generate
insights combining ecommerce and cross-cloud data. Create intelligent ecommerce experiences for registered shoppers with a B2C
Commerce activation target.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Commerce Cloud Connector (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
503
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Non-Aggregatable Measures Now Supported in Activation
Non-Aggregatable Measures Now Supported in Activation

Non-aggregatable metrics let you personalize messages and make marketing decisions using granular metrics, for example, “last purchase
date” for a product category.
How: Navigate to the Activation tab in Salesforce CDP, and create an activation using measures from Calculated Insights.
New Calculated Insights Data Types Now Supported in Activation

Activation now supports DateTime measures, dimensions, and Text measures for Calculated Insights. Expanded data types allow you to
support specific use cases like last purchase date to run promotional campaigns.
How: Navigate to the Activation tab in Salesforce CDP, and create an activation using measures from Calculated Insights.
Use the Privacy Data Model to Honor Customer Consent Preferences

The privacy data model offers you a robust and extensible way to store consumer privacy preferences. Using the data model starts with
Party Consent and focuses into more granular levels of consent to suit your business needs. The Privacy data model can also be used in
Segmentation to ensure your Audience counts are properly reflective of consent preferences.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Privacy Data Model (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Consent Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce CDP API: New and Changed Items

Use the Salesforce CDP API more effectively with more data objects in version 53.0.
Receive real-time notifications by subscribing to the channels of these new and changed standard platform events.
Be notified of an action that occurs
Use the new DataObjectDataChgEvent object.
Be notified of metadata change for Data Lake, Data Model, and Calculated Insight objects
Use the new DataObjectMetadataChgEvent object.
Metadata API includes new types and fields.
Create a top-level data kit container definition
Use the new DataPackageKitDefinition metadata type.
Retrieve information about a data kit, such as CRM bundle and Data Models
Use the new DataPackageKitObject metadata type.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Developer Guide: Standard Platform Event Object List (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
504
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Download Release Notes PDF for Salesforce CDP Releases
Before Winter ’22
Download Release Notes PDF for Salesforce CDP Releases Before Winter
’22
Looking for release notes before Winter ’22? Click this link to download them in PDF: Salesforce CDP Release Notes.
Salesforce CMS
IN THIS SECTION:
Preview Salesforce CMS Content on Your Site
Now content managers and content admins can preview Salesforce CMS content as it appears in their desktop, tablet, or mobile
Experience Cloud sites before you publish to a channel. Previously, you couldn't see how CMS content appeared in different site
contexts before publishing.
Preview Salesforce CMS Content on Your Site

Now content managers and content admins can preview Salesforce CMS content as it appears in their desktop, tablet, or mobile
Experience Cloud sites before you publish to a channel. Previously, you couldn't see how CMS content appeared in different site contexts
before publishing.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience when you purchase Salesforce CMS in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
Who: Content preview is available with a paid CMS license.
How: Open the content details page in Salesforce CMS and click Preview. The Experience Builder site preview opens in a new tab and
the content detail page shows the site’s configuration for the content type. To preview the content in your Experience Cloud site, select
a view mode, either desktop, tablet, or mobile, and select a channel.

To comply with browser requirements, you must have a My Domain, or we deploy one for you. Verify your identity with biometric built-in
authenticators. To help you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement, use the MFA Rollout Pack. Enjoy a more
intuitive consent data model and Portability Policy dashboards. Event Monitoring includes four new event log file types and more detailed
Transaction Security policy notification emails. Encrypt more Financial Services Cloud data at rest. And Threat Detection integration with
Security Center is now generally available, along with customizable alerts for monitoring security configuration changes.
IN THIS SECTION:
Domains
All Salesforce orgs must have a My Domain. Enable enhanced domains to meet the latest browser requirements. Restrict users’ email
domains and require SOAP API calls to log in with My Domain. And we’re moving custom domains that serve Experience Cloud sites
to Salesforce Edge Network.
505
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Domains

Salesforce Identity and Access Management now supports built-in authenticators, tracking of enforced multi-factor authentication
(MFA) challenges, and Identity Connect 7.1. Prepare for the upcoming MFA requirement with the MFA Rollout Pack. For Salesforce
Customer Identity, benefit from a new email template that provides consistent branding and control over customer communications.
Privacy Center
Changes to the Consent Data Model include new objects that allow you to create multiple brands and relationships in one Salesforce
org. Enhancements to the existing Portability Policy feature make navigation more user-friendly.
Salesforce Shield
Shield Platform Encryption offers support for more Financial Services Cloud fields. Event Monitoring delivers better Transaction
Security notification emails and four new Event Log File types. You can append only new data to Event Monitoring Analytics app
datasets for more efficient updates (beta). Get more granular control over Field Audit Trail retention policies.
Security Center
Centralized Threat Detection is now generally available. Create in-app and email alerts to instantly learn about changes to security
settings that you want to monitor. Parse metric data with filters for the results view.
Other Security Changes
The CORS allowlist now supports browser extension requests to Salesforce REST resources.
Domains
All Salesforce orgs must have a My Domain. Enable enhanced domains to meet the latest browser requirements. Restrict users’ email
domains and require SOAP API calls to log in with My Domain. And we’re moving custom domains that serve Experience Cloud sites to
Salesforce Edge Network.
IN THIS SECTION:
To use the latest features and comply with browser requirements, all Salesforce orgs must have a My Domain. Deploy one, or we
assign one for you based on your org ID. If you prefer to use a different My Domain name, you can change it. Because your My
Domain affects all application URLs, we recommend that you test and deploy a My Domain before this update is enforced. This
update was first made available in Winter ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
To restrict the email domains allowed in a user’s Email field, enable the email domain allowlist. Previously, you contacted Salesforce
Support to enable this feature.
Require SOAP API Calls to Log In with My Domain
By default, SOAP API calls can log in with a generic Salesforce login URL, such as https://login.salesforce.com, or
your My Domain login URL, such as https://mycompany.my.salesforce.com. To further restrict access to your org,
require that SOAP API logins use your My Domain login URL.
Prepare for Your Custom Domain to Use Salesforce Edge Network
Cloud sites to the Salesforce Edge Network infrastructure. To prepare, update your allowlists to include the latest Salesforce IP ranges.
506
Enable Enhanced Domains (Release Update)

To comply with the latest browser and security standards, enable enhanced domains on your Salesforce org’s My Domain. With
enhanced domains, your company-specific My Domain name is included in your URLs, including Salesforce Sites and Experience
Cloud sites. Consistent domain formats improve the user experience and standardize URLs for use in custom code and API calls.
Salesforce enhanced domains also comply with the latest browser requirements, allowing your users to access Salesforce using
browsers that block third-party cookies. Because this update affects application URLs, including Experience Cloud sites, Salesforce
Sites, and Visualforce pages, we recommend that you enable enhanced domains before it’s enforced in Summer ’22. This update
was first made available in Summer ’21.
The domain HTTPS option, Salesforce serves the domain over HTTPS using a Salesforce content delivery network (CDN) partner and
a shared or single HTTPS certificate, was renamed. It’s now called: Salesforce serves the domain over HTTPS using a Salesforce content
delivery network (CDN) partner.

To use the latest features and comply with browser requirements, all Salesforce orgs must have a My Domain. Deploy one, or we assign
one for you based on your org ID. If you prefer to use a different My Domain name, you can change it. Because your My Domain affects
all application URLs, we recommend that you test and deploy a My Domain before this update is enforced. This update was first made
available in Winter ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance,
and Unlimited editions.
When: This update applies to orgs without a deployed My Domain. This update was first available in Winter ’21. For production orgs
and related sandboxes, this update is enforced in Winter ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status,
search for your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
For information about when this update is enforced in demo, trial, free, and Developer Edition orgs and related sandboxes, join the My
Domain and Enhanced Domains group in the Trailblazer Community.
Why: Deploying a My Domain brands your login URL with your chosen My Domain name. It also removes the instance name from your
login URL, preventing user login disruption if your org moves to another Salesforce instance. You must have a My Domain to set a custom
login policy that determines how users are authenticated, to set up single sign-on (SSO) with external vendors, and to use newer services
like Customer 360 Data Manager. Some Lightning container components and web security protections require a My Domain as well.
How: We recommend that you deploy a My Domain in a sandbox and test connectivity across your org before deploying it in production.
To complete this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Deploy
a My Domain, follow the testing and activation steps. See My Domain in Salesforce Help for details on how to set up, test, and deploy a
My Domain.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: My Domain (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: Plan for Salesforce Domain Changes: My Domain and Enhanced Domains
Release Updates

To restrict the email domains allowed in a user’s Email field, enable the email domain allowlist. Previously, you contacted Salesforce
Support to enable this feature.
507
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter User Management, and then select User Management Settings. Turn on Email
Domain Allowlist. Then manage the permitted email domains for users from the Allowed Email Domains Setup page.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Restrict User Email Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Require SOAP API Calls to Log In with My Domain

By default, SOAP API calls can log in with a generic Salesforce login URL, such as https://login.salesforce.com, or your
My Domain login URL, such as https://mycompany.my.salesforce.com. To further restrict access to your org, require that
SOAP API logins use your My Domain login URL.
How: This option is available through the doesApiLoginRequireOrgDomain field on the MyDomainSettings Metadata API
type in API version 47.0 and later. In Winter ’22, you can enable this option from the My Domain Setup page.
From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter My Domain, and then select My Domain. In the Policies section, click Edit. In production,
select Prevent SOAP API login from https://login.salesforce.com. Or, in a sandbox, select Prevent SOAP API login from
https://test.salesforce.com. Then save your changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Set My Domain Login and Redirect Policies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Prepare for Your Custom Domain to Use Salesforce Edge Network

Cloud sites to the Salesforce Edge Network infrastructure. To prepare, update your allowlists to include the latest Salesforce IP ranges.
Where: This change applies to custom domains serving Aura, LWR, and Visualforce sites accessed through Lightning Experience and
Salesforce Classic in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. It applies only to custom domains with the HTTPS
option, “Salesforce serves the domain over HTTPS on Salesforce’s servers using your HTTPS certificate.”
SEE ALSO:

To comply with the latest browser and security standards, enable enhanced domains on your Salesforce org’s My Domain. With enhanced
domains, your company-specific My Domain name is included in your URLs, including Salesforce Sites and Experience Cloud sites.
Consistent domain formats improve the user experience and standardize URLs for use in custom code and API calls. Salesforce enhanced
domains also comply with the latest browser requirements, allowing your users to access Salesforce using browsers that block third-party
cookies. Because this update affects application URLs, including Experience Cloud sites, Salesforce Sites, and Visualforce pages, we
recommend that you enable enhanced domains before it’s enforced in Summer ’22. This update was first made available in Summer
’21.
508
When: Enhanced domains are available in Hyperforce orgs and in orgs with a deployed My Domain routed through Salesforce Edge
Network. For updates about the availability of this feature in other orgs and when it’s enabled by default in new orgs, join the My Domain
and Enhanced Domains group in the Trailblazer Community.
Salesforce enforces this update in Summer ’22. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for
your instance, and click the maintenance tab.
Why: When you enable enhanced domains, all application URLs start with your My Domain name, and instance names are removed.
The domain suffix (the part after the My Domain name) changes for Experience Cloud sites, Salesforce Sites, content files, Site.com Studio,
Experience Builder, and Visualforce URLs. And sandbox URLs include the word sandbox, making them easy to identify.
Here are some My Domain URL formats with enhanced domains. The login URL is the same as without enhanced domains, but the rest
of the URLs change.
URL TYPE ENHANCED DOMAIN FORMAT

Login MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com
Content files MyDomainName.file.force.com
Experience Cloud sites MyDomainName.my.site.com
Experience Builder MyDomainName.builder.salesforce-experience.com
Salesforce Sites MyDomainName.my.salesforce-sites.com
Visualforce pages MyDomainName--PackageName.vf.force.com
Sandbox login MyDomainName--SandboxName.sandbox.my.salesforce.com
Experience Cloud sites in a sandbox org MyDomainName--SandboxName.sandbox.my.site.com
For a full list of URL formats and URL format changes when deploying a My Domain with enhanced domains, see My Domain URL Formats
in Salesforce Help.
How: We recommend testing all My Domain changes in a sandbox before updating production.
To complete this update, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and then select Release Updates. For Enable
Enhanced Domains, follow the testing and activation steps.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enhanced Domains (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: My Domain URL Formats (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Knowledge Article: Plan for Salesforce Domain Changes: My Domain and Enhanced Domains
Release Updates

The domain HTTPS option, Salesforce serves the domain over HTTPS using a Salesforce content delivery network (CDN) partner and a
shared or single HTTPS certificate, was renamed. It’s now called: Salesforce serves the domain over HTTPS using a Salesforce content
delivery network (CDN) partner.
509
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Identity and Access Management
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic in Professional, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited
editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Options to Serve a Custom Domain (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Salesforce Identity and Access Management now supports built-in authenticators, tracking of enforced multi-factor authentication (MFA)
challenges, and Identity Connect 7.1. Prepare for the upcoming MFA requirement with the MFA Rollout Pack. For Salesforce Customer
Identity, benefit from a new email template that provides consistent branding and control over customer communications.
IN THIS SECTION:
Users can now register biometric built-in authenticators, such as Touch ID, Face ID, and Windows Hello. You can monitor which
users register built-in authenticators and when they use them. As you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement,
check out the MFA Rollout Pack for customizable templates. Also, users are no longer subject to MFA challenges in Salesforce when
they log in through an authentication provider that supports single sign-on. And you can track enforced MFA challenges with four
new verification history fields in users reports. For increased security, configure forced authentication when Salesforce is acting as a
SAML identity provider. Salesforce now prevents users from logging in with a username and password as GET query string parameters
to the login URL. Upgrade to Identity Connect 7.1 as soon as possible because Salesforce no longer supports downloads for Identity
Connect 2.1 and Identity Connect 3.0.X.X. For improved functionality, customize the way your JIT handler processes user information,
include refresh tokens in the OAuth 2.0 user-agent flow, and authorize additional access to Salesforce CDP data.
Maintain consistent branding for your site and control customer communications with the Device Activation email template. When
you’re using Apex to manage identity verification for Experience Cloud sites, guarantee that self-registration verification messages
are sent in the right language. To improve privacy and security, we shortened durations of the lloopch_loid and hideIdentityDialog
cookies and increased the length of one-time passwords.

Users can now register biometric built-in authenticators, such as Touch ID, Face ID, and Windows Hello. You can monitor which users
register built-in authenticators and when they use them. As you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement, check
out the MFA Rollout Pack for customizable templates. Also, users are no longer subject to MFA challenges in Salesforce when they log
in through an authentication provider that supports single sign-on. And you can track enforced MFA challenges with four new verification
history fields in users reports. For increased security, configure forced authentication when Salesforce is acting as a SAML identity provider.
Salesforce now prevents users from logging in with a username and password as GET query string parameters to the login URL. Upgrade
to Identity Connect 7.1 as soon as possible because Salesforce no longer supports downloads for Identity Connect 2.1 and Identity
Connect 3.0.X.X. For improved functionality, customize the way your JIT handler processes user information, include refresh tokens in
the OAuth 2.0 user-agent flow, and authorize additional access to Salesforce CDP data.
IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Identity Verification with Built-In Authenticators (Beta)
With new support for biometric methods, verifying your identity in Salesforce just got even easier. Users can register biometric
built-in authenticators, such as Touch ID, Face ID, and Windows Hello. Anytime users are challenged to verify their identity, including
multi-factor authentication and device activations, they’re prompted to use their built-in authenticator.
510
As you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement that goes into effect on February 1, 2022, check out the MFA
Rollout Pack. It provides customizable planning and change management templates to help you roll out MFA to your users.
By default, users who log in to Salesforce through an authentication provider that supports single sign-on (SSO) are no longer subject
to multi-factor authentication (MFA) challenges in Salesforce. To restore MFA challenges for those users, you can update the session
security levels for their assigned profiles.
Four new verification history fields in users reports let you view user login verification data. Use these fields in combination with
login history fields to identify which user logins have multi-factor authentication (MFA) challenges enforced.
Require Users to Reauthenticate When Accessing Service Providers with Single Sign-On
To protect sensitive resources, you can now configure forced authentication when Salesforce is acting as a SAML identity provider.
With forced authentication, users who are already logged in to Salesforce must reenter their credentials when trying to access a
third-party service provider. After setting up this feature, you can use the identity provider event log to monitor when users have
been logged out due to forced authentication.
Login Credentials in GET Query Strings Are Disabled
Users can no longer log in to Salesforce by using a username and password as GET query string parameters to the login URL. Users
who attempt to log in using a GET query string are redirected to a login page. This update improves your security.
Customize How Just-in-Time Provisioning Handlers Process Attributes in SAML Assertions
If you’re configuring just-in-time (JIT) provisioning with a custom Apex handler, and your single sign-on (SSO) identity provider sends
encrypted SAML assertions, Salesforce now passes the decrypted assertion to your JIT handler. The previous process sometimes
limited the JIT handler from accessing certain user attributes. The decrypted assertion is stored as a value with the key
Sfdc.SamlAssertion. With access to the decrypted assertion, you can modify the way your JIT handler processes the assertion
to make sure no attribute gets left behind.
Upgrade to Identity Connect 7.1
Identity Connect 7.1 offers extensive security enhancements. As of the Winter ’22 release, you can no longer download Identity
Connect 2.1 and Identity Connect 3.0.X.X. We recommend that you upgrade to Identity Connect 7.1 as soon as you’re able to.
Give Authorized Access to Salesforce CDP Data
To authorize additional access to Salesforce CDP data, you can assign a connected app two new OAuth scopes. With the Perform
ANSI SQL queries on Salesforce CDP data OAuth scope, the connected app can perform ANSI SQL queries of Salesforce CDP data on
behalf of the user. The Manage Salesforce CDP profile data OAuth scope gives the connected app access to Salesforce CDP REST API
data to manage profile records.
OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow Supports mobileauth.salesforce.com/analytics Redirect URL for Refresh Tokens
The OAuth 2.0 user-agent flow now supports refresh tokens when the scope=refresh_token is included in the request and
the redirect URL is https://mobileauth.salesforce.com/analytics/oauth/done.
Streamline Identity Verification with Built-In Authenticators (Beta)

With new support for biometric methods, verifying your identity in Salesforce just got even easier. Users can register biometric built-in
authenticators, such as Touch ID, Face ID, and Windows Hello. Anytime users are challenged to verify their identity, including multi-factor
authentication and device activations, they’re prompted to use their built-in authenticator.
511
Why: There are a few great reasons to let your users verify their identity with built-in authenticators.
• They’re convenient. Users can breeze through identity verification without needing a second device, such as a security key or a
mobile device with an authenticator app.
• They’re secure. Built-in authenticators are based on the FIDO2 Web Authentication (WebAuthn) Platform standard, making them
extra resistant to security threats, like phishing.
• They ensure privacy. The user’s biometric data never leaves their device.
Before you enable built-in authenticators, it’s important to keep these things in mind.
• The user’s device, browser, and operating system must support the FIDO2 WebAuthn Platform standard.
• To use a built-in authenticator, the user must have access to the device where it’s enrolled. Users who access Salesforce from multiple
devices must register a built-in authenticator on each device. We also recommend that users register another verification method,
such as Salesforce Authenticator.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Use a Built-In Authenticator as a Verification Method (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Register a Built-In Authenticator for Identity Verification (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
As you prepare for the multi-factor authentication (MFA) requirement that goes into effect on February 1, 2022, check out the MFA
Rollout Pack. It provides customizable planning and change management templates to help you roll out MFA to your users.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer
editions.
How: Download the MFA Rollout Pack from the Salesforce MFA Site. The pack includes:
• An MFA overview presentation to share with your leadership and stakeholders
• A sample project schedule
• A sample drip email campaign to prepare users for the coming changes to your login process
• A user training deck to use for virtual or in-person sessions
• Onboarding guides to walk users through MFA registration steps on your launch day
SEE ALSO:
By default, users who log in to Salesforce through an authentication provider that supports single sign-on (SSO) are no longer subject
to multi-factor authentication (MFA) challenges in Salesforce. To restore MFA challenges for those users, you can update the session
security levels for their assigned profiles.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and the Salesforce mobile app in Personal, Group, Essentials,
Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
How: To restore MFA challenges for a user, set Session Security Level Required at Login to High Assurance and confirm that Multi-Factor
Authentication is in the High Assurance column.
512

Four new verification history fields in users reports let you view user login verification data. Use these fields in combination with login
history fields to identify which user logins have multi-factor authentication (MFA) challenges enforced.
Where: These changes are available in Lightning Experience in Group, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer editions.
How: Verification History fields include login method, user activity, login status, and time of login.
Require Users to Reauthenticate When Accessing Service Providers with Single Sign-On
To protect sensitive resources, you can now configure forced authentication when Salesforce is acting as a SAML identity provider. With
forced authentication, users who are already logged in to Salesforce must reenter their credentials when trying to access a third-party
service provider. After setting up this feature, you can use the identity provider event log to monitor when users have been logged out
due to forced authentication.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) and Lightning Experience in all editions.
How: We provide an example forced authentication SAML request. To configure forced authentication, share this request with your
service provider. Your service provider then uses the SAML request to tell Salesforce that the user must reauthenticate. When Salesforce
is acting as the identity provider, forced authentication is automatically supported, so no additional setup in your org is required.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Salesforce as a SAML Identity Provider (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Prerequisites for Integrating Service Providers with SAML (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Use the Identity Provider Event Log (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
513
Login Credentials in GET Query Strings Are Disabled

Users can no longer log in to Salesforce by using a username and password as GET query string parameters to the login URL. Users who
attempt to log in using a GET query string are redirected to a login page. This update improves your security.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and the Salesforce Mobile App in all editions.
Customize How Just-in-Time Provisioning Handlers Process Attributes in SAML Assertions

If you’re configuring just-in-time (JIT) provisioning with a custom Apex handler, and your single sign-on (SSO) identity provider sends
encrypted SAML assertions, Salesforce now passes the decrypted assertion to your JIT handler. The previous process sometimes limited
the JIT handler from accessing certain user attributes. The decrypted assertion is stored as a value with the key Sfdc.SamlAssertion.
With access to the decrypted assertion, you can modify the way your JIT handler processes the assertion to make sure no attribute gets
left behind.
How: Configure Salesforce as a service provider for SAML SSO and enable custom JIT with an Apex handler. Then use the
SamlJitHandler interface to customize the JIT handler as needed.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Just-in-Time Provisioning for SAML (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Configure Salesforce as the Service Provider with SAML Single Sign-On (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Apex Reference Guide: SamlJitHandler Interface (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Upgrade to Identity Connect 7.1

Identity Connect 7.1 offers extensive security enhancements. As of the Winter ’22 release, you can no longer download Identity Connect
2.1 and Identity Connect 3.0.X.X. We recommend that you upgrade to Identity Connect 7.1 as soon as you’re able to.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic and is available for an additional cost in Enterprise, Performance,
and Unlimited editions. Developer edition includes 10 Identity Connect permission set licenses.
How: To install Identity Connect 7.1, use the download link on the Identity Connect setup page. Before you upgrade from Identity
Connect 2.1 or 3.0.X.X, make sure that you have the latest version of the Identity Connect managed package installed.
Give Authorized Access to Salesforce CDP Data

To authorize additional access to Salesforce CDP data, you can assign a connected app two new OAuth scopes. With the Perform ANSI
SQL queries on Salesforce CDP data OAuth scope, the connected app can perform ANSI SQL queries of Salesforce CDP data on behalf
of the user. The Manage Salesforce CDP profile data OAuth scope gives the connected app access to Salesforce CDP REST API data to
manage profile records.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in Group, Professional, Enterprise,
Essentials, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. Connected apps can be installed in all editions.
How: Assign the OAuth scopes to the connected app that represents your external app.
514
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enable OAuth Settings for API Integration (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow Supports mobileauth.salesforce.com/analytics Redirect URL

for Refresh Tokens
The OAuth 2.0 user-agent flow now supports refresh tokens when the scope=refresh_token is included in the request and the
redirect URL is https://mobileauth.salesforce.com/analytics/oauth/done.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: OAuth 2.0 User-Agent Flow for Desktop or Mobile App Integration (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Maintain consistent branding for your site and control customer communications with the Device Activation email template. When
you’re using Apex to manage identity verification for Experience Cloud sites, guarantee that self-registration verification messages are
sent in the right language. To improve privacy and security, we shortened durations of the lloopch_loid and hideIdentityDialog cookies
and increased the length of one-time passwords.
IN THIS SECTION:
Tailor Device Activation Emails for Experience Cloud Sites
Take control of your customer communications with the Device Activation email template. You can use the template to customize
the emails your users receive when they log in from an unfamiliar browser, app, or location.
Control the Language Used for Experience Cloud Self-Registration Verification Messages
To give you more control over email and SMS verification messages, we changed how the initSelfRegistration method
detects a user’s language. You can now specify a language in the User object to guarantee that verification messages use the correct
language.
515

To improve privacy, we shortened the lloopch_loid cookie duration from 2 years to 1 year. And we changed the duration of
the hideIdentityDialog cookie from 50 years to 1 year.
Email and SMS One-Time Password Codes Are Longer
To improve security, we increased the length of one-time passwords (OTPs), also known as verification codes, from five digits to six.
This change applies to OTPs sent through email and SMS. If you have customizations that rely on five-digit OTPs, such as Apex
implementations for multi-factor authentication or passwordless login, make sure you update them.
Get Information About Named Credentials in the EventLogFile
Capture information about Apex callouts that use named credentials as their endpoints with the EventLogFile object’s new
Named Credential event type. This event type is ideal for auditing the installed managed packages that use named credentials.
Tailor Device Activation Emails for Experience Cloud Sites

Take control of your customer communications with the Device Activation email template. You can use the template to customize the
emails your users receive when they log in from an unfamiliar browser, app, or location.
SEE ALSO:
Summer '21 Release Notes: Customize Your Experience Cloud Site's Device Activation Emails
Control the Language Used for Experience Cloud Self-Registration Verification Messages
To give you more control over email and SMS verification messages, we changed how the initSelfRegistration method
detects a user’s language. You can now specify a language in the User object to guarantee that verification messages use the correct
language.
SEE ALSO:
Summer '21 Release Notes: Specify a Language for Email and SMS Messages When Using initSelfRegistration

To improve privacy, we shortened the lloopch_loid cookie duration from 2 years to 1 year. And we changed the duration of the
hideIdentityDialog cookie from 50 years to 1 year.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Experience Cloud Cookies (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Email and SMS One-Time Password Codes Are Longer

To improve security, we increased the length of one-time passwords (OTPs), also known as verification codes, from five digits to six. This
change applies to OTPs sent through email and SMS. If you have customizations that rely on five-digit OTPs, such as Apex implementations
for multi-factor authentication or passwordless login, make sure you update them.
516
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Privacy Center
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) in all editions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Define Identity Verification Settings for Your Orgs and Experience Cloud Sites (can be outdated or unavailable during
release preview)
Salesforce Help: Implement Multi-Factor Authentication with Apex (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Choose Your Passwordless Login Implementation (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Get Information About Named Credentials in the EventLogFile

Capture information about Apex callouts that use named credentials as their endpoints with the EventLogFile object’s new Named
Credential event type. This event type is ideal for auditing the installed managed packages that use named credentials.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions. This event is available in the API but not in
the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
SEE ALSO:
Get the Names of Installed Managed Packages That Access Named Credentials
Privacy Center
Changes to the Consent Data Model include new objects that allow you to create multiple brands and relationships in one Salesforce
org. Enhancements to the existing Portability Policy feature make navigation more user-friendly.
IN THIS SECTION:
Track Consent Preferences for Multiple Brands
Store customer consent preferences for multiple brands that exist in one Salesforce org. Use the Business Brand object to identify
different brands that share a parent brand. Then use the Customer and Seller objects to define unique relationships to these brands.
Manage Portability Policies with Feature Enhancements
The Portability Policy dashboard you already know and love has new functionalities. Now you can activate, edit, and delete inactive
policies, run policies directly from the dashboard, use the search function in the Portability Log, and more.
Track Consent Preferences for Multiple Brands

Store customer consent preferences for multiple brands that exist in one Salesforce org. Use the Business Brand object to identify different
brands that share a parent brand. Then use the Customer and Seller objects to define unique relationships to these brands.
SEE ALSO:
SOAP API Developer Guide: Consent Management Objects (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Manage Portability Policies with Feature Enhancements

The Portability Policy dashboard you already know and love has new functionalities. Now you can activate, edit, and delete inactive
policies, run policies directly from the dashboard, use the search function in the Portability Log, and more.
517
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Salesforce Shield
Who: To use this feature in Privacy Center, you need the ModifyAllData and PrivacyCenter permissions.
How: From the Privacy Center dashboard, under Portability Policies, click View All to see the changes.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create a Portability Policy (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Shield
Shield Platform Encryption offers support for more Financial Services Cloud fields. Event Monitoring delivers better Transaction Security
notification emails and four new Event Log File types. You can append only new data to Event Monitoring Analytics app datasets for
more efficient updates (beta). Get more granular control over Field Audit Trail retention policies.
IN THIS SECTION:
Event Monitoring
Transaction Security email notifications contain more trigger event detail. Append only new data to Event Monitoring Analytics app
datasets for more efficient daily dataset updates (beta). New event log file types help you analyze flow trends, monitor CORS violation
records, audit installed managed packages that use named credentials, and monitor Bulk API 2.0 usage and performance.
Field Audit Trail
When you set a retention policy on an object, Salesforce no longer sets the same policy for a different object with a similar key prefix.
Bring even more security to Financial Services Cloud data with encryption at rest for deal and interaction fields.
Event Monitoring
Transaction Security email notifications contain more trigger event detail. Append only new data to Event Monitoring Analytics app
datasets for more efficient daily dataset updates (beta). New event log file types help you analyze flow trends, monitor CORS violation
records, audit installed managed packages that use named credentials, and monitor Bulk API 2.0 usage and performance.
IN THIS SECTION:
Append New Data to Event Monitoring Analytics App Datasets (Beta)
Now you can configure your app to add only the data that’s new since the last dataset update. This change reduces network loads,
can speed up dataflow jobs for very large datasets, and helps you stay within your limits. No more worrying about updates leading
to duplicated data across multiple datasets and counting against your row count limits.
518
Get More Informative Transaction Security Policy Notifications

Email notifications for triggered Transaction Security policies include more detail. In addition to the policy name and events that
triggered the policy, you now see the policy's ID and related org ID and user ID. More information helps you identify affected orgs
and streamline investigations.
To analyze the usage trends and performance health of your flows, access the new Flow Execution event type in the EventLogFile
object.
The new CORS Violation Record event type in the EventLogFile object captures information about Cross-Origin Resource
Sharing (CORS) violations for Lightning apps. Cross-origin requests to Lightning apps are blocked unless the request comes from a
URL listed in your CORS allowlist. Use this event type to monitor CORS violation records and help you decide if your CORS allowlist
requires an update before the Enforce CORS Allowlist for Lightning Apps release update is enforced. Currently, the CORS allowlist in
Setup isn’t enforced for Lightning apps.
Capture information about Apex callouts that use named credentials as their endpoints with the EventLogFile object’s new
Named Credential event type. This event type is ideal for auditing the installed managed packages that use named credentials. For
example, you’re sometimes required to create a named credential as part of the installation of a managed package from an
AppExchange partner. However, in previous Salesforce releases, you didn’t have a way to determine whether other packages also
used the named credential, which was a potential security risk. This new event type allows you to track all packages that use a named
credential and investigate packages you don’t recognize.
The new Bulk API 2.0 event log file type helps you query Bulk API 2.0 job information. Previously, Bulk API 2.0 information was available
only on the Bulk Data Load Jobs page in Setup. Use the new event type to track how long Bulk API 2 jobs take to complete, what
kinds of data they process and how much, who runs jobs, and more.
Review Threat Detection Data in Security Center (Generally Available)
Now generally available, Threat Detection integration with Security Center helps you understand threat event trends and plan your
responses accordingly. You can view aggregated data about threat events for single and multiple orgs, and drill in to event details
right from the Security Center app.
Append New Data to Event Monitoring Analytics App Datasets (Beta)

Now you can configure your app to add only the data that’s new since the last dataset update. This change reduces network loads, can
speed up dataflow jobs for very large datasets, and helps you stay within your limits. No more worrying about updates leading to
duplicated data across multiple datasets and counting against your row count limits.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: In the configuration wizard, select Add only new event log file data to existing datasets?. The app then adds only the new
data and deletes all data that’s dated outside of your specified retention period.
This configuration is available only in new apps. To add it to an existing app, delete the app, and then recreate it. Enable the Add only
new event log file data to existing datasets? setting in the configuration wizard.
519
Get More Informative Transaction Security Policy Notifications

Email notifications for triggered Transaction Security policies include more detail. In addition to the policy name and events that triggered
the policy, you now see the policy's ID and related org ID and user ID. More information helps you identify affected orgs and streamline
investigations.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Enhanced Transaction Security Actions and Notifications (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

To analyze the usage trends and performance health of your flows, access the new Flow Execution event type in the EventLogFile object.
This event is available in API version 53.0 and later but not in the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchased the Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscription
and use the EventLogFile object data to monitor events.
SEE ALSO:
Object Reference: Flow Execution Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

The new CORS Violation Record event type in the EventLogFile object captures information about Cross-Origin Resource Sharing
(CORS) violations for Lightning apps. Cross-origin requests to Lightning apps are blocked unless the request comes from a URL listed in
your CORS allowlist. Use this event type to monitor CORS violation records and help you decide if your CORS allowlist requires an update
before the Enforce CORS Allowlist for Lightning Apps release update is enforced. Currently, the CORS allowlist in Setup isn’t enforced
for Lightning apps.
the Event Monitoring Analytics app. It’s available for free for two releases because it’s intended to help you prepare for the enforcement
of the Enforce CORS Allowlist for Lightning Apps release update.
How: CORS enables web browsers to request resources from origins other than their own. For example, using CORS, JavaScript code at
https://www.example.com can request a resource from https://www.salesforce.com.
The Event Log File Browser application is the easiest tool to download event monitoring data. See these instructions.
SEE ALSO:
Object Reference: EventLogFile Supported Event Types (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
520
Capture information about Apex callouts that use named credentials as their endpoints with the EventLogFile object’s new Named
Credential event type. This event type is ideal for auditing the installed managed packages that use named credentials. For example,
you’re sometimes required to create a named credential as part of the installation of a managed package from an AppExchange partner.
However, in previous Salesforce releases, you didn’t have a way to determine whether other packages also used the named credential,
which was a potential security risk. This new event type allows you to track all packages that use a named credential and investigate
packages you don’t recognize.
the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Who: The Named Credential event type is free to all customers. Customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring
add-on subscriptions can use the EventLogFile object to monitor events.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Named Credentials (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Object Reference: EventLogFile Supported Event Types
Apex Developer Guide: Named Credentials as Callout Endpoints

The new Bulk API 2.0 event log file type helps you query Bulk API 2.0 job information. Previously, Bulk API 2.0 information was available
only on the Bulk Data Load Jobs page in Setup. Use the new event type to track how long Bulk API 2 jobs take to complete, what kinds
of data they process and how much, who runs jobs, and more.
Who: The Bulk API 2.0 event type is free to all customers. Customers who purchased Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring
add-on subscriptions can use the EventLogFile object to monitor events.
SEE ALSO:
Bulk API 2.0
Object Reference: Bulk API 2.0 Event Type (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Review Threat Detection Data in Security Center (Generally Available)

Now generally available, Threat Detection integration with Security Center helps you understand threat event trends and plan your
responses accordingly. You can view aggregated data about threat events for single and multiple orgs, and drill in to event details right
from the Security Center app.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchase Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
SEE ALSO:
Monitor Security Threats with Centralized Threat Detection (Generally Available)
Field Audit Trail

When you set a retention policy on an object, Salesforce no longer sets the same policy for a different object with a similar key prefix.
521
IN THIS SECTION:
Retention Policy Now Associated with Only One Custom Object
Previously, a retention policy could be associated with both the custom object that you explicitly set it for and another custom object
with a similar key prefix. This behavior no longer happens.
Retention Policy Now Associated with Only One Custom Object

Previously, a retention policy could be associated with both the custom object that you explicitly set it for and another custom object
with a similar key prefix. This behavior no longer happens.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience, Salesforce Classic, and all versions of the mobile app in Enterprise, Performance,
and Unlimited editions.
Who: Field Audit Trail is available to customers who purchased a Salesforce Shield or Salesforce Field Audit Trail add-on subscription.
How: A key prefix is the three-character code in an object ID that specifies the object type, such as 001 for Account. Let’s say you
previously created two custom objects, Object1 and Object2, whose key prefixes differ only in their case sensitivity, such as a0B and
a0b. You then defined a retention policy for Object1 but not Object2. Salesforce used to associate the same retention policy with
Object2. Starting in this release, Salesforce no longer associates the policy with Object2.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Field Audit Trail (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Bring even more security to Financial Services Cloud data with encryption at rest for deal and interaction fields.
IN THIS SECTION:
You take your clients’ confidentiality seriously and so do we. Now you can add an extra layer of protection to deal information and
data discussed in your interactions with Financial Services Cloud customers.

You take your clients’ confidentiality seriously and so do we. Now you can add an extra layer of protection to deal information and data
discussed in your interactions with Financial Services Cloud customers.
Who: This change applies to editions that have both Shield Platform Encryption and Financial Services Cloud add-on subscriptions.
Why: You can now encrypt these Financial Services Cloud fields.
• Financial Deal—Description, Financial Deal Code, Name
• Financial Deal Interaction—Comment
• Financial Deal Interaction Summary—Comment
• Interaction—Description, Name
• Interaction Summary—Next Steps, Meeting Notes, Title
• Interaction Summary Discussed Account—Comment
522
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Security Center
How: On the Encryption Policy page in Setup, click Encrypt Fields. Then click Edit, and select the fields you want to encrypt.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Which Standard Fields Can I Encrypt? (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Security Center
Centralized Threat Detection is now generally available. Create in-app and email alerts to instantly learn about changes to security
settings that you want to monitor. Parse metric data with filters for the results view.
IN THIS SECTION:
The Threat Detection integration powered by Event Monitoring for Security Center is now generally available. Let machine learning
identify and provide data on four types of threats across your connected tenants in real time.
Create Alerts for Changes to Your Security Configuration
Automate security monitoring by setting up in-app and email alerts for conditions of your choosing. Indicate what changes you
want to be alerted of, how you want to be alerted, and who receives the alert.
Explore Metric Data with Detail View Filters
Quickly find information you need by applying filters to metric detail pages.

The Threat Detection integration powered by Event Monitoring for Security Center is now generally available. Let machine learning
identify and provide data on four types of threats across your connected tenants in real time.
Where: Security Center is available in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions as an add-on subscription.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchase Security Center and Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: From the Security Center dashboard in your parent tenant, click Threat Detection. Below the 30-day summary graph, choose a
date. To see the details of a detected event, click the Threat Identifier value. The four supported security threats are: Credential Stuffing,
API Anomaly, Session Hijacking, and Report Anomaly.
523
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Security Center
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Review Threat Detection Events (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Create Alerts for Changes to Your Security Configuration

Automate security monitoring by setting up in-app and email alerts for conditions of your choosing. Indicate what changes you want
to be alerted of, how you want to be alerted, and who receives the alert.
Who: This change is available to customers who purchase Security Center and Event Monitoring add-on subscriptions.
How: From the Security Center app in your parent tenant, click the Alert Settings tab. Click New Alert, and follow the instructions to
define your alert details like triggers and thresholds. For example, receive an alert if the number of users with the Modify All Data permission
in any tenant reaches more than five.
524
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Other Security Changes
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Alerts for Security Changes (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Explore Metric Data with Detail View Filters

Quickly find information you need by applying filters to metric detail pages.
How: To change which results are displayed on a metric detail page, below the summary graph, click the filter button. Choose your filter
conditions, and click Apply to see the filtered metric data.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Review Detailed Metric Data (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Other Security Changes

The CORS allowlist now supports browser extension requests to Salesforce REST resources.
IN THIS SECTION:
Add browser extensions to your cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) list to allow requests for Salesforce REST resources. Previously,
the CORS allowlist supported only websites and IP addresses. For example, you can now allow an appointment management browser
extension to view and work with your Salesforce records. Browser extensions that aren't on your CORS allowlist are blocked from
requesting resources.

Add browser extensions to your cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) list to allow requests for Salesforce REST resources. Previously, the
CORS allowlist supported only websites and IP addresses. For example, you can now allow an appointment management browser
extension to view and work with your Salesforce records. Browser extensions that aren't on your CORS allowlist are blocked from
requesting resources.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions.
It also applies to Professional Edition with API access enabled.
525
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Service
How: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter CORS, and then select CORS.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Perform Cross-Origin Requests from Web Browsers (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Service
Try out Incident Management, which allows your team to diagnose root causes and resolve major incidents faster while creating a better
customer experience. Use it to empower your service teams to quickly classify and prioritize work, assign the right experts, and streamline
communication with customers. Workforce Engagement offers a queue-based workflow for planning and staffing tools so you can
access the business analytics that you need faster. And set up Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony more easily with the new
prescriptive setup experience, which includes templates and menus to help you create your contact center and sync it with your telephony
provider.
IN THIS SECTION:
Incident Management
When an urgent incident affects your customers, stay calm and let Incident Management do the heavy lifting to eliminate potential
complications before they become showstoppers. Use Incident management tools to track, diagnose, and prevent service interruptions
from reoccurring -- all within Salesforce.
Service Setup
Let the Service Setup Assistant handle all the key Service Cloud setup tasks for you. In addition to the other tasks it completes, the
Assistant now turns on Salesforce Surveys and provides two sample surveys that you can use to measure customer satisfaction.
Channels
Create your contact center and sync it with your telephony provider more easily with the improved Voice setup experience. Upgrade
the customer service experience with enhanced contact flows and a unified, robust way to route voice calls, chats, and messages
to the correct agents. End Messaging sessions in bulk. For Service Chat, Salesforce admins choose what can be accessed with the
findOrCreate API for more security.
Make data-driven planning and staffing decisions in an Omni queue-based workflow. Workload history, intelligent forecasting,
Omni-Channel planning, and scheduling rules now work with skills-based workflows and Omni queue-based workflows. Streamline
mapping of job profiles to queues with the new Configuration App. Create shifts in bulk straight from your Omni-Channel plan, and
speed up the process further with shift templates. Filter your workload history by text or picklist fields on a lookup entity.
Routing
Efficiently route work to the most qualified agents with Omni-Channel Flow. To save time building the flow, start with a template.
Help your agents respond to customer queries quickly and consistently with Einstein for Service Cloud. We refined the template
generation process for Reply Recommendations to remove short or repetitive replies and focus Einstein’s predictive powers on the
more complex parts of conversations.
Knowledge
We expanded accessibility to knowledge article versions with a new list layout.
526
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Incident Management
Cases
See two reminders about the changed enforcement dates for Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior and
Use a Default No-Reply Address as System Address for Case Email Notifications.
Incident Management
When an urgent incident affects your customers, stay calm and let Incident Management do the heavy lifting to eliminate potential
complications before they become showstoppers. Use Incident management tools to track, diagnose, and prevent service interruptions
from reoccurring -- all within Salesforce.
IN THIS SECTION:
Diagnose, Track, and Prevent Service Interruptions with Incident Management
Get ready for a service team that manages interruptions like superheroes! When a widespread incident occurs, use Incident
Management to analyze the cause, streamline agent operations, and minimize downtime. Plus, change management features help
get meaningful changes implemented to prevent incidents from reoccurring.
Diagnose, Track, and Prevent Service Interruptions with Incident Management

Get ready for a service team that manages interruptions like superheroes! When a widespread incident occurs, use Incident Management
to analyze the cause, streamline agent operations, and minimize downtime. Plus, change management features help get meaningful
changes implemented to prevent incidents from reoccurring.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and Developer editions in
Service Cloud.
Why: Incident management helps your escalation teams track large-scale disruptions and delegate tasks to the right agent for the job
to ensure your company delivers on customer expectations. They can log a problem to find the root cause of a service interruption or
other major productivity blocker. And the change manager gives escalation specialists a way to take the steps necessary to ensure the
problem is never an issue for your org again. More time spent providing value to your customers means more revenue for your company,
and better brand reputation among your customers.
After the escalation team decides on the best fix, your agents can create related change requests to get the fix approved and the incident
resolved.
How: All new Service Cloud orgs can access Incident Management right out of the box. To turn it on for existing orgs, find Incident
Management in the Setup search bar and turn the feature toggle on. You can view more detailed information about the new Incident
Management objects from the Object Manager once they’re created.
Service Setup
Let the Service Setup Assistant handle all the key Service Cloud setup tasks for you. In addition to the other tasks it completes, the
Assistant now turns on Salesforce Surveys and provides two sample surveys that you can use to measure customer satisfaction.
IN THIS SECTION:
Get Sample Surveys from the Service Setup Assistant
The Service Setup Assistant now enables Salesforce Surveys for you. Get feedback from your customers on their service experience
with the Customer Satisfaction and Net Promoter Score sample surveys. We also give you two email templates that you can use to
share the surveys with customers.
527
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Channels
Get Sample Surveys from the Service Setup Assistant

The Service Setup Assistant now enables Salesforce Surveys for you. Get feedback from your customers on their service experience with
the Customer Satisfaction and Net Promoter Score sample surveys. We also give you two email templates that you can use to share the
surveys with customers.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Professional, and Developer editions.
How: To get started with Service, go to the Service Setup Assistant page in Setup. If it’s your first time using the Assistant, turn it on
and follow the prompts to let the Assistant complete key setup tasks for you, including enabling Surveys.
If you already used the Assistant to create your Service app, click Update My Service App in the banner at the top of the screen. This
enables Surveys and gives you the two sample surveys.
To use the Customer Satisfaction and Net Promoter Score sample surveys, go to the Surveys page in Setup. Create a copy of a sample
survey for your own use. View your email templates on the Email Templates tab.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Features Included in the Service Setup Assistant (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Send Survey Invitations by Email (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Channels
Create your contact center and sync it with your telephony provider more easily with the improved Voice setup experience. Upgrade
the customer service experience with enhanced contact flows and a unified, robust way to route voice calls, chats, and messages to the
correct agents. End Messaging sessions in bulk. For Service Chat, Salesforce admins choose what can be accessed with the findOrCreate
API for more security.
IN THIS SECTION:
Voice
Set up Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony more easily with the new prescriptive setup experience, which includes templates
and menus to help you create your contact center and sync it with your telephony provider. We’ve also made it easier for service
agents to find the info they need—agents can enjoy global search for voice calls, faster search for agent-to-agent transfers, and
customized screen pops of related records. Preserve the quality of your caller experience with enhanced contact flows, Omni-Channel
flow-based routing, and email alerts about configuration issues.
Messaging
Dynamically route messaging sessions with Omni-Channel flows. Close multiple messaging sessions with a few clicks.
Chat
Manage object accessibility with two new allowlists. Make smoother transitions between sessions with transfers and conferences.
Voice
Set up Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony more easily with the new prescriptive setup experience, which includes templates
and menus to help you create your contact center and sync it with your telephony provider. We’ve also made it easier for service agents
to find the info they need—agents can enjoy global search for voice calls, faster search for agent-to-agent transfers, and customized
screen pops of related records. Preserve the quality of your caller experience with enhanced contact flows, Omni-Channel flow-based
routing, and email alerts about configuration issues.
528
IN THIS SECTION:
Streamline Your Partner Telephony Contact Center Setup (Prescriptive Setup)
Connect your existing contact center to your partner telephony accounts in fewer steps. After you install your partner telephony
provider’s managed package from AppExchange, use clicks and not code to streamline your setup and share information across
accounts. To cut down on repetitive tasks, users are also synced across your Salesforce contact center and your partner telephony
account.
Simplify Your Amazon Partner Telephony Setup
Integrate your Amazon Connect contact center faster with the Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Partner Telephony Lightning
application. Minimize manual setup with a custom Voice Call record page that includes standard Voice components. Give your
agents a seamless experience with Omni-Channel already baked in and ready to use.
Define your routing rules in Salesforce to dynamically route calls to the correct agent in the same place that you configure routing
rules for your other channels. Give supervisors real-time queue metrics about voice calls in Omni Supervisor. Customize the agent
experience, such as using screen pops to provide the agent with more context about the conversation when they accept a call.
Review service call stats such as keyword mentions in the new Einstein Conversation Insights dashboard for Service. Previously,
service and sales calls were combined in one dashboard. Supervisors can apply service-specific filters to focus on the data they care
about.
Telephony from Amazon Connect. Give supervisors the data to coach agents on customer interactions, listen to recorded calls with
talk tracks, and view dashboards. You can also review service call stats such as keyword mentions in the new Einstein Conversation
Insights dashboard for Service.
Improve Reporting with Consistent Call Statuses
To enable better reporting and automation, we removed inconsistent call statuses, also known as call dispositions, across all call
types: inbound, outbound, transferred, and queued callbacks. All call types now use the same call statuses: New, In Progress, and
Completed. Regardless of call type, the call status switches to Completed after the call ends. When an agent attempts to transfer a
call, the call status is set to Completed, not Transferred—Transferred is no longer used. If needed, rework your workflows based on
call statuses.
Define Omni-Channel Statuses for Missed and Declined Calls
Keep the agents visible in Omni-Channel Supervisor by setting the presence statuses when agents miss or decline calls. Previously,
when an agent missed or declined a call, the agent went offline in Omni-Channel and was no longer visible in Omni-Channel
Supervisor.
Keep Your Lambda Functions Warm and Other Enhancements
To prevent call delays in Service Cloud Voice caused by Lambda function cold starts, warm up your Lambda functions by leveraging
an out-of-the-box integration with AWS EventBridge. Your Lambda changes are kept warm, saving you maintenance time and
keeping your business running smoothly. You can also easily roll back Lambda changes made during a contact center upgrade with
contact center versioning.
Search for a call based on call fields, such as phone number, caller name, and voice call ID. To reduce the noise of a global search,
filter the results to voice calls only. To ensure that you found the right call, hover over the voice call ID to view the details.
Speed Up Agent Troubleshooting with Downloadable Call Logs
Save your agents time troubleshooting call issues with detailed logs that they can easily download and send to Salesforce Customer
Support. If a disruption occurs, the agent can simply download the log from the Omni-Channel utility and save the debugging for
someone else.
529
Transfer Callers to Available Agents with Search

It’s easier for agents to transfer calls, even if they don’t remember the other agent’s name. Now agents can search for an agent,
queue, or phone number, or scroll through a list of agents to jog their memory. Your agents can also see who’s available to help the
customer before transferring the call.
Match Callers to End User Records with Phone Channels (Beta)
With new phone channels, you can configure call routing for voice calls with Omni-Channel flows and queue routing, and determine
how End User records are created. When a customer dials in, use the caller phone number and phone channel number to create an
End User record. After an agent identifies the caller and associates the End User record with a Contact, all future calls from that
number are associated with that contact.
Improve the Supervisor Reporting Experience with Recognizable Usernames
Make it easier for supervisors and admins to view reports and search for agents with recognizable AWS usernames. Now when you
add a user to your contact center, part of their Salesforce username is added to their AWS Connect username. For example, if John
Liu’s Salesforce username is john.liu@salesforce.com, his AWS Connect username is john.liu.
Monitor Call Quality with Mean Opinion Scores
Measure the quality of your voice calls with mean opinion scores (MOS) added to your voice call records. Use MOS to stay one step
ahead of possible network degradations or call quality issues.
Get notified by email when it’s time to take steps to avoid problems with your Service Cloud Voice implementation. For example,
get an email if you reach a service limit or if your contact center’s interactive voice response (IVR) isn’t configured correctly.
Starting this release, all users with access to Service Cloud Voice call recordings must agree to the call recording terms and conditions.
Improve Caller Experiences with Enhanced Contact Flows
To improve your customers’ interactions with the contact center, we enhanced the contact flows provided by Salesforce. To inform
callers what’s happening while they’re waiting, we added more prompts to the existing flows. Calls that encounter issues now
include informative logging. These changes don’t affect existing Amazon contact centers.
Streamline Your Partner Telephony Contact Center Setup (Prescriptive Setup)

Connect your existing contact center to your partner telephony accounts in fewer steps. After you install your partner telephony provider’s
managed package from AppExchange, use clicks and not code to streamline your setup and share information across accounts. To cut
down on repetitive tasks, users are also synced across your Salesforce contact center and your partner telephony account.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions.
How: When you add or remove a user in your contact center, the user is also added to or removed from your partner account, including
details like the user’s name and email address.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Create Your Partner Telephony Contact Center (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Simplify Your Amazon Partner Telephony Setup

Integrate your Amazon Connect contact center faster with the Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Partner Telephony Lightning application.
Minimize manual setup with a custom Voice Call record page that includes standard Voice components. Give your agents a seamless
experience with Omni-Channel already baked in and ready to use.
How: From AppExchange, install the Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Partner Telephony managed package.
530

Define your routing rules in Salesforce to dynamically route calls to the correct agent in the same place that you configure routing rules
for your other channels. Give supervisors real-time queue metrics about voice calls in Omni Supervisor. Customize the agent experience,
such as using screen pops to provide the agent with more context about the conversation when they accept a call.
Why: In addition to providing information about Omni-Channel agents and queues, Omni Supervisor provides supervisors with real-time
information about voice calls, including position, call type, and wait time.
SEE ALSO:
Connect Your Customers to the Correct Service Agents Using Omni-Channel Flow (Generally Available)

Review service call stats such as keyword mentions in the new Einstein Conversation Insights dashboard for Service. Previously, service
and sales calls were combined in one dashboard. Supervisors can apply service-specific filters to focus on the data they care about.
Who: Users with the Conversation Insights for Service permission set can see the Einstein Conversation Insights for Service dashboard.
If users have the Conversation Insights for Sales or High Velocity Sales permission sets, they see the Sales dashboard in the Sales Console.
Users who have the Service and the Sales permission sets see the Sales dashboard.
How: In the Service Console, click the Conversation Insights tab to view the dashboard. The dashboard shows only voice calls made
by users with the Conversation Insights for Service permission set.
531
• Filter calls by rep, call date, and related record type (1).
• View charts of top keyword mentions including competitor and product keywords, customer keywords, and automatic service
keywords. To drill into keyword trends, click View All Mentions (2).
• Scan a list of recent calls with details about their mentions, date and duration, and participants (3).
Telephony from Amazon Connect. Give supervisors the data to coach agents on customer interactions, listen to recorded calls with talk
tracks, and view dashboards. You can also review service call stats such as keyword mentions in the new Einstein Conversation Insights
dashboard for Service.
Improve Reporting with Consistent Call Statuses

To enable better reporting and automation, we removed inconsistent call statuses, also known as call dispositions, across all call types:
inbound, outbound, transferred, and queued callbacks. All call types now use the same call statuses: New, In Progress, and Completed.
Regardless of call type, the call status switches to Completed after the call ends. When an agent attempts to transfer a call, the call status
is set to Completed, not Transferred—Transferred is no longer used. If needed, rework your workflows based on call statuses.
All models of Service Cloud Voice are available as an add-on license in Service and Sales Clouds. Service Cloud Voice with Amazon
Connect and Service Cloud Voice with Partner Telephony from Amazon Connect are available as an add-on license in Government Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Object Reference for Salesforce and Lightning Platform: VoiceCall (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Define Omni-Channel Statuses for Missed and Declined Calls

Keep the agents visible in Omni-Channel Supervisor by setting the presence statuses when agents miss or decline calls. Previously, when
an agent missed or declined a call, the agent went offline in Omni-Channel and was no longer visible in Omni-Channel Supervisor.
532
How: In the Update Status on Decline and Update Status on Timeout presence configuration settings, specify new agent statuses when
calls are missed or declined. For example, for timed-out calls, set the status to Missed Call. Previously, Service Cloud Voice ignored these
settings and set an agent as offline when missing or declining a call.
Keep Your Lambda Functions Warm and Other Enhancements

To prevent call delays in Service Cloud Voice caused by Lambda function cold starts, warm up your Lambda functions by leveraging an
out-of-the-box integration with AWS EventBridge. Your Lambda changes are kept warm, saving you maintenance time and keeping
your business running smoothly. You can also easily roll back Lambda changes made during a contact center upgrade with contact
center versioning.
SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Voice Implementation Guide: Keep the InvokeTelephonyIntegrationApiFunction Lambda Function Warm (can be outdated
Salesforce Help: Roll Back a Lambda Update (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Search for a call based on call fields, such as phone number, caller name, and voice call ID. To reduce the noise of a global search, filter
the results to voice calls only. To ensure that you found the right call, hover over the voice call ID to view the details.
How: Enter a search string, and select Voice Calls to filter the results. Search shows only the records you have access to. To view call
details, hover over the voice call name.
533
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Search for Records from the Global Search Box (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Speed Up Agent Troubleshooting with Downloadable Call Logs

Save your agents time troubleshooting call issues with detailed logs that they can easily download and send to Salesforce Customer
Support. If a disruption occurs, the agent can simply download the log from the Omni-Channel utility and save the debugging for
someone else.
Transfer Callers to Available Agents with Search

It’s easier for agents to transfer calls, even if they don’t remember the other agent’s name. Now agents can search for an agent, queue,
or phone number, or scroll through a list of agents to jog their memory. Your agents can also see who’s available to help the customer
before transferring the call.
How: To use the new call transfer experience, set up quick connects in the Amazon Connect console. Agents can then see a list of agents
and queues, use search, or dial a number from the keypad.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Callers or Transfer Calls (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Match Callers to End User Records with Phone Channels (Beta)

With new phone channels, you can configure call routing for voice calls with Omni-Channel flows and queue routing, and determine
how End User records are created. When a customer dials in, use the caller phone number and phone channel number to create an End
User record. After an agent identifies the caller and associates the End User record with a Contact, all future calls from that number are
associated with that contact.
534
Note: Match Callers to End User Records is a Beta Service. Customers may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any
use of the Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Service Terms provided at Agreements and Terms
Why: Now you can create and manage phone channels like you do your other Service Cloud channels. After you create a phone channel,
you can create or reuse the caller’s End User record and choose whether to associate it with the number dialed. You can also choose to
create or reuse the same End User record regardless of which number the caller dialed.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Configure Caller ID for Your Contact Center (Beta) (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Help: Create a Phone Channel(can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Improve the Supervisor Reporting Experience with Recognizable Usernames

Make it easier for supervisors and admins to view reports and search for agents with recognizable AWS usernames. Now when you add
a user to your contact center, part of their Salesforce username is added to their AWS Connect username. For example, if John Liu’s
Salesforce username is john.liu@salesforce.com, his AWS Connect username is john.liu.
Monitor Call Quality with Mean Opinion Scores

Measure the quality of your voice calls with mean opinion scores (MOS) added to your voice call records. Use MOS to stay one step ahead
of possible network degradations or call quality issues.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Monitor Call Quality with Mean Opinion Scores (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Get notified by email when it’s time to take steps to avoid problems with your Service Cloud Voice implementation. For example, get
an email if you reach a service limit or if your contact center’s interactive voice response (IVR) isn’t configured correctly.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. The Customer Alerts pilot is available only for
customers using Service Cloud Voice with Amazon Connect.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Increase Amazon Service Quotas (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)

Starting this release, all users with access to Service Cloud Voice call recordings must agree to the call recording terms and conditions.
How: The first time a user tries to listen to a call recording or make or receive a call after they update to the new release, they see a
message asking them to agree to being recorded. If the user doesn’t agree, they can’t make or receive calls or listen to call recordings,
and they’re prompted again the next time they log in.
535
When an inbound or outbound voice call starts, recording starts automatically, though agents can pause recording if they want to. When
a call ends, the recording is available in the call audio player on the voice call record. Any user with access to the voice call record can
listen to its recording.
Improve Caller Experiences with Enhanced Contact Flows

To improve your customers’ interactions with the contact center, we enhanced the contact flows provided by Salesforce. To inform
callers what’s happening while they’re waiting, we added more prompts to the existing flows. Calls that encounter issues now include
informative logging. These changes don’t affect existing Amazon contact centers.
Who: Contact center resources, including contact flows provided by Salesforce, are available to users with the Contact Center Admin
permission set.
Why: The contact flow updates go beyond just improving caller experiences. To prevent a transcription stream from being used while
a call sits in a queue and possibly hitting Amazon’s streaming limit, use the new Sample_SCV_Agent_Whisper_With_Transcription
contact flow. This flow executes and starts transcription when an agent accepts an inbound call.
In new Amazon contact centers, the new Sample_SCV_Inbound_Flow_With_Transcription contact flow replaces Sample_SCV_Inbound.
SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Voice Implementation Guide: Using Service Cloud Voice Contact Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)
Messaging
Dynamically route messaging sessions with Omni-Channel flows. Close multiple messaging sessions with a few clicks.
IN THIS SECTION:
Route Messaging Sessions with Omni-Channel Flows (Beta)
With the help of Flow Builder’s power and flexibility, define your routing rules to dynamically route messaging sessions. In addition
to routing to queues or skills, Omni-Channel flows allow you to develop a more personal relationship with your customers by routing
sessions directly to agents, such as the account owners.
End up to 200 messaging sessions at one time from All Sessions.
Route Messaging Sessions with Omni-Channel Flows (Beta)

With the help of Flow Builder’s power and flexibility, define your routing rules to dynamically route messaging sessions. In addition to
routing to queues or skills, Omni-Channel flows allow you to develop a more personal relationship with your customers by routing
sessions directly to agents, such as the account owners.
editions.
536
SEE ALSO:

End up to 200 messaging sessions at one time from All Sessions.
editions.
Chat
Manage object accessibility with two new allowlists. Make smoother transitions between sessions with transfers and conferences.
IN THIS SECTION:
Improve Your Control Over Objects Available Using findOrCreate API
Specify which objects are accessible using the findOrCreate API with two allowlists in Chat Settings.
When agents use the transfer or conference features during a session, users sometimes get two greetings after a new agent joins
the chat. Disable the auto-greeting for transfers and conferences.
Improve Your Control Over Objects Available Using findOrCreate API

Specify which objects are accessible using the findOrCreate API with two allowlists in Chat Settings.
editions.
How: On the Chat Settings page in Setup, select objects that service agents can find and create using the findOrCreate API. We recommend
allowing objects that you feel are required for your org’s usage of the API. If no objects are selected, all objects are allowed.
SEE ALSO:
Service Cloud Chat Developer Guide: findOrCreate (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
537
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Workforce Engagement

When agents use the transfer or conference features during a session, users sometimes get two greetings after a new agent joins the
chat. Disable the auto-greeting for transfers and conferences.
editions
How: From Chat Agent Configurations in Setup, select Disable auto-greeting for transfers/conferences.
Make data-driven planning and staffing decisions in an Omni queue-based workflow. Workload history, intelligent forecasting,
Omni-Channel planning, and scheduling rules now work with skills-based workflows and Omni queue-based workflows. Streamline
mapping of job profiles to queues with the new Configuration App. Create shifts in bulk straight from your Omni-Channel plan, and
speed up the process further with shift templates. Filter your workload history by text or picklist fields on a lookup entity.
IN THIS SECTION:
Create a Workload History, Intelligent Forecast, and Omni-Channel Plan in a Queue-Based Workflow
Workforce Engagement’s planning and staffing tools now work with queue-based routing. The queue-based version of the workload
history, intelligent forecast, and Omni-Channel plan wizards have been streamlined to increase time to value. You get to the business
analytics you need faster.
View the Omni-Channel Plan by Shifts, Not Time Intervals
Your Omni-Channel plan results now reflect a real-world use case. Instead of displaying the results in time intervals, for example
hourly, daily, or weekly, your plan displays results in terms of how many shifts are required to meet your workload demands. You
can still adjust your workload history and intelligent forecast before creating an Omni-Channel plan, and you can still adjust your
shift count via the Shifts app.
Map Job Profiles to Queues with the Workforce Engagement Configuration App
The new Workforce Engagement Configuration App streamlines your setup process. Currently, the app makes mapping job profiles
to queues quick and easy. Set up this mapping one time, so you focus on the important work of creating an Omni-Channel plan.
Create Shifts in Bulk from Your Omni-Channel Plan
In just a few clicks, create all of the remaining shifts required by your Omni-Channel plan. Increase the accuracy and time to value
of shift creation by creating them directly from your plan. No more cloning shifts one by one and tracking how many you still need.
Shift assignment tools are now inclusive of customers who rely on queue-based routing. Match agents to shifts based on the queue
associated with the shift.
Increase the time to value of the shift creation process with pre-populated templates that can be inserted in a single click. Gone are
the days of entering in each field value for a shift manually.
Filter a Workload History Based on Picklist or Text Fields
Filter your workload history dashboard by picklist or text fields on a lookup object. If you rely on lookup objects to store important
data, reference that data in your workload history dashboard filters. Previously, you could only filter by picklist fields.
Set Objectives for Streamlined Scheduling
To help achieve their business goals, admins and planners can integrate objectives in shift scheduling. Adding an objective in a new
setup menu, such as balance shifts, delivers an equal number of shifts assigned from the scheduling logic engine.
538

Some days are harder than others. To increase employee satisfaction and ensure equitable assignments, planners can now mark
painful or less convenient shifts as non-standard for managers to view at a glance. This designation also applies to the scheduling
logic engine to auto-balance these shifts across your workforce.
Create a Workload History, Intelligent Forecast, and Omni-Channel Plan in a

Queue-Based Workflow
Workforce Engagement’s planning and staffing tools now work with queue-based routing. The queue-based version of the workload
history, intelligent forecast, and Omni-Channel plan wizards have been streamlined to increase time to value. You get to the business
analytics you need faster.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions. Workforce Engagement is
available for an additional cost as an add-on license.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Analyst permission set can create or view a workload history, intelligent forecast, or
Omni-Channel plan. Users with the Workforce Engagement Planner permission set can create or view an Omni-Channel plan.
How: The location of the creation wizard for a new workload history, intelligent forecast, or Omni-Channel plan hasn’t changed. In a
Salesforce org where Omni is enabled, you select queues instead of skills during the creation wizard flow.
View the Omni-Channel Plan by Shifts, Not Time Intervals

Your Omni-Channel plan results now reflect a real-world use case. Instead of displaying the results in time intervals, for example hourly,
daily, or weekly, your plan displays results in terms of how many shifts are required to meet your workload demands. You can still adjust
your workload history and intelligent forecast before creating an Omni-Channel plan, and you can still adjust your shift count via the
Shifts app.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Analyst permission set can create or view an Omni-Channel plan. Users with the Workforce
Engagement Planner permission set can create or view an Omni-Channel plan.
How: The location of the creation wizard for a new workload history, intelligent forecast, or Omni-Channel plan hasn’t changed. In a
Salesforce org where Omni is enabled, you select queues instead of skills during the creation wizard flow.
Map Job Profiles to Queues with the Workforce Engagement Configuration App
The new Workforce Engagement Configuration App streamlines your setup process. Currently, the app makes mapping job profiles to
queues quick and easy. Set up this mapping one time, so you focus on the important work of creating an Omni-Channel plan.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Analyst or Workforce Engagement Planner permission sets can use the Workforce Engagement
Configuration App.
How: To install the app, in Setup, open Workforce Engagement Management. Then check the box to Enable Workforce Engagement
Configuration App.
539
Create Shifts in Bulk from Your Omni-Channel Plan

In just a few clicks, create all of the remaining shifts required by your Omni-Channel plan. Increase the accuracy and time to value of
shift creation by creating them directly from your plan. No more cloning shifts one by one and tracking how many you still need.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Planner permission set can create shifts from an Omni-Channel Plan.
How: From your Omni-Channel plan, click the Create Shifts button. Follow the steps to create the remaining shifts required by your
plan. To see the newly created shifts, refresh your plan.

Shift assignment tools are now inclusive of customers who rely on queue-based routing. Match agents to shifts based on the queue
associated with the shift.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Planner permission set can set scheduling rules.
How: From Setup, open Scheduling Rules, and then click New. Select Match Queues as your Scheduling Rule Type, and then proceed
to create the rule.

Increase the time to value of the shift creation process with pre-populated templates that can be inserted in a single click. Gone are the
days of entering in each field value for a shift manually.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Planner permission set can create shifts from a template.
How: Find the New from Template button under the Shifts entity. Select a template value to autofill the shift start time and shift
duration. If set up, two optional fields autofill: non-standard flag and job profile.
540
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Routing
Filter a Workload History Based on Picklist or Text Fields

Filter your workload history dashboard by picklist or text fields on a lookup object. If you rely on lookup objects to store important data,
reference that data in your workload history dashboard filters. Previously, you could only filter by picklist fields.
Who: Users with the Workforce Engagement Analyst permission set can create and view a Workload History.
How: In a Salesforce org where Omni isn’t enabled, launch the workload history creation wizard. When asked to select and map Region,
Skills, and Custom fields, select a child text or picklist field on lookup entity. A corresponding column appears where you can select the
parent field it looks up to.
Set Objectives for Streamlined Scheduling

To help achieve their business goals, admins and planners can integrate objectives in shift scheduling. Adding an objective in a new
setup menu, such as balance shifts, delivers an equal number of shifts assigned from the scheduling logic engine.
Who: Users with Workforce Engagement Planner permissions can add scheduling objectives in setup.
How: From Workforce Engagement Setup, select Scheduling Objectives to set your new objective.

Some days are harder than others. To increase employee satisfaction and ensure equitable assignments, planners can now mark painful
or less convenient shifts as non-standard for managers to view at a glance. This designation also applies to the scheduling logic engine
to auto-balance these shifts across your workforce.
Who: Users with Workforce Engagement Planner permissions can mark shifts and shift templates.
How: To identify a shift or a shift template as non-standard, select the checkbox in a shift or shift template record.
Routing
Efficiently route work to the most qualified agents with Omni-Channel Flow. To save time building the flow, start with a template.
541
IN THIS SECTION:
Manage complex routing processes from a centralized location to create efficient, flexible, and productive service experiences.
Omni-Channel Flow unifies the routing setup for all supported channels. Omni-Channel Flow supports voice calls, chats, messaging
sessions, cases, leads, and custom objects. This feature, which is now generally available, includes some changes since the beta
release.
Get a Head Start on Building Omni-Channel Flows with Templates
To save time and effort, start building Omni-Channel flows with templates. The new templates include prebuilt variables and sample
routing logic for key use cases. You can quickly and easily customize flows created from templates to route work based on your
business needs.
Give Agents More Context with a Customized Screen Pop
Personalize service by providing the agent with more information about the conversation. With screen pop, automatically open up
to three records on the agent’s screen when a voice call, message, or chat is routed to the agent. For example, you can show the
customer’s contact, case, and order records on separate subtabs, along with the primary work record.
Connect Your Customers to the Correct Service Agents Using Omni-Channel Flow
Manage complex routing processes from a centralized location to create efficient, flexible, and productive service experiences.
Omni-Channel Flow unifies the routing setup for all supported channels. Omni-Channel Flow supports voice calls, chats, messaging
sessions, cases, leads, and custom objects. This feature, which is now generally available, includes some changes since the beta release.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, Professional, and
Developer editions in Service Cloud.
Why: Use the power and flexibility of Flow Builder to define your routing rules and other business processes and dynamically route work
to the best agent for each customer.
For example, use the information on the Chat Transcript or a related Contact to route work. Route work based on the website that your
customer is using, their location or language, the number of times they reached out for help, or even their preferred agent.
542
How: To create an Omni-Channel flow, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows in the Quick Start menu. Under Process
Automation, select Flows, and then select New Flow. In the left pane of the New Flow screen, select Omni-Channel Flow to filter the
flow types to Omni-Channel flows, and then select an Omni-Channel flow template in the right pane.
If you currently use Omni-Channel Flow (beta), the Winter ’22 release contains these enhancements.
• Support for the Messaging and Voice channels (beta)
• The Add Screen Pop action opens related records when work, such as a chat, is routed to an agent.
• The Channel-Object Linking action links channel interactions to objects. For example, use it to automatically identify the customer
who is calling you.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Omni-Channel Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Salesforce Release Notes: Route Calls with Omni-Channel Flows (Beta)
Salesforce Release Notes: Route Messaging Sessions with Omni-Channel Flows (Beta)
Get a Head Start on Building Omni-Channel Flows with Templates

To save time and effort, start building Omni-Channel flows with templates. The new templates include prebuilt variables and sample
routing logic for key use cases. You can quickly and easily customize flows created from templates to route work based on your business
needs.
How: When you create a flow, click All + Templates, select Omni-Channel Flow, and then select the flow template. For example, to
route chats, start with the Chats Routed to Agents and Queues template.
543
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Omni-Channel Flow Templates (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)
Give Agents More Context with a Customized Screen Pop

Personalize service by providing the agent with more information about the conversation. With screen pop, automatically open up to
three records on the agent’s screen when a voice call, message, or chat is routed to the agent. For example, you can show the customer’s
contact, case, and order records on separate subtabs, along with the primary work record.
Note: In Summer ’21, Screen Pop was a closed pilot feature. If you added the pilot version of a Screen Pop action to a flow, replace
it with the new version. If your flow includes the old version of the action, the flow runs successfully, but the screens don’t open
when the work is routed to an agent.
How: To set up screen pops, add a Screen Pop action to the Omni-Channel flow and specify which records to open. Pass the Screen
Pop action output to the Route Work action to open the screen pops when the agent accepts work.
544
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Einstein for Service
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Help: Add Screen Pops to Give Agents More Context about Conversations (can be outdated or unavailable during release
preview)

Help your agents respond to customer queries quickly and consistently with Einstein for Service Cloud. We refined the template generation
process for Reply Recommendations to remove short or repetitive replies and focus Einstein’s predictive powers on the more complex
parts of conversations.
IN THIS SECTION:
Retiring the Related Record from Case Classification
Starting Summer ’21, you can no longer display predictions using the Related Records component. To display Einstein’s predictions,
we recommend using the Einstein Field Recommendation component.
545
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Knowledge
Upgrade Your Customer Service Materials with Smarter Reply Templates

We made template recommendations more robust to help agents resolve cases more quickly, accurately, and consistently. We also
reduced the number of short or similar replies and focused the majority of the templates on the middle, more meaningful part of
conversations. After you review and publish your reply templates, Einstein can recommend them to your chat agents.
SEE ALSO:
Retiring the Related Record from Case Classification

Starting Summer ’21, you can no longer display predictions using the Related Records component. To display Einstein’s predictions, we
recommend using the Einstein Field Recommendation component.
Where: This change applies to Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
How: To get started with Service, in Setup, go to the Service Setup Assistant page. If it’s your first time using the Assistant, turn it on,
and follow the prompts to let the Assistant complete key setup tasks for you, including enabling Surveys.
If you already used the Assistant to create your Service app, in the banner at the top of the screen, click Update My Service App. This
action enables Surveys and gives you the two sample surveys.
To use the Customer Satisfaction and Net Promoter Score sample surveys, in Setup, go to the Surveys page. Create a copy of a sample
survey for your own use. View your email templates on the Email Templates tab.
Upgrade Your Customer Service Materials with Smarter Reply Templates

We made template recommendations more robust to help agents resolve cases more quickly, accurately, and consistently. We also
reduced the number of short or similar replies and focused the majority of the templates on the middle, more meaningful part of
conversations. After you review and publish your reply templates, Einstein can recommend them to your chat agents.
How: To produce a list of common replies, Einstein needs 1,000 English closed chat transcripts with four or more chat turns. To find out
what chat transcripts Einstein can learn from, see Prepare for Einstein Reply Recommendations.
When you have enough usable transcripts, from Setup, enable Einstein Reply Recommendations. Build a predictive model and select
replies from the initial reply templates to publish as quick text. When there are 10,000 closed chats to learn from, Einstein rebuilds the
model and refreshes your reply template list. Review the templates and publish new replies so that you can put more responses at your
agents’ fingertips.
Knowledge
We expanded accessibility to knowledge article versions with a new list layout.
546
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Cases
IN THIS SECTION:
Review Knowledge Article Versions with Improved Accessibility Measures
See your knowledge article version history in an adjustable list layout that improves accessibility for users who require assistive
technologies like screen readers.
SEE ALSO:
Use Knowledge Advanced Search with Einstein Search
Review Knowledge Article Versions with Improved Accessibility Measures

See your knowledge article version history in an adjustable list layout that improves accessibility for users who require assistive technologies
like screen readers.
Where: This change applies to Enterprise, Essentials, Performance, Developer, and Unlimited editions of Knowledge with Lightning
Knowledge enabled.
How: To generate a list of the knowledge article versions, in your Service Console, select an article, then click the Versions tab.
Cases
See two reminders about the changed enforcement dates for Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior and Use
a Default No-Reply Address as System Address for Case Email Notifications.
IN THIS SECTION:
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior (Release Update)
We now match email headers to their corresponding cases. With the new threading behavior, new outbound emails don’t contain
a Ref ID. This update was first made available in Winter ’21.
547
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Cases
Use a Default No-Reply Address as System Address for Case Email Notifications (Release Update)
Configure a default No-Reply address from the Organization-Wide Addresses page from setup. Add an email address in Special
Purpose Organization-Wide Email Addresses, then follow the steps outlined in the verification email sent to the new default No-Reply
address. After you verify your default No-Reply address, set up and start the Test Run in the Release Update. This update was first
made available in Spring ’21.
We now match email headers to their corresponding cases. With the new threading behavior, new outbound emails don’t contain a
Ref ID. This update was first made available in Winter ’21.
When: This update was first available in Winter ’21 and is enforced in Summer ’22. This update was originally scheduled to be enforced
in Winter ’22 but was postponed. To get the major release upgrade date for your instance, go to Trust Status, search for your instance,
and click the maintenance tab.
Disable Ref ID and Transition to New Email Threading Behavior, follow the testing and activation steps.
Email-to-Case is backward compatible until you turn on the new threading method, or after this update is auto-enforced. If you turn off
the update, incoming responses without Ref ID don't link to an existing case and a new one is created.
Before you turn on Email-to-Case threading, verify that there’s data in the Message-ID, In-Reply-To, and References fields. It's crucial that
getCaseIdFromEmailHeaders replaces getCaseIdFromEmailThreadId wherever it occurs in your org’s custom code.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
Use a Default No-Reply Address as System Address for Case Email Notifications
(Release Update)
Configure a default No-Reply address from the Organization-Wide Addresses page from setup. Add an email address in Special Purpose
Organization-Wide Email Addresses, then follow the steps outlined in the verification email sent to the new default No-Reply address.
After you verify your default No-Reply address, set up and start the Test Run in the Release Update. This update was first made available
in Spring ’21.
How: To enable this update, first configure a default No-Reply address. Otherwise, when you turn on Send Case Notifications from System
Address, email notifications for incoming emails on existing cases, Case Comment, Case Escalation, and Case Assignment send from
noreply@salesforce.com. The notifications lack important information, and eventually stop sending.
Finally, configure a default No-Reply address, Verify your default No-Reply address, Set Up Case Escalation and Inbound Email for Existing
Cases, and Enable Test Run and Run Tests to test and activate the release update.
SEE ALSO:
Release Updates
548
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Sustainability
Sustainability
Resolve issues with your carbon footprint record data with Data Gap Filling. Individually lock or unlock energy use records with Individual
Locking Control.
For the latest information, see the monthly release notes on the Trailblazer Community: Sustainability Cloud or Partner Community:
Sustainability Cloud.
Work.com
Prepare your business, employees, and facilities. Respond to major events, such as the current COVID-19 crisis, with the apps and services
in Work.com.
See the Work.com release notes for the latest updates: Work.com Release Notes
Other Salesforce Products and Services

Get the latest information on features from Customer Success Group, Heroku, IdeaExchange,, and Trailhead GO.
Customer Success Group

The certified experts, consultants, and innovative tools of Salesforce Customer Success Group are here to help with support, best practices,
and professional services at every stage of your journey. With each release, we introduce new and better ways to help you see results
from all your Salesforce products, faster. Highlights for this release include:
• Assurance Services, now available for Industries
• Run Readiness, a new offer under our Assurance Services category to help guide you at a critical step in your implementation journey
• Help Portal Enhancements, including a total redesign of Salesforce Help
• Guidance Center Enhancements, which empower admins of all orgs and experience levels to effectively use Salesforce and enable
their teams
Heroku
Heroku is a cloud-based application platform for building and deploying web apps.
For information on new features, go to the Heroku Changelog.
IdeaExchange
Share ideas with the Trailblazer community and Salesforce product managers with the IdeaExchange. In 2021, we rebuilt the IdeaExchange
on Lightning Experience. The new version features an improved search experience that aids discoverability, more informative idea
records, and search-as-you-type dupe detection to help avoid posting the same idea twice. For more information, visit the IdeaExchange.
Trailhead GO
Trailhead GO empowers anyone to skill up and connect from anywhere. You can access all of the free Trailhead learning content you
love—including the 1000+ badges of marketable skills, trailmixes, and Trailhead LIVE—right from the palm of your hand. Collaborate
549
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Release Updates
with Trailblazers, ask questions, and share your knowledge on important topics with the Community in Trailhead GO. Focus on the
learning content that is best completed on a mobile device with the new Trailhead GO compatible filter. And rapidly get the content
you want and need with the refreshed Today tab and redesigned Community feed.
Trailhead GO is available on iPhone, iPad, and Android devices.
• Android: Trailhead GO at Google Play
• iOS: Trailhead GO at the App Store
Release Updates
Salesforce periodically provides release updates that improve the performance, logic, security, and usability of our products. The Release
Updates page provides a list of updates that can be necessary for your organization to enable. Some release updates affect existing
customizations.
Every time a release update is created, it gets scheduled to be enforced in a future release. We announce each update and its schedule
here as soon as that schedule is known, but occasionally, updates are postponed or canceled. If that happens, we let you know in the
section that describes that specific release update.
Often, release updates provide a Test Run option that lets you enable an update and examine any changes to your org, including changes
to customizations, before that update’s Complete Steps By date.
To view release updates, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Release Updates, and select Release Updates.
Enforced with This Release

These updates are scheduled to be enforced this release.
To use the latest features and comply with browser requirements, all Salesforce orgs must have a My Domain. Deploy one, or we
assign one for you based on your org ID. If you prefer to use a different My Domain name, you can change it. Because your My
Domain affects all application URLs, we recommend that you test and deploy a My Domain before this update is enforced. This
update was first made available in Winter ’21 and is enforced in Winter ’22.
This update ensures that an external component with access="public" is accessible only to other components within its
same namespace or to internal Salesforce components. This update was first made available in Summer ’21 and is enforced in Winter
’22.
The Visualforce Remoting API uses JavaScript to call methods in Apex controllers directly from Visualforce pages. To ensure that the
API is properly secured, calls now have stricter validation. This update was first made available in Spring ’21 and is enforced in Winter
’22.
550
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Spring ’22

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’22. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
With this update, you can use reports to examine run-time details about your screen flows. Use these metrics to discover usage
patterns and in turn to optimize your screen flows for users. This update is available for Salesforce orgs that don’t already capture
run-time metrics for screen flows. This update was first made available in Spring ’21.
Ensure that users have secure and appropriate levels of access to objects and fields. Assign the new Salesforce CPQ Admin User
Access and Salesforce CPQ Partner User Access permission sets to your Salesforce CPQ admins and partner users. Review the new
permissions added to the Salesforce CPQ Customer User Access permission set. Then use a CPQ package setting to test the permission
sets before they’re enforced in Spring ’22.
Check for Null Record Variables or Null Values of Lookup Relationship Fields in Process and Flow Formulas (Release Update)
This update enables process and flow formulas to reference a record’s field when the field is accessed via a null lookup relationship
field or null record variable. Now process and flow formulas can return null values when the calculations involve a null record variable
or null lookup relationship field. This update was first made available in Spring ’19. This update was enabled in Salesforce orgs that
received Summer ’20 before July 10, 2020. If this is true for your org and you disabled the update, you must enable it in Spring ’22.
In Spring ’21, Salesforce enabled the test run option for this update because of a known issue with the scheduled enforcement. You
can still disable the test run until the update is enforced in Spring ’22.
The CORS allowlist in Setup isn’t currently enforced for Lightning apps. This update enforces the allowlist. Cross-Origin Resource
Sharing (CORS) requests to Lightning apps are blocked unless the request comes from a URL listed in your CORS allowlist. This update
In Lightning console apps, dialogs no longer stop you from interacting with the rest of the UI. This release update limits the focus
of dialogs triggered by a workspace tab or subtab to only the tab that triggered it. This update was first made available in Winter
’20.
To better protect your Salesforce data, this update adds org-wide sharing settings for product records. As of Spring ’22, in new orgs
only, the update will set the org-wide sharing default for products to Private for external users. Sharing rules and manual sharing
aren’t supported. This update was first made available in Winter ’22.
Use a Default No-Reply Address as System Address for Case Email Notifications (Release Update)
Configure a default No-Reply address from the Organization-Wide Addresses page from setup. Add an email address in Special
Purpose Organization-Wide Email Addresses, then follow the steps outlined in the verification email sent to the new default No-Reply
551
address. After you verify your default No-Reply address, set up and start the Test Run in the Release Update. This update was first
made available in Spring ’21.
Visualforce Expression Language Apex Method Access Modifier Enforcement (Release Update)
When accessing Apex methods defined by custom controllers, the Visualforce Expression Language doesn’t correctly validate the
access modifiers of the method. Developers can sometimes access unauthorized data on managed and system classes. To improve
security, this update validates the Apex method access modifier and throws an error if the Visualforce Expression Language can’t
access it. This update was first made available in Winter ’22.
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Summer ’22

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Summer ’22. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
This update lets Salesforce accurately measure, log, and limit the CPU time consumed by flows and processes. Because CPU time is
now accurately counted, flows and processes fail after executing the element, criteria node, or action that pushes a transaction over
the CPU limit. We recommend testing all complex flows and processes, which are more likely to exceed this limit. This update was
first made available in Spring ’21.
We now match email headers to their corresponding cases. With the new threading behavior, new outbound emails don’t contain
a Ref ID. This update was first made available in Winter ’21.
This update disables the requirement for a user running a flow to have explicit access to Apex classes invoked by that flow. This
update was first made available in Summer ’20 and was scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’22, but we postponed the enforcement
date to Summer ’22.
To comply with the latest browser and security standards, enable enhanced domains on your Salesforce org’s My Domain. With
enhanced domains, your company-specific My Domain name is included in your URLs, including Salesforce Sites and Experience
Cloud sites. Consistent domain formats improve the user experience and standardize URLs for use in custom code and API calls.
Salesforce enhanced domains also comply with the latest browser requirements, allowing your users to access Salesforce using
browsers that block third-party cookies. Because this update affects application URLs, including Experience Cloud sites, Salesforce
Sites, and Visualforce pages, we recommend that you enable enhanced domains before it’s enforced in Summer ’22. This update
was first made available in Summer ’21.
Make Paused Flow Interviews Resume in the Same Context with the Same User Access (Release Update)
With this update enabled, paused autolaunched flows always resume in the same context and with the same user access they had
before they were paused. This update was first made available in Winter ’21 and was scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’22, but
we postponed the enforcement date to Summer ’22.
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Winter ’23

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Winter ’23. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
In Visualforce pages, API navigation calls can be fired consecutively, which can lead to unwanted behavior. This release update
prevents this API navigation call pattern, firing only the first navigation call. This update was first made available in Summer ’20 and
scheduled to be enforced in Spring ’22, but we postponed the enforcement date to Winter ’23.
552
Salesforce Winter ’22 Release Notes Legal Documentation
Scheduled to Be Enforced in Summer ’23

These updates are scheduled to be enforced in Summer ’23. The list can include new, previously announced, and previously postponed
release updates.
ensures that a process with multiple criteria and a record update evaluates the original value of the field that began the process with
a value of null. This update was first made available in Summer ’19.
Canceled Updates
These updates were announced in a previous release but are now canceled. They were removed from the Release Updates node and
won’t be enforced.
Legal Documentation
We made seasonal updates to Salesforce Legal Documents.
Trust & Compliance

IoT Cloud has been discontinued.
For a complete list of changes to the Trust & Compliance documents related to this release, see the Salesforce Trust & Compliance
Documentation Change Log.
553

Salesforce Winter22 Release Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Salesforce Winter22 Release Notes

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Salesforce Winter22 Release Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Salesforce Release Notes

Maximize your Salesforce ROI with the latest features,

SALESFORCE WINTER ’22 RELEASE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

How to Use the Release Notes

Use Filters to Zero In on the News That Matters Most

Know What’s in Salesforce Lightning Experience and What’s in Salesforce

Release Note Changes

August 30, 2021

August 23, 2021

August 16, 2021

Your Feedback Matters

Get Ready for the Release

Release Readiness Essentials

How and When Do Features Become Available?

Enabled for Requires Contact

Supported Browsers and Devices for

Supported Browsers for Tableau CRM

Enabled for Requires Contact

Get Ready for the Future Requirement

Keep Working with Tab-Focused Dialogs

See More Information About Permission

Add and Remove Permission Set License

Solve Cross-Cloud Use Cases with

Point to Specific Elements on a Page

Enabled for Requires Contact

Create and View In-App Guidance in

Learn About Salesforce In-App Content

Explore More Resources in the Guidance

Keep Track of Resources Inside the

Your Account App

View Invoices with the Your Account

Checkout Is Now Named Manage

Engage More Customers Using Digital

Personalize Post Feedback Followup

Share Surveys with Team Members

New Apex Methods

Make the Most of the Improved

Welcome to Einstein Search: Now On by

Take Control of Which Objects Users See in

Enabled for Requires Contact

Get Search Results for More Objects

Enabled for Requires Contact

Automatically Tune Your Dashboards

Update More Fields from the Report Run

Setup and Data Integration

Audit Usage Statistics for Auto-Installed

Be a Connector Trailblazer with New and

Output Your Tableau CRM Data to Amazon

Access Salesforce Data Without Data Sync

Supersize Recipe Creation

Navigate Data Prep with Accessible

Filter Smarter with Custom Filter Logic

Bucket Smarter with Fuzzy Match for Data

Enabled for Requires Contact

Get Unselected Values Included in Pivot

Roll Up Hierarchical Data

Output Fully Qualified Names in .csv

Prebuilt Templates and Apps

Unify Sales and Service Analytics in the